Capital Design Tools - Common

Functions
Incorporating Capital® Insight™ User Guide

Release 2015.1
February 2016

© 2016 Mentor Graphics Corporation

All rights reserved.

This document contains information that is proprietary to Mentor Graphics Corporation. The original recipient of this
document may duplicate this document in whole or in part for internal business purposes only, provided that this entire
notice appears in all copies. In duplicating any part of this document, the recipient agrees to make every reasonable
effort to prevent the unauthorized use and distribution of the proprietary information.
This document is for information and instruction purposes. Mentor Graphics reserves the right to make
changes in specifications and other information contained in this publication without prior notice, and the
reader should, in all cases, consult Mentor Graphics to determine whether any changes have been
made.

The terms and conditions governing the sale and licensing of Mentor Graphics products are set forth in
written agreements between Mentor Graphics and its customers. No representation or other affirmation
of fact contained in this publication shall be deemed to be a warranty or give rise to any liability of Mentor
Graphics whatsoever.

MENTOR GRAPHICS MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

MENTOR GRAPHICS SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOST PROFITS)
ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED TO THIS PUBLICATION OR THE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN IT,
EVEN IF MENTOR GRAPHICS HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

U.S. GOVERNMENT LICENSE RIGHTS: The software and documentation were developed entirely at
private expense and are commercial computer software and commercial computer software
documentation within the meaning of the applicable acquisition regulations. Accordingly, pursuant to
FAR 48 CFR 12.212 and DFARS 48 CFR 227.7202, use, duplication and disclosure by or for the U.S.
Government or a U.S. Government subcontractor is subject solely to the terms and conditions set forth in
the license agreement provided with the software, except for provisions which are contrary to applicable
mandatory federal laws.

TRADEMARKS: The trademarks, logos and service marks ("Marks") used herein are the property of
Mentor Graphics Corporation or other parties. No one is permitted to use these Marks without the prior
written consent of Mentor Graphics or the owner of the Mark, as applicable. The use herein of a third-
party Mark is not an attempt to indicate Mentor Graphics as a source of a product, but is intended to
indicate a product from, or associated with, a particular third party. A current list of Mentor Graphics’
trademarks may be viewed at: www.mentor.com/trademarks.

The registered trademark Linux® is used pursuant to a sublicense from LMI, the exclusive licensee of
Linus Torvalds, owner of the mark on a world-wide basis.

Mentor Graphics Corporation

8005 S.W. Boeckman Road, Wilsonville, Oregon 97070-7777
Telephone: 503.685.7000
Toll-Free Telephone: 800.592.2210
Website: www.mentor.com
SupportNet: supportnet.mentor.com/

Send Feedback on Documentation: supportnet.mentor.com/doc_feedback_form

 Table of Contents

Chapter 1
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Refreshing External Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Extensibility Plugins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Viewing the Details of Installed Extensibility Plugins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Reloading Extensibility Plugins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Design Inspectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Custom Action Plugins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Object Attribute Descriptions for Use in Extensibility Plugins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Usage Example - Loading an Extensibility Plugin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Specifying the Memory Allocation of Capital Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Encrypted Client-Manager Communication Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Enabling Encrypted Client-Manager Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Creating Additional Icons in the Capital Launcher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Using the Report Builder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
User Interface Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Diagram Language Translation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Language Dictionary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Active Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Translatable Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Notes About Specific Dialogs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Chinese and Japanese Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Editing the Language Dictionary CSV File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Saving a Language Dictionary CSV File with UTF-8 or Non-Ascii Characters . . . . . . . . 45
Importing a Language Dictionary CSV File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Exporting a Language Dictionary CSV File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Refreshing Language Dictionary Data in a Design Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Adding a Translation of an Existing Translatable Term for the Currently Active Language 48
Adding a Translation of a New Translatable Term for the Currently Active Language . . 49
Converting Free Text Strings into Translations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Running Capital Tasks in the Background (Flexible Execution Model). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Server Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Configuring a Capital Integration Server as the Task Execution Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Configuring a Capital Integration Server as a Task Execution Slave. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Configuring a Client to Connect to the Task Execution Manager when Submitting a Task 55
Running Harness Processing in Capital HarnessXC (or Capital ModularXC) in the Background
55
Tasks tab in Output Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Running SBOM Generation and Costing in Capital Harness MPM and Capital Harness TVM
in the Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Running FMEA Scenarios in Capital Analysis in the Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 3

February 2016
 Table of Contents

Creating Audit Reports When Capital Analysis Operations are Run in the Background . . . 60
Searching for an Action on the Ribbon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Launch Pane. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Chapter 2
Projects and Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Projects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Project Browser. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Opening a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Creating a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Deleting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Importing a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Exporting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Closing a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Project Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Capital Compressed Format for Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Exporting a Project in Capital Compressed Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Importing a Project in Capital Compressed Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Designs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Importing Designs into a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Migrating a Design from Capital Harness Classic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Editing the Information for a Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Adding a Property to a Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Editing a Property for a Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Deleting a Property for a Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Comparing Objects and Their Properties in Design Revisions or Build Lists . . . . . . . . . . 81
Running Design Rule Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Running Design Rule Checks in Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Design Rule Checks Output Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Design Rule Check Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Releasing Designs with Enforced Design Rule Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Build List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Options and Option Relationships . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Define Option Relationships. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Creating an Option Folder at Project Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Creating an Option at Project Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Defining Inclusive and Exclusive Relationships for an Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Creating an Option Combination at Project Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Adding a Valid Selection to an Option Combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Deleting a Valid Selection from an Option Combination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Deleting an Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Engineering Change Orders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
ECO Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Working with an ECO Created in Capital . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Creating an Engineering Change Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Deleting an Engineering Change Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Viewing Engineering Change Orders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Capture and Apply a Change Within an ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

4 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
Table of Contents

Recording a Change with an ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Applying a Stored Change from an ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Identifying Topology Changes with Hotspots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Harness Object Behavior on Applying ECO Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Bundles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Splices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Modular Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Fixings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Insulations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Wires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Multicores. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
ECO Import and Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Exporting an ECO Design Change Record. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Importing an ECO Design Change Record. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Chapter 3
Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Common Edit Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Undoing an Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Redoing an Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Repeating an Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Cutting and Pasting an Object in a Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Copying and Pasting an Object in a Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Deleting an Object in a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Moving Objects from a Diagram to Another Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Selecting All Objects in a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Finding and Selecting Objects by Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Finding and Selecting Objects by Attribute or Property. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Specifying the Highlight Color of Selected Objects in a Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Using the Stroke Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Using Keyboard Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Window Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Arranging Diagram Windows for Viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Using Tearable Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Zooming In and Out of Diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Panning Across a Diagram Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Chapter 4
Graphics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Borders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Adding a Border to a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Replacing a Border on a Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Removing a Border from a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Graphic Drawing Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Drawing a Line in a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 5

February 2016
 Table of Contents

Drawing a Rectangle in a Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Drawing a Polygon in a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Drawing a Circle in a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Drawing an Arc in a Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Drawing a Curved Line in a Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Adding Text Frames to a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Adding a Picture to a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Changing the Picture in an Image Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Link or Embed Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Adding a Comment Symbol to a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Resizing a Comment Symbol in a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Adding Properties to a Graphical Shape. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Editing a Property Value of Graphical Shape. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Editing the Graphical Properties of a Graphical Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Stretching a Graphical Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Moving a Graphical Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Deleting a Graphical Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Grouping Graphical Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Ungrouping Graphical Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Controlling the Layering Order (Z-Order) of Graphical Shapes Objects and Images . . . . 189
Graphics Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Adding a Graphics Point to a Graphical Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Deleting a Graphics Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Grip Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Adding a Grip Point to an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Deleting a Grip Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Chapter 5
Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Grouping Objects in a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Creating a Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Moving a Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Ungrouping Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Aligning Objects in a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Distributing Objects in a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Flipping Objects in a Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Rotating Objects in a Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Rotating Objects Around a Specified Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Defining Rotation Increments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Free Rotating Text Decorations, Comment and RED Symbols or Graphical Objects . . . . 204
Example of Applying Styling on Rotated or Flipped Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Pivoting Text About its Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Setting Snap To Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Setting Grid Defaults for a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Manual Table Splitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Using Japanese Text on a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

6 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
Table of Contents

Chapter 6
Rules and Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Overview of Rules and Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Object Rule Hierarchies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Editable Elements in Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Defining Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Assigning a Rule or Constraint to an Object or Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Usage Example - Using a Null Value in a Constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Chapter 7
Modifying Objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Editing the Properties of Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Editing Multiple Object Simultaneously . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Editing the Attributes and Properties of Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Editing an Object's General Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Specifying the Name Property of an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Editing the Display-details of the Object's Short Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Adding a Property to an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Editing Multiple Objects Simultaneously . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Deleting an Existing Property from an Object. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Editing a Bundle's Length in Capital Integrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Assigning a New Library Part to an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Updating an Object's Library Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Unassigning a Library Part from an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Viewing the Library Part Details for an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Defining Specification Attributes for a Conductor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Specifying the Slot Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Assigning/Editing an Object's Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Assigning Module Codes (Capital Logic only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Associating a Block with a Design (Capital Logic only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Specifying a Part Number for a Harness Level in Capital Integrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Editing the Harness Levels on which a Wire Exists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Editing the Offset of Bundle Region Nodes from Bundle Ends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Foreground, Background and Manual Color Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Specifying Option-Specific Values for Net Attributes and Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Object Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Symbol Attributes in Capital Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Editing an Object's Graphical Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Changing an Object's Primary or Secondary Graphical Color Property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Changing an Object's Graphical Thickness Property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Changing an Object's Graphical Line Style Property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Changing the Fill Color Attribute for an Object. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Changing an Object's Graphical Fill Pattern Property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Changing the Line End Style of a Conductor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Physical Line Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Setting the Physical Line Thickness for Graphics in Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 7

February 2016
 Table of Contents

Using a Plugin Interface to Control Physical Line Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Setting the Default Physical Line Thickness for Comment Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Finding and Replacing Property Values, Attribute Values and Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Fill Pattern Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Applying Scopes to a Project or Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Advanced Naming Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Generating Names for Selected Objects in a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Generating Names for all Objects in a Build List, Design or Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Selecting a Component Part Number in the Part Selection Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Performing a Batch Update of Library Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Slice Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Slice Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Slice Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Slice Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Slice Conductors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Slicing a Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Slicing a Bundle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Reconnecting a Sliced Bundle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Navigating Between Sliced Object Instances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Slice to Trim Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Slice and Move To . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Design Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Viewing Design Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Opening Design Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Parameterized Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

Chapter 8
Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Print to a Printer or Plotter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Printing a Single Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Printing Selected Diagrams in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Printing All Diagrams in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Printing All Diagrams in a Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Printing Selected Print Regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Print Regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Adding a Print Region to a Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Resizing a Print Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Moving a Print Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Editing a Print Region. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Deleting a Print Region. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Print to a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Printing To File - All Diagrams in a Project. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Printing To File - All Diagrams in a Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Printing To File - Single Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Printing To File - Selected Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Printing To File - Print Regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
SVG Page Settings Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Line Thickness Scale Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

8 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
Table of Contents

Minimum Line Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

Display Width and Display Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Line Pattern Scale Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Fill Pattern Scale Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

Chapter 9
Trace and Navigate, Compare and Propagate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Trace and Navigate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Tagging Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Working Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Adding Designs to a Working Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Tracing an Object across Designs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Trace Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Trace Relationships. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Configuring Tagging Tasks to Run in the Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Configuring Stale Tag Cleanup Tasks to Run in the Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Compare and Propagate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Viewing the To Do List for a Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
To Do List Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Troubleshooting Tagging Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
ANSTagGenerationTask or ANSStaleTagCleanupTask Fails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
ANSTagGenerationTask or ANSStaleTagCleanupTask Runs for a Long Time . . . . . . . . 333
CapitalRunner Log File Indicates Out-of-Memory Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Tagging Tasks Have Not Started After Data Migration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
First Tagging Task Takes a Long Time After Data Migration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

Chapter 10
Dialog and Field Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Project-related Dialogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Edit Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Edit Project Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Project Folders Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Import Designs to Project Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Import Designs to Project Wizard Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Select Project Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
New Project Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Open Project Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Choose Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Project Preferences Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Copy Design Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Create New Design Revision Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Editing Action Dialogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Applicable Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Compare Designs Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Design Revision - Build List Selection Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Design Rule Checks Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Details Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 9

February 2016
 Table of Contents

Edit Breakout/Spot Tape Details Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450

Edit Design Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Edit Effectivity Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Edit Graphical Attributes Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Edit Name Text Attributes Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Edit Option Expression Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Generate Advanced Names Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Map Equivalent Devices Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Name Selection Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
New Property Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Part Selection Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Project Usages Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Select by Attribute/Property Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
Select By Name Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Select Color Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Details Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Select Details Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Graphics Related Dialogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Edit Border Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Add Text Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Image Selection Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Symbol Selection Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Update Symbol - Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Edit Properties - Propertied Graphic Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Fill Pattern Selection Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Layout Related Dialogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Set Grid Defaults Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Split Table Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
Miscellaneous Dialogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Edit Diagram Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
New Property Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Plugins Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
Plugin Details Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
Batch Translate Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
Edit Capital Configuration Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
Release Designs Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
Engineering Change Orders Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Engineering Change Orders Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Change Manager Apply ECO Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
Options (Apply ECO) Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
Change Manager Preview ECO Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Simulate Change Output Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
Apply Change Output Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
Applicable Changes Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
Query Criteria Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Report Builder Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
Printing Dialogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
CGM Page Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
DXF Page Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531

10 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
Table of Contents

PDF Page Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532

SVG Page Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
Print Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
Edit Print Region Groups Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
Print to File Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
Project Diagram Settings Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
Edit File Name Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
Rules and Constraints Dialogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
Constraint Selection Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
Define Rules Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
Rule Selection Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
Rules Tab in Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
Warning Dialogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
Undoable Operation Confirmation Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
Design Log Dialogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
Design Log Event Filter Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
Design Log Filter Options Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
Design Log Viewer Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
View Design Logs Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
Help Button Landing Pages for Dialog Boxes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
Edit Properties Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
Edit Project Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
Project Folders Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
Import Designs to Project Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
Import Designs to Project Wizard Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
New Project Dialog Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
Open Project Dialog Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
Options Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
Choose Options Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
Project Preferences Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
Copy Design Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
Create New Design Revision Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
Build Lists Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
Design Effectivity Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
Edit Build List Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
Applicable Options Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
Compare Designs Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
Design Revision/Build List Selection Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
Design Rule Checks Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
Edit Breakout/Spot Tape Details Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
Edit Design Properties Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
Edit Effectivity Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
Edit Option Expression Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
Generate Advanced Names Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
Map Equivalent Devices Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
New Property Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
Part Selection Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
Project Usages Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
Select by Attribute/Property Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 11

February 2016
 Table of Contents

Select By Name Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568

Edit Border Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
Add Text Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
Image Selection Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
Symbol Selection Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
Update Symbol - Options Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
Edit Properties: Propertied Graphic Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
Fill Pattern Selection Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
Set Grid Defaults Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
Split Table Dialog Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
New Property Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
Plugins Dialog Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
Plugin Details Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
Batch Translate Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
Edit Capital Configuration Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
Release Designs Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
Engineering Change Orders Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
Options (Apply ECO) Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
Change Manager Apply ECO Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
Change Manager Preview ECO Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
Query Criteria Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
CGM Page Settings Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
DXF Page Settings Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
PDF Page Settings Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
SVG Page Settings Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
Print Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
Edit Print Region Groups Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
Print to File Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
Project Diagram Settings Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
Edit File Name Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
Constraint Selection Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
Define Rules Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
Rule Selection Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
Rules Tab in Properties Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
Undoable Operation Confirmation Dialog Box Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
Design Log Event Filter Options Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
Design Log Filter Options Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
Design Log Viewer Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
View Design Logs Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577

Chapter 11
Bridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
Available Topics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579

Chapter 12
Capital Insight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
Enabling Capital Insight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
Architectural Study Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583

12 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
Table of Contents

Overview of Studies and Scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585

Studies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
Scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
Creating a Study . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586
Editing a Study . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586
Deleting a Study . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
Creating a Scenario (and Study) from the Insight Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
Opening a Scenario . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588
Metrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590
Default Metrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590
Creating a Metric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592
Creating a Metric Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593
Deleting a Metric Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594
Editing a Metric Element Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594
Deleting a Metric Element Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595
Specifying the Architectural Cost of a Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595
Viewing Metric Results for the Open Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596
Snapshots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598
Taking a Snapshot of Metric Results for Current Design Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598
Editing a Snapshot Name and Display Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599
Opening a Snapshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599
Opening a Snapshot in the Insight Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600
Comparing Snapshots from One Study . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600
Comparing Snapshots from Different Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601
Comparing Snapshots from One or More Studies in the Insight Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601
Capital Insight Dialog and Field Reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
Calculation Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604
Compare Snapshots Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
Compare Snapshot With Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606
Condition Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609
Edit Metrics Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612
Edit Scenario Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615
Edit Snapshot Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616
Edit Study Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617
Edit Study/Scenario Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618
Metrics/Insight Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619
Metrics Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623
New Scenario Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624
New Study Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625
Snapshot Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628
Take Snapshot Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630
Usage Example - Study of Alternative Harness Routing Paths. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630
Help Button Landing Pages for Capital Insight Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
Calculation Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
Compare Snapshots Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
Compare Snapshot With Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
Condition Dialog Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
Edit Metrics Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
Edit Scenario Properties Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 13

February 2016
 Table of Contents

Edit Snapshot Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635

Edit Study Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
Edit Study Properties Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
New Scenario Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
New Study Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
Snapshot Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
Take Snapshot Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
Third-Party Information
Index
End-User License Agreement

14 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 List of Figures

Figure 1-1. Encrypted Client Manager Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Figure 2-1. ECO Cost Only Change Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Figure 2-2. Status Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Figure 2-3. ECO Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Figure 2-4. ECO Console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Figure 2-5. Hotspot Visualization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Figure 2-6. Hotspot Issue Highlighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Figure 7-1. Slice Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Figure 7-2. Device Slice Complete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Figure 7-3. Separate Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Figure 7-4. Slice Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Figure 7-5. Block Slice Complete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Figure 7-6. Separate Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Figure 7-7. Slice Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Figure 7-8. Connector Slice Complete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Figure 7-9. Separate Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Figure 7-10. Slice Conductors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Figure 7-11. Slice Complete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Figure 7-12. Slot Before Slice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Figure 7-13. Slot After Split . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Figure 7-14. Make the Slice Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Figure 7-15. Trimmed Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Figure 7-16. Starting Point. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Figure 7-17. Make the Slice. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Figure 7-18. Slice Made . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Figure 7-19. Select Move To . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Figure 7-20. Objects Removed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Figure 7-21. Selected Objects on New Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Figure 8-1. Before Factor Increase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Figure 8-2. After Factor Increase. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Figure 8-3. Source Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Figure 8-4. First Minimum Width Increase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Figure 8-5. Second Minimum Width Increase. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Figure 8-6. Insufficient Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Figure 8-7. More Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Figure 8-8. Source Diagram Linestyle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Figure 8-9. Inconsistent Linestyle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Figure 8-10. Correctly Rendered Linestyle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Figure 8-11. Source Diagram Fill Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Figure 8-12. Inconsistent Fill Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 15

February 2016
 List of Figures

Figure 8-13. Correctly Rendered Fill Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

Figure 10-1. Simulate Change Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521

16 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 List of Tables

Table 1-1. Tasks Tab Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Table 1-2. Launch Pane Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Table 2-1. Release Level Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Table 2-2. Design Rule Checks for Capital Integrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Table 2-3. Design Rule Checks for Capital Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Table 2-4. Design Rule Checks for Capital HarnessXC and Capital ModularXC . . . . . . . . 101
Table 2-5. Design Rule Checks for Capital Harness MPM and Capital Harness TVM . . . . 109
Table 2-6. Design Rule Checks for Capital Topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Table 3-1. Stroke Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Table 3-2. Keyboard Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Table 7-1. Effects of Override Symbol Styling and Master Setting Combinations . . . . . . . 236
Table 9-1. Trace Tab Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Table 9-2. Trace Relationships . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Table 9-3. To Do List Tab Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Table 10-1. Edit Properties Dialog Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Table 10-2. Edit Project Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Table 10-3. Project Folders Dialog Box Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Table 10-4. Import Designs to Project Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Table 10-5. Import Designs to Project Wizard Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Table 10-6. New Project Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Table 10-7. Open Project Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Table 10-8. Options Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Table 10-9. Choose Options Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Table 10-10. Fields in the Project Preferences Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Table 10-11. Project Preferences for Capital Harness MPM and Capital Harness TVM Designs
366
Table 10-12. Project Preferences for Capital HarnessXC and Capital ModularXC Designs 370
Table 10-13. Project Preferences for Capital Integrator Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Table 10-14. Project Preferences for Capital Logic Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Table 10-15. Project Preferences for Capital Topology Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Table 10-16. Project Preferences for Design Rule Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Table 10-17. General Project Preferences Applicable to all Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Table 10-18. Applicable Options Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Table 10-19. Compare Designs Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Table 10-20. Design Revision/Build List Selection Dialog Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Table 10-21. Design Rule Checks Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Table 10-22. Edit Breakout/Spot Tape Details Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Table 10-23. Properties Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Table 10-24. Rules Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Table 10-25. Scopes Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 17

February 2016
 List of Tables

Table 10-26. ECO Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453

Table 10-27. Edit Effectivity Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Table 10-28. Edit Graphical Attributes Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Table 10-29. Edit Name Text Attributes Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Table 10-30. Edit Option Expression Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Table 10-31. Generate Advanced Names Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Table 10-32. Map Equivalent Devices Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Table 10-33. Name Selection Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Table 10-34. New Property Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Table 10-35. Part Selection Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Table 10-36. Project Usages Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Table 10-37. Select by Attribute/Property Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
Table 10-38. Select by Name Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Table 10-39. Edit Border Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Table 10-40. Add Text Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Table 10-41. Image Selection Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Table 10-42. Symbol Selection Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Table 10-43. Update Symbol - Options Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Table 10-44. Edit Properties - Propertied Graphic Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Table 10-45. Fill Pattern Selection Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Table 10-46. Set Grid Defaults Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Table 10-47. Split Table Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
Table 10-48. New Property Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Table 10-49. Plugins Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
Table 10-50. Plugin Details Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
Table 10-51. Batch Translate Dialog Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
Table 10-52. Edit Capital Configuration Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
Table 10-53. Release Designs Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
Table 10-54. Engineering Change Orders Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Table 10-55. Engineering Change Orders Output Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Table 10-56. Change Manager Apply ECO Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
Table 10-57. Options (Apply ECO) Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
Table 10-58. Change Manager Preview ECO Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Table 10-59. Apply Change Output Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
Table 10-60. Applicable Changes Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
Table 10-61. Query Criteria Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Table 10-62. Report Builder Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
Table 10-63. CGM Page Settings Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
Table 10-64. DXF Page Settings Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
Table 10-65. PDF Page Settings Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
Table 10-66. SVG Page Settings Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
Table 10-67. Print Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
Table 10-68. Edit Print Region Groups Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
Table 10-69. Print to File Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
Table 10-70. Project Diagram Settings Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544

18 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
List of Tables

Table 10-71. Edit File Name Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545

Table 10-72. Constraint Selection Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
Table 10-73. Define Rules Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
Table 10-74. Rule Selection Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
Table 10-75. Rules Tab in Properties Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
Table 10-76. Undoable Operation Confirmation Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
Table 10-77. Design Log Event Filter Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
Table 10-78. Design Log Filter Options Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
Table 10-79. Design Log Viewer Dialog Box (Non-Bridge Logs) Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
Table 10-80. Design Log Viewer Dialog Box (Bridge Logs) Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
Table 10-81. View Design Logs Dialog Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
Table 12-1. Calculation Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604
Table 12-2. Compare Snapshots Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
Table 12-3. Compare Snapshot With Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606
Table 12-4. Condition Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609
Table 12-5. Edit Metrics Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612
Table 12-6. Edit Scenario Properties Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615
Table 12-7. Edit Study/Scenario Property Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618
Table 12-8. Metrics/Insight Tab Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619
Table 12-9. New Scenario Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624
Table 12-10. New Study Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625
Table 12-11. Snapshot Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628
Table 12-12. Take Snapshot Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 19

February 2016
 List of Tables

20 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Chapter 1
Introduction

This user guide contains information on the functions that are common between the design
applications. These functions include the handling of projects and designs, the layout of design
objects and the ability to add comment graphics to a diagram.
For complete information on each of the design applications, refer to the following user guides:

• Capital Harness MPM User Guide

• Capital Harness TVM User Guide
• Capital HarnessXC User Guide
• Capital Integrator User Guide
• Capital Logic User Guide
• Capital ModularXC User Guide
• Capital Publisher User Guide
• Capital Symbol User Guide
This chapter contains information about the following:

• “Refreshing External Data” on page 22

• “Extensibility Plugins” on page 24
• “Specifying the Memory Allocation of Capital Applications” on page 30
• “Enabling Encrypted Client-Manager Communication” on page 32
• “Creating Additional Icons in the Capital Launcher” on page 33
• “Reports” on page 37
• “User Interface Language” on page 40
• “Diagram Language Translation” on page 41
• “Running Capital Tasks in the Background (Flexible Execution Model)” on page 51

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 21

February 2016
Introduction
Refreshing External Data

Refreshing External Data

The following options are available to refresh data that has been updated outside of the open
design in which are you working. All options are available by pressing Space Bar and entering
Refresh.
• Refresh All
Refreshes data for all of the items below:
o Symbol Libraries
Refreshes symbol library data when it has been modified in Capital Symbol.
o Options & Variants
Refreshes option and variant data for a design when they have been modified in
other Capital applications.
Refreshes shared object data for a design when it has been modified in other Capital
applications.
o Designs
Refreshes design data for the design in which you are working when it has been
modified in other Capital applications.
o Library Parts
Refreshes cached library part data when it has been modified in Capital Library.
o Cross References
Refreshes cross-reference data when it has been modified in other Capital
applications.
o Change Policies
Refreshes change policy data for the design in which you are working when it has
been modified in Capital Project. Capital HarnessXC Capital ModularXC only.
o Synchronize Logical Changes
Refreshes design data relating to associated Capital Logic designs when it has been
modified in Capital Logic. Capital Integrator only.
o SBOM Patterns
Refreshes SBOM Pattern data when it has been modified in Capital Project. It does
not refresh the SBOM pattern based on changes to the design. You should close and
reopen the SBOM to see any changes. Capital Harness MPM and Capital Harness
TVM only.
o Functional Module Codes

22 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Introduction
Refreshing External Data

Refreshes Functional Module Code data when it has been modified in other Capital
applications.
o Production Module Codes
Refreshes Production Module Code data when it has been modified in other Capital
applications.
o Language Dictionary
Refreshes any Diagram Language Translation changes made in other Capital
applications.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 23

February 2016
Introduction
Extensibility Plugins

Extensibility Plugins
The following topics explain how to view the details of any extensibility plugins that you have
installed and how to load new plugins or reload modified plugins.
Compiled plugins - written in Java or JavaScript - provide custom actions and are placed into
the \plugins sub-directory of the Capital installation location. These plugins are loaded when an
application is launched, and can be inspected from within an application, see “Viewing the
Details of Installed Extensibility Plugins” on page 24.

Note
For more information about developing and using extensibility plugins, see the
PluginDevelopment.pdf file that is located in the doc\plugin folder of your Capital
installation.

The function of a custom action is entirely dependent upon the plugin design; refer to the user
documentation supplied with the plugin for information on using the action.

Viewing the Details of Installed Extensibility Plugins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Reloading Extensibility Plugins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Design Inspectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Custom Action Plugins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Object Attribute Descriptions for Use in Extensibility Plugins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Usage Example - Loading an Extensibility Plugin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Viewing the Details of Installed Extensibility

Plugins
This topic explains how to view the details of the extensibility plugins that you have installed.
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Plugins.
The Plugins Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Select a plugin in the Available Plugins table and click Details.
Results
The Plugin Details Dialog Box is displayed, allowing you to view the details of the selected
plugin.
Related Topics
Reloading Extensibility Plugins

24 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Introduction
Reloading Extensibility Plugins

Design Inspectors
Custom Action Plugins
Usage Example - Loading an Extensibility Plugin

Reloading Extensibility Plugins

This topic explains how to reload extensibility plugins, or load new plugins, when they have
been modified in your Capital installation and you do not want to restart the application.
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Plugins.
2. Click Reload All on the Plugins Dialog Box.
Results
The Available Plugins table is updated and any new or modified plugins are available to use in
your Capital applications.
Related Topics
Viewing the Details of Installed Extensibility Plugins
Design Inspectors
Custom Action Plugins
Usage Example - Loading an Extensibility Plugin

Design Inspectors
Accessed by pressing Space Bar and entering Show Design Inspector.
The Design Inspector is available as an interface to expose the functionality of custom plugins
that you may want to create to extend the Capital applications. Once a plugin has been loaded, a
new tab will be added to the inspector, from where all of the plugin functions can be accessed.

The creation and application of plugins is detailed in a separate document called

CustomInspectorDevelopment.pdf, which can be found in the \doc\plugin folder of your Capital
home directory.

Once the plugin has been placed in the correct location, check it has been loaded and refresh the
installed plugins list if necessary. Open the required Capital application, press Space Bar and
enter Plugins. If the custom plugin is not displayed in the Available Plugins list, click the
Reload All button to refresh the list. Once you have verified that the plugin is present, close the
dialog.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 25

February 2016
Introduction
Custom Action Plugins

Related Topics
Viewing the Details of Installed Extensibility Plugins
Reloading Extensibility Plugins
Custom Action Plugins
Usage Example - Loading an Extensibility Plugin

Custom Action Plugins

Custom actions are customer-delivered functions that are exposed in the Capital user interface.
Implemented using the plugin architecture, these actions allow the extensibility of the Capital
functionality on a client-by-client basis.
Custom actions are delivered as a compiled plugin - written in Java or JavaScript - which is
placed into the \plugins sub-directory of the Capital installation location. These plugins are
loaded when the application is launched, and can be inspected from within the Capital tools; see
“Viewing the Details of Installed Extensibility Plugins” on page 24 for more information.

Note
A reference document describing the construction and deployment of custom actions is
available. Refer to the document CustomActionDevelopment.pdf in the \doc\plugin sub-
directory of your Capital installation location.

Custom actions are exposed in the user interface in three ways:

• On the ribbon. Press Space Bar and enter Custom. The name of the action - as coded in
the plugin - is displayed as a selectable option.
• In the context-menu, accessed by right-clicking on an object in the design browser. Any
installed custom actions available are offered beneath a Custom > menu option.
• In the context-menu, accessed by right-clicking on an object on the diagram. Any
installed custom actions available are offered beneath a Custom > menu option.
The function of a custom action is entirely dependent upon the plugin design; refer to the user
documentation supplied with the plugin for information on using the action.

Related Topics
Viewing the Details of Installed Extensibility Plugins
Reloading Extensibility Plugins
Design Inspectors
Usage Example - Loading an Extensibility Plugin

26 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Introduction
Object Attribute Descriptions for Use in Extensibility Plugins

Object Attribute Descriptions for Use in

Extensibility Plugins
If you are using extensibility plugins, you can use object attributes when creating the plugins.
For a full list of available attributes, see the AttributeList.html file located in the /doc/plugin/
api directory of your installation.

Usage Example - Loading an Extensibility Plugin

This usage example demonstrates how to load an extensibility plugin into your Capital
installation and how to use a custom constraint from a plugin.
This example uses a plugin that is available on the Mentor Graphics Community for Electrical
System Design and Harness Engineering.
This plugin is for Capital Integrator and utilizes a custom Protect Wiring by Attribute/
Property constraint to protect every signal, except those that are selected in the Topological
Plane Browser Window during batch operations, such as Composite Wiring Synthesis. This
effectively provides the ability to run these actions only on selected signals. This makes it very
easy to synthesize different sub-sets of signals without even changing the constraint - you just
have to select a different set of signals.

The normal scenario for using this plugin is when CWS has already run for all signals, some
signals have been edited and you want to run CWS again only for those edited signals.

Prerequisites
• The plugin must have been developed and compiled. For more information about
developing extensibility plugins, see the PluginDevelopment.pdf file that is located in
the doc\plugin folder of your Capital installation. For the purposes of this example, we
are using a pre-developed plugin.
• For this example, you must have a SupportNet user account in order to access the
compiled plugin.
• This example uses a Quick Start - Automotive Generative project. If you want to re-
create the steps in Capital Integrator, import the Quick Start - Automotive
Generative.xml project file from here.
• If you want to try out the plugin used in this example, CWS should already have been
run for all signals in the Vehicle Topology design of the project. This is so that harness
levels have been generated.
Procedure
1. Obtain the compiled plugin and add it to your Capital installation as below:
a. Download the ProtectUnselectedSignals.zip file that contains the plugin from:
http://communities.mentor.com/mgcx/docs/DOC-1415.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 27

February 2016
Introduction
Usage Example - Loading an Extensibility Plugin

b. Open the ProtectUnselectedSignals.zip file and copy the

ProtectUnselectedSignals.jar file into the \plugins sub-directory of the Capital
installation location.

Note
The zip file also contains a ProtectUnselectedSignals.java file, which is an
uncompiled version of the ProtectUnselectedSignals.jar file. You do not need
to do anything with this file.

2. Check that the plugin is available in the Capital Integrator application:

a. Open the Capital Integrator application
b. Press Space Bar and enter Plugins: the Plugins Dialog Box is displayed. The
ProtectUnselectedSignals plugin is listed in the table of plugins that have been
loaded in the software.

Note
The plugin might not be listed if Capital Integrator was already running when
you added it to your installation. In this case, click Reload All on the Plugins
dialog. This will load the plugin.

3. Use the functionality that has been added by the plugin.

Note
The steps from this point onwards depend on the plugin that you are using. In this
example, you will apply the custom constraint from the plugin to a topological plane
and run Composite Wiring Synthesis (CWS) for selected signals.

a. Open the Quick Start - Automotive Generative project in Capital Integrator.

b. Open the Vehicle Topology design.

28 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Introduction
Usage Example - Loading an Extensibility Plugin

c. In the Topological Plane Browser Window, right-click the Vehicle Topology plane
and select Properties.

The Plane: Vehicle Topology dialog is displayed where you edit properties and
attributes for it.
d. On the Rules tab, click Add Constraint; the Constraint Selection dialog is
displayed.
e. Select the Protect Wiring by Attribute/Property constraint and click OK; the
standard template for the constraint is added to the Rules tab.

f. Click the icon; a drop-down list is displayed from which you select
ProtectUnselectedSignals.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 29

February 2016
Introduction
Specifying the Memory Allocation of Capital Applications

g. The Protect Wiring by Attribute/Property constraint template is replaced with the

following:

h. Click OK to exit the Plane: Vehicle Topology dialog.

i. In the Topological Plane Browser Window, select the signals for which you want to
run CWS, press Space Bar and enter CWS; the Abstract & Composite Wire
Synthesis dialog is displayed.
j. You do not want to update harness options or generate harness levels again so select
Finish Synthesis and click Go; CWS re-generates the wiring for those selected
signals only.
Related Topics
Viewing the Details of Installed Extensibility Plugins
Reloading Extensibility Plugins
Design Inspectors
Custom Action Plugins

Specifying the Memory Allocation of Capital

Applications
This topic explains how to use the Capital Configuration Editor to specify the maximum
amount of physical memory (on a client computer) that each Capital application is permitted to
use.
Procedure
1. On the Capital Launcher, click the Configuration option in the Support section.
The Edit Capital Configuration Dialog Box is displayed.
2. In the Memory Allocation (MB) column for an application, select the maximum amount
of memory that the application can use. By default, this is 512 MB. Alternatively,
manually enter another amount.
3. Click Apply to save the change or OK to save the change and exit.
4. Start an amended application from the Capital Launcher.
Results
The Capital application starts, using the amended memory allocation.

30 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Introduction
Encrypted Client-Manager Communication Concepts

The memory allocation is recorded in the application log file, where “xxx” is the set memory
allocation:
“Allocated Maximum Heap Size = xxxMb”

Encrypted Client-Manager Communication

Concepts
To establish secure communications between a Capital Manager and client machines there are a
number of concepts to consider:

Authentication
This is the process by which the Capital client and Capital Manager establish to each other that
they are genuine and not an impersonator. This is done using public key certificates which hold
information about its owner's identity and a public key. A server can give out copies of its
public key certificate to all of the clients that want to communicate with it. When the server
starts to communicate with the client, the client uses the server's certificate to confirm that it is
genuine. This also occurs in the other direction with the server authenticating the client with the
client's certificate.

Keystore
The certificates are held in the keystore. Access to the keystore is controlled by a password. By
default your installation comes with two sample keystore files: manager_ks and client_ks (in the
config directory). There are also generated certificates: manager_cert and client_cert. These
certificates are embedded into the keystores for mutual authentication.

SSL
SSL (secure socket layer) is the secure communications protocol that is used for encrypted
communications. This needs to be turned on for both the clients and Capital Manager. Capital
uses a CORBA ORB for communication between clients and Capital Manager and therefore the
configuration for SSL is done in the ORB properties files.

Ciphers
It is possible to configure which ciphers are used for encrypting the communication. Strong
ciphers can make the encryption extremely difficult to break but require more CPU time for the
encrypt/decrypt operations.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 31

February 2016
Introduction
Enabling Encrypted Client-Manager Communication

Figure 1-1. Encrypted Client Manager Communication

Enabling Encrypted Client-Manager

Communication
By default, communications between Capital clients and Capital Manager are not secure
(encrypted). However, you can configure Capital for encrypted client-manager communication.
See “Encrypted Client-Manager Communication Concepts” on page 31 for further information
on the concepts involved in enabling encrypted communications between the Capital Manager
and client machines.

To enable and configure encrypted communication you must edit the manager_orb.properties
file in the Capital Manager installation and a client_orb.properties file in each client
installation.

Procedure
1. Enabling encryption is achieved by turning on SSL on both the Capital Manager and the
clients. Do the following:
• On the Capital Manager installation, navigate to the config directory and open the
manager_orb.properties file for editing.
• Find the jacorb.security.support_ssl property and set its value to ON. This enables
the use of secure sockets for communication.

32 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Introduction
Creating Additional Icons in the Capital Launcher

• In the Capital client installations, navigate to the config directory and open the
client_orb.properties file for editing.
• Again find the jacorb.security.support_ssl property and set its value to ON.
2. If you want to replace the keystore provided in your installation with an alternative, then
you will need to make the following changes to the client and manager orb.properties
file:
3. Find the jacorb.security.keystore property and specify the location of the keystore.
Specify the complete path of the keystore file.
4. Find the jacorb.security.keystore_password property and specify the keystore password
used while regenerating the keystore. The existing value corresponds to the sample
keystore.
5. Find the jacorb.security.default_user property and specify the default user for the
regenerated keystore. This avoids prompting for the user whenever you use the keystore.
The existing value corresponds to the sample keystore.
6. Find the jacorb.security.default_password property and specify the default user
password for the regenerated keystore. This avoids prompting for the password
whenever you use the keystore. The existing value corresponds to the sample keystore.
7. If you want to control the ciphers being used in the encryption, find the
jacorb.security.ssl.server.cipher_suites property and specify the set of all cipher suites
which need to be supported. By default, all the supported types are included. Specify
only the ones you really want to support.

Note
Specify at least one of the cipher suites matching the algorithm used for generating
the keystore file. For example if RSA is used for the key generation algorithm, then
at least one RSA supported cipher suite must be present in the list.

8. Save the file.

Creating Additional Icons in the Capital

Launcher
The Capital Launcher is used to start the Capital applications.
This topic details how to extend the Capital Launcher with custom icons for starting additional
applications.

Examples of such custom icons are:

• Starting an internet browser with the Capital Enterprise Reporter start page displayed

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 33

February 2016
Introduction
Creating Additional Icons in the Capital Launcher

• Launching Capital-related, external applications

• Launching Capital applications with different memory settings
• Launching Capital applications with an explicit Login dialog if Single Sign-on is
standard
Procedure
1. Edit the launcherprops.xml file in the config directory of your Capital installation.
2. Within the <launcher> tags, create a new <launcherentry> tag with the following
attributes:
• name="Name"
Where Name is the name text that will be displayed next to the icon in the Capital
Launcher.
• exec="path to executable"
Where path to executable is the path to the executable for the application.
• section="Section title"
Where Section title is the title of the Capital Launcher section in which you want the
icon to be displayed. It must be either Design, Harness, Analysis, Manager or
Custom.
• icon="path to icon"
Where path to icon is the path to the icon graphic that you want to use in the Capital
Launcher. If you leave this attribute blank (that is, icon=""), then a default icon is
used.
• launcherentrydescription text="description of the icon"
Where description of the icon is the descriptive text that is displayed below the icon
name in the Capital Launcher.
3. When you have finished editing the file, save and close it.
4. Open the Capital Launcher by selecting the Capital Launcher item from the Capital
folder within the Start Menu;
Results
Capital Launcher is displayed with your custom icons.
Examples
• Custom icon for starting Capital Harness Classic
<launcher>

34 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Introduction
Creating Additional Icons in the Capital Launcher

<launcherentry name="Capital Harness Classic"

exec="C:\MentorGraphics\CAPH\caph.bat"
section="Custom"
icon="C:\MentorGraphics\CAPH\IMAGES\img_capitalmanufacture_32x32.gif">
<launcherentrydescription text="Harness Design and detailing" />

</launcherentry>
</launcher>
• Custom icon for opening Capital Enterprise Reporter in Firefox Browser
<launcher>
<launcherentry name="Capital Enterprise Reporter"
exec="C:\ProgramFiles(x86)\MozillaFirefox\firefox.exehttp://localhost:49912/reporter/
Login.jsp"
section="Custom" icon="">
<launcherentrydescription text="Enterprise wide Reporting" />
</launcherentry>
</launcher>
• Custom icon for starting Capital Project with Login dialog even when Single sign-on is
active
<launcher>
<launcherentry name="Capital Project with Login"
exec="C:\MentorGraphics\Capital\bin\CapitalProject.exe -login"
section="Manager" icon="">
<launcherentrydescription text="Manage Designs and Projects" />

</launcherentry>
</launcher>
• Custom icon for starting Capital Logic with parameter -Xmx1400m for bigger heap
space
<launcher>
<launcherentry name="Capital Logic 1400m"
exec="C:\MentorGraphics\Capital\bin\CapitalLogic.exe -Xmx1400m"
section="Design" icon="">
<launcherentrydescription text="CLogic with more Memory allocation" />
</launcherentry>
</launcher>

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 35

February 2016
Introduction
Creating Additional Icons in the Capital Launcher

• Custom icon for starting Capital Logic with parameter -Xmx1400m (to increase the
default memory allocation)
<launcher>
<launcherentry name="Capital Logic 1400m"
exec="C:\MentorGraphics\Capital\bin\CapitalLogic.exe -Xmx1400m"
section="Design" icon="">
<launcherentrydescription text="CLogic with more Memory allocation" />

</launcherentry>
</launcher>

36 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Introduction
Reports

Reports
In Capital Logic, Capital HarnessXC and Capital HarnessMPM, you can run reports on designs.
If you are using Capital Logic, see the Capital Logic User Guide for more information.

If you are using Capital HarnessXC or Capital ModularXC, see the Capital HarnessXC User
Guide for more information.

If you are using Capital Harness MPM or Capital Harness TVM, see the Capital Harness MPM
User Guide for more information.

If you are using Capital Publisher, see the Capital Publisher User Guide for more information.

If you are using Capital Systems Capture, see the Function Design in Capital Systems Capture
User Guide for more information.

If you are creating platform designs in Capital Systems Architect, see the Platform Design in
Capital Systems User Guide for more information.

The following topic provides details about how you can configure reports:

Using the Report Builder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Using the Report Builder

Capital provides a dynamic report generator enabling you to quickly and easily specify, create
and modify customised reports. The functionality is available in Capital Logic, Capital
Integrator, Capital Topology, and Capital HarnessXC.
The Report Builder interface is intuitive and user-friendly, offering control via icons and drag
and drop functionality enabling the simple creation and management of reports. The scope of
the report is only based on the current design.
The reports are generated as plugins and can be made available, depending on your
requirements, as tables on diagrams, in Design Inspectors, for internal reports, and in Capital
Enterprise Reporter.

Prerequisites
A design must be open in the browser.

Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Build.
2. Either:
• Click the icon to create a new report

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 37

February 2016
Introduction
Using the Report Builder

• Click the icon to load an existing report (as a plugin) and edit as required.

3. Select the Tool or Tools you wish to report on by clicking on the relevant icon.
• Select for Capital Logic

• Select for Capital Integrator and Capital Topology

• Select for Capital HarnessXC

Note
You can report on one, or a combination of tools. The objects that can be
reported on changes according to the tool(s) selected and are displayed for
selection in the Include: section at the bottom of the window. Click the icons to
include in, or remove from the report.
Only applicable object types are available for each of the design types. Combining
design types narrows the scope of possible objects for selection, as only common
objects are shown. as available.

4. Choose the type of report, or reports you wish to generate. Options are:
• Select to generate output as an embedded report

• Select to generate output as a table to be used in a style set

• Select to generate a design inspector report

5. Enter a unique name, version and description for your report by typing in the free text
entry boxes.
6. Click the icon to add columns to the report. Once there is at least one column in the
report click the icon to specify the contents of the column.

Tip
Double click the heading of the column to change or edit its name. Columns may be
reordered by dragging or dropping into the required configuration.
Clicking the icon allows you to delete the selected column.

38 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Introduction
Using the Report Builder

7. After clicking the icon the Edit Contents of Column dialog opens:

8. Drag and drop available elements, including attributes, queries and plugin queries, to
construct the desired content of the report. You can also insert your own text by typing
in between the elements. A preview of how the elements will appear in the report
column is shown at the bottom of the dialog.
Where there are a number of different options available under an element a drop down
list is accessible by clicking the down arrow.
When selecting the Attribute element a list of specific attributes are displayed for
conductors, devices, connectors and splices, along with common attributes for all
objects. In addition you can add a "User specified" attribute where you can include
attributes not listed in the above sections.
Plugins not created by Capital cannot be opened, or used as the basis for report content.
The From and To elements are available if only Nets or Wires are selected. Selecting
any other object will remove the From and To fields.
If you add a calculation element then its drop down list allows access to a further list of
options enabling you to construct your required calculation. You can also format the
calculation, including specifying the number of decimal places shown by clicking the
Format option from the calculation dropdown menu.

Tip
Reports are always sorted by the first column, unless you include an Index element,
in which case this is used for sorting purposes.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 39

February 2016
Introduction
User Interface Language

9. Click the icon compile and save your report, ensuring you have specified a name and
description, if required, in the Plugin Name and Plugin Description fields.
Reports automatically become available in the Capital tool suite, negating any need to
restart the Capital Enterprise Reporter server.
Results
The report is available as a plugin and, depending on the choice of output, can be viewed as an
embedded report in the tool, as a plugin in table in Styling, via the design inspector or in Capital
Enterprise Reporter.
Related Topics
Report Builder Dialog Box

User Interface Language

Capital provides the user interface in four languages: English, German, Chinese and Japanese.
You set the language in the clientprops.xml file located in the config subdirectory of your
Capital installation directory. See the Capital Configuration Files Reference Guide.

40 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Introduction
Diagram Language Translation

Diagram Language Translation

You can display, print and publish diagrams with text rendered in any given language using a
language database stored as part of your system data. This enables you to generate multi-
language service documentation.

Language Dictionary
In order to start using diagram language translation, you must edit and import a comma
separated variable (CSV) file, that acts as a language dictionary of translatable terms. This is the
starting point for the language database.
See “Editing the Language Dictionary CSV File” on page 43 and “Importing a Language
Dictionary CSV File” on page 45.

Any updates made in the applications will only be included in the database, the CSV file is not
updated automatically but you can export an updated CSV file. See “Exporting a Language
Dictionary CSV File” on page 47.

The CSV file lists the available translation languages and any translations that already exist for
specific translated words or terms. Each translation entry has a quick code and a list of
translations for the available languages. The quick code links each translatable string within the
design tools, or library data, with the translation entry in the language dictionary.

An example CSV file, dictionary.csv, is included in the starter data supplied with the software
see capital_home\data\xml\Language Dictionary. You can take a copy of that and edit it or
create a new CSV file.

Active Language
Within Capital Project or a design application, you control which translation language is active
by selecting a language code in the box that is at the bottom right of the application window. By
default, the is EN. In Capital Library, you control it by pressing Space Bar and entering Switch
Language.
The default EN language is used:

• When you bridge data in or out of the applications.

• When design rule checks and design compare functionality interpret results.
• When the Analysis functionality interprets properties and names. It is not recommended
to use translatable strings in analysis models.
When you export a DXF, PDF, CGM or SVG file, the currently active language is used.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 41

February 2016
Introduction
Translatable Terms

Translatable Terms
When you enter property, attribute or comment text into a dialog, predictive text displays a list
of translated terms in the active language, thereby allowing you to select an existing translated
term. You can enter free, non-translated text as normal, including text that exists within the
language database.
Wherever a translatable term is used, that translation is displayed against a gray background
( ). When the active language is changed, the displayed text will change to the one for
the now active language.

If a translatable term was entered for a previously active language and the currently active
language does not have a translation for that term, the quick code will be displayed.

If a translatable term does not have a translation for the active language, you can enter one using
the context menu for that highlighted term. See “Adding a Translation of an Existing
Translatable Term for the Currently Active Language” on page 48).

You can enter a new translatable term and add it to the dictionary. See “Adding a Translation of
a New Translatable Term for the Currently Active Language” on page 49).

A design rule check No translation for text is also available to identify:

• where a translatable term has been used but no translation exists for the active language
so the quick code is displayed.
• where a translatable term has been entered as free text and has no link to the language
database.
See “Running Design Rule Checks” on page 82.

Notes About Specific Dialogs

In dialogs using query expressions, the query expression will work with values from the
currently active language. However, if you change the active language, the query expression has
to be modified to match the now active language.
In the Part Selection Dialog Box, the filter for a property value will only work with a quick code
as the value for translatable entries.

Chinese and Japanese Characters

In order to see Chinese and Japanese characters in dialogs, you must have East Asian characters
available on your computer.
Editing the file in Microsoft Office Excel removes UTF-8 encoding. See “Saving a Language
Dictionary CSV File with UTF-8 or Non-Ascii Characters” on page 45 for a workaround.

42 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Introduction
Editing the Language Dictionary CSV File

Font settings for comment text on diagrams are taken from the Project Preferences for each
application (Applicaton Name > Property > Text). By default, they use the Lucida Sans font
which does not support East Asian characters. To use East Asian characters, you must change
the font in these preferences. See “Project Preferences” on page 70.

Related Topics
Editing the Language Dictionary CSV File
Saving a Language Dictionary CSV File with UTF-8 or Non-Ascii Characters
Importing a Language Dictionary CSV File
Exporting a Language Dictionary CSV File
Refreshing Language Dictionary Data in a Design Application
Adding a Translation of an Existing Translatable Term for the Currently Active Language
Adding a Translation of a New Translatable Term for the Currently Active Language
Converting Free Text Strings into Translations

Editing the Language Dictionary CSV File

An example CSV file is included in the starter data supplied with the software. You can take a
copy of that and edit it or create a new CSV file.
You must use a unicode-supporting text editor capable of creating UTF-8 encoded files (for
example, OpenOffice, Windows Notepad) to edit the CSV file that acts as the language
dictionary of translatable terms.

Note
Editing the file in Microsoft Office Excel removes UTF-8 encoding. See “Saving a
Language Dictionary CSV File with UTF-8 or Non-Ascii Characters” on page 45 for a
workaround.

The first line of the file lists the available languages. For example:

QuickCode,EN_UK:ENGLISH:UK:BRITISH,DE:GERMAN:GERMANY:GERMAN

Note that QuickCode is mandatory, this code is not necessarily in any particular language but
links a translation with a particular translatable term. All other listed languages are optional.

In this example, QuickCode is followed by the languages UK English

(EN_UK:ENGLISH:UK:BRITISH) and German (DE:GERMAN:GERMANY:GERMAN).
Each language is separated by a comma (,). Each language entry consists of the language code
(which is the code that appears within the design tools, in the lower right corner of the
application), language name, country code and remarks separated by a colon (:). Only the
language code is mandatory information.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 43

February 2016
Introduction
Editing the Language Dictionary CSV File

You can add any languages to this row. For example, if you wanted to add French to the
available languages, you would add FR:FRENCH:FRANCE:FRENCH. For example:

QuickCode,EN_UK:ENGLISH:UK:BRITISH,DE:GERMAN:GERMANY:GERMAN,FR:FRE
NCH:FRANCE:FRENCH

The remaining lines within the CSV file describe each translated entry. Each row consists of a
unique quick code followed by the translations. The QuickCode that you use for a language can
be anything. The translations must follow the same order as the language list in the first row.

For example:

PWR,Leistung,power
PWRC,Leistungsteil,power circuit
SUP,Lieferant,supplier
YES,möglich,possible
SWPOS,Positionsschalter,position switch

In this example, PWR is the quick code, Leistung is the German translation and power circuit is
the English translation.

Each translatable term must have a quick code as this is used to identify which term is being
translated when you enter a translation from an application.

Each translatable term should have one translation for each available language defined in the
first line. However, if no translation exists for a particular language, the entry for that language
is placed as an empty string.

Using the above example, if there was an English translation for PWR but no German
translation, its row would be:

PWR,Leistung,,

Note
If a translation string contains an explicit comma (,), you must enter a backslash before it
(\,).

Related Topics
Diagram Language Translation
Saving a Language Dictionary CSV File with UTF-8 or Non-Ascii Characters
Importing a Language Dictionary CSV File
Exporting a Language Dictionary CSV File
Refreshing Language Dictionary Data in a Design Application
Adding a Translation of an Existing Translatable Term for the Currently Active Language

44 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Introduction
Saving a Language Dictionary CSV File with UTF-8 or Non-Ascii Characters

Adding a Translation of a New Translatable Term for the Currently Active Language
Converting Free Text Strings into Translations

Saving a Language Dictionary CSV File with UTF-8

or Non-Ascii Characters
Editing a language dictionary CSV file in Microsoft Office Excel removes UTF-8 encoding.
This topic describes a workaround for this.
Procedure
1. Open the CSV file in Microsoft Office Excel.
2. In Microsoft Office Excel, save the file as a CSV (Comma delimited) (*.csv) file.
3. Close Microsoft Office Excel.
4. Open the CSV file in Notepad (found under All Programs > Accessories in the
Windows Start menu).
5. In Notepad, select File > Save As from the menu; the Save As dialog is displayed.
6. From the Encoding dropdown list at the bottom of the dialog, select UTF-8.

Note
Do not select ANSI or you will lose any accents.

7. Save the file with a different name from the original.

Results
This file is in UTF-8 and retains all characters and accents. It can be imported into databases
supported by Capital.
Related Topics
Diagram Language Translation
Editing the Language Dictionary CSV File
Importing a Language Dictionary CSV File
Exporting a Language Dictionary CSV File

Importing a Language Dictionary CSV File

This topic details how to import a comma-separated variable (CSV) file that acts as a language
dictionary of translatable terms into your database.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 45

February 2016
Introduction
Importing a Language Dictionary CSV File

Note
When importing and exporting system data, any language dictionary data will be included in
your system data and as such will be imported and exported. You do not need to import and
export language dictionary data separately, although you may want to just import language
dictionary data from a separate CSV file.

Prerequisites
• The CSV file must contain the languages that you want available. See “Editing the
Language Dictionary CSV File” on page 43.
• Your user account must have the Import Language Dictionary permission.
Procedure
1. In Capital Project, press Space Bar and enter Import Language Dictionary; the Import
Dictionary dialog is displayed.
2. Navigate to the language dictionary CSV file and select it. If your database already
contains language dictionary data, you must specify one of the following:
• Overwrite
Completely overwrites the contents of the existing language dictionary in the
database and removes existing translations that are not in the imported CSV file.
• Merge
Merges the contents of the CSV file with the existing language dictionary in the
database. Existing strings that are not included in the CSV file remain in the
database. New strings are added and existing strings are updated with any new
translation strings in the file.
3. Click Import Dictionary.
Results
The contents of the language dictionary CSV file are stored as part of your system data.
Related Topics
Diagram Language Translation
Editing the Language Dictionary CSV File
Exporting a Language Dictionary CSV File
Refreshing Language Dictionary Data in a Design Application
Adding a Translation of an Existing Translatable Term for the Currently Active Language
Adding a Translation of a New Translatable Term for the Currently Active Language
Converting Free Text Strings into Translations

46 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Introduction
Exporting a Language Dictionary CSV File

Exporting a Language Dictionary CSV File

This topic details how to export a comma-separated variable (CSV) file that acts as a language
dictionary of translatable terms from your database.
Note
When importing and exporting system data, any language dictionary data included in your
system data will also be imported and exported. You do not need to import and export
language dictionary data separately, although you may want to just export language dictionary
data in a separate CSV file.

Prerequisites
• Your user account must have the Export Language Dictionary permission.
Procedure
1. In Capital Project, press Space Bar and enter Export Language Dictionary; the Export
Dictionary dialog is displayed.
2. Navigate to the location where you want to save the file, specify a name and click
Export Dictionary.
Results
The contents of your language dictionary are saved in the CSV file.
Related Topics
Diagram Language Translation
Editing the Language Dictionary CSV File
Importing a Language Dictionary CSV File
Refreshing Language Dictionary Data in a Design Application
Adding a Translation of an Existing Translatable Term for the Currently Active Language
Adding a Translation of a New Translatable Term for the Currently Active Language
Converting Free Text Strings into Translations

Refreshing Language Dictionary Data in a Design

Application
This topic details how to refresh the language dictionary data that is being used in a design
application. This is useful if the language dictionary has been updated while your application
session has been open.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 47

February 2016
Introduction
Adding a Translation of an Existing Translatable Term for the Currently Active Language

Procedure
Press Space Bar and enter Language Dictionary; the language dictionary accessed by the
application is updated.

Results
• Any new languages that have been added are now visible in the application.
• Any modified translations are displayed in the application.
Related Topics
Diagram Language Translation
Editing the Language Dictionary CSV File
Importing a Language Dictionary CSV File
Exporting a Language Dictionary CSV File
Adding a Translation of an Existing Translatable Term for the Currently Active Language
Adding a Translation of a New Translatable Term for the Currently Active Language
Converting Free Text Strings into Translations

Adding a Translation of an Existing Translatable

Term for the Currently Active Language
This topic details how to add (enter) a translation for a term that does exist in the language
dictionary but does not yet have a translation for the currently active language. You can do this
while entering property, attribute or comment text into a dialog.
Prerequisites
• The translatable term must have been entered in the language dictionary but without a
translation for the currently active language.
• You must know the quick code for the translatable term.
• Your user account must have the Add to Language Dictionary permission.
Procedure
1. Enter the new translation in the field where you want to use it.
2. Select the translation, right-click on it and select Add To Dictionary; the Add To
Dictionary dialog is displayed.
3. Specify the Entry Value and click OK.
Results
• The translation is added to the language dictionary.

48 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Introduction
Adding a Translation of a New Translatable Term for the Currently Active Language

• The translation is displayed against a gray background in the field ( ).

Related Topics
Diagram Language Translation
Editing the Language Dictionary CSV File
Importing a Language Dictionary CSV File
Exporting a Language Dictionary CSV File
Refreshing Language Dictionary Data in a Design Application
Adding a Translation of a New Translatable Term for the Currently Active Language
Converting Free Text Strings into Translations

Adding a Translation of a New Translatable Term

for the Currently Active Language
This topic details how to add (enter) a translation for a term that does not exist in the language
dictionary. You can do this while entering property, attribute or comment text into a dialog.
Prerequisites
• Your user account must have the Add to Language Dictionary permission.
Procedure
1. Enter the translation in the field where you want to use it.
2. Select the translation, right-click on it and select Add To Dictionary; the Add To
Dictionary dialog is displayed.
3. Specify a unique Entry Code (the quick code for the term) and click OK.
Results
• The translatable term and translation are added to the language dictionary.
• The translation is displayed against a gray background in the field ( ).

Related Topics
Diagram Language Translation
Editing the Language Dictionary CSV File
Importing a Language Dictionary CSV File
Exporting a Language Dictionary CSV File
Refreshing Language Dictionary Data in a Design Application
Adding a Translation of an Existing Translatable Term for the Currently Active Language

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 49

February 2016
Introduction
Converting Free Text Strings into Translations

Converting Free Text Strings into Translations

Converting Free Text Strings into Translations

This topic details how to perform a batch conversion of free text strings, that exactly match
existing translations for the currently active language, into translation strings.
Translation Strings are text strings with a gray background, ( ), that change when the
active language changes).

You can do this in the design applications and it will work on any texts in fields where
translation is supported. You specify whether you want to perform this for an entire project, a
design or a diagram.

Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Translation; the Batch Translate Dialog Box is displayed.
2. In the Scope tree, select the designs and diagrams in which you want to perform the
action and click Translate; a progress bar indicates that the action is being performed.
Results
• A Batch Translate tab in the Output Window at the bottom of the application reports on
the results of the action.
• If multiple entries are found for a particular text in the language dictionary, the one
whose quick code appears alphabetically first is used.
Related Topics
Diagram Language Translation
Editing the Language Dictionary CSV File
Importing a Language Dictionary CSV File
Exporting a Language Dictionary CSV File
Refreshing Language Dictionary Data in a Design Application
Adding a Translation of an Existing Translatable Term for the Currently Active Language
Adding a Translation of a New Translatable Term for the Currently Active Language

50 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Introduction
Running Capital Tasks in the Background (Flexible Execution Model)

Running Capital Tasks in the Background

(Flexible Execution Model)
Capital can use a Flexible Execution Model (FEM) to process long running and recurring tasks,
such as Harness Processing, Design Rule Checks (DRCs), running FMEA scenarios, Costing or
Global Library tasks, in the background. These tasks can be distributed across one or more task
servers for efficient execution. In this way, engineers avoid waiting for tasks to complete and
reduce design cycle times. In addition, FEM allows any Capital task to be launched by a third-
party web-service using the same infrastructure as Capital’s own integrated functionality.
Server Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Configuring a Capital Integration Server as the Task Execution Manager . . . . . . . . . 54
Configuring a Capital Integration Server as a Task Execution Slave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Configuring a Client to Connect to the Task Execution Manager when Submitting a Task
55
Running Harness Processing in Capital HarnessXC (or Capital ModularXC) in the
Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Tasks tab in Output Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Running SBOM Generation and Costing in Capital Harness MPM and Capital Harness
TVM in the Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Running FMEA Scenarios in Capital Analysis in the Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Server Setup
You can distribute these tasks across multiple servers by having one CIS server running as a
task execution manager and other CIS installations running as task execution slaves:
• Configuring a Capital Integration Server as the Task Execution Manager
• Configuring a Capital Integration Server as a Task Execution Slave
When a task is sent to the task execution manager, it finds the first idle slave and forwards the
task to it. The client computer on which the tasks are submitted must be configured to connect
to the Task Execution Manager (see “Configuring a Client to Connect to the Task Execution
Manager when Submitting a Task” on page 55).

End user running Capital client applications

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 51

February 2016
Introduction
Server Setup

User invokes task and it is forwarded to the task execution manager.

CIS configured as Task Execution Manager

Tasks forwarded to task execution slaves

CIS configured as Task Execution Slave

Starts client in headless mode, supplying tasks and parameters. When a task is complete
(success or failure), the slave reports back to the Task Execution Manager.

The status of tasks is viewable in the Tasks tab in Output Window of the design tools.

Tasks can be submitted to a Capital Integration Server (CIS) either for execution as soon as
possible or for execution at a specified time. If you want to schedule specific times when
running a task in the background, you can use web services to schedule it. See the
WebServiceDevelopment.pdf document located in the doc folder of your Capital installation for
more information about web services.

At v2012.1, Harness Processing in Capital HarnessXC, SBOM generation in Capital Harness

MPM, costing calculations in Capital Harness TVM and Global Library functionality in Capital
Library support the Flexible Execution Model (FEM). See “Running SBOM Generation and
Costing in Capital Harness MPM and Capital Harness TVM in the Background” on page 58 or
Enterprise Assets in the Capital Library User Guide.

52 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Introduction
Server Setup

At v2014.1, running FMEA analysis scenarios as background tasks supports the Flexible
Execution Model (FEM). See “Running FMEA Scenarios in Capital Analysis in the
Background” on page 59.

Note
In order to manage Flexible Execution Model (FEM) tasks, your user account must have the
Task Administration permission set in Capital User.

Web Services Related to Running Tasks in the Background

There are several web services related to this functionality that can be deployed via the
extensibility architecture:

• SubmitTask
Enables you to submit a new task.
• ListTasks
Enables you to retrieve a list of submitted tasks.
• DescribeTask
Enables you to view the execution records and parameters for a specific task.
• DeleteTask
Enables you to delete a submitted task.
See the WebServiceDevelopment.pdf document located in the doc folder of your Capital
installation for more information about these web services and how to use them.

The doc/webservices/ folder also contains a data sub-folder that provides an example task
parameters file for use in SBOM and costing generation. You can access FEM using these
parameters, adapted for your own requirements.

Related Topics
Configuring a Capital Integration Server as the Task Execution Manager
Configuring a Capital Integration Server as a Task Execution Slave
Configuring a Client to Connect to the Task Execution Manager when Submitting a Task
Running SBOM Generation and Costing in Capital Harness MPM and Capital Harness TVM in
the Background

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 53

February 2016
Introduction
Configuring a Capital Integration Server as the Task Execution Manager

Configuring a Capital Integration Server as the

Task Execution Manager
On the computer where you are running the Capital Integration Server that you want to run as
the task execution manager, navigate to the config directory of your Capital installation and
open the clientprops.xml file in an editor (such as Notepad).
You must:

• Edit the cismaster node in the file to specify parameters that control the behavior of the
task execution manager and to specify the connection details for the task execution
slaves.
• Check that the use_licensed_services parameter for the Capital Integration Server
section is set appropriately for your licensing setup.
See the Flexible Execution Manager (FEM) section and Capital Integration Server (CIS)
entry in the Capital Configuration Files Reference guide.

Related Topics
Running Capital Tasks in the Background (Flexible Execution Model)
Configuring a Capital Integration Server as a Task Execution Slave
Configuring a Client to Connect to the Task Execution Manager when Submitting a Task

Configuring a Capital Integration Server as a Task

Execution Slave
On the computer where you are running the Capital Integration Server that you want to run as a
task execution slave, navigate to the config directory of your Capital installation and open the
clientprops.xml file in an editor (such as Notepad).
You must:

• Edit the cismaster node in the file to specify the connection details for the task
execution manager.
• Check that the use_licensed_services parameter for the Capital Integration Server
section is set appropriately for your licensing setup.
See the Flexible Execution Manager (FEM) section and Capital Integration Server (CIS)
entry in the Capital Configuration Files Reference guide.

Related Topics
Running Capital Tasks in the Background (Flexible Execution Model)
Configuring a Capital Integration Server as the Task Execution Manager

54 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Introduction
Configuring a Client to Connect to the Task Execution Manager when Submitting a Task

Configuring a Client to Connect to the Task Execution Manager when Submitting a Task

Configuring a Client to Connect to the Task

Execution Manager when Submitting a Task
On the computer where you are running the client, navigate to the config directory of your
Capital installation and open the clientprops.xml file in an editor (such as Notepad).
You must edit the cismaster node in the file to specify the connection details for the task
execution manager.

See the cismaster section of the Capital Configuration Files Reference guide.

Related Topics
Running Capital Tasks in the Background (Flexible Execution Model)
Configuring a Capital Integration Server as the Task Execution Manager
Configuring a Capital Integration Server as a Task Execution Slave

Running Harness Processing in Capital HarnessXC

(or Capital ModularXC) in the Background
This topic details how to run harness processing in Capital HarnessXC (or Capital ModularXC)
as a task in the background.
See also the Processing a Harness Design topic in the Capital HarnessXC User Guide.

Prerequisites
• You must have configured the Capital Integration Server that is running as the task
execution manager. See “Configuring a Capital Integration Server as the Task Execution
Manager” on page 54.
• You must have configured the Capital Integration Servers that are running as the task
execution slaves. See “Configuring a Capital Integration Server as a Task Execution
Slave” on page 54.
• The Capital Integration Servers must be running. On the task execution manager
computer, you must have logged in to the Capital Integration Server with a user name
and password.
• The client from which you are running harness processing must have been configured to
connect to the Task Execution Manager (see “Configuring a Client to Connect to the
Task Execution Manager when Submitting a Task” on page 55).

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 55

February 2016
Introduction
Running Harness Processing in Capital HarnessXC (or Capital ModularXC) in the Background

Procedure
Run harness processing as detailed in the Processing a Harness Design topic in the Capital
HarnessXC User Guide but ensure that you select the Background Run box at the bottom of
the Harness Processing dialog.

Note
If you want to use scheduling when running harness processing in the background,
you can use web services to schedule it. See the WebServiceDevelopment.pdf
document located in the doc folder of your Capital installation for more information
about web services.

Results
When the harness processing starts, the task will be viewable in the Tasks Tab.
Related Topics
Running Capital Tasks in the Background (Flexible Execution Model)
Tasks tab in Output Window

56 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Introduction
Tasks tab in Output Window

Tasks tab in Output Window

To access: Press Space Bar and enter Tasks in a design tool.
Use this tab to view the status of tasks that have been submitted to run in the background.
Objects

Table 1-1. Tasks Tab Contents

Field Description
Delete If the selected task in the Tasks Table has not been executed yet,
this deletes the selected task.
If the selected task in the Tasks Table is a recurring task or is a
failed task scheduled for a rerun, this stops the selected task but
does not delete it.
Only the user who submitted the task or a superuser can use this.
Refresh Refreshes the tasks listed in the Tasks Table.
View Logs Allows you to view the log files for the tasks listed in the Tasks
Table.
Tasks Table Lists the tasks that have been performed in the background or are
scheduled to be performed in the background. Also details the
name of the design on which the task has been performed. The
user id of the person who initiated the task. The start and end time
of the task performance, the machine it was run on and its current
status - whether it is running, stopped, failed, completed, and so on
Today / Yesterday / Past Specifies the time period for which tasks are displayed in the
Week / Tasks Table.

Future

Related Topics
Configuring a Capital Integration Server as the Task Execution Manager
Configuring a Capital Integration Server as a Task Execution Slave
Configuring a Client to Connect to the Task Execution Manager when Submitting a Task
Running SBOM Generation and Costing in Capital Harness MPM and Capital Harness TVM in
the Background

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 57

February 2016
Introduction
Running SBOM Generation and Costing in Capital Harness MPM and Capital Harness TVM in the

Running SBOM Generation and Costing in Capital

Harness MPM and Capital Harness TVM in the
Background
This topic details how to run SBOM generation and costing in Capital Harness MPM and
Capital Harness TVM as a task in the background.
See also the Generating an SBOM topic in the Capital Manufacturing Systems Solutions
User Guide.

Prerequisites
• You must have configured the Capital Integration Server that is running as the task
execution manager. See “Configuring a Capital Integration Server as the Task Execution
Manager” on page 54.
• You must have configured the Capital Integration Servers that are running as the task
execution slaves. See “Configuring a Capital Integration Server as a Task Execution
Slave” on page 54.
• The Capital Integration Servers must be running. On the task execution manager
computer, you must have logged in to the Capital Integration Server with a user name
and password.
• The client from which you are running SBOM generation and costing must have been
configured to connect to the Task Execution Manager (see “Configuring a Client to
Connect to the Task Execution Manager when Submitting a Task” on page 55).
• Capital Harness MPM and Capital Harness TVM are installed, with the appropriate
licenses, on your remote machines.
Procedure
Run SBOM generation and costing as detailed in the Generating an SBOM topic in the Capital
Manufacturing Systems Solutions User Guide but ensure that you select the Background
Run box at the bottom of the SBOM Processing Wizard dialog.

Note
If you want to use scheduling when running SBOM generation and costing in the
background, you can use web services to schedule it. See the
WebServiceDevelopment.pdf document located in the doc folder of your Capital
installation for more information about web services.

Results
SBOM generation and costing runs, the task will be viewable in the Tasks tab of the Output
window.

58 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Introduction
Running FMEA Scenarios in Capital Analysis in the Background

Related Topics
Running Capital Tasks in the Background (Flexible Execution Model)

Running FMEA Scenarios in Capital Analysis in the

Background
This topic details how to run FMEA analysis scenarios in Capital Analysis as a task in the
background.
Prerequisites
• You must have configured the Capital Integration Server that is running as the task
execution manager. See “Configuring a Capital Integration Server as the Task Execution
Manager” on page 54.
• You must have configured the Capital Integration Servers that are running as the task
execution slaves. See “Configuring a Capital Integration Server as a Task Execution
Slave” on page 54.
• The Capital Integration Servers must be running. On the task execution manager
computer, you must have logged in to the Capital Integration Server with a user name
and password.
• The client from which you are running the FMEA task must have been configured to
connect to the Task Execution Manager (see “Configuring a Client to Connect to the
Task Execution Manager when Submitting a Task” on page 55).
Procedure
Use the FMEA Wizard to run an analysis scenario as detailed in the Creating FMEA Scenarios
topic in the Capital Analysis User Guide, but ensure that you select the Background Run box
at the bottom of the Run Scenario dialog.

Note
If you want to use scheduling when running FMEA analysis in the background, you
can use web services to schedule it. See the WebServiceDevelopment.pdf document
located in the doc folder of your Capital installation for more information about web
services.

Results
When the FMEA starts, the task will be viewable in the Tasks tab in Output Window.
Related Topics
Running Capital Tasks in the Background (Flexible Execution Model)

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 59

February 2016
Introduction
Creating Audit Reports When Capital Analysis Operations are Run in the Background

Creating Audit Reports When Capital Analysis

Operations are Run in the Background
This topic details how to create audit reports for Capital SimProve, Capital SimStress and
Capital SimScript in Capital Analysis as a task in the background.
See also the Creating a SCA Report, the Stress Analysis Wizard and the Using a Script File
topics in the Capital Analysis User Guide, for more information on creating the required audit
report.

Prerequisites
• You must have configured the Capital Integration Server that is running as the task
execution manager. See Configuring a Capital Integration Server as the Task Execution
Manager.
• You must have configured the Capital Integration Servers that are running as the task
execution slaves. See Configuring a Capital Integration Server as a Task Execution
Slave.
• The Capital Integration Servers must be running. On the task execution manager
computer, you must have logged in to the Capital Integration Server with a user name
and password.
• The client from which you are running the Create audit report task must have been
configured to connect to the Task Execution Manager (see Configuring a Client to
Connect to the Task Execution Manager when Submitting a Task).
Procedure
Use either the SCA Wizard, the Stress Analysis Wizard or the simulation tool, Capital
SimScript tab to create the required audit report as detailed in the Creating a SCA Report, the
Stress Analysis Wizard and the Using a Script File topics in the Capital Analysis User Guide,
but ensure that you select the Run in background box at the bottom of the appropriate dialog.

Note
If you want to use scheduling to create audit reports when running analysis
operations in the background, you can use web services to schedule it. See the
WebServiceDevelopment.pdf document located in the doc folder of your Capital
installation for more information about web services.

Results
When the audit reports are created, the task will be viewable in the Tasks tab of the Output
window.

60 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Introduction
Searching for an Action on the Ribbon

Searching for an Action on the Ribbon

The ribbon at the top of an application contains tabs with menu items and buttons for various
actions. You can use the Ribbon Helper to find a particular action.
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar or click the Capital tab on the ribbon and click the Ribbon Helper
button, a Search Ribbon dialog box displays.

2. Start typing the name of the action in the box; the Ribbon Helper searches for actions
matching the string.
Results
If only one actions matches the string, the ribbon jumps to the appropriate tab and the action is
highlighted.
If multiple actions match the string, the dialog box lists the matches. Click the action you want
and the ribbon jumps to that action.
To activate an action, do one of the following:
• Select it in the search results and press Enter
• Double-click it in the search results
• Click it on the ribbon

Launch Pane
The Launch Pane is displayed in a design application when no diagram is open.
The top panels on it change each release and provide links to information on such things as new
functionality.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 61

February 2016
Introduction
Launch Pane

At the bottom of the launch pane, the following icons link to the following sources of
information:

Table 1-2. Launch Pane Icons

Launch Pane Icon Links to:
InfoHub Locally-installed user guides with links to SupportNet.

Communities Discussions with other Capital users around the world,

where you can get the latest guidance and advice.

IDEAS A facility where you can suggest ideas for enhancements

to the Capital software.

On Demand Training Mentor Learning Center where you can enroll on courses
about Capital software.

SupportNet Mentor Graphics customer support site.

62 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Chapter 2
Projects and Designs

This chapter contains the following topics which explain how to perform various generic editing
actions on diagrams.
Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Project Browser. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Opening a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Creating a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Deleting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Importing a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Exporting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Closing a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Project Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Capital Compressed Format for Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Exporting a Project in Capital Compressed Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Importing a Project in Capital Compressed Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Importing Designs into a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Migrating a Design from Capital Harness Classic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Editing the Information for a Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Adding a Property to a Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Editing a Property for a Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Deleting a Property for a Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Comparing Objects and Their Properties in Design Revisions or Build Lists . . . . . . . . . . 81
Running Design Rule Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Running Design Rule Checks in Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Design Rule Checks Output Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Design Rule Check Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Releasing Designs with Enforced Design Rule Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Build List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Options and Option Relationships . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Define Option Relationships. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Creating an Option Folder at Project Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Creating an Option at Project Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Defining Inclusive and Exclusive Relationships for an Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Creating an Option Combination at Project Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Adding a Valid Selection to an Option Combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Deleting a Valid Selection from an Option Combination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Deleting an Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 63

February 2016
Projects and Designs

Engineering Change Orders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

ECO Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Working with an ECO Created in Capital . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Creating an Engineering Change Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Deleting an Engineering Change Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Viewing Engineering Change Orders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Capture and Apply a Change Within an ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Recording a Change with an ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Applying a Stored Change from an ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Identifying Topology Changes with Hotspots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Harness Object Behavior on Applying ECO Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
ECO Import and Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Exporting an ECO Design Change Record. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Importing an ECO Design Change Record. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

64 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Projects and Designs
Projects

Projects
The topics in the following sections explain how to open, create, edit and delete projects from
within the application.
Project Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Opening a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Creating a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Deleting a Project. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Importing a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Exporting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Closing a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Project Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Capital Compressed Format for Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Exporting a Project in Capital Compressed Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Importing a Project in Capital Compressed Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Project Browser
The Project Browser is located on the upper left side of the application window.
It contains the following:

• Close Project ( ) button

Closes the currently viewed project.

• Project Dropdown List
Lists the currently open projects so that you can select the one that you want to view.
• Project Browser Tree
Lists the designs and diagrams that have been created for the project. To expand a
section of the browser tree, click . To collapse a section of the browser tree, click .

• Enter Filter String ( ) / Clear Filter String ( )

In the field next to the Enter Filter String icon ( ), enter a series of characters. A filter
is applied to the Project Browser Tree so that only designs with names containing that
series of characters are listed.
Click the Clear Filter String icon ( ) to clear the filter and view all designs in the
project.
• Design Filter ( )

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 65

February 2016
Projects and Designs
Opening a Project

Click the dropdown list to filter the designs displayed in the Project Browser Tree
window to those of a particular type, all designs in the project or all designs in the
currently active build list.
Related Topics
Opening a Project
Creating a Project
Deleting a Project
Importing a Project
Exporting a Project
Closing a Project
Project Preferences

Opening a Project
This topic explains how to open an existing project.
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Open.
The Open Project Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Click the project that you want to open and click OK.
Results
The project opens and is added to the Project Browser.
Related Topics
Creating a Project
Deleting a Project
Importing a Project
Exporting a Project
Closing a Project
Project Preferences

Creating a Project
This topic details how to create a project from within the application.

66 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Projects and Designs
Deleting a Project

Once a project has been created, all project-level data can be managed within Capital Project.
Refer to the Capital Project User Guide for more information.

Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter New Project. The New Project Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter a Name for the project.
3. Click OK.
Results
The project is created and added to the Project Browser.
Related Topics
Opening a Project
Deleting a Project
Importing a Project
Exporting a Project
Closing a Project
Project Preferences

Deleting a Project
This topic details how to delete a project from the database.
Caution
The deletion of a project can only be undone from a database backup.

Procedure
1. Open the project you want to delete.
2. Press Space Bar and enter Delete Project.
3. A message is displayed asking you to confirm the deletion. Click Yes to proceed and
delete the project.
Results
The project is removed from the database.
Related Topics
Opening a Project
Creating a Project

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 67

February 2016
Projects and Designs
Importing a Project

Importing a Project
Exporting a Project
Closing a Project
Project Preferences

Importing a Project
This topic details how to import a project (from a Project XML file) that has been exported from
another instance of Capital.
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Import Project. A generic file browser is displayed.
2. Navigate to the Project XML (*.xml) file that you want to import.
3. Click Import Project. A progress bar monitors the status of the import and disappears
once complete.

Note
An imported project is not opened by default and must be opened manually.

Related Topics
Opening a Project
Creating a Project
Deleting a Project
Exporting a Project
Closing a Project
Project Preferences

Exporting a Project
Projects may be exported from, and imported into, the Capital Design databases (as XML files).
The use of XML files as the data-transfer medium enables the exchange of project data between
other data systems and also increases the portability of Capital project data. The data stored in
XML files is readily manipulated manually.
An exported project's XML file contains all of the information (options, object names, designs,
diagrams etc.) that are contained in its original database record.

68 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Projects and Designs
Exporting a Project

Note
Even if you do not have Capital Analysis installed, you must have the Analysis permission
assigned to your user account in Capital User if you want to import and export projects that
have Analysis project models attached to them.

Procedure
1. If you want to export the currently open project, press Space Bar and enter Export
Current Project, or right-click on the project and select Export.
If you want to export a project that is not open, press Space Bar and enter Select Project
to Export; the Select Project dialog box is displayed. Select the project to export and
click OK.
The Export Project dialog box is displayed.
2. Specify the folder location and file name for the project's exported XML file.
3. Choose the following as required:
• As Copy
Select this if you want the project to be exported with anonymous unique identifiers
(UIDs). This option replaces all of the exported project's database UIDs (within the
exported XML file) with anonymous UIDs so that the project can be imported back
into Capital in the future. A project exported with anonymous UIDs are
automatically assigned new UIDs when it is imported back into Capital.

Note
When a project is exported from Capital, its original record remains in the
database with its original UIDs. Therefore, if the project is exported without
anonymous UIDs, it cannot be imported back into Capital unless its UIDs have been
changed, as its original UIDs are already present in the original project in the
database and are not allowed to be overwritten.

4. Click Export Project; the selected project is exported from the database.
Related Topics
Opening a Project
Creating a Project
Deleting a Project
Importing a Project
Closing a Project
Project Preferences

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 69

February 2016
Projects and Designs
Closing a Project

Closing a Project
This topic explains how to close a project in the application.
Procedure
1. Click the project in the Project Browser and either:
• Press Space Bar and enter Close Project
• Right-click on the project and select Close Project
2. A warning prompts you to save any modified designs in the project. Click Yes to save
them and close the project. Click No to discard any changes you have made and close
the project.
Related Topics
Opening a Project
Creating a Project
Deleting a Project
Importing a Project
Exporting a Project
Project Preferences

Project Preferences
Project preferences are default settings that you specify for the designs and diagrams in a
project.
You specify them in the Project Preferences Dialog Box, accessed in the design applications by
pressing Space Bar and entering Project Preferences.

You can also edit them in Capital Project by opening a project, expanding the Project Browser
Tree for that project and double-clicking the Preferences node.

Note
Some preferences work alongside Capital styling to control the appearance of designs. See
the Capital Diagram Styling User Guide for more information about all aspects of Capital
styling.

If a preference (for example, bundle thickness) is specified for an object type, whenever a new
instance of that object type is inserted into a design, it will automatically assume this pre-set
preference setting.

All new and existing designs within a project automatically inherit their project's preferences.

70 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Projects and Designs
Capital Compressed Format for Projects

Note
Preferences can also be specified at the system level.

Related Topics
Project Preferences Dialog Box

Capital Compressed Format for Projects

You can export and import projects in a Capital Compressed Format. This extends Capital’s
project transfer capabilities for extremely large projects by reducing the file size required for the
data and accelerating the export and import actions.
This format provides direct export and import of data without using Capital’s established XML
data formats.

When you import a project in Capital Compressed Format, the system does not perform design
validation checks automatically. However, it runs those checks when you open an imported
design in any Capital application.

In addition, you can use Capital compressed format to export a corrupted project from the
database. The project data is exported in a .ccf file that can be sent directly to Mentor Graphics
support or to your own in-house support, who should forward it to Mentor Graphics support.

For instructions about exporting a project as a raw data dump, see “Exporting a Project in
Capital Compressed Format” on page 71.

Related Topics
Exporting a Project in Capital Compressed Format
Importing a Project in Capital Compressed Format

Exporting a Project in Capital Compressed Format

You can export a project from the database in Capital Compressed Format.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 71

February 2016
Projects and Designs
Importing a Project in Capital Compressed Format

Procedure
Choose an action:

If you want to... Do the following:

Export the currently 1. Press Space Bar and enter Export Current Project; the
open project Export Project dialog box is displayed.
2. In the Files of Type field, select Capital Compressed
Format files (*.ccf).
3. Specify a location and name for the exported file.
4. Click the Export Project button; a progress bar displays
and disappears when the export is complete.
Export a project that is 1. Press Space Bar and enter Select Project to Export; the
not open Select Project dialog box is displayed.
2. Select the project to export and click OK; the Export
Project dialog box is displayed.
3. In the Files of Type field, select Capital Compressed
Format files (*.ccf).
4. Specify a location and name for the exported file.
5. Click the Export Project button; a progress bar displays
and disappears when the export is complete.

Results
The system saves the .ccf file at the specified location.

Importing a Project in Capital Compressed Format

You can import a project that was exported as a raw data dump.
Prerequisites
• You must import any symbols required by the project into Capital Symbol.
• You must import library components required by the project into Capital Library.
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Import; the Import dialog box is displayed.
2. Browse to the project's r .ccf file that you want to import.
3. Click the Import button.

72 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Projects and Designs
Importing a Project in Capital Compressed Format

Results
• If a project with the same name does not exist in the database already, the specified
project is imported into the database and now appears in the Project Browser Tree.
Related Topics
Capital Compressed Format for Projects
Exporting a Project in Capital Compressed Format

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 73

February 2016
Projects and Designs
Designs

Designs
The following topics explain how to import designs, edit design properties and attributes and
how to compare the content of designs.
Importing Designs into a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Migrating a Design from Capital Harness Classic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Editing the Information for a Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Adding a Property to a Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Editing a Property for a Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Deleting a Property for a Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Comparing Objects and Their Properties in Design Revisions or Build Lists. . . . . . . . 81
Running Design Rule Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Running Design Rule Checks in Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Design Rule Checks Output Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Design Rule Check Descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Releasing Designs with Enforced Design Rule Checks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Importing Designs into a Project

This topic details how to import one or more designs in XML format from outside of your
database into a project.
You can do this either by specifying only the basic details for the imported designs using the
Import Designs to Project Dialog Box or using the Import Designs to Project Wizard Dialog
Box to specify advanced details.

Prerequisites
• Design XML file is available for import
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Import >Designs; the Import dialog is displayed.
2. Locate and select the XML files containing the designs. Click Import; the Import
Designs to Project Dialog Box is displayed with the designs listed.
3. Select the Target Project into which you are importing the designs.
4. If you want to specify advanced details for the designs that will be created in the target
project, click the Advanced button; the Import Designs to Project Wizard Dialog Box is
displayed. Skip to step 6.

74 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Projects and Designs
Importing Designs into a Project

If you want to specify only basic details for the designs that will be created in the target
project, edit the following as required:
• Name
• Short Description
• Description
• Revision
• Release Level
• Abstraction
• Effectivity - Displayed only if Effectivity is enabled in the target project.
• Overwrite
• Copy As Revision
• Copy Effectivity - Displayed only if Effectivity is enabled in the target project.
5. Click OK and skip to step 6
6. On the Designs tab, map the design abstractions from the source designs (designs being
imported) to the design abstractions in the target project.
7. On the Design Details tab, specify the basic details for the designs that will be created in
the target project:
• Name
• Part Number (if importing a Capital HarnessXC design)
• Revision
• Short Description
• Description
• Release Level
• Design
• Copy Associated Logic Designs (if importing a Capital Integrator design)
• Copy Generated Wiring (if importing a Capital Integrator design)
• Overwrite Revision
• Copy As Revision

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 75

February 2016
Projects and Designs
Migrating a Design from Capital Harness Classic

8. If the imported designs contain any shared conductors, click the Shared Conductors
tab and specify the following for them:
• Project Shared Conductor
• Copy Shared Conductor
9. If the imported designs contain any shared pin lists, set the defaults for automatic shared
pin association by clicking the Shared Pin Association Defaults tab and specifying:
• Automatic Association Configuration Mode
• Automatically Associate
10. If you want to manually associate source shared pin lists with shared pin lists in the
target project, click the Shared Pin Lists tab and specify the following settings:
• Associate Pin Lists
• Associate Pins
• Pin Reservations
11. On the Summary tab, check that the listed import settings are correct. You can return to
any of the tabs to edit settings.
12. Click Back to return to the Import Designs to Project dialog box.
13. Click OK.
Results
The imported design(s) are added under the Designs node for that project.
Related Topics
Import Designs to Project Dialog Box
Import Designs to Project Wizard Dialog Box

Migrating a Design from Capital Harness Classic

You can migrate, (import / transfer), designs from Progress or Oracle installations of Capital
Harness Classic into Oracle or Postgres installations of Capital, retaining all design content and
branch layout details.
Full details can be found in the Migration of Designs from Capital Harness Classic topic in the
Capital HarnessXC User Guide.

76 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Projects and Designs
Editing the Information for a Design

Editing the Information for a Design

If the necessary permissions have been set for your user account in Capital User, you can edit
the information (such as design name, revision, abstraction) for a design in the Capital Design
Tools.
If you use advanced naming functionality, design properties may be included in the naming
compositions that are set up in Capital Project. This means that the values that you specify for
design properties in this dialog may influence the names that are generated. See the Capital
Project help system for more information about setting up naming compositions and see
“Advanced Naming Functionality” on page 266 for more information about applying advanced
naming to objects in Capital Logic.

Procedure
1. Right-click on the name of the design in the Project Browser Window on the upper left
of the application window and select Edit from the pop-up menu that is displayed.
2. The Edit Design dialog is displayed. You can edit the following properties for the
design:
• Name - the name of the design. If valid names for the object type have been created
in Capital Project, you can select a name by clicking the ellipsis button (...) to
display the Name Selection dialog.

Note
You can click the Properties button to display the Edit Design Properties Dialog
Box that allows you to add or delete properties for the design.

• Part Number (Capital HarnessXC design only) - a unique part number for the
design.
• Revision - the revision for the design.
• Short Description - the short description for the design.
• Description - the long description for the design.
• Release Level - the release level for the design. Select the release level from the
drop-down list. The release levels that you can assign to the design depend on the
permissions that have been set for your user account in Capital User. See the Capital
User help system for more information about setting permissions for a user account.
If the release level of a design is changed and saved in Capital HarnessXC, the
release level will be automatically be transferred when the design is opened in
Capital Harness Classic.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 77

February 2016
Projects and Designs
Editing the Information for a Design

The release levels will be mapped between Capital Harness Classic and Capital
HarnessXC as follows:

Table 2-1. Release Level Mapping

Capital Harness Classic HarnessXC
Draft Draft
Pending Checking
Released Released
Obsolete Obsolete

• Abstraction - the abstraction level for the design.

• Domain - the domain for the design. See the Capital Project help system for more
information about domains.
• Applicable Options - the options that can be assigned to the design. Click the
ellipsis (...) button by the Applicable Options field to display the Applicable
Options dialog.
• Applicable Modules
Functional Module Codes that are available to objects in the design, can be assigned,
amended or removed by clicking the ellipsis button, (...), next to the Applicable
Modules field. This will display the Applicable Modules dialog where you can
select the required Functional Module code(s).

Note
The Applicable Modules field will only display if the project has been
configured to use module codes.

• Applicable FM Codes - (Capital ModularXC only) - displays the Functional

Module codes that have been assigned to this design. Click the ellipsis (...) button to
the right of the field to launch the Applicable Functional Module Codes dialog box,
where you can edit the selection.
• Applicable Variant FM Codes
(This field is only available for Capital ModularXC)
Specify any Applicable Variant FM codes to be assigned to the design by clicking
the ellipsis button, (...), next to the field. This displays the Applicable Variant FM
Codes Dialog Box where you can select the required Variant Functional Module
code(s). Optional.

78 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Projects and Designs
Editing the Information for a Design

These codes are used to control bundle length and object position variance. See
Variant Length Bundles and Component Positions. Optional.
• Applicable PM Codes - (Capital ModularXC only) - displays the Production
Module codes that have been assigned to this design. Click the ellipsis (...) button to
the right of the field to launch the Applicable Production Module Codes Dialog,
where you can edit the selection.
• Applicable Variant PM Codes
(This field is only available for Capital ModularXC)
Specify any Applicable Variant PM codes to be assigned to the design by clicking
the ellipsis button, (...), next to the field. This displays the Applicable Variant PM
Codes Dialog Box where you can select the required Variant Functional Module
code(s). Optional.
These codes are used to control bundle length and object position variance. See
Variant Length Bundles and Component Positions. Optional.
• Option - the option or option expression that you want to apply to the whole design.
You must enter this in the Option Expression field by clicking the ellipsis (...)
button to display the Edit Option Expression dialog.
• Effectivity - if using effectivity, click the ellipsis (...) button to the right of the field
to launch the Edit Effectivity Dialog Box, from where you can specify the effectivity
ranges that apply to the design. See Managing Effectivity in the Capital Project
User Guide for an overview of using effectivity.
• Harness Group - (displayed for Capital HarnessXC and Capital ModularXC
designs only), Use of Harness Groups, allows auto-mapping of valid objects when
Synchronizing from a Capital Logic Build List. Harness Group names can be
manually added or removed here. To select multiple Harness Groups, click the
ellipsis (...) button to the right of the field to launch the Name Selectiondialog box,
from where you can select predefined names.
• Select Derivatives, (displayed for Capital HarnessXC and Capital ModularXC
designs with derivatives only) - If the Release Level of the Composite design has
been changed, click the ellipsis button to open the Change Release Level of Child
Designs dialog, to select, or deselect, any derivative designs to which the Release
Level change should also be applied.
• Select Functional Modules, (displayed for Capital ModularXC designs only) If the
Release Level of the Parent design has been changed, click the ellipsis button to
open the Change Release Level of Child Designs dialog, to select, or deselect, any
child designs to which the Release Level change should also be applied.
• Sealing Requirements (displayed for Capital HarnessXC designs only) - Select the
sealing options for specific component types on the design.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 79

February 2016
Projects and Designs
Adding a Property to a Design

• Seal Harness (displayed for Capital HarnessXC designs only) - check this box if
you want to apply all of the below seal type options to the connectors and splices
when they are inserted into the design. Optional.
• Seal Connectors (displayed for Capital HarnessXC designs only) - check this box if
you want all of the connectors inserted into the design to be sealed by default.
Optional.
• Plug Connectors (displayed for Capital HarnessXC designs only) - check this box if
you want all of the connectors inserted into the design to be plugged by default.
Optional.
• Insulate Splices (displayed for Capital HarnessXC designs only) - check this box if
you want all of the splices inserted into the design to be insulated by default.
Optional.
• Modify Harness Details - click this button to launch the Edit Harness Detailsdialog
box, from where you can enter additional manufacturing information for both
internal and customer consumption.
3. Click the OK button to confirm the changes and to exit the dialog.

Note
If you move a design to release level with Frozen Shared Objects behavior, all
shared objects in a design must be frozen. If any shared objects are not frozen, the
Freeze/Unfreeze Shared Objects dialog is displayed automatically when you click the
OK button so that you can freeze them. See the Release Level topic in the Capital
Project User Guide for more information on Release Level behaviors.

Adding a Property to a Design

This topic explains how to add a property to a design when creating a new design or editing the
information for a design.
Procedure
1. On the Edit Design dialog or dialog for creating a design, click Properties to display
the Edit Design Properties Dialog Box.
2. Click New to display the New Property Dialog Box. Enter a name for the property and
click OK.
The property is added to the Edit Design Properties Dialog Box.
3. Specify the Value and Type for the property and click OK.

80 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Projects and Designs
Editing a Property for a Design

Editing a Property for a Design

This topic explains how to edit a property value for a design when editing the information for a
design.
Procedure
1. On the Edit Design dialog, click Properties to display the Edit Design Properties
Dialog Box.
2. Edit the Value and click OK.

Deleting a Property for a Design

This topic explains how to delete a property for a design when editing the information for a
design.
Procedure
1. On the Edit Design dialog, click Properties to display the Edit Design Properties
Dialog Box.
2. Click the property and click Delete.
Results
The property is deleted.

Comparing Objects and Their Properties in Design

Revisions or Build Lists
This topic explains how to compare a revision of a design with any revision of any design in a
project. The comparison looks at what objects appear on the design revisions and, optionally, at
what properties and attributes are on those objects. The results can be exported and saved as an
HTML file.
When you compare two build lists, design revisions are compared individually by mapping each
design revision from the first build list to one in the second build list based on Name.

Procedure
1. In a design application (such as Capital Logic or Capital HarnessXC):
Open the diagram or plane for one of the design revisions that you want to compare,
press Space Bar and enter Compare.
In Capital Project:
In the Project Browser Tree, right-click one of the design revisions that you want to
compare and select Compare.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 81

February 2016
Projects and Designs
Running Design Rule Checks

The Design Revision - Build List Selection Dialog Box is displayed.

2. Select the project that contains the build lists or design that you want to compare from
the Projects window.
3. Either:
• Select the two build lists that you want to compare from the Build Lists window.
• Select the other design revision that you want to compare from the Design Revisions
window.
4. Click OK.
The Compare Designs Dialog Box is displayed.
5. Configure the Comparison Type, Traverse and Compare parameters that you want to
perform.
6. Click Compare.
Results
• The Differences window lists the results of the design comparison in a tree. The tree
displays each design revision and the objects being compared in each design. If an
object appears on a design revision or build list, the field in the column for that design
revision or build list is selected.
• If you are comparing properties and attributes on objects, these are listed under the
appropriate objects. If the property or attribute is set for the object in a design revision or
build list, the field in the column for that design revision or build list is selected.

Note
You can export and save the comparison results in an HTML file by clicking
Export.

Running Design Rule Checks

This topic explains how to run design rule checks to identify errors in designs.
You can check a single design or, in the case of Capital Logic, all designs in a build list.

Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter DRCs.
The Design Rule Checks Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Select the design or build list that you want to check.
3. Select the checks that you want to run in the Design Rule Checks browser and click OK.

82 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Projects and Designs
Running Design Rule Checks in Background

4. Any issues that the checks identify are displayed in the Design Rule Checks Output
Window.
Related Topics
Design Rule Check Descriptions

Running Design Rule Checks in Background

This topic explains how to run design rule checks in the background.
When doing this, you cannot select checks at the time of running them. The checks that are run
are controlled by Project Preferences. See “Design Rule Check Descriptions” on page 84.

Procedure
Click the Design Rule Checks Toggle on the Status Bar at the bottom of the application:

Results
• The system runs the design rule checks that have been specified to run in background
mode in Project Preferences.
• The results of the design rule checks are listed on the Check tab of the Design Rule
Checks Output Window.
• The Design Rule Checks Toggle changes to show a square (stop icon) and also indicates
whether the checks have currently found failures or not:

• The checks run whenever changes are made to the design to which the currently active
diagram belongs; the Check tab of the Design Rule Checks Output Window and Design
Rule Checks Toggle update dynamically to reflect the latest results.

Design Rule Checks Output Window

The output window is displayed at the bottom of the application and displays various tabs
depending on the actions performed in a design. When your run design rule checks, the Check
tab displays the results in a tabular form.
You can print the contents of the table as a comma separated variable (CSV) file by clicking
at the top right of the tab and selecting Save to CSV. A dialog is displayed where you specify
the file name and where you want to save it.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 83

February 2016
Projects and Designs
Design Rule Check Descriptions

The table includes columns in which you can filter the contents by selecting an item from the
dropdown list at the top. You can sort the contents of a column by clicking the column header.
The columns are:

• Severity
Whether the result is an error ( ), a warning ( ) or an information message ( ).

• Message
Detailed message about what the check has identified. You can click an object in the
message to jump to that object in the diagram window.
• Category
The category of design rule check to which the particular design rule check belongs (for
example, Connectivity, Naming, and so on).
• Check
The specific design rule check that has identified something in the design.
• Design/Build List
The design or build list in which the check has identified something/
• Object
The specific object for which the check has identified something.

Design Rule Check Descriptions

You can use Design Rule Checks to check for specific errors in designs.
If you are using Web Services with your Capital applications, design and send an automatic
notification to the Web Services component. When you release a design this way, it is
automatically checked for design errors using the Design Rule Checks functionality.

Note
The design rule check names were changed at v2012.1. For a list of the old names with their
new ones, click communities.mentor.com/mgcx/docs/DOC-3220 to go to a document in the
Electrical System Design and Harness Engineering Community.

The following sections list the design rule checks that are available for each of the applications:

• Design Rule Checks Applicable to Capital Integrator Designs

• Design Rule Checks Applicable to Capital Logic Designs
• Design Rule Checks Applicable to Capital HarnessXC and Capital ModularXC Designs

84 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Projects and Designs
Design Rule Check Descriptions

• Design Rule Checks Applicable to Capital Harness MPM and Capital Harness TVM
Designs
• Design Rule Checks Applicable to Capital Topology Designs
• Design Rule Check Descriptions for Platform Designs in the Platform Design in Capital
Systems User Guide
• Design Rule Check Descriptions in the Function Design Capital Systems Capture User
Guide

Design Rule Checks Applicable to Capital Integrator Designs

Table 2-2. Design Rule Checks for Capital Integrator

Description
Appearance
No translation for text Identifies:
• where a translatable term has been used but no
translation exists for the active language so the quick
code is displayed.
• where a translatable term has been entered as free text
and has no link to the language database.
See “Diagram Language Translation” on page 41.
Text cannot be shown or Identifies diagram text that cannot be rendered in the font
printed in chosen font applied to it. For example, Chinese text must have a font that
supports UNICODE so this check identifies Chinese text
entered in a non-UNICODE font.
Connectivity
Empty physical multicore Identifies multicores that do not contain any wires (all
harness levels checked).
Incomplete wiring in vehicle Identifies signals that are un-routed or unmapped in existing
configuration vehicle configurations. This check has been largely replaced
by the route status functionality available in the Design
Assistant.
Inline cavity signal mismatch Identifies mismatched and unmated signals in inline pairs. If
connector refinement has been used, this check identifies
whether the signals mapped to mated pins on the specialized
connectors are different.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 85

February 2016
Projects and Designs
Design Rule Check Descriptions

Table 2-2. Design Rule Checks for Capital Integrator (cont.)

Description
Signal wire mismatch at cavity Identifies virtual connector cavities that have a wire from the
wrong signal connected. If a wire terminates at a cavity from
a signal that is not mapped to the cavity, this is an error. The
signal of the wire must share a common ancestor with at
least one of the signals mapped to the cavity.
Unconnected wire Identifies wires that are unconnected at one or both ends.
Also reports the signal name carried by the wire.
Unterminated bundle Identifies bundles that are unconnected at one or both ends.
Wiring with no harness level Identifies wires and splices that have no harness level
assigned.
Empty bundle Identifies bundles that do not contain wires (all harness
levels checked).
Multiple signals mapped to Identifies slot connector or interface connector cavities to
cavity which incompatible signals are mapped (that is, they do not
share a common ancestor or parent signal).
Redundant wires Identifies wires which connect between two pins which are
also connected together by another wire or wires.
Two-wire splice Inefficient splice situations where a splice connects just two
wires.
Consistency
Constraint that breaks rule Identifies constraints which have been added to an object to
hierarchy which the constraint does not have any affect. For example,
a placement constraint added to a bundle.
Device pin not connected to a Performs the same checks as the “Mismatched device
device connector footprint” design rule check.
Inconsistent module code Identifies wires with a module code which is different from
other wires with the same option expression in the same
harness.
Inconsistent option-based Identifies wires whose attributes do not match the option-
variance specific values defined for their source net as displayed on
the Variance tab of the Edit Properties facilities for
signals.

86 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Projects and Designs
Design Rule Check Descriptions

Table 2-2. Design Rule Checks for Capital Integrator (cont.)

Description
Inconsistent terminal bar Validates that wires, connected together by slot-internal
splices created by wiring synthesis, correspond to the wires
connected together by terminal bar data. Terminal bar data
includes terminal block internal connectivity, jumpers
between terminal bar pins and the conductive bar itself.
Verifies that changes to the signal map, changes to
placement data or changes to wiring in Capital Integrator,
have not invalidated the terminal bar definition and that the
terminal bar definition itself, corresponds to the slot's model
of internal connectivity.
Also verifies that the connectivity of components embedded
in the terminal blocks, corresponds to the slot-internal
connectivity of the corresponding functional devices placed
in the slot.
Mismatched physical and Identifies physical multicores that are of a different type to
logical multicore that of their corresponding functional multicore.
Identifies functional multicores that do not have a
corresponding physical multicore (due to conductor/shield
mismatches)
Mismatched wire option Identifies wires whose option expression is not active on one
expression and harness level or more of the harness levels to which it is assigned. For
example, a wire with option expression ABS should not
appear on a harness level which does not support the ABS
feature.
Refined connector cavity If a connector has been refined, all the cavities that carry
mismatch wiring should be referenced by the refinement. This check
identifies situations where a cavity that is not referenced by
a refinement carries wiring that would be relevant to the
refinement.
Comment symbol requires Any comment symbol that has changed since it was assigned
update to a library part.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 87

February 2016
Projects and Designs
Design Rule Check Descriptions

Table 2-2. Design Rule Checks for Capital Integrator (cont.)

Description
Inconsistent harness level This check does the following:
• If vehicle models are defined, identifies levels that are
not associated with any vehicle model.
• If vehicle models are defined, identifies levels which do
not support options defined as STD in an associated
vehicle model.
• If vehicle models are defined, identifies levels which
support an option which is unavailable in an associated
vehicle model.
• Identifies levels that support exclusive options.
• Identifies levels which have identical supported vehicle
models and options.
Obsolete option Identifies any obsolete options used on design objects.
Design Assistant
Inconsistent harness option Identifies options that are either missing from a harness and
needed by synthesis to route a signal, or are present on a
harness and are no longer required or are missing from the
project.
Empty slot Identifies slots with no placed devices.
Placement conflict If slots have both Option place by Attribute/Property and
Place by Attribute/Property constraints that match a
device, only Option place by Attribute/Property
constraints influence the placement of ground devices in
slots. This check reports any related conflicts. For example:
Slot1 and Slot2 both contain conflicting placement
constraints for GND1. This will result in the placement
of GND1 being placed in Slot1.
Unplaced device Identifies unplaced devices in the current plane.
Integrator rules
Assign connector rule violation Identifies mappings between device connectors and virtual
connectors that violate any Assign Connector by
Attribute/Property constraints (rules).
Ground placement constraint Identifies combined ground devices and multiple
violation terminations of ground signals that violate constraints
applied to ground slots.
Map same cavity by signal rule Identifies any signals and pins that violate any Map to Same
violation Cavity by Signal Attribute/Property constraint (rules).

88 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Projects and Designs
Design Rule Check Descriptions

Table 2-2. Design Rule Checks for Capital Integrator (cont.)

Description
Map signal to inline cavity rule Identifies wires that violate any Map To Inline Cavity by
violation Signal Attribute/Property constraint (rules). Also reports
the signal, cavity and connector on which the violation
exists.
Minimum splice separation rule Identifies splices that violate any applicable minimum
violation separation constraints (rules). Also reports the bundle and
harness on which the violation exists.
Missing custom constraint Identifies any custom constraints that have been defined for
an object, but are no longer loaded in Capital Integrator
Multicore that breaks Identifies multicores that violate any applicable multicore
specification rule specification constraints (rules). Also reports the signal and
harness on which the violation exists.
and
Any conflicting multicore specification constraints (rules)
that apply to the design.
Multiterm that breaks number Identifies synthesized (CWS) multiple wire terminations
of wires rule that contain more wires than the maximum specified (for a
particular signal) in a constraint (rule).
Network wiring that breaks Identifies network wiring that does not conform to the limits
specified limit specified using a Network Specification constraint. The
wiring does not conform if:
• Not all stubs are connected to the main line using splices.
• The maximum length between the terminated devices is
greater than the length specified in the constraint.
• The minimum and maximum stub lengths do not
conform to the values specified in the constraint.
• The minimum distance between stubs does not conform
to the distance specified in the constraint.
Object that breaks attribute/ Identifies any objects that violate any Set Integrator
property rule Attribute/Property on Object constraints. These
constraints define, for specific objects, which value an
attribute/property should have when another attribute/
property has another specific value.
Signal that breaks backshell Identifies backshell terminations where a cavity should be
usage rule used according to assigned rules and constraints.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 89

February 2016
Projects and Designs
Design Rule Check Descriptions

Table 2-2. Design Rule Checks for Capital Integrator (cont.)

Description
Signal that breaks pigtail usage Identifies signals that connect using a pigtail where no
rule pigtail should be used according to assigned rules and
constraints.
Signals that connect without a pigtail where a pigtail should
be used according to assigned rules and constraints.
Slot that breaks placement rule Identifies devices that violate any applicable slot placement
constraints (rules).
and
Regular devices that have been placed into ground slots.
Also reports the slot in which the violation exists.
Splice that breaks number of Identifies splices that violate any applicable maximum
wires rule number of wires per splice constraints (rules). Also reports
the bundle and harness on which the violation exists.
Splice that breaks specification Identifies splices that violate any applicable splice
rule specification constraints (rules). Also reports the signal and
harness on which the violation exists.
and
Any conflicting splice specification constraints (rules) that
apply to the design.
Wire that breaks length change Identifies wires with Length Change Type or Length
rule Change Value attribute values that violate any Length
Change for Jumper or Length Change for Wire
constraints. Wire are considered to be violating the
constraints if:
• they have values for the Change Length attributes that
vary from the matching constraint values
• the wire length varies from the length calculated using
the matching constraint
• the wire length calculation using the constraint produces
a negative value
Wire that breaks routing rule Identifies wires that violate any applicable signal routing
constraints (rules). Also reports the signal, bundle and
harness on which the violation exists.

90 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Projects and Designs
Design Rule Check Descriptions

Table 2-2. Design Rule Checks for Capital Integrator (cont.)

Description
Wire that breaks specification Identifies wires that violate any applicable wire specification
rule constraints (rules). Also reports the signal and harness on
which the violation exists.
and
Any conflicting wire specification constraints (rules) that
apply to the design.
and
Conflicts in the option-specific values as displayed on the
Variance tab of the Edit Properties facilities for signals.
Wire that breaks terminal Identifies wires that violate any applicable terminal
specification rule specification constraints (rules) e.g. StartTerminalSpec and
EndTerminalSpec. Also reports the signal and harness on
which the violation exists.
Ground device that breaks Identifies issues with the placement of ground devices in
placement rule slots.
For each placed ground device, this determines whether it
should be uniquely placed in a single slot, variant place or
placed according to optimized ground placement. In each
case, this check reports warnings as follows:
• If the ground device has one or more matching variant
placement constraints, the check reports if the ground is
not placed in these slots, or is not placed with the
appropriate variant option expression, or is placed in
additional slots.
• If the ground device has a single matching slot, the check
reports if the ground is not placed in this slot, or is
variantly placed in this slot, or is placed in additional
slots.
• If the ground device has multiple matching slots (that is,
it needs to be optimally placed), the check determines
whether the ground device is placed once and only once
for every placement context that has at least one active
connected device. The placement context will be based
on the options on the connected devices and on the
ground slots only.
Library consistency
Inline mate part mismatch Identifies mated inline pair halves that have library parts that
are not valid mates. If connector refinement has been used,
this check examines the mated specialized connectors.
Latest library part status check Identifies any library part that is not the latest revision.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 91

February 2016
Projects and Designs
Design Rule Check Descriptions

Table 2-2. Design Rule Checks for Capital Integrator (cont.)

Description
Library connector cavity count Identifies virtual/device/inline/refined (specialized)
mismatch connectors having a cavity count that differs to that of their
corresponding library part.
Library multicore mismatch Identifies multicores with mismatches between the number
of conductors in their library association and that specified
on the design.
Mismatched device footprint Identifies mismatches and conflicts in device connector or
harness footprint pin mappings once they have been placed
into slots.
Reference to non-existent Identifies devices, wires, connectors, device connectors,
library object refined (specialized) connectors, multicores, shields, splices
that possess a library reference or part number property, but
where a corresponding library object does not exist.
Status of library part is not Identifies any library part used in a design or build list that
current has a status other than that of Current (i.e. that have an
Obsolete or New status).
Wire fits cavity mismatch At every harness level, this check examines the cavities of
all connectors with a library part, determines the set of wires
that are connected to each cavity and identifies the
following:
• Single wires not fitting a cavity
• Sets of wires not fitting a cavity
• When a cavity and its single connected wire are not
accepted by a terminal
• When a cavity and its set of connected wires are not
accepted by a terminal
If connector refinement has been used, this check examines
the specialized connectors.
Where a wire terminates at multiple cavities (variance), all
cavities are checked.
Include-on-BOM status Identifies a connector or conductor whose component
changed library definition has changed so that the ‘On BOM’ status
is now different.
Library part required for Identifies inline and virtual connectors that have no library
connector part assigned.
Library part required for slot Identifies slots containing devices that have no library part
assigned.

92 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Projects and Designs
Design Rule Check Descriptions

Table 2-2. Design Rule Checks for Capital Integrator (cont.)

Description
No conductor library part Identifies conductors for which the combination of
available specification attribute values (specified on the General tab
of the Edit Properties facility) does not exist in any library
wire size definition.
Out of scope component Identifies components whose scope is not within the scope
of the project or design.
Naming
Duplicate names in the design Identifies objects having a name that is identical to that of
another object of the same kind on the same design or a
shared object of the same kind but having different option
expressions.
If connector refinement has been used, this check examines
both the specialized connectors and generalized connectors.
If a generalized connector has the same name as one of its
specialized connectors, this will not be identified as an issue.
Duplicate names in a harness Identifies object names that are not unique on a harness.
This check compares objects against those of the same
object type only.
If connector refinement has been used, this check examines
both the specialized connectors and generalized connectors.
If a generalized connector has the same name as one of its
specialized connectors, this will not be identified as an issue.

Design Rule Checks Applicable to Capital Logic Designs

Table 2-3. Design Rule Checks for Capital Logic

Check Name Description
Build List Checks
Consistency
Inconsistent shared pin connections Identifies inconsistencies in the connection of shared
across designs. pins where:
• the same pin in multiple designs is mated to different
connectors
• the same pin has no mate in one design but does
have a mate in another design
This check also considers ring terminals.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 93

February 2016
Projects and Designs
Design Rule Check Descriptions

Table 2-3. Design Rule Checks for Capital Logic (cont.)

Check Name Description
Inconsistent mating of connectors Identifies unassociated pins and invalid associations by
on blocks across designs. checking each block on a design for un-mated
receptacle pins, or unconnected device pins. A warning
is issued along with a link to the highlighted block.
Naming
Duplicate names across designs Identifies objects (devices, connectors, wires, nets,
Note: This check is only available if splices, multicores, and so on.) having a name that is
a build list has been defined in the identical to that of an object of the same kind on another
project. design in the build list but having different option
expressions. The default status for this check is true, and
its default severity setting is error. The check works in
conjunction with the Uniqueness project preference.
Invalid name for shared object Identifies, within the selected build list, shared objects
Note: This check is only available if with names that do not appear in the list of valid names
a build list has been defined in the for that project's shared object type.
project.
Logic Design Checks
Appearance
Incorrect number of indicators on a Identifies multicores in the design that either have no
multicore indicators on the diagram or not enough indicators on
the diagram.
No translation for text Identifies:
• where a translatable term has been used but no
translation exists for the active language so the quick
code is displayed.
• where a translatable term has been entered as free
text and has no link to the language database.
See “Diagram Language Translation” on page 41.
Overlapped device pins not Identifies device pins on the diagram that overlap but
connected are not connected. To fix this, right-click on a pin or
pinlist and select Connect > by wire, by net or by pin.
Note: This DRC is not applicable for connector pins.
Overlapping conductors Identifies conductors in which any portion of their
segment overlaps another conductor segment.
Pin not on the grid Identifies electrical pins on the diagram that are not
positioned on grid points.

94 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Projects and Designs
Design Rule Check Descriptions

Table 2-3. Design Rule Checks for Capital Logic (cont.)

Check Name Description
Text cannot be shown or printed in Identifies diagram text that cannot be rendered in the
chosen font font applied to it. For example, Chinese text must have a
font that supports UNICODE so this check identifies
Chinese text entered in a non-UNICODE font.
Connectivity
Interconnect not terminating at a pin Identifies interconnects that are not terminated at one or
more ends.
Net not terminating at a pin Identifies net conductors that are not terminated at one
or more ends.
Shield termination not terminating Identifies shields that are not terminated at one or both
at a pin ends.
Unconnected connector Identifies plug connectors or receptacle connectors that
are not connected to any conductors on the design.
Unconnected device Identifies parameterized devices (with or without pins),
library devices or symbol devices that are not connected
to any conductors on the design.
Unconnected splice Identifies splices that are not connected to any
conductors on the design.
Wire not terminating at a pin Identifies wires that are not terminated at one or both
ends.
Design that breaks module code Examines the module codes applied to a design and
relationships checks the explicit inclusive/exclusive relationships and
the implicit relationships (such as mutually exclusive
folders). Any violations are reported. (Only available if
the Enable and Display Modules is set in the Module
Codes Project Preference.)
Object that breaks module code Examines the module codes on each object and checks
relationships the explicit inclusive/exclusive relationships and the
implicit relationships (such as mutually exclusive
folders). Any violations are reported. (Only available if
the Enable and Display Modules is set in the Module
Codes Project Preference.)
Shield terminating at more than two Identifies shields that are terminated at more than two
pins pins.
Hierarchical block connectivity Identifies where block connectivity, including numbers
does not match with associated of pins, differs from the connectivity specified in the
design associated design.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 95

February 2016
Projects and Designs
Design Rule Check Descriptions

Table 2-3. Design Rule Checks for Capital Logic (cont.)

Check Name Description
Incompatible mates on hierarchical Identifies when mated blocks have different numbers of
block pins.
Consistency
Design assembly does not match the Identifies assemblies with a part number that have child
library assembly components in the design that are not defined in the
component library. The DRC also checks if the
connectivity associated with design assembly has an
older last modified date than its library definition and
reports accordingly.
Hierarchical block pins does not Identifies that conductors between blocks do not have a
match with associated design pins valid route and must be added. Also identifies instances
where multiple blocks either lack shared conductors or
have not been associated to a design that uses shared
conductors.
Included on BOM with no part Identifies objects on the design (connectors or
number conductors) that have the ‘On BOM’ flag set for them
but have no part number.
Assembly item not in a boundary You can have associated comment graphics for an
assembly that can be used to create a graphical
boundary for the assembly on the diagram. This check
identifies any diagram objects that belong to an
assembly but do not fall within the bounding box of its
associated graphics.
Assembly library definition not Identifies assemblies with a part number but having
used in design missing child components (that is, child components
defined in the component library but missing from the
assembly in the design).
Comment symbol requires update Identifies any comment symbol that has changed since it
was assigned to a library part.
Electrical symbol requires update Identifies any symbol that has changed since it was
assigned to a library part (causing a graphical/electrical
mismatch between the library part symbol and its
corresponding symbol in the symbol library).
Mismatch between assembly Identifies assemblies, contained on the design, that
content and project preference comprise of objects that do not match the default
Assembly settings in project preferences.

96 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Projects and Designs
Design Rule Check Descriptions

Table 2-3. Design Rule Checks for Capital Logic (cont.)

Check Name Description
Mismatch between interconnect Identifies interconnect pins on interconnect connectors
pins and conductors that represent a different number of pins to the number
of wires/multicores/overbraids that have been added to
the interconnect connections that terminate at the
connectors.
Obsolete option Identifies any obsolete options used on design objects.
Unplaced object Identifies non-shared objects that are not placed on any
diagram. These are displayed in a folder called
Unplaced and there is a project preference to delete all
unplaced objects when you save the design.
Invalid design association on Identifies that the block is either missing an association
hierarchical block to a design, or does not have a valid association within
the active build list.
Multiple instances of pin within the Identifies any pins on a design with duplicate names,
design where project preference Disallow pin duplication
within a design is set and prohibits this.
Exclusion
Harness connector not defined in Identifies any plug or receptacle connector that is
device library footprint present on the design and not part of a device's library
description.
Wire not allowed Identifies any wires present on a design in which wires
are not permitted (e.g. on net type designs for use with
Capital Integrator). The default status for this check is
Not shown.
Inclusion
Missing symbol for device Identifies devices on the design that do not possess a
symbol.
ICD Consistency
ICD part number mismatch Identifies that the part number assigned to an ICD does
not match with the ICD placed in the Capital Logic
design.
ICD pin signal connectivity Identifies if an ICD is placed and any of its pins have an
inconsistency associated signal and they are either not connected or
they are connected to the wrong signal.
Invalid release level on ICD Identifies if the release level behavior of a placed ICD in
Capital Logic does not support ‘ICD Design
Association.’
Multiple ICD definitions exist Identifies if more than one definition of an ICD exist.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 97

February 2016
Projects and Designs
Design Rule Check Descriptions

Table 2-3. Design Rule Checks for Capital Logic (cont.)

Check Name Description
ICD option expression and property Identifies where option expressions and properties differ
mismatch from those specified in Capital Devices suggesting that
the ICD should be updated to reflect the latest version.
Unplaced ICD Identifies if ICDs are applicable for the design and are
not placed.
Library consistency
Incompatible mated connector Identifies:
• When mated connectors have different numbers of
pins.
• When the library parts assigned to mated connectors
have different numbers of pins.
• When a mated connector does not have a library part
assigned.
Invalid library footprint Identifies devices that have library parts with footprints
where the footprint data on the device instance is out of
sync with the footprint data in Capital Library.
Invalid library pin mapping Identifies invalid mappings between library part cavities
and object pins in a design.
Invalid library reference Identifies objects (devices, connectors, wires, nets,
splices, multicores, shields, etc.) on the design that
reference library parts that do not exist in the library
databases (e.g. as a result of an imported project).
Invalid library symbol Identifies objects (devices, connectors, wires, nets,
splices, multicores, shields, etc.) on the design that
reference symbols that do not exist in the symbol
library. (e.g. as a result of a deleted symbol).
Latest library part status check Identifies any library part that is not the latest revision.
Library connector cavity count Identifies pin count mismatches between connectors
mismatch (plugs or receptacles) on the design and their
corresponding library part.
Library multicore mismatch Identifies multicores with mismatches between the
number of conductors in their library association and
that specified on the design.
Mismatched cavity on interconnect Identifies cavity number mismatches between
connector and device interconnect connectors and devices.
Status of library part is not current Identifies any library part used in a design or build list
that has a status other than that of Current (i.e. that have
an Obsolete or New status).

98 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Projects and Designs
Design Rule Check Descriptions

Table 2-3. Design Rule Checks for Capital Logic (cont.)

Check Name Description
Wire fits cavity mismatch Examines the cavities of all connectors or ring terminals
with a library part, and considers all combinations of
each cavity with its connected conductors (wires, nets
and shields), and identifies the following:
• For connector cavity
• Connected conductors not fitting the cavity as per
material and CSA of conductors.
• When the cavity and its connected conductors are
not accepted by any defined terminals on the
cavity.
• For ring terminal cavity
• Connected conductors not fitting the cavity as per
material and CSA of conductors. In this case, the
system considers the conductors connected to the
ring terminal and checks that they are valid
against the “Single Terminations” tab and
“Multiple Terminations” tab for the ring terminal.
• The design rule check is NOT applied to shared
connectors or shared ring terminals.
• In particular, for ring terminals, it will not consider
library data from either the “Single wire fits cavity”
and “Multiple wire fits cavity” tab, or any terminals
defined in the Housing tab of the terminal part.
• The acceptance check for conductors connected to
Connector cavity is done via “Single wire fits
cavity” or “Multiple wire fits cavity” tab of
connector part.
• The acceptance check for conductors connected to
Ring terminal cavity is done via “Single
terminations” or “Multiple terminations” tab of the
terminal part.
Include-on-BOM status changed Identifies connectors or conductors whose component
library definitions have changed so that the ‘On BOM’
status is now different.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 99

February 2016
Projects and Designs
Design Rule Check Descriptions

Table 2-3. Design Rule Checks for Capital Logic (cont.)

Check Name Description
Invalid ring terminal on stud pin Checks the validity of library parts on ring terminals
connected to stud pins. The check examines the stud pin
and reads the valid ring terminal associated from the
ring terminal group to ensure that any mated ring
terminals are in that group. It reports an error if:
• if the stud pin has a housing definition defined in the
library, but its mated ring terminal does not have a
library part.
• if the stud pin has a housing definition defined in the
library, but the library part of its mated ring terminal
does not match any of the parts defined in the
housing
• if the device has a stud pin for which no library
housing definition is defined in the library.
Library part required for device Identifies devices on the design that do not possess a
library part.
No conductor library part available Identifies conductors for which the combination of
specification attribute values (specified on the General
tab of the Edit Properties facility) does not exist in any
library wire size definitions.
Out of scope component Identifies components whose scope is not within the
scope of the project or design.
Ring terminal with connector part Issues a warning where ring terminal objects exist with
number connector part numbers assigned.
Logic rules
Object that breaks attribute/property Identifies any objects that violate any Set Logic
rule Attribute/Property on Object constraints. These
constraints define, for specific objects, which value an
attribute/property should have when another attribute/
property has another specific value.
Naming
Invalid name for component Identifies objects with names that do not appear in the
list of valid names for the project's object type.
Duplicate Names for Shared Identifies shared objects (devices, connectors, wires,
Objects in Project nets, splices, multicores, and so on.) having a name that
is identical to that of another shared object of the same
kind in the project but having different option
expressions. The default status for this check is true, and
its default severity setting is error. The check works in
conjunction with the Uniqueness project preference.

100 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Projects and Designs
Design Rule Check Descriptions

Table 2-3. Design Rule Checks for Capital Logic (cont.)

Check Name Description
Duplicate Names in Design Identifies objects (devices, connectors, wires, nets,
splices, multicores, and so on.) having a name that is
identical to that of another object of the same kind on
the same design or a shared object of the same kind but
having different option expressions. The default status
for this check is true, and its default severity setting is
error. The check works in conjunction with the
Uniqueness project preference.
Invalid name for shared object Identifies, within the selected design, shared objects
with names that do not appear in the list of valid names
for that project's shared object type. Note: If a shared net
is connected to more than one device with a Usage
definition and these devices are split across multiple
designs, it is possible that this check will give incorrect
results. In this case, the “Inconsistent shared pin
connections across designs” check, listed under Build
list checks will give a more accurate result.
Invalid short description Identifies any object for which the short description has
been changed in the object type information in Capital
Project but this change has not been applied in Capital
Logic.

Design Rule Checks Applicable to Capital HarnessXC and Capital

ModularXC Designs

Table 2-4. Design Rule Checks for Capital HarnessXC and Capital ModularXC

Check Name Description

Appearance
No translation for text Identifies:
• where a translatable term has been used but no
translation exists for the active language so the quick
code is displayed.
• where a translatable term has been entered as free text
and has no link to the language database.
• See “Diagram Language Translation” on page 41.
Text cannot be shown or Identifies diagram text that cannot be rendered in the font
printed in chosen font applied to it. For example, Chinese text must have a font
that supports UNICODE so this check identifies Chinese
text entered in a non-UNICODE font.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 101

February 2016
Projects and Designs
Design Rule Check Descriptions

Table 2-4. Design Rule Checks for Capital HarnessXC and Capital ModularXC
(cont.)
Check Name Description
Connectivity
Empty multicore Identifies multicores exist that do not contain any wires.
Unconnected wire Identifies wires are unconnected at one or both ends.
Unterminated bundle Identifies bundles are unconnected at one or both ends.
Unterminated wire end Checks single and multiple wire CSA, with regard to cavity
seal and single/multi terminations. There must be a
termination for each wire.
Wire with zero strip length Checks if the wire instance has zero strip length following
harness processing.
Empty bundle The system checks the routes of all bundles and lists those
without wires or multicores.
Consistency
Blank terminal material Checks if there is any cavity detail object with a blank
driver terminal material.
Bundle arc below minimum Identifies bundles that contain an arc with a bend radius
bend radius lower than that specified in its minimum bend radius value.
Centerstrip splice not on Checks the route of all wires with center strip. The
wire route corresponding splice node should fall on the route.
Component not located on Checks if there is any component that exists on a node
any bundle which is not on any bundle.
Connector route does not Identifies if routes assigned to a connector on the design do
exist in library definition not match the routes defined in Capital Library.
Design assembly does not Detects if a main node component is present in the design
match the library assembly assembly, but not present in assembly details.
Different graphical and On a full scale diagram, if the bundle is made flexible and it
physical bundle lengths is stretched, this DRC will identify the difference between
the physical and graphical length.
Included on BOM with no Indicates if an object has an Include on BOM=true, but no
part number part assigned to it.
Inconsistent variant Evaluates all object’s variant positions against the
position reference node derivative options and validates if the order of the reference
nodes on a bundle in each derivative will be the same as the
default order specified on the bundle.

102 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Projects and Designs
Design Rule Check Descriptions

Table 2-4. Design Rule Checks for Capital HarnessXC and Capital ModularXC
(cont.)
Check Name Description
Invalid variant position Evaluates all object’s variant positions against the
derivative options and validates all object positions on a
bundle is within the bundle length limit for each derivative.
Invalid wire attributes Checks that the specified color, material and specification
versus library definition of the wire exist and are consistent with the applicable
component library codes.
Invalid wire route Checks the route on the wire.
Mid-bundle component Evaluates all object's variant positions against the
with multiple locations in derivative options and validates all object positions on a
the same derivative bundle are within the bundle length limit for each
derivative.
Multiple components at Checks if there is more than one additional component
position occupying the same position.
Multiple instances for Identifies if a variant position connector or splice exists at
variant position object on a more than one position within the same derivative.
derivative
Multiple variant bundles Identifies if more than one variant length exists for the
same bundle within a derivative.
Non-modular connector is Checks the presence of a non modular connector at a node
connected to more than one which is connected to more than one bundle. (such as a
bundle modular connector with inserts placed and connected with
zero-length bundles, then the modular connector part is
removed and a normal connector is added in its place).
Option on object not Checks that the options used for the object match the option
applicable to design expression on the design.
Unrouted wire to multi- Checks if a wire end is terminated at a multi-entry
entry connector connector but no route has been picked for this end.
Assembly insulation/wire Reports on assemblies where there is a mismatch in the
length in design does not length of wires and insulations used on the design versus
match library definition the definition in Assembly Details in Capital Library.
Assembly library definition Detects assembly components from an assembly library
not used in design part which have not been added to the assembly on the
design.
Assembly splits in Indicates if the options assigned to assembly components
derivative design would lead to them being on different derivatives.
Calculated bundle width Checks that the width of a bundle does not exceed the
exceeds max bundle width maximum bundle width specified.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 103

February 2016
Projects and Designs
Design Rule Check Descriptions

Table 2-4. Design Rule Checks for Capital HarnessXC and Capital ModularXC
(cont.)
Check Name Description
Cavity component does not Checks single/multiple wire csa in relation to cavity seal
fit wire and single and multi terminals.
Cavity multi-location Reports cases where a cavity MLC (multiple location
components without component) is pointing to cavities that no longer exist (e.g.
cavities deleted connector cavities after MLC creation).
Cavity with seal but no Checks that the cavity has a seal defined, but there is no
wire connectivity at the cavity.
Cavity with terminal but no Checks that the cavity has a terminal defined, but there is
wire no connectivity at the cavity.
Child module design (Applicable for Capital ModularXC only) Checks whether
references module code not a child design uses module codes that are no longer
on composite applicable to its parent composite design, this can result
from manual or bridged-in changes to the codes applicable
to the composite. Any violations are reported.
Design has applicable (Applicable for Capital ModularXC only) Reports if objects
module code that is not exist on a design for which no module codes are assigned.
assigned to any object
Design that breaks module (Applicable for Capital ModularXC only) Examines the
code relationships module codes applied to a design and checks the explicit
inclusive/exclusive relationships and the implicit
relationships (such as mutually exclusive folders). Any
violations are reported.
Empty modular design (Applicable for Capital ModularXC only) If the design is a
module parent, this checks the module code on each object.
If a child exists where applicable module codes do not
contain at least one of the module codes used in the parent
then a report is issued.
Inconsistent assembly (Applicable for Capital ModularXC only) Checks whether
module code an assembly and its constituent parts have matching module
code assignation and reports any inconsistencies.
Inconsistent insulation code Identifies whether the contents of an insulation code have
been edited and no longer match the contents of the same
code in use within the design, or whether an insulation code
in use no longer exists within the design.
Inconsistent multicore (Applicable for Capital ModularXC only) Checks whether
inner core module code all inner cores of a multicore have matching code
assignations.

104 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Projects and Designs
Design Rule Check Descriptions

Table 2-4. Design Rule Checks for Capital HarnessXC and Capital ModularXC
(cont.)
Check Name Description
Inconsistent variant Identifies if one or more variant positions for an object
position object (connector or splice) have been modified, and are now out
of synchronization with the primary position object.
Inconsistent variant Identifies if one or more variant positions for a wire have
position wiring been modified, and are now out of synchronization with the
primary position wire.
Invalid overbraid end Identifies if a termination has been specified for an
termination overbraid that does not exist on the routes of any of the
wires contained within it.
Mismatch between Checks the content of assemblies on the design and
assembly content and highlights any that do not conform with the project
project preference preference “Assembly”.
Modular expression too (Applicable for Capital ModularXC only) Checks if the
long to be costed in CapH length of the Module Code Expression is longer than 1024
Costing characters. If this is the case it reports that, due to the
number of characters, the harness will unable to be
accurately costed in Capital Harness Classic.
Modular Objects With No (Applicable for Capital ModularXC only) Checks whether
Functional Module Codes any applicable objects exist without functional module
codes assigned.
Modular Objects With No (Applicable for Capital ModularXC only) Checks whether
Production Module Codes any applicable objects exist without production module
codes assigned.
Module code used on (Applicable for Capital ModularXC only) Reports if
composite but not module codes exist in the design that are not consumed by a
consumed by child module buildable module, indicating that a child module has not
been created to use this module.
Multi-location component Reports cases where a wire multi-location component is
without a wire end pointing to wire ends that no longer exist (e.g. deleted wire
after MLC creation).
Multi-location component Reports cases where a node multi-location component is
without node pointing to nodes that no longer exist (e.g. deleted
connector after MLC creation).
Nested assembly contains Indicates when a standard or connector assembly contains
in-house assembly/ an in-house assembly.
multicore

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 105

February 2016
Projects and Designs
Design Rule Check Descriptions

Table 2-4. Design Rule Checks for Capital HarnessXC and Capital ModularXC
(cont.)
Check Name Description
Object assigned a technical (Applicable for Capital ModularXC only) Examines
module code that has no module codes on each object. If the module code is a
associated combinations technical module code and is not associated with a
combination a report is issued.
Object that breaks module (Applicable for Capital ModularXC only) Examines the
code relationships module codes on each object and checks the explicit
inclusive/exclusive relationships and the implicit
relationships (such as mutually exclusive folders). Any
violations are reported.
Related objects assigned (Applicable for Capital ModularXC only) Checks the
different module codes validity of codes assignments and reports when related
objects, for example connectors and cavity seals, have been
assigned different module codes.
Obsolete option Identifies any obsolete options used on design objects.
Overlapping insulation Checks that there are no overlapping insulation layers with
layers with same layer same layer number in the same derivative.
number
Tube does not fit bundle Identifies any tubes that are too small for the bundle to
which they have been applied.
Assembly component not Checks if an extra component is present in the design
in library assembly, but not present in library.
Insufficient distance Identifies insulation runs for which the Distance between
between items items attribute has a value of 0.
General
Invalid wire path Checks if Wire End2 is reachable from Wire End1 through
the bundles and honoring the thru / not-thru nodes
constraints.
HarnessXC rules
Violated attribute/property Identifies any objects that violate any Set Attribute/
rule Property on Object constraints. These constraints define,
for specific objects, which value an attribute/property
should have when another attribute/property has another
specific value.
Wire that breaks routing Identifies wires that violate any Route by Attribute/
rule Property constraints (rules). Also reports the signal,
bundle, inline connector and harness on which the violation
exists.

106 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Projects and Designs
Design Rule Check Descriptions

Table 2-4. Design Rule Checks for Capital HarnessXC and Capital ModularXC
(cont.)
Check Name Description
Inclusion
Wire does not fit cavity Checks against cavity attributes whether a wire fits or not.
Alternative cavity plug The system has selected a cavity plug where there are two
available or more identical plugs to choose from. This check prompts
you to check the selection was correct.
Alternative cavity seal The system has selected a cavity seal where there are two or
available more identical seals to choose from. This check prompts
you to check the selection was correct
Alternative terminal The system has selected a cavity terminal where there are
available two or more identical terminals to choose from. This check
prompts you to check the selection was correct
Cavity with plug or seal Identifies where the use of plug/seals has been specified but
marked as “none” the corresponding library part does not have it assigned.
Inappropriate terminal Identifies where the terminal material or type does not
material or type for wire match the selected wire terminal or type defined in Cavity
Component Management.
Invalid mandatory item Checks if a mandatory item defined in a library
selection component's housing definition exists on the node with a
matching quantity. For cavity components, check that they
exist in the matching cavity in correct quantity.
Mismatched mated Checks that all the terminals on the cavities of a Connector
connectors and terminal are of same material.
material
Mismatched wire and Identifies the terminal material of the selected terminal
cavity terminal material does not match the wire terminal material defined in Cavity
Component Management.
Plug and wire at the same Checks if a cavity has a plug as well as a wire.
cavity
Terminal material code Identifies where the terminal selected on a derivative in a
mismatch at double multiple termination does not match the terminal material
termination assigned to the wires in Cavity Component Management.
Sealed and unsealed Checks the sealed/unsealed status on each connector and
components exist lists them.
Library Consistency
Component does not exist Identifies where an additional node or cavity component is
in housing definition not defined in the housing definition.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 107

February 2016
Projects and Designs
Design Rule Check Descriptions

Table 2-4. Design Rule Checks for Capital HarnessXC and Capital ModularXC
(cont.)
Check Name Description
Latest library part status Identifies any library part that is not the latest revision.
check
Obsolete or invalid part Identifies where a part number exists but the corresponding
number part is either not available or obsolete in Library.
Fixture Part Number Validates the assigned part numbers for all fixtures on all
Validity diagrams in the design using the fixture Part Number
Selection Rules (see the Capital HarnessXC User Guide).
Note: The “Auto-Selectable” rule is not is not
considered in this check.
Include-on-BOM status Identifies where an object has a “Not-On-BOM” attribute
changed with a value different to its library setting.
Library part required for Identifies where an insulation run exists that has no library
bundle insulation part assigned.
Library part required for Identifies where a clip exists that has no library part
clip assigned.
Library part required for Identifies where a connector exists that has no library part
connector assigned.
Library part required for Identifies where a grommet exists that has no library part
grommet assigned.
Library part required for Identifies where a multi-location component exists that has
multi-location component no library part assigned.
Library part required for Identifies where a multicore exists that has no library part
multicore assigned.
Library part required for Identifies where a node insulation exists that has no library
node insulation part assigned.
Library part required for Identifies where a splice exists that has no library part
splice assigned.
Library part required for Identifies where a wire exists that has no library part
wire assigned.
Library part without Checks the components that have no supplier part number
supplier number listed in Library.
Out of scope component Identifies components whose scope is not within the scope
of the project or design.

108 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Projects and Designs
Design Rule Check Descriptions

Table 2-4. Design Rule Checks for Capital HarnessXC and Capital ModularXC
(cont.)
Check Name Description
Position assigned does not Checks if a housing component is made applicable to one
match library definition position but is placed in a different one. For example, if a
fuse is present in an incompatible position on a fuse box
connector.
Ring terminal with Issues a warning where ring terminal objects exist with
connector part number connector part numbers assigned.
Undefined route for dressed Identifies where the routes assigned to a connector on the
connector design do not match the routes defined for it in Capital
Library.
Naming
Invalid name for Identifies where objects exist with names that do not appear
component in the list of valid names for that project's object type.
Multiple components with Checks for objects with the same name on a harness design.
same name For example, when synchronizing device connectors of a
device that has two device footprint connectors with the
same part number.
Missing BOM ID Checks that all objects that can be assigned a BOM ID have
a valid BOM ID.

Design Rule Checks Applicable to Capital Harness MPM and Capital

Harness TVM Designs

Table 2-5. Design Rule Checks for Capital Harness MPM and Capital Harness
TVM
Check Name Description
SBOM Checks
Costing
Sub-assembly not costed When running checks on a costed harness, this
identifies where there were problems during the cost
calculation run. Examples include:
• Task did not fire on a sub-assembly
• Formula returned no value
• Sub-assembly with no cost results
Part number
management

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 109

February 2016
Projects and Designs
Design Rule Check Descriptions

Table 2-5. Design Rule Checks for Capital Harness MPM and Capital Harness
TVM (cont.)
Check Name Description
Sub-assembly with no part Identifies sub-assemblies on the SBOM that have no
assigned part number assigned.
Sub-assembly structure
Incomplete insulation Identifies sub-assemblies which contain an insulation
object but which do not include all wire sub-
assemblies which run through this insulation.
Incomplete overbraid Identifies sub-assemblies which contain an overbraid
object but which do not include all wire sub-
assemblies which run through this overbraid.
Incomplete splice Checks that all connected wire sub-assemblies are also
included in a sub-assembly which contains a splice.
Orphaned strip Checks that the owner wire sub-assembly is also
included in a sub-assembly which contains a strip
(either wire end or center-strip).

Design Rule Checks Applicable to Capital Topology Designs

Table 2-6. Design Rule Checks for Capital Topology

Check Name Description
Appearance
No translation for text Identifies:
• where a translatable term has been used but no
translation exists for the active language so the quick
code is displayed.
• where a translatable term has been entered as free text
and has no link to the language database.
See “Diagram Language Translation” on page 41.
Text cannot be shown or printed Identifies diagram text that cannot be rendered in the font
in chosen font applied to it. For example, Chinese text must have a font
that supports UNICODE so this check identifies Chinese
text entered in a non-UNICODE font.
Connectivity
Unterminated bundle Identifies bundles that do not terminate on connectors or a
device.
Empty bundle Identifies bundles that do not contain any conductors.

110 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Projects and Designs
Design Rule Check Descriptions

Table 2-6. Design Rule Checks for Capital Topology (cont.)

Check Name Description
Consistency
Comment symbol requires Identifies any comment symbol that has changed since it
update was assigned to a library part.
Obsolete option Identifies any obsolete options used on design objects.
Design Assistant
Attribute/property mismatch Identifies attributes and properties that have been set on an
with wiring design object within the Capital Topology design but which have
not been set or do not match with the attributes and
properties on the associated object in the Capital Logic
design.
Unplaced harness connector Identifies harness connectors that exist in the associated
Capital Logic designs but have not been placed in the
Capital Topology design.
Unplaced inline connector Identifies inline connectors that exist in the associated
Capital Logic designs but have not been placed in the
Capital Topology design.
Empty slot Identifies slots with no placed devices.
Placement conflict Identifies placement conflicts caused by multiple
constraints influencing placement.
Unassociated harness connector Identifies harness connectors in the Capital Topology
design that have no association with a connector in the
Capital Logic designs.
Unplaced device Identifies unplaced devices in the current plane.
Unrouted wires Identifies wires that have not been routed in the Capital
Topology design.
Library consistency
Inline mate part mismatch Identifies mated inline pair halves that have library parts
that are not valid mates.
Latest library part status check Identifies any library part that is not the latest revision.
Library connector cavity count Identifies virtual/device/inline connectors having a cavity
mismatch count that differs to that of their corresponding library part.
Reference to non-existent library Identifies devices, wires, connectors, device connectors,
object multicores, shields, splices that possess a library reference
or part number property, but where a corresponding library
object does not exist.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 111

February 2016
Projects and Designs
Design Rule Check Descriptions

Table 2-6. Design Rule Checks for Capital Topology (cont.)

Check Name Description
Status of library part is not Identifies any library part used in a design or build list that
current has a status other than that of Current (i.e. that have an
Obsolete or New status).
Wire fits cavity mismatch At every harness level, examines the cavities of all
connectors with a library part, determines the set of wires
that are connected to each cavity and identifies the
following:
• Single wires not fitting a cavity
• Sets of wires not fitting a cavity
• When a cavity and its single connected wire are not
accepted by a terminal
• When a cavity and its set of connected wires are not
accepted by a terminal
Include-on-BOM status changed Identifies objects that have a “Not-On-BOM” attribute
with a value different to its library setting.
Library part required for Identifies inline and virtual connectors that have no library
connector part assigned.
Library part required for slot Identifies slots containing devices that have no library part
assigned.
Out of scope component Identifies components whose scope is not within the scope
of the project or design.
Naming
Duplicate names in the design Identifies objects having a name that is identical to that of
another object of the same kind on the same design.
Duplicate names in a harness Identifies object names that are not unique on a harness.
This check compares objects against those of the same
object type only.
Topology Rules
Assign connector rule violation Identifies mappings between device connectors and virtual
connectors that violate any Assign by Attribute/Property
constraints (rules).
Minimum splice separation rule Identifies splices that violate any Minimum Splice
violation Separation constraints (rules). Also reports the bundle and
harness on which the violation exists.
Missing custom constraint Identifies any custom constraints that have been defined
for an object but are not loaded in Capital Topology any
longer

112 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Projects and Designs
Releasing Designs with Enforced Design Rule Checks

Table 2-6. Design Rule Checks for Capital Topology (cont.)

Check Name Description
Object that breaks attribute/ Identifies any objects that violate any Set Topology
property rule Attribute/Property on Object constraints. These
constraints define, for specific objects, which value an
attribute/property should have when another attribute/
property has another specific value.
Slot that breaks placement rule Identifies devices that violate any Place by Attribute/
Property constraints (rules). Also reports the slot in which
the violation exists.
Wire that breaks routing rule Identifies wires that violate any Route by Attribute/
Property constraints (rules). Also reports the signal,
bundle, inline connector and harness on which the
violation exists.

Releasing Designs with Enforced Design Rule

Checks
You can release designs and enforce the running of particular design rule checks so that the
content is verified. This action is available from Capital Logic, Capital Topology, Capital
Integrator, Capital HarnessXC and Capital ModularXC.
The type of design that you can release is dependent upon the application that you use (that is,
only Capital Integrator designs can be released in the Capital Integrator application, and so on).

You can run the release action on:

• a single design
• a set of selected designs (including complete design families in composite/derivative or
modular parent/child scenarios)

Note
Default functionality enables users to bypass this process by manually changing the
release levels of designs in the Edit Design dialog. However, a system administrator
can prevent this by selecting the “Enforce Design Rule Checks on release of designs”
project preference.

If you are using Web Services, you can release designs and send an automatic notification to the
Web Services component.

Prerequisites
• In the appropriate design application, open the project that contains the designs.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 113

February 2016
Projects and Designs
Releasing Designs with Enforced Design Rule Checks

• The designs to be released must have a current release level setting that can be changed
to a release level of type Released.
• The design rule checks to be run on the designs must have been set to run On Release in
the Project Preferences for the design application (the appropriate preferences are
displayed when you select the Checks node for an application in the Project Preferences
Dialog Box).
Procedure
1. In the appropriate design application for the type of design that you want to release,
press Space Bar and enter Release; the Release Designs Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Select the designs that you want to release.

Note
If you have a design open in the diagram window, it is selected automatically. If you
have selected designs in the Project Browser Window on the top left of the
application window before initiating this action, those designs are selected
automatically.

3. Specify the Release Level that you want to apply to the designs.
4. Specify whether you want to “Annotate results” and “Treat warnings as errors” for the
design rule checks.

Note
When you select to annotate results, the release process is slower if the diagrams
involved are not open in the design application. This is because the application must
open and close each diagram. Project preferences can also be used to set whether the
Annotate results box is checked by default (Annotate by Default) and to customize the
wording of the annotation that is added to the diagram (Annotation Template).

5. Click OK; a progress bar is displayed while the design rule checks run.
Results
• If there are no failures, the release level for the designs is changed and they are saved,
including any modifications such as annotations.
• A summary of the release process is displayed in the Output Window at the bottom of
the application. This indicates whether any design rule checks failed for designs. The
Check tab of the Output Window gives details of the design rule checks that have failed.
The failure messages contain links to objects that caused the failures. You must fix any
issues in a design before you can release it.
• For a Capital Logic design, the summary also lists any shared objects that are frozen
during the release process.

114 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Projects and Designs
Build List

Related Topics
Designs

Build List
A build list is a container for designs, representing a sub-set of a vehicle’s connectivity and
topology at a single point in the design lifecycle. Any number and configuration of build lists
may be created for a project.
See Build List in the Capital Project User Guide for full details of this concept and links to
related tasks.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 115

February 2016
Projects and Designs
Options and Option Relationships

Options and Option Relationships

Options and variant options can be created at project level from design applications. An option
is a code representing a feature or capability in a vehicle. Options are used in expressions to
convey the conditional inclusion of an object in a particular vehicle configuration.
Define Option Relationships . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Creating an Option Folder at Project Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Creating an Option at Project Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Defining Inclusive and Exclusive Relationships for an Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Creating an Option Combination at Project Level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Adding a Valid Selection to an Option Combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Deleting a Valid Selection from an Option Combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Deleting an Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Define Option Relationships

Once created for a project, an option may be applied to any of the designs created within that
project. The options applied to designs are known as applicable options.
There are three ways in which you can define relationships between options at project level:

• Define inclusive and exclusive relationships for individual options.

• Group them within option folders that allow you to specify whether the options in the
folder are mutually exclusive (that is, none of the options within this folder can be
selected together in a vehicle) or mandatory (that is, at least one of the options within
this folder must be selected in a vehicle). At system or project level.
• Create option combinations that allow you to specify valid selections of options.
Option combinations and valid selections allow the representation of complex
relationships between a group of otherwise unrelated options by specifying their allowed
combinations. Option combinations reduce the allowable combinations of a set of
options, which in turn helps to limit the potentially large number of harness levels that
can be generated by the Composite Wiring Synthesis (CWS) procedure in Capital
Integrator.
An option combination is a collection of options that have been arranged into specific,
valid selections.
For example:
If no inclusive or exclusive relationships exist between the 6 options A, B, C, D, E, F,
and they are all optional in a particular vehicle model, then there are 64 possible
combinations. In order to lower the complexity (or for other design reasons), the 6

116 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Projects and Designs
Creating an Option Folder at Project Level

option can be selected in an option combination and arranged to permit only the
following combinations:
o (A, B, C, D, E, F)
o (B, F)
o (A)
o (F)
Each of the 4 combinations of the original 6 options is known as a valid selection (that
is, there are only 4 valid selections in the option combination).
The following considerations apply to option combinations and valid selections:
o An option can exist in either no option combination or just one option combination
(that is, not multiple option combinations).
o An option combination does not have to include a valid selection where all options
are selected.
o Within an option combination, the only limitation on its valid selections is that they
must conform to any normal inclusive/exclusive relationships between the options.
o If it is permitted for none of the options in an option combination to apply to a
vehicle, then an explicit, empty valid selection must be created for that option
combination.
Related Topics
Creating an Option Folder at Project Level
Creating an Option at Project Level
Defining Inclusive and Exclusive Relationships for an Option
Creating an Option Combination at Project Level
Adding a Valid Selection to an Option Combination
Deleting a Valid Selection from an Option Combination
Deleting an Option

Creating an Option Folder at Project Level

This topic explains how to create an option folder at a project level from a design application.
You can specify whether the options in the folder are mutually exclusive or mandatory.
Procedure
1. With the project open, press Space Bar and enter Options.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 117

February 2016
Projects and Designs
Creating an Option at Project Level

The Options Dialog Box is displayed.

2. Select the node or folder of the Options Browser under which you want to create the
option folder:
• If you want to create an option folder at the top level of the Options Browser outside
of any other folders, select the Options node.
• If you want to create an option folder within another option folder, select that folder.
3. Click Create a new option ( ).

A new option folder is added to the Options Browser on the left of the dialog.
4. Specify the Name of the folder and whether it will contain options that are Mutually
Exclusive or Mandatory.
5. Click OK.
Related Topics
Creating an Option at Project Level
Defining Inclusive and Exclusive Relationships for an Option
Creating an Option Combination at Project Level
Adding a Valid Selection to an Option Combination
Deleting a Valid Selection from an Option Combination
Deleting an Option

Creating an Option at Project Level

This topic explains how to create options and variant options at a project level. You can specify
inclusive and exclusive relationships for the option.
Procedure
1. With the project open, press Space Bar and enter Options.
The Options Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Select the node of the Options Browser under which you want to create the option:
• If you want to create an option at the top level of the Options Browser outside of any
other folders, select the Options node.
• If you want to create an option in a particular option folder, select that folder.
3. Click Create a new option ( ); a new option is added to the Options Browser.

4. Specify the Name and Description for the option and whether it is a variant option.

118 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Projects and Designs
Defining Inclusive and Exclusive Relationships for an Option

5. Define any Inclusive or Exclusive relationships for the option.

6. Click OK.
Related Topics
Creating an Option Folder at Project Level
Defining Inclusive and Exclusive Relationships for an Option
Creating an Option Combination at Project Level
Adding a Valid Selection to an Option Combination
Deleting a Valid Selection from an Option Combination
Deleting an Option

Defining Inclusive and Exclusive Relationships for

an Option
This topic explains how to define inclusive and exclusive relationships between options at a
project level.
Procedure
1. With the project open, press Space Bar and enter Options.
The Options Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Select the option in the Options Browser on the left of the dialog.
The fields on the right of the dialog display the values for that option.
3. Add any Inclusive or Exclusive relationships for the option.
4. Repeat steps 2 to 3 for each option that you want to add to edit.
5. Click OK.
Related Topics
Creating an Option Folder at Project Level
Creating an Option at Project Level
Creating an Option Combination at Project Level
Adding a Valid Selection to an Option Combination
Deleting a Valid Selection from an Option Combination
Deleting an Option

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 119

February 2016
Projects and Designs
Creating an Option Combination at Project Level

Creating an Option Combination at Project Level

This topic explains how to create an option combination and its valid selections.
Procedure
1. With the project open, press Space Bar and enter Options.
The Options Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Click Create a new Combination ( ).

A new option combination is added to the Options Browser on the left of the dialog.
3. Specify the Name for the option combination.
4. Drag and drop an option to be included in the option combination from its location in the
Options Browser tree to the option combination node in the tree.
The option is listed under the option combination as well as in its original location in the
tree.
5. Repeat step 4 for each option that you want to add to the option combination.
6. Select the option combination in the Options Browser.
The options are displayed as columns in the Valid Selections table.
7. Click to add a valid selection row to the table.

The row is added to the table.

8. Specify a unique identifier for the valid selection in the Name column.
9. In the row, select the options that are included in the valid selection.
10. Repeat steps 7 to 9 for each valid selection in the option combination.
11. Repeat steps 2 to 10 for each option combination that you want to create.
12. Click OK.
Related Topics
Creating an Option Folder at Project Level
Creating an Option at Project Level
Defining Inclusive and Exclusive Relationships for an Option
Adding a Valid Selection to an Option Combination
Deleting a Valid Selection from an Option Combination
Deleting an Option

120 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Projects and Designs
Adding a Valid Selection to an Option Combination

Adding a Valid Selection to an Option Combination

This topic explains how to add a valid selection row to the Valid Selections table for an option
combination in the Options Dialog Box.
Procedure
1. With the project open, press Space Bar and enter Options.
The Options Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Select the option combination in the Options Browser on the left of the dialog.
The Valid Selections table on the right of the dialog displays the existing valid selections
for the option combination.
3. Click to add a valid selection row to the table.

The row is added to the table.

4. Specify a unique identifier for the valid selection in the Name column.
5. In the row, select the options that are included in the valid selection.
6. Repeat steps 3 to 5 for each valid selection that you want to add.
7. Click OK.
Related Topics
Creating an Option Folder at Project Level
Creating an Option at Project Level
Defining Inclusive and Exclusive Relationships for an Option
Creating an Option Combination at Project Level
Deleting a Valid Selection from an Option Combination
Deleting an Option

Deleting a Valid Selection from an Option

Combination
This topic explains how to delete (remove) a valid selection row from the Valid Selections table
for an option combination in the Options Dialog Box.
Procedure
1. With the project open, press Space Bar and enter Options.
The Options Dialog Box is displayed.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 121

February 2016
Projects and Designs
Deleting an Option

2. Select the option combination in the Options Browser on the left of the dialog.
The Valid Selections table on the right of the dialog displays the existing valid selections
for the option combination.
3. Select the row that you want to delete.
4. Click .

The row is deleted from the table and the valid selection is deleted from the option
combination.
5. Repeat steps 3 to 4 for each valid selection that you want to add.
6. Click OK.
Related Topics
Creating an Option Folder at Project Level
Creating an Option at Project Level
Defining Inclusive and Exclusive Relationships for an Option
Creating an Option Combination at Project Level
Adding a Valid Selection to an Option Combination
Deleting an Option

Deleting an Option
This topic explains how to delete an option from the Options Dialog Box.
Procedure
1. Select the option in the Options Browser.
2. Click Delete selected objects ( ).

Results
• If the option is used in a combination, an error message is displayed, giving details of the
combination that is using the option, and the option is not deleted.
• If the option has been specified as an applicable option for a design, an error message is
displayed, giving details of the design that is using the option, and the option is not
deleted.
• If the option is not used in a combination, it is removed from the Options Browser.
Related Topics
Creating an Option Folder at Project Level

122 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Projects and Designs
Deleting an Option

Creating an Option at Project Level

Defining Inclusive and Exclusive Relationships for an Option
Creating an Option Combination at Project Level
Adding a Valid Selection to an Option Combination
Deleting a Valid Selection from an Option Combination

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 123

February 2016
Projects and Designs
Engineering Change Orders

Engineering Change Orders

Engineering Change orders can be used across all design tools.
ECO Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Working with an ECO Created in Capital . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Creating an Engineering Change Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Deleting an Engineering Change Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Viewing Engineering Change Orders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Capture and Apply a Change Within an ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Recording a Change with an ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Applying a Stored Change from an ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Identifying Topology Changes with Hotspots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Harness Object Behavior on Applying ECO Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
ECO Import and Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Exporting an ECO Design Change Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Importing an ECO Design Change Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

ECO Introduction
Engineering Change Orders (ECO) allow you to track the implementation of any instructions to
make a change to one or more designs. Once the change has been made, the ECO can be set as
“Completed”.
Image files can be added to the ECO and opened in the Image Viewer, to illustrate and explain
the before and after details of the changes required.

In Capital HarnessXC and Capital ModularXC you can automatically capture and store design
changes against an ECO and re-apply them onto a different design revision at a later date. See
“Capture and Apply a Change Within an ECO” on page 128,

Since the scope of an ECO can span many designs within Capital, each design within an ECO
has a Completion Status (Not Started, In Progress or Completed), and only when the
completion status for each design is set to Completed, can the release level of the ECO be
changed to Released (note that an ECO can transition between Draft, Obsolete, Released -
these levels can be configured within Capital Project). However, the release level assigned to an
ECO does not have to be the same release level assigned to the impacted design revisions.

You can:

• Manually create ECOs within the Capital design applications. See “Creating an
Engineering Change Order” on page 126.

124 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Projects and Designs
Working with an ECO Created in Capital

• Import and export ECO Impacted Designs using the Capital applications.
When you export and import project data (as a copy or dataset), all ECO data is included.
However, if you export the project as a template, no ECO data is included.

Related Topics
Working with an ECO Created in Capital
Creating an Engineering Change Order
Deleting an Engineering Change Order
Viewing Engineering Change Orders
Engineering Change Orders Dialog Box
ECO Import and Export
Capture and Apply a Change Within an ECO

Working with an ECO Created in Capital

This topic details the basic flow for ECOs.
Procedure
1. In Capital Project or within any design tool, use the Engineering Change Orders Dialog
Box to create an ECO for a required change, then associate the ECO with the impacted
design revisions. See “Creating an Engineering Change Order” on page 126. The
Release Level for the ECO (not necessarily for the associated design revisions) is Draft
and the Completion Status value for each associated design is Not Started.
2. In the design tools, make the required change to the designs.
3. For each of those designs, open the Edit Design Properties Dialog Box and click the
ECO Tab. In the Design Status column for the ECO, change the value to Completed.

Note
You can also change the status on the Engineering Change Orders Tab see “Start and
Stop Recording an ECO Change” on page 130.

4. In Capital Project or a design tool, open the Engineering Change Orders Dialog Box;
note that the Completion value for each design associated with the ECO has changed to
Completed. Change the ECO Release Level to Released.
Related Topics
Creating an Engineering Change Order
Deleting an Engineering Change Order
Viewing Engineering Change Orders

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 125

February 2016
Projects and Designs
Creating an Engineering Change Order

Engineering Change Orders Dialog Box

Creating an Engineering Change Order

This topic details how to create an engineering change order (ECO).
Prerequisites
• Your user account must have the Engineering Change Order Creation permission set.
Procedure
1. Either:
In Capital Project: In the browser tree on the left of the application, navigate to the
Engineering Change Orders node for the project. Double-click it or right-click on it
and choose Edit; the Engineering Change Orders Dialog Box is displayed.
or
In a design application: Press Space Bar and enter Engineering Change Order; the
Engineering Change Orders dialog box is displayed.
2. If the ECO category to which the ECO belongs does not yet exist, create it:
a. Click above the Category Window; a new category is added to the window.

b. Click the new category and edit its name.

3. Click next to the category name; a new ECO is added under the category.

4. Click the new ECO and edit its name.

5. Ensure that the ECO is selected in the Category Window and specify its Short
Description, Release Level, Description and Properties.
6. Specify the designs impacted by the ECO:
a. In the Impacted Designs panel, click ; the Design Revision Selection dialog box is
displayed.
b. Select one or more impacted designs and click OK; the designs are added to the list.
7. If required, add an image(s) to illustrate the change. Use the Images panel buttons to
paste from the clipboard, take a screenshot of the currently visible diagram canvas area,
or add an image from a file. Once added, you can double-click a file to open it in the
Image Viewer.
8. Click OK.

126 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Projects and Designs
Deleting an Engineering Change Order

Results
• An association is created between the ECO and the impacted designs and any image
files added.
Related Topics
Working with an ECO Created in Capital
Deleting an Engineering Change Order
Viewing Engineering Change Orders
Engineering Change Orders Dialog Box

Deleting an Engineering Change Order

This topic details how to delete an engineering change order (ECO).
Prerequisites
• Your user account must have the Engineering Change Order Deletion permission set.
Procedure
1. Either:
In Capital Project: In the browser tree on the left of the application, navigate to the
Engineering Change Orders node for the project. Double-click it or right-click on it
and choose Edit; the Engineering Change Orders Dialog Box is displayed.
or
In a design application: Press Space Bar and enter Engineering Change Order; the
Engineering Change Orders dialog box is displayed.
2. Select the ECO in the Category Window and click next to the category name to which
it belongs.
3. The selected ECO is deleted.
4. Click OK.
Results
• The association between the ECO and the impacted designs is removed.
• The ECO is removed from the project
Related Topics
Working with an ECO Created in Capital
Creating an Engineering Change Order

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 127

February 2016
Projects and Designs
Viewing Engineering Change Orders

Viewing Engineering Change Orders

Engineering Change Orders Dialog Box

Viewing Engineering Change Orders

This topic details how to view an engineering change order (ECO) in any of the Capital Design
tools.
The columns displayed can be configured in the almintegration.xml file which is located in the
capital_home\config folder.

Prerequisites
• ECOs have been created for the relevant design.
• The relevant designs have been associated to the ECOs.
Procedure
1. Open the diagram in the relevant Capital Design tool
2. Press Space Bar and enter ECOs.
Results
• ECOs applicable to the active design are displayed in the Engineering Change Orders
Tab, below the diagram. You can use the Filter button to toggle the display to show all
ECOs for the project.

Note
If no diagram is open, then all ECOs applicable to the current project are displayed.

Related Topics
Working with an ECO Created in Capital
Creating an Engineering Change Order
Deleting an Engineering Change Order
Engineering Change Orders Dialog Box
Engineering Change Orders Tab

Capture and Apply a Change Within an ECO

You can capture and store design edits within an ECO impacted design for automatic
implementation onto another design at a later date.

128 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Projects and Designs
Capture and Apply a Change Within an ECO

Note
This functionality is available in Capital HarnessXC and Capital ModularXC only.

ECO Cost Only Change Flow

A common example is the application of a “cost only” design change, illustrated in Figure 2-1
below, where there is a requirement to process and report the cost impact of a change based on a
given version of a design, but implement it on the live design at a later date, when approval for
the change is given.

Figure 2-1. ECO Cost Only Change Flow

• In step 1, ECO(s) are created with the change details.

• In step 2, a copy of the design is made and associated with the ECO. The changes
detailed in the ECO are made and captured. See “Recording a Change with an ECO” on
page 132. The harness is engineered and costing reports for the changes are created and
sent for approval.
• In step 3, approval is received and a revision of the design is created as a target for
selected recorded changes to be applied onto.
• In step 4, the selected changes captured in step 2 are automatically applied onto the
target design. See “Applying a Stored Change from an ECO” on page 133.

ECO Impacted Design

An ECO can have one or more associated impacted designs. The system can store the following
data against each impacted design:

• Recorded ECO capture data. See “Recording a Change with an ECO” on page 132
• Images. You can add PNG, JPG or JPEG files to help illustrate details of the ECO.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 129

February 2016
Projects and Designs
Capture and Apply a Change Within an ECO

You can export and import ECO impacted designs between ECOs in the same or different
projects or databases. See “ECO Import and Export” on page 147.

Start and Stop Recording an ECO Change

You can change the completion status against an ECO Impacted Design to start and stop the
recording of ECO changes:

Figure 2-2 shows the completion status changes.

Figure 2-2. Status Changes

Note
If you change the completion status from Completed to In Progress, any recorded changes
are deleted from the ECO impacted design. If you change the completion status from In
Progress to Not Started, the baseline point where the recording started is deleted from the ECO
impacted design.

You can change the completion status:

• From the ECO Tab on the Edit Design Properties dialog box.

130 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Projects and Designs
Capture and Apply a Change Within an ECO

Figure 2-3. ECO Tab

• From the Engineering Change Orders Tab.

Figure 2-4. ECO Console

Apply Changes
When you have captured the ECO changes, they can be applied to a target design.

See Applying a Stored Change from an ECO.

Related Topics
Recording a Change with an ECO
ECO Import and Export
Applying a Stored Change from an ECO
Identifying Topology Changes with Hotspots
Harness Object Behavior on Applying ECO Changes

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 131

February 2016
Projects and Designs
Recording a Change with an ECO

Recording a Change with an ECO

When an ECO is received, you can make and record the changes on a copy of the design and
implement them at a later date on a revision of the design.
The procedure in this topic relates to step two of the ECO Cost Only Change Flow, recording
the change, see Figure 2-1 on page 129.

Prerequisites
• The required Impacted Design is associated to the ECO. See Creating an Engineering
Change Order.
• The Completion Status of the Impacted Design on the ECO is set to Not Started.
Procedure
1. Open the required design diagram.
2. Press Space Bar and enter ECOs.
The Engineering Change Orders Tab opens in the output window below the diagram.
3. Click the ellipsis button in the Name cell of the relevant ECO and choose Completion
Status > In Progress.
Alternatively, open the Edit Design Properties Dialog Box for the required design and
click the ECO Tab. In the Design Status column for the ECO, change the value to In
Progress and click OK.
The Create Baseline message box is displayed.
4. Click the Create Baseline button.
The system creates a baseline and starts recording the ECO changes you make from this
point. This is indicated by the Completion Status of the impacted design changing to “In
Progress (Capturing Changes)” on the Engineering Change Orders Dialog Box.
5. Make the appropriate changes as documented in the ECO description and illustrated by
any associated image files.
6. Optionally add images to confirm that the changes have been made.
7. Save the design.
8. In the Engineering Change Orders Tab, click the ellipsis button in the Name cell and
choose Completion Status > Completed.
Results
• The system stops recording. All the changes you have made are captured and stored
against the ECO Impacted Design. This is indicated by the Completion Status of the

132 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Projects and Designs
Applying a Stored Change from an ECO

impacted design changing to “Completed (Changes Captured)” on the Engineering

Change Orders dialog box.
Related Topics
Applying a Stored Change from an ECO
Harness Object Behavior on Applying ECO Changes
Identifying Topology Changes with Hotspots
ECO Import and Export

Applying a Stored Change from an ECO

When an ECO is received, you can make and record the changes on a copy of the design and
implement them at a later date on a revision of the design.
The procedure in this topic relates to step 4 of the ECO Cost Only Change Flow, applying the
change, see Figure 2-1 on page 129.

Prerequisites
• The steps in the Recording a Change with an ECO topic have been completed.
• A target design which is a revision or copy of the source design used in the Recording a
Change with an ECO topic is open.
• The target design has been added as an impacted design of the ECO and has a
Completion Status of In Progress. See Creating an Engineering Change Order.
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Apply Change.
2. The Applicable Changes Dialog Box displays. Select the required ECO Impacted
Design and click the Apply Change button.
3. The Change Manager Apply ECO Dialog Box and/or the Change Manager Preview
ECO Dialog Box are displayed, depending on which was displayed at the end of the
previous session. (You can use the View ( )Toolbar button to toggle between the two
dialog boxes.

Note
The Simulate Change Output Window displays automatically. It reports all the
identified changes that will be applied on processing the ECO, without the design
changes being committed.

4. On the Change Manager Apply ECO Dialog Box, choose File > Options.
The Options (Apply ECO) Dialog Box displays.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 133

February 2016
Projects and Designs
Identifying Topology Changes with Hotspots

5. Configure any ECO apply change settings on the Translation, Change Policy and Setup
tabs. These settings are persisted from the last time the dialog box was used.
6. Any topology changes are highlighted in the Change Manager Preview ECO Dialog Box
as hotspots. See “Identifying Topology Changes with Hotspots” on page 134 for more
information.
7. Click the Process button. The ECO changes are applied to the target design. See
Harness Object Behavior on Applying ECO Changes for information about how the
changes are applied to different harness objects.
Results
• The recorded changes are all applied to the target design revision.
• The Apply Change Output Window displays. It reports the changes that have been
applied on processing the ECO. Any changes that could not be made due to conflict in
the target design state are also reported for manual intervention.
Related Topics
Recording a Change with an ECO
Harness Object Behavior on Applying ECO Changes
Identifying Topology Changes with Hotspots
ECO Import and Export

Identifying Topology Changes with Hotspots

The ECO change manager contains functionality that enables the quick identification of harness
topology changes by means of hotspots.
Objects in the Change Manager Preview ECO Dialog Box (where possible connectivity issues
exist) are highlighted as shown in Figure 2-5. Hotspots are shown if all connected objects in the
preview are linked but there are still connectivity issues. These issues include:

• Connected bundles at a node in the source data are left unlinked to the same node in the
target design.
• Connected bundles at a node in the target design are left unlinked to the same node in the
source data.
• There is a connector mismatch at a node.

134 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Projects and Designs
Identifying Topology Changes with Hotspots

Figure 2-5. Hotspot Visualization

Clicking on a hotspot automatically highlights the bundles and connectors which are causing the
issue, as shown in Figure 2-6, where Bundle 8 has switched nodes. These can then be
investigated.

Figure 2-6. Hotspot Issue Highlighting

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 135

February 2016
Projects and Designs
Harness Object Behavior on Applying ECO Changes

Harness Object Behavior on Applying ECO

Changes
ECO design changes are applied to target designs in different ways depending on the object type
being processed.
Bundles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Splices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Modular Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Fixings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Insulations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Multicores . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Bundles
The Change Manager Apply ECO process offers the following support for bundles.
• Place - Appropriate bundles are created as specified.
If multiple objects are selected for placement, all selected bundles are placed first, this is
because placement of splices, fixings and protections, mandates that underlying bundles
are already placed.
• Link - Creates a permanent association between the target object and its counterpart in
the source.
• Unlink - Clears the value in the selected Capital object’s External ID attribute, breaking
the link with the Source object.
• Autolink - Only Name and Length are applicable to bundles.
• Synchronize - Updates the linked object with the source data. The following attributes
are synchronized in accordance with any defined Change Policy:
o MaxBundleWidth
o MinBendRadius
o Option Expression
o The Source ID of a linked bundle is displayed in the Edit Bundle dialog box as an
attribute of the bundle.

136 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Projects and Designs
Harness Object Behavior on Applying ECO Changes

Splices
The Change Manager Apply ECO process offers the following support for splices.
• Place - If the source data has a part number specified and the part is available in the
library, then it is assigned to the splice created in the design. If the part is not found, the
splice is still created as per the source data, and a warning related to the missing part is
displayed in the Status field. The splice is created even if the source data does not have a
part number specified.
If the underlying bundle is not linked, the splice is not be placed and an error is
displayed in the Status field.
All splice cavity names (default L, R, X or any other user defined name) are preserved.
• Link - Creates a permanent association between the target object and its counterpart in
the source.
• Unlink - Clears the value in the selected Capital object’s External ID attribute, breaking
the link with the Source object.
• Autolink - Only Name, Offset, ElecId and PartNumber are applicable to splices
• Synchronize - Updates the linked object with the source data.
o The part number specified in the source data is searched for in the library and if
found, is assigned to the splice in the design (accordance with any defined Change
Policy) irrespective of whether it is already part assigned or not. If the part is not
found, then the existing part assigned to the splice in the design will remain.
o The Source ID of a linked splice is displayed in the Capital HarnessXC Edit Splice
dialog box as an attribute of the splice.

Devices
The Change Manager Apply ECO process offers the following support for devices.
• Place - A device is placed at the bundle end node if the connected bundle is already
placed. Otherwise it is placed at the node coordinates. New incoming devices, without a
node, are automatically placed on existing structure nodes in the design with the same
name, and without any node component.
If the source data has a part number specified and the part is available in the library, then
it is assigned to the device created in the design. If the part is not found, the device is
still created as per the source data, and a warning related to the missing part is displayed
in the Status field. The device is created even if the source data does not have a part
number specified.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 137

February 2016
Projects and Designs
Harness Object Behavior on Applying ECO Changes

Cavities are created as specified in the source data. Additional components are created
only as part of the housing of the device part, so the Place function only needs to select
appropriate additional components after assigning the device part.
• Link - Creates a permanent association between the target object and its counterpart in
the source.
• Unlink - Clears the value in the selected Capital object’s External ID attribute, breaking
the link with the Source object.
• Autolink - Only Name, ElecId and PartNumber are applicable to devices.
• Synchronize - The linked device is updated with the source data.
o The part number specified in the source data is searched for in the library and if
found, is assigned to the device in the design (accordance with any defined Change
Policy) irrespective of whether it is already part assigned or not. If the part is not
found, then the existing part assigned to the device in the design will remain.
o If an associated additional component part (or its quantity) are different, a Property
Mismatch is shown. If the additional component part specified in the source data is
different from the selected additional components, and if the new additional
component exists in the library as an available additional component, then that one is
selected.
o If the number of cavities differs between the source data and the harness device, a
Property Mismatch is shown. If the number of cavities is greater in the source device
than the target device, remaining non-linked cavities are created.

Note
Creation of cavities is performed only if there is no part assigned. User-defined
properties of cavities are not considered as this is not supported in Capital
HarnessXC.

• Changes to cavities are managed based on a one-to-one mapping between the cavities in
the source data and those in the target design, using the cavity name.
• The Option Expression and Module Expression fields are also synchronized.
• The Source ID of a linked device is displayed in the Capital HarnessXC Edit Device
dialog box as an attribute of the device.

Connectors
The Change Manager Apply ECO process offers the following support for connectors.
• Place - A connector is placed at the bundle end node if the connected bundle is already
placed. Otherwise it is placed at the node coordinates. New incoming connectors,

138 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Projects and Designs
Harness Object Behavior on Applying ECO Changes

without a node, are automatically placed on existing structure nodes in the design with
the same name, and without any node component.
If the source data has a part number specified and the part is available in the library, then
it is assigned to the connector created in the design. If the part is not found, the
connector is still created as per the source data, and a warning related to the missing part
is displayed in the Status field. The connector is created even if the source data does not
have a part number specified.
Cavities are created as specified in the source data. Backshells and any other additional
components are created only as part of the housing of the connector part, so the Place
function only needs to select an appropriate backshell and other components as
additional components after assigning the connector part.
• Link - Creates a permanent association between the target object and its counterpart in
the source.
• Unlink - Clears the value in the selected Capital object’s External ID attribute, breaking
the link with the Source object.
• Autolink - Only Name, ElecId and PartNumber are applicable to connectors.
• Synchronize - The linked connector is updated with the source data.
o The part number specified in the source data is searched for in the library and if
found, is assigned to the connector in the design (accordance with any defined
Change Policy) irrespective of whether it is already part assigned or not. If the part is
not found, then the existing part assigned to the connector in the design will remain.
o If an associated backshell part or additional component part (or its quantity) are
different, a Property Mismatch is shown. If the backshell part or additional
component part specified in the source data are different from the selected additional
components, and if the new backshell/additional component exists in the library as
an available additional component, then that one is selected. User-defined properties
of a backshell are not considered as this is not supported in Capital HarnessXC. The
length of backshell is also not synchronized.
o If the number of cavities differs between the source data and the harness connector, a
Property Mismatch is shown. If the number of cavities is greater in the source
connector than the target connector, remaining non-linked cavities are created.

Note
Creation of cavities is performed only if there is no part assigned. User-defined
properties of cavities are not considered as this is not supported in Capital
HarnessXC.

• Changes to cavities are managed based on a one-to-one mapping between the cavities in
the source data and those in the target design, using the cavity name. Changes to plugs,
seals and terminals are synchronized.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 139

February 2016
Projects and Designs
Harness Object Behavior on Applying ECO Changes

• Cavity wire combinations, including “autoselect” attributes for plugs and seals are
supported, enabling multiple cavity details to be correctly handled.
• The Plugged and Sealed flags of connectors are also synchronized. These flags are
recursively applied to cavities.
• The Option Expression and Module Expression fields are also synchronized.
• The Source ID of a linked connector is displayed in the Capital HarnessXC Edit
Connector dialog box as an attribute of the connector.

Modular Connectors
The Change Manager Apply ECO process offers the following support for modular connectors.
Note
This section details only that functionality that is specific to modular connectors. Refer to
the Connectors section, above, for a full description of connector functionality.

• Place - If the modular connector shell is not yet placed, it is placed at the bundle end
node if the connected bundle is already placed, else it is placed at the node coordinates.
Sub-connectors are placed at reference nodes, connected to the connector shell by zero-
length bundles.
o If none, or some, of the sub-connectors of the shell have been previously linked, the
connector shell is placed and a Topology Mismatch warning is displayed in the
connector shell’s Status field. The Apply Change Output Window displays a
message advising remedial action is taken to ensure that all internal objects are
linked.
o If the sub-connectors are already linked, the connector shell is placed and all sub-
connectors, along with the connector shell, are grouped to be a single modular
connector. The grouping information is obtained from the connector shell object of
the source data and the shellid attribute of the sub-connector objects.
• Link - The connector shell object can be linked to any parent connector using the
Source ID.
o If any of the component connectors are not linked, a Topology Mismatch is
displayed in the Status field for the connector shell.
o In cases where the connector shell is not linked, a Topology Mismatch is displayed
in the Status field on each of the linked sub-connectors.
• Unlink - Unlink the modular connector by clearing the Source ID from the connector
shell and all sub-connectors.
• Autolink - Only Name, ElecId, PartNumber and shellid are applicable to modular
connectors

140 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Projects and Designs
Harness Object Behavior on Applying ECO Changes

• Synchronize - The grouping information of the modular connector is synchronized as in

the source data.

Fixings
The Change Manager Apply ECO process offers the following support for fixings.
• Place - Appropriate fixings are created as specified by the type (a grommet is placed for
type Grommet, a clip for type Clip, and so on).
o If the fixing type is not specified, but the part number can be found in the library,
that part’s fixing type is used.
o If a matching part is found in the library, but the fixing type assigned to it differs
from that assigned to the source fixing, then the type assigned to the library part is
used.
o If a fixing type is not specified and no matching part number is found in the library,
a clip is placed as default, and Fixing is displayed in the Change Manager.

Note
If a subsequent source file is imported for the same harness, for those fixings
whose type has previously been determined, the correct type will still be
displayed.

o If the source data has a part number specified and the part is available in the library,
then it is assigned to the fixing created in the design. If the part is not found, the
fixing is still created as per the source data, and a warning related to the missing part
is displayed in the Status field. The fixing is created even if the source data does not
have a part number specified.
If the underlying bundle is not linked, the fixing will not be placed and an error is shown
in the Status field.
If the fixing has multiple locations then Unsupported Action is displayed for Place.
• Link - Link the objects by assigning the Source ID. If the fixing has multiple locations
then Unsupported Action is displayed. Also, if the fixing type is specified, only that
type is linkable. (a clip can only be linked to a clip, a grommet can only be linked to a
grommet). However, if the type is not specified, then a fixing is linkable to any of the
types.
• Unlink - Unlink the objects by clearing the Source ID. If the fixing has multiple
locations then Unsupported Action is displayed.
• Autolink - Only Name, Offset and PartNumber are applicable to fixings.
• Synchronize - Updates the fixing with the source data.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 141

February 2016
Projects and Designs
Harness Object Behavior on Applying ECO Changes

o A Property Mismatch is displayed if Offset, PartNumber, Option Expression or

user-defined properties are different.
o A Topology Mismatch is displayed if the underlying bundle is not linked.
o If the fixing has multiple locations then Unsupported Action is displayed.
o The fixing is moved according to the Offset supplied in the source data. If the fixing
happens to be in a different linked bundle, the fixing is moved across the bundle.
o The part number specified in the source data is searched for in the library and if
found, is assigned to the fixing in the design (accordance with any defined Change
Policy) irrespective of whether it is already part assigned or not. If the part is not
found, then the existing part assigned to the fixing in the design will remain.
o The Option Expression field is also synchronized.
o The Source ID is displayed in the Edit dialog box for Clips, Grommets and Other
components.

Insulations
The Change Manager Apply ECO process offers the following support for insulations.
• Place - Appropriate insulations are created as specified by the insulation type.
o Insulations with the same start and end nodes (after offset conversion and
approximation to multiples of bundle precision, as dictated by the source data) are
created in the same Capital HarnessXC insulation run.
o Insulation type is set as Untaped, Overlap Tape, Spiral Tape, Space Tape, Fixed
Tube, Fixed Cut-back Tube, Fixed Pulled-back Tube, Selected Tube, Selected
Cut-back Tube or Selected Pulled-back Tube as given by the subtype field.
• If the subtype field is not present, but the part number can be found in the library,
that part’s insulation type is used.
• If a matching part is found in the library, but the subtype assigned to it differs
from that assigned to the source insulation, the subtype assigned to the library
part is used.
• If the subtype field is not present and no matching part number is found in the
library, the insulation type is set as FixedTube for source insulation type Tube,
as OverlapTape for source insulation type Tape, and as SpotTape for source
insulation type SpotTape.

Note
If a subsequent source file is imported for the same harness, for those
insulations whose subtype has previously been determined, the correct
subtype will still be displayed.

142 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Projects and Designs
Harness Object Behavior on Applying ECO Changes

o Insulations are placed into layers dictated according to the layer values in the source
data. Once placed, all source supplied insulation layer numbers are compared with
their Capital counterparts; a Property Mismatch is displayed if found to be different.
o If the part number is included in the source data, Place will search in the library for
the exact part (using a Tape or Tube filter) and if the part is found it is assigned to
the object. If the part is not found, a warning is displayed in the Status field and the
insulation is created as specified in the source data but without the library part
number.
o If the underlying bundles are not linked, the insulation will not be placed and an
error is displayed in the Status field.
o Spot Tape is placed at a location defined as the mid-point between the startLocation
and endLocation positions.
o If the incoming insulation has an insulation code assigned, and a matching code
exists within the current project, insulation layers are created as dictated by the code.
• Link - Link the objects by assigning the Source ID. If the insulation type is specified,
linking is possible only with same type. For example, a spot tape can only be linked to a
spot tape.
• Unlink - Clears the value in the selected Capital object’s External ID attribute, breaking
the link with the Source object.
• Autolink - Only Name, Offset, Length and PartNumber are applicable to insulations.
• Synchronize - Updates the linked object with the source data.
o An insulation is moved according to the start or end offset supplied in the source
data. This is done by repositioning the reference nodes. Rounding rules in Capital
HarnessXC are honored while updating offset values. If the end node is a structure
node, offset synchronization fails and an error message is displayed. If the insulation
ends happen to be in different linked bundle, they will not be moved across the
bundle.
o The part number specified in the source data is searched for in the library and if
found, is assigned to the insulation in the design (accordance with any defined
Change Policy) irrespective of whether it is already part assigned or not. If the part is
not found, then the existing part assigned to the insulation in the design will remain.
o If an insulation has been placed into a layer of an insulation run containing other
insulations, but has moved in a later iteration of the source data, the updated
insulation is removed from the insulation run and added to a new insulation run,
which is created if required.
o The Convoluted flag, Slit Tube flag, innerDiameter, numberTurns,
wallThickness, tapeThickness, overlap, insulationNote, optionExpression,

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 143

February 2016
Projects and Designs
Harness Object Behavior on Applying ECO Changes

colorCode and materialCode fields are synchronized with the corresponding fields
in the Capital HarnessXC insulation.
o The innerDiameter value is mapped to the Width attribute in Capital HarnessXC.
o The wallThickness and tapeThickness fields are mapped to the Thickness value
depending on whether the insulation type is Tube or Tape.
o A Property Mismatch is returned if the offset, length, part number, user-defined
properties, innerDiameter, thickness, option expression, insulation note, overlap,
color or material are different.
o A Topology Mismatch is returned if all underlying bundles are not one-to-one
linked.
o The Source ID is displayed in the Edit Insulation dialog box attributes.
o If either the source insulation does not have an insulation code associated, or the
code does not exist in the current project, and the linked insulation run in the design
has an associated insulation code, a connectivity mismatch is reported, and the run
will need to be synchronized manually.
o Assuming the source protection has an insulation code associated, which also exists
within the current project:
• If the linked insulation run in the design has a different insulation code
associated, a connectivity mismatch is reported, and all existing insulation layers
(associated with the existing insulation code) are deleted, and recreated using the
source insulation code. The “Update” change policy assigned to the TypeCode
attribute is honored.
• If the linked insulation run in the design has the same insulation code, no other
attributes of the source protection are synchronized and no mismatches are
reported.
• If the linked insulation run has no insulation code associated, the source code is
applied to the run. No other attributes of the source protection are synchronized.

Wires
The Change Manager Apply ECO process offers the following support for wires.
• Place - Appropriate wires are created.
o If the source data has a part number specified and the part is available in the library,
then it is assigned to the wire created in the design. If the part is not found, the wire
is still created as per the source data, and a warning related to the missing part is
displayed in the Status field. The wire is created even if the source data does not
have a part number specified.

144 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Projects and Designs
Harness Object Behavior on Applying ECO Changes

o Route is set according to the source data.

o Center-strip splices are associated if the associated splices in the source data are
already placed or linked in Capital HarnessXC. For multiple object placements,
bundles, connectors and splices are placed before wires.
o If all the underlying bundles are not linked, the wire is placed with appropriate
report.
o If all connecting cavities are not resolved, the wire is placed and error message
displayed.
• Link - Creates a permanent association between the target object and its counterpart in
the source.
• Unlink - Clears the value in the selected Capital object’s External ID attribute, breaking
the link with the Source object.
• Autolink - Only Name, Electrical ID, and PartNumber are applicable to wires.
• Synchronize - Updates the linked object with the source data.
o A Property Mismatch is returned if center-strip splices associated with the wire are
different in the source data and target design.
o A Topology Mismatch is returned if routes and connected cavities are different.
o The part number specified in the source data is searched for in the library and if
found, is assigned to the wire in the design (accordance with any defined Change
Policy) irrespective of whether it is already part assigned or not. If the part is not
found, then the existing part assigned to the wire in the design will remain.
o Wirematerial, Wirecolor, Wirespec, Wirelength, Wirecsa, WireNote,
OptionExpression, Material Code at Wire End, and so on, are set with the values
in the source data. Change Manager also ensures that attributes are not modified if
a library attribute and part are assigned.
o The Source ID is displayed as a wire attribute in the Edit Wires dialog box.

Multicores
The Change Manager Apply ECO process offers the following support for multicores.
• Place - Appropriate twisted or sheath multicore is created according to the multicore
type in the source data. Internal wires, shields and multicores are also placed. Shields are
placed as wires in Capital HarnessXC.
o If the source data has a part number specified and the part is available in the library,
then it is assigned to the multicore created in the design. If the part is not found, the
multicore is still created as per the source data, and a warning related to the missing

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 145

February 2016
Projects and Designs
Harness Object Behavior on Applying ECO Changes

part is displayed in the Status field. The multicore is created even if the source data
does not have a part number specified.
o Route and wire ends are set on wires according to the source data.
o If all the underlying bundles are not linked, or wire pins are not resolved, then wires
are placed and a report message displayed in the Status field.
• Link - Link the multicores by assigning the Source ID. This is also set for internal wires
and multicores. Internal objects are linked after an alphanumeric sort on members is
performed.
• Unlink - Unlink the multicores by clearing the Source ID. This is also cleared for
internal wires and multicores.
• Autolink - Only Name, Electrical Id and PartNumber are applicable to multicores.
• Synchronize - Updates the linked object with the source data.
o A Topology Mismatch is returned if member wires or multicores are different in the
source data and target design.
o If a part is not assigned and there is an incoming part, then that part is searched in the
library and, if found, assigned to the object.
o If the target object’s part number is different from the source part number, the new
part is assigned if there is a Change Policy that allows for part number change. If no
Change Policy is assigned, a warning is displayed in the Status field and the
incoming part is not assigned.
o If enabled in Capital HarnessXC, user-defined properties can be synchronized.
o Cablelength, cablecoverthickness, cablematerial, cablecolor, cablespec, and so
on, are set with the values in the source data. ECO Change Manager also ensures
that attributes are not modified if a library attribute and part are assigned.
o A wire’s attributes and library part are synchronized as specified in the wire section.
o The Source ID is displayed as a multicore attribute in the Edit Multicores dialog
box.

Options
Source options are synchronized with project options.
• Options are not be listed in the Change Manager Apply ECO Dialog Box or Change
Manager Preview ECO Dialog Box.
• If any of the incoming options are not available in the project, a Missing Options
message is displayed on the selected harness’ Status field if linked and selected. You

146 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Projects and Designs
ECO Import and Export

can then perform the Synchronize action on the harness to import the new options into
the project.
• If the you have the Option Maintenance permission, the new options are imported to
the project, otherwise an error report is displayed.
Related Topics
Change Manager Preview ECO Dialog Box
Capture and Apply a Change Within an ECO
Change Manager Apply ECO Dialog Box
Harness Shape Parameters

ECO Import and Export

ECO Design Change Records can be imported and exported between ECOs on the same or
different databases.
As outlined in the “cost only” design change example in Figure 2-1, once you have created an
ECO Impacted Design with recorded changes, it can be exported and sent to another site for
application to a target design that system.

Exporting an ECO Design Change Record

You can export ECO Impacted Designs for transfer between ECOs on the same or different
databases.
Restrictions and Limitations
• Only ECO impacted designs with a Completion Status of “Completed - Changes
Captured” can be exported.
Prerequisites
• An ECO exists with a valid ECO impacted design which (optionally) has attached
images.
• The Engineering Change Orders Dialog Box is open.
Procedure
1. Select the required Impacted Design.
2. Click the Export( ) button on the Impacted Designs toolbar.

The Export file chooser dialog box displays with a default file type of “Engineering
Change Order .eco”. Enter the required name for the export file and navigate to the
required location.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 147

February 2016
Projects and Designs
Importing an ECO Design Change Record

3. Click the Export button.

Results
• The “Engineering Change Order .eco” file is created at the specified location.
• The ECO impacted design (including and any associated captured change data) is saved
to the .eco export file.
• All images associated with the ECO impacted design are saved to the .eco export file.
Related Topics
Importing an ECO Design Change Record
Engineering Change Orders Dialog Box
Capture and Apply a Change Within an ECO

Importing an ECO Design Change Record

You can import “Engineering Change Order .eco” files to transfer ECO Design Change
Records between ECOs on the same or different databases.
Prerequisites
• An .eco file has been created.
• The Engineering Change Orders Dialog Box is open.
Procedure
1. Select the required ECO in the Category panel.
2. Click the Import ( ) button on the Impacted Designs toolbar. A file chooser dialog
box displays.
3. Navigate to the required .eco file and click Import.
Results
• The ECO Impacted Design (including and any associated captured change data) are
imported.
• All images associated with the ECO Design Change Record are imported and displayed
in the images panel.
• The Impacted Design’s table entry for the imported ECO Design Change Record:
o Displays in italic.
o Does not display a “Release Level” or “Latest” entry as the target project does not
have that information.

148 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Projects and Designs
Importing an ECO Design Change Record

Related Topics
Exporting an ECO Design Change Record
Engineering Change Orders Dialog Box
Capture and Apply a Change Within an ECO

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 149

February 2016
Projects and Designs
Importing an ECO Design Change Record

150 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Chapter 3
Diagrams

This chapter contains the following topics which explain how to perform various generic editing
actions on diagrams.
Common Edit Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Undoing an Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Redoing an Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Repeating an Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Cutting and Pasting an Object in a Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Copying and Pasting an Object in a Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Deleting an Object in a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Moving Objects from a Diagram to Another Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Selecting All Objects in a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Finding and Selecting Objects by Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Finding and Selecting Objects by Attribute or Property. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Specifying the Highlight Color of Selected Objects in a Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Using the Stroke Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Using Keyboard Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Window Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Arranging Diagram Windows for Viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Using Tearable Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Zooming In and Out of Diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Panning Across a Diagram Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 151

February 2016
Diagrams
Common Edit Actions

Common Edit Actions

The following topics explain how to perform common editing actions on objects in a diagram.
Undoing an Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Redoing an Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Repeating an Action. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Cutting and Pasting an Object in a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Copying and Pasting an Object in a Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Deleting an Object in a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Moving Objects from a Diagram to Another Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Selecting All Objects in a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Finding and Selecting Objects by Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Finding and Selecting Objects by Attribute or Property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Specifying the Highlight Color of Selected Objects in a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Using the Stroke Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Using Keyboard Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Undoing an Action
This topic explains how to use the undo facility to reverse up to the last 20 actions that have
been performed.
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Undo.
2. The previous action is undone and is added to the stored list of undone actions.

Note
If you perform a new action after you have undone one or more actions, this empties
the stored list of undone actions.

Related Topics
Redoing an Action
Repeating an Action
Cutting and Pasting an Object in a Diagram
Copying and Pasting an Object in a Diagram
Deleting an Object in a Diagram
Selecting All Objects in a Diagram

152 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Diagrams
Redoing an Action

Finding and Selecting Objects by Name

Finding and Selecting Objects by Attribute or Property
Specifying the Highlight Color of Selected Objects in a Diagram
Using the Stroke Tool

Redoing an Action
This topic explains how to use the redo facility to re-perform the last actions that were reversed
using the undo facility.
Note
If there are no more actions to redo, the Redo option changes to Repeat... .

Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Redo.
2. The previously undone action is redone.
Related Topics
Undoing an Action
Repeating an Action
Cutting and Pasting an Object in a Diagram
Copying and Pasting an Object in a Diagram
Deleting an Object in a Diagram
Selecting All Objects in a Diagram
Finding and Selecting Objects by Name
Finding and Selecting Objects by Attribute or Property
Specifying the Highlight Color of Selected Objects in a Diagram
Using the Stroke Tool

Repeating an Action
This topic explains how to repeat an action. If there are no undone actions that can be redone,
the Edit menu includes an option to repeat the last action that was performed.
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Repeat.
2. The application is put in the correct mode to repeat the last action performed.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 153

February 2016
Diagrams
Cutting and Pasting an Object in a Diagram

Examples
A number of the component placement functions can be locked to enable the continuous
placement of the same component type until the tool is unlocked. For example, in Capital
HarnessXC, you can lock the Static Bundle function (press Space Bar and enter Static Bundle),
allowing you to keep drawing bundles (and confirming the entered length) without having to
reselect the Static Bundle action.

To lock a function, hold down the Shift key while selecting it, either from the menu or by
clicking the appropriate icon.

To unlock a tool, press the Esc key.

Related Topics
Undoing an Action
Redoing an Action
Cutting and Pasting an Object in a Diagram
Copying and Pasting an Object in a Diagram
Deleting an Object in a Diagram
Selecting All Objects in a Diagram
Finding and Selecting Objects by Name
Finding and Selecting Objects by Attribute or Property
Specifying the Highlight Color of Selected Objects in a Diagram
Using the Stroke Tool

Cutting and Pasting an Object in a Diagram

This topic explains how to cut and paste an object in a diagram.
Procedure
1. Select the object.
2. Use one of the following actions:
• Press Space Bar and enter Cut
• Right-click on the selected entity and select Cut
The object is cut from the diagram and saved to the clipboard.
3. Use one of the following actions:
• Select Edit > Paste from the menu

154 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Diagrams
Copying and Pasting an Object in a Diagram

• Press Space Bar and enter Paste

4. Click where you want to place the entity.
Related Topics
Undoing an Action
Redoing an Action
Repeating an Action
Copying and Pasting an Object in a Diagram
Deleting an Object in a Diagram
Selecting All Objects in a Diagram
Finding and Selecting Objects by Name
Finding and Selecting Objects by Attribute or Property
Specifying the Highlight Color of Selected Objects in a Diagram
Using the Stroke Tool

Copying and Pasting an Object in a Diagram

This topic explains how to copy and paste an object in a diagram. You can copy primitive
objects, comment symbols and images both within a diagram and from one diagram to another,
as long as the designs are of the same type.
• Graphic objects are only pasted to the current diagram. To paste objects from the
clipboard to other diagrams you must first open each required diagram and repeat the
paste action.
• If you attempt to undo this action, you will clear the clipboard only.
• Only graphical objects and comment symbols that are directly part of the diagram, or
that you have placed on the diagram may be copied and pasted.
The following objects are available to copy and paste in Capital HarnessXC diagrams:

• Text
• Circle
• Rectangle
• Curve
• Polygon
• Line
• Arc

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 155

February 2016
Diagrams
Deleting an Object in a Diagram

• Comment Symbol
• Image
• Group
Procedure
1. Select the object.
2. Use one of the following actions:
• Press Space Bar and enter Copy
• Right-click on the selected entity and select Copy
• Use the key combination CTRL + C.
3. Either:
• Press Space Bar and enter Paste
• Use the key combination CTRL + V.
• Right-click on the selected entity and select Paste
4. Alternatively, select and drag the copy to the location where you want to paste it.
Results
A copy of the object is added to the diagram near the original object.
Related Topics
Undoing an Action
Redoing an Action
Repeating an Action
Cutting and Pasting an Object in a Diagram
Deleting an Object in a Diagram
Selecting All Objects in a Diagram
Finding and Selecting Objects by Name
Finding and Selecting Objects by Attribute or Property
Specifying the Highlight Color of Selected Objects in a Diagram
Using the Stroke Tool

Deleting an Object in a Diagram

This topic explains how to delete an object in a diagram.

156 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Diagrams
Moving Objects from a Diagram to Another Diagram

Procedure
1. Select the object.
2. Use one of the following actions:
• Press Space Bar and enter Delete
• Right-click on the selected entity and select Delete
• Click the Delete key on your keyboard
3. The object is deleted.
Related Topics
Undoing an Action
Redoing an Action
Repeating an Action
Cutting and Pasting an Object in a Diagram
Copying and Pasting an Object in a Diagram
Selecting All Objects in a Diagram
Finding and Selecting Objects by Name
Finding and Selecting Objects by Attribute or Property
Specifying the Highlight Color of Selected Objects in a Diagram
Using the Stroke Tool

Moving Objects from a Diagram to Another

Diagram
It is possible to move objects from one diagram to another diagram within a design.
In Capital Logic, if objects to be moved are connected to other objects that are not selected to be
moved, the connections are broken when the objects are moved. No connectivity is created
automatically in the new diagram. However, you can move objects as normal to create
connectivity.

The following restrictions apply to the moving of objects in Capital Logic:

• Individual pins are not moved without the parent pinlist moving.
• Device connectors cannot be copied without their owning pinlist.
• Inline connectors cannot be split.
• A multicore will not be moved unless the entire multicore has been selected.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 157

February 2016
Diagrams
Selecting All Objects in a Diagram

• A subset of an assembly cannot be moved. Only the entire assembly can be moved.
In Capital Integrator and Capital Topology, any objects graphically connected to the selected
objects are moved with them.

In all tools, you cannot undo the Move To action.

Procedure
1. Select the objects that you want to move either in the diagram window or in the Design
Browser Window. Right-click on the selected objects and select the Move To option
from the pop-up menu. Alternatively, right-click on the selected objects and select the
Actions > Move To menu option.
2. The Diagram Selection facility is displayed. From the list of diagrams, select the
diagram to which you want to move the objects and click the OK button.
3. The selected diagram is opened in the diagram window and the objects are moved to it
and placed in the same position that they occupied in the original diagram. You can then
move and the objects as required.

Selecting All Objects in a Diagram

This topic explains how to select all objects in a diagram so that you can perform an action on
all of them at once.
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Select All.
All of the objects on the diagram are highlighted.
2. Perform the required action.
Related Topics
Undoing an Action
Redoing an Action
Repeating an Action
Cutting and Pasting an Object in a Diagram
Copying and Pasting an Object in a Diagram
Deleting an Object in a Diagram
Finding and Selecting Objects by Name
Finding and Selecting Objects by Attribute or Property
Specifying the Highlight Color of Selected Objects in a Diagram

158 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Diagrams
Finding and Selecting Objects by Name

Using the Stroke Tool

Finding and Selecting Objects by Name

This topic explains how to search for an object in a diagram by using its name.
Procedure
1. With the diagram open, press Space Bar and enter Select by Name.
The Select By Name Dialog Box is displayed.
2. In the Name field, enter the name for which you are searching.
3. Use the Regular Expression option to specify whether the Name string you entered
contains Regular Expression wildcard search characters. Leave un-selected if the string
is an exact value that must be matched.

Note
Common Regular Expression search wildcards are:
.* searches for any character (.), zero or more times (*), $ matches at the end of a string
(e.g. searchme$), ^ matches at the beginning of a string (e.g. ^searchme)

4. Click OK.
5. Any objects with matching names are selected in the diagram and in any browser trees
where they appear.
Related Topics
Undoing an Action
Redoing an Action
Repeating an Action
Cutting and Pasting an Object in a Diagram
Copying and Pasting an Object in a Diagram
Deleting an Object in a Diagram
Selecting All Objects in a Diagram
Finding and Selecting Objects by Attribute or Property
Specifying the Highlight Color of Selected Objects in a Diagram
Using the Stroke Tool

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 159

February 2016
Diagrams
Finding and Selecting Objects by Attribute or Property

Finding and Selecting Objects by Attribute or

Property
This topic explains how to search for an object in a diagram by using a value for a particular
attribute or property.
Procedure
1. With the diagram open, press Space Bar and enter Select By Attribute/Property.
The Select by Attribute/Property Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Specify the following:
• In the Attribute/Property field, enter the property or attribute name
• In the Value field, specify the value for which you are searching.
• Use the Regular Expression option to specify whether the Value string you entered
contains Regular Expression wildcard search characters. Leave un-selected if the
string is an exact value that must be matched.

Note
Common Regular Expression search wildcards are:
.* searches for any character (.), zero or more times (*), $ matches at the end of a
string (e.g. searchme$), ^ matches at the beginning of a string (e.g. ^searchme)

3. Click OK.
4. Any objects with matching values for the specified attribute or property are selected in
the diagram and in any browser trees where they appear.
Related Topics
Undoing an Action
Redoing an Action
Repeating an Action
Cutting and Pasting an Object in a Diagram
Copying and Pasting an Object in a Diagram
Deleting an Object in a Diagram
Selecting All Objects in a Diagram
Finding and Selecting Objects by Name
Specifying the Highlight Color of Selected Objects in a Diagram
Using the Stroke Tool

160 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Diagrams
Specifying the Highlight Color of Selected Objects in a Diagram

Specifying the Highlight Color of Selected Objects

in a Diagram
This topic explains how to select (specify) the color used to display (highlight) selected objects
in a diagram.
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Selection Color; the Select Color dialog is displayed.
2. Select the color that you want the system to use when highlighting selected objects in a
diagram and click OK.

Note
The color that you have selected will also be used in other sessions of Capital design
tools when you start them.

Related Topics
Undoing an Action
Redoing an Action
Repeating an Action
Cutting and Pasting an Object in a Diagram
Copying and Pasting an Object in a Diagram
Deleting an Object in a Diagram
Selecting All Objects in a Diagram
Finding and Selecting Objects by Name
Finding and Selecting Objects by Attribute or Property
Using the Stroke Tool

Using the Stroke Tool

This topic explains how to use the stroke tool to perform various actions by moving the mouse.
Procedure
Note
The stroke tool enables you to perform various actions by moving the mouse in a
pre-defined way. If you do not have a middle mouse button, you cannot use the
stroke tool.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 161

February 2016
Diagrams
Using the Stroke Tool

Follow these steps:

• Each stroke action maps to a pattern on the following nine part grid:

• A stroke is identified by the path of the mouse through the grid. For example, the
following stroke that is a counter-clockwise C pattern is named 3214789 because of
the grid squares that it passes through.

• The following stroke actions are available:

Table 3-1. Stroke Actions

Stroke Action Grid Path
Zoom Area 159
Zoom All 951
Zoom in by 20% 357
Zoom out by 20% 753
Delete 741236987
Undo 1478963
Redo 7412369
Add net (in Capital Logic), Add bundle (in 258
Capital Integrator)
Route selected (in Capital Logic only) 96321

162 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Diagrams
Using Keyboard Shortcuts

Using Keyboard Shortcuts

This topic contains a list of keyboard shortcuts available in Capital.
In certain cases shortcut actions may differ depending on the tool in which you are working, but
some actions are common across all tools. Table 3-2 contains a list of keyboard shortcuts.

Table 3-2. Keyboard Shortcuts

Keyboard Shortcut Action
All Tools
Editing
CTRL + X Cut
CTRL + C Copy
CTRL + V Paste
DEL Delete
CTRL + Z Undo
CTRL + Y Redo
CTRL + A Select All
CTRL + E Extend Selection
CTRL + D Edit Rules
CTRL + SHIFT + O Edit Options
CTRL + SHIFT + F Edit Functional Module codes
CTRL + SHIFT + P Edit Production Module codes
CTRL + ALT + R Pivot Text
ALT + ENTER Properties
DOUBLE CLICK Properties
CTRL + SHIFT + UP Bring Forward
CTRL + SHIFT + DOWN Send Backward
SHIFT + Toolbar Repeat Selected Action
SHIFT + {SELECT} Multi-select sequence of rows
DRAG + {SELECT} Area select objects on diagram
CTRL + {SELECT} Multi-select objects
F Flip while placing symbols
R Rotate while placing symbols

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 163

February 2016
Diagrams
Using Keyboard Shortcuts

Table 3-2. Keyboard Shortcuts (cont.)

Keyboard Shortcut Action
Styling
SHIFT + A Apply Style
CTRL + SHIFT + A Apply Style to All
SHIFT + E Edit Style
ALT + SHIFT + F Force Apply Style
CTRL + SHIFT + I Split table
SHIFT + U Fix decoration
Graphics
T Text
L Line
R Rectangle
Y Polygon
C Circle
A Arc
K Curve
CTRL + SHIFT + T Snap to Object
Navigation
CTRL + O Open Project
CTRL + N New Project
CTRL + S Save
Z Zoom selected
CTRL + ZOOM / PAN Spring-loaded Zoom
ALT + NUMPAD + + Zoom In
ALT + NUMPAD + - Zoom Out
CTRL + P Print
CTRL + ALT + A Add Print Region
CTRL + ALT + E Print Region Settings
KEYBOARD * Expand All Tree nodes
KEYBOARD + Expand Tree Node
KEYBOARD - Collapse Tree Node

164 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Diagrams
Using Keyboard Shortcuts

Table 3-2. Keyboard Shortcuts (cont.)

Keyboard Shortcut Action
F1 Help
Capital Logic
Editing
CTRL + SHIFT + V Paste Extended
CTRL + M Move To
CTRL + R Route Selected
CTRL + SHIFT + R Auto-Route
CTRL + SHIFT + S Slice
O Overbraids
V Shared Overbraids
X View Related Items
D Disconnect Selected
SHIFT + W Connect by Wire (overlapping pins)
SHIFT + C Connect by Net (overlapping pins)
SHIFT + NumPad + + Connect by Pin (overlapping pins)
Add
P Pin
I Internal Pin
N Net
G Highway
W Wire
S Shield Termination
M Edit / Add Multicores
CTRL + SHIFT + T Ring Terminal
V Overbraid (Shared)
CTRL + L Device (from Library)
Editing
CTRL + SHIFT + V Paste Extended (Capital Logic)
CTRL + M Move To
CTRL + R Route Selected

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 165

February 2016
Diagrams
Using Keyboard Shortcuts

Table 3-2. Keyboard Shortcuts (cont.)

Keyboard Shortcut Action
CTRL + SHIFT + R Auto-Route
CTRL + SHIFT + S Slice
O Overbraids
V Shared Overbraids
X View Related Items
D Disconnect Selected
SHIFT + W Connect by Wire (overlapping pins)
SHIFT + C Connect by Net (overlapping pins)
SHIFT + NumPad + + Connect by Pin (overlapping pins)
CTRL + G Generate Selected Names
Capital Topology
Editing
X Show Physical Source
CTRL + G Generate Selected Names
Add
I Inline Pair
] Inline Receptacle
[ Inline Plug
V Slot Connector
H Hole
B Bundle
Capital Integrator
Editing
CTRL + F5 Vehicle Models
CTRL + F8 Vehicle Configurations
ALT + F8 Configuration Builder
CTRL + F7 Harness Levels
CTRL + W Synthesize All Wiring
X Show Physical Source
CTRL + G Generate Selected Names

166 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Diagrams
Using Keyboard Shortcuts

Table 3-2. Keyboard Shortcuts (cont.)

Keyboard Shortcut Action
M Edit Multicore
Add
I Inline Pair
] Inline Receptacle
[ Inline Plug
V Slot Connector
H Hole
B Bundle
Capital HarnessXC
Styling
CTRL + H Hide decoration
CTRL + I Un-hide decoration
CTRL + F Edit Font Style
CTRL + E Edit Graphic Style
CTRL + W Edit Width Graphic Style
CTRL + SHIFT + H Edit Graphic Height
CTRL + SHIFT + E Edit Symbol Graphic Style
Editing
ALT + P Bundle Palette
CTRL + SHIFT + R Proportional Bundle Stretch
CTRL + R Edit Insulation Run
Add
CTRL + B Bundle (Dynamic)
SHIFT + B Bundle (Static)
CTRL + SHIFT + B Bundle (Define)
O Connector
CTRL + SHIFT + T Ring Terminal
S Splice
SHIFT + V Device
W Wires

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 167

February 2016
Diagrams
Using Keyboard Shortcuts

Table 3-2. Keyboard Shortcuts (cont.)

Keyboard Shortcut Action
M Multicores
V Overbraids
P Clip
F Fixture
G Grommet
I Insulation run (Bundle)
SHIFT + I Insulation run (Start & End)
SHIFT + D Dimension (Reference)
D Dimension (Standard)
CTRL + D Dimension (Contiguous)
SHIFT +F Dimension (External)
Rules
CTRL + SHIFT + C Apply Constraints
CTRL + SHIFT + L Route Wires
CTRL + ALT + SHIFT + L Clear Wire Route
CTRL + ALT + SHIFT + C Define Fixture Constraint
CTRL + ALT + X Place Fixtures
Processing
CTRL + ALT + L Calculate Wire/Multicore Lengths
CTRL + ALT + B Calculate Node/Bundle Sizes
CTRL + SHIFT + U Calculate Insulation Totals
CTRL + ALT + D Calculate Center Strip Distances
CTRL + ALT + G Calculate Harness Weight
CTRL + ALT + N Balance Splices
CTRL + ALT + F Balance Splices (Force Entry Direction)
CTRL + SHIFT + Z Optimize Splice Position
ALT + R De-populate redundant objects
Actions
CTRL + ALT + SHIFT + F Assign Functional Module Codes
CTRL + ALT + SHIFT + R Assign Production Module Codes

168 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Diagrams
Using Keyboard Shortcuts

Table 3-2. Keyboard Shortcuts (cont.)

Keyboard Shortcut Action
Process Part Selection
CTRL + ALT + P Select All Part Numbers
CTRL + ALT + W Select Wire Part Numbers
CTRL + ALT + M Select Multicore Part Numbers
CTRL + ALT + C Select Customer Part Numbers
CTRL + ALT + S Select Supplier Part Numbers
CTRL + ALT + Y Select Mandatory Component
CTRL + ALT + I Select Splice Part Numbers
CTRL + SHIFT + W Select Ultrasonic Weld P/N
CTRL + SHIFT + V Select Solder Sleeve P/N
CTRL + ALT + H Select Heat Shrink Sleeves
CTRL + ALT + O Select Spot Tapes
CTRL + ALT + U Select Tubes
CTRL + ALT + T Select Cavity Components
Harness Processing
CTRL + ALT + SHIFT + P Harness Processing
Capital Harness TVM
Actions
CTRL + ALT + SHIFT + B SBOM Processing
CTRL + ALT + SHIFT + Part Number Where Used
W
CTRL + ALT + SHIFT + Set Masters
M

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 169

February 2016
Diagrams
Window Controls

Window Controls
The following topics explain how to arrange open diagram windows and browser windows for
viewing and how to use the zoom and pan controls to change what you are viewing in a
window.
Arranging Diagram Windows for Viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Using Tearable Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Zooming In and Out of Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Panning Across a Diagram Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Arranging Diagram Windows for Viewing

This topic explains how to use the window controls to arrange open diagram windows for
viewing purposes. The window controls are available from the Windows menu.
Procedure
Select the following to rearrange and resize the diagram window:

• New
Creates a copy of the active window and its contents. Any changes made in the copy
are also made in the original. This is useful for viewing smaller sections of large
diagrams.
• Cascade
Rearranges and resizes the open diagram windows in a staggered fashion, allowing
selection and viewing of a window by clicking on it once.
• Tile Horizontal
Rearranges and resizes the open diagram windows so that they are aligned
horizontally.
• Tile Vertical
Rearranges and resizes the open diagram windows so that they are aligned vertically.
• Tabbed Mode
Resizes each diagram to occupy the entire display area, but adds a row of tabs at the
bottom of the display area to switch between open diagrams.
Related Topics
Using Tearable Tabs
Zooming In and Out of Diagrams

170 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Diagrams
Using Tearable Tabs

Panning Across a Diagram Window

Using Tearable Tabs

This topic explains how to display browser windows in separate windows that you can move
around your screen.
Any browser windows and tabs that are displayed at the bottom left of the application window
are tearable and can be dragged away from that position so that they are displayed in their own
separate windows.

Procedure
1. Click on the tab of the browser window and drag it to the location where you want to
display it.
2. Resize the browser window as required.

Note
To return the browser window to the bottom left of the main application window,
close the separate window. It returns to its original position automatically.

Related Topics
Arranging Diagram Windows for Viewing
Zooming In and Out of Diagrams
Panning Across a Diagram Window

Zooming In and Out of Diagrams

This topic explains how to use the zoom controls to zoom in and out of diagram windows.
Procedure
Choose one of the following options:

• Zoom In
Increases the scale of the diagram so that objects appear larger.
Either:
o Press Space Bar and enter Zoom In
o Press Ctrl+Shift+=
o Press Alt+NumPad+
• Zoom Out

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 171

February 2016
Diagrams
Zooming In and Out of Diagrams

Decreases the scale of the diagram so that objects appear smaller.

Either:
o Press Space Bar and enter Zoom Out
o Press Ctrl+Shift+-
o Press Alt+NumPad-
• Zoom Selected
Zooms in on the objects that you have selected in the diagram.
Select the objects and either:
o Press Space Bar and enter Zoom Selected
o Right-click on the diagram and select Zoom Selected
o Press Z
• Zoom Area
Zooms in on a specified area of a diagram.
Press Space Bar and enter Zoom Area.
The cursor changes to . Click once on the diagram to specify the first corner of the
area and click again to specify the opposite corner of the area.
• Zoom All
Zooms out to display all objects in the diagram.
Do one of the following:
o Press Space Bar and enter Zoom All
o Right-click on the diagram and select Zoom All
• Zoom
Allows you to zoom in or out by moving your mouse.
Either:
o Press Space Bar and enter Zoom
o Right-click on the diagram and select Zoom
To zoom out, move your mouse forwards or to the left. To zoom in, move your
mouse, backwards or to the right. Press the Esc key on your keyboard to turn off the
zoom mode.

172 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Diagrams
Panning Across a Diagram Window

Panning Across a Diagram Window

This topic explains how to pan across a diagram window.
Procedure
1. Do one of the following:
• Press Space Bar and enter Pan
• Right-click on the diagram and select Pan
2. The cursor changes to . Hold down the left mouse key and drag the cursor across the
diagram to pan. The diagram moves as you drag the cursor.

Note
You can activate the panning tool at any time by holding down the left mouse button
for at least a second. Once the tool is activated, you can drag the diagram canvas.

Related Topics
Arranging Diagram Windows for Viewing
Using Tearable Tabs
Zooming In and Out of Diagrams

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 173

February 2016
Diagrams
Panning Across a Diagram Window

174 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Chapter 4
Graphics

The following topics explain how to add and edit graphical shapes and graphical objects in a
diagram.
Borders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Adding a Border to a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Replacing a Border on a Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Removing a Border from a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Graphic Drawing Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Drawing a Line in a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Drawing a Rectangle in a Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Drawing a Polygon in a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Drawing a Circle in a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Drawing an Arc in a Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Drawing a Curved Line in a Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Adding Text Frames to a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Adding a Picture to a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Changing the Picture in an Image Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Link or Embed Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Adding a Comment Symbol to a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Resizing a Comment Symbol in a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Adding Properties to a Graphical Shape. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Editing a Property Value of Graphical Shape. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Editing the Graphical Properties of a Graphical Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Stretching a Graphical Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Moving a Graphical Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Deleting a Graphical Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Grouping Graphical Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Ungrouping Graphical Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Controlling the Layering Order (Z-Order) of Graphical Shapes Objects and Images . . . . 189
Graphics Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Adding a Graphics Point to a Graphical Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Deleting a Graphics Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Grip Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Adding a Grip Point to an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Deleting a Grip Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 175

February 2016
Graphics
Borders

Borders
The following topics explain how to add and edit the border in a diagram.
Adding a Border to a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Replacing a Border on a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Removing a Border from a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Adding a Border to a Diagram

This topic details how to add a border that has been created in Capital Symbol to a diagram.
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Border.
The Edit Border Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Browse through the border libraries in the Border Selection tree and select the border to
add to the diagram.
3. Click OK. The border is added to the diagram.
Related Topics
Replacing a Border on a Diagram
Removing a Border from a Diagram

Replacing a Border on a Diagram

This topic details how to replace a border that has been added to a diagram.
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Border.
The Edit Border Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Browse through the border libraries in the Border Selection tree and select the new
border to add to the diagram.
3. Click OK. The new border is added to the diagram.
Related Topics
Adding a Border to a Diagram
Removing a Border from a Diagram

176 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Graphics
Removing a Border from a Diagram

Removing a Border from a Diagram

This topic details how to remove a border that has been added to a diagram.
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Border.
The Edit Border Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Select [ No Border ] in the Border Selection tree.
3. Click OK. The border is removed from the diagram.
Related Topics
Adding a Border to a Diagram
Replacing a Border on a Diagram

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 177

February 2016
Graphics
Graphic Drawing Tools

Graphic Drawing Tools

The following topics explain how to add and edit non-intelligent, graphical shapes and text on a
diagram. These design objects are considered comments and do not represent any electrical
connectivity.
Drawing a Line in a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Drawing a Rectangle in a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Drawing a Polygon in a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Drawing a Circle in a Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Drawing an Arc in a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Drawing a Curved Line in a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Adding Text Frames to a Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Adding a Picture to a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Changing the Picture in an Image Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Link or Embed Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Adding a Comment Symbol to a Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Resizing a Comment Symbol in a Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Adding Properties to a Graphical Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Editing a Property Value of Graphical Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Editing the Graphical Properties of a Graphical Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Stretching a Graphical Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Moving a Graphical Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Deleting a Graphical Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Grouping Graphical Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Ungrouping Graphical Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Controlling the Layering Order (Z-Order) of Graphical Shapes Objects and Images 189

Drawing a Line in a Diagram

This topic details how to use the drawing tools to add a line to a diagram.
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Line. The cursor changes to .

2. Click on the diagram to place the first end of the line.

178 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Graphics
Drawing a Rectangle in a Diagram

3. To insert a waypoint into the line, click once again on the diagram, otherwise, place the
second end of the line by double-clicking or by pressing the Enter key.

Note
In Capital Logic, if you click once on a pin, connector or device before clicking to
start drawing the graphic, the graphic is automatically associated with the object
(that means, if the object is moved, the graphic moves with it).

Drawing a Rectangle in a Diagram

This topic details how to use the drawing tools to add a rectangle to a diagram.
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Rectangle. The cursor changes to .

2. Click on the diagram to place the first corner of the rectangle.

3. Click on the diagram to place the opposite corner of the rectangle.

Note
In Capital Logic, if you click once on a pin, connector or device before clicking to
start drawing the graphic, the graphic is automatically associated with the object
(that means, if the object is moved, the graphic moves with it).

Drawing a Polygon in a Diagram

This topic details how to use the drawing tools to add a polygon to a diagram.
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Polygon. The cursor changes to .

2. Click on the diagram to place the first corner of the polygon.

3. Click once on the diagram to place further corners and double-click on the diagram or
press the Enter key to place the last corner.

Note
In Capital Logic, if you click once on a pin, connector or device before clicking to
start drawing the graphic, the graphic is automatically associated with the object
(that means, if the object is moved, the graphic moves with it).

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 179

February 2016
Graphics
Drawing a Circle in a Diagram

Drawing a Circle in a Diagram

This topic details how to use the drawing tools to add a circle to a diagram.
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Circle. The cursor changes to .

2. Click on the diagram to place the center of the circle.

3. Drag the cursor away from the center and click once on the diagram to place the edge of
the circle.

Note
In Capital Logic, if you click once on a pin, connector or device before clicking to
start drawing the graphic, the graphic is automatically associated with the object
(that means, if the object is moved, the graphic moves with it).

Drawing an Arc in a Diagram

This topic details how to use the drawing tools to add an arc to a diagram.
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Arc. The cursor changes to .

2. Click on the diagram to place the first end of the arc.

3. Click on the diagram to place the second end of the arc

4. Drag the cursor away from the ends and click once on the diagram or press the Enter
key to place the curve of the arc.

Note
In Capital Logic, if you click once on a pin, connector or device before clicking to
start drawing the graphic, the graphic is automatically associated with the object
(that means, if the object is moved, the graphic moves with it).

Drawing a Curved Line in a Diagram

This topic details how to use the drawing tools to add a curved line to a diagram.

180 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Graphics
Adding Text Frames to a Diagram

Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Curve. The cursor changes to .

2. Click on the diagram to place the first end of the curved line.

3. Click once on the diagram to place further points along the curve and double-click on
the diagram or press the Enter key to place the second end of the curved line.

Note
In Capital Logic, if you click once on a pin, connector or device before clicking to
start drawing the graphic, the graphic is automatically associated with the object
(that means, if the object is moved, the graphic moves with it).

Adding Text Frames to a Diagram

This topic details how to use the drawing tools to add a text frame to a diagram.
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Text. The cursor changes to .

2. Click on the diagram to place the first corner of the text frame.

3. Click on the diagram to place the opposite corner of the text frame. The Add Text
Dialog Box is displayed.
4. Enter the text that you want to display in the box at the bottom of the Add Text dialog
box.
5. Click OK. The text frame and text is added to the diagram.

Note
If the text is not displayed, the text frame is not large enough for the text. To increase
the size of the text frame, place the mouse cursor over a corner of the frame so that
the stretch icon is displayed, hold down the left mouse key and drag the corner.
In Capital Logic, if you click once on a pin, connector or device before clicking to start
drawing the graphic, the graphic is automatically associated with the object (that means,
if the object is moved, the graphic moves with it).

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 181

February 2016
Graphics
Adding a Picture to a Diagram

Adding a Picture to a Diagram

This topic details how to add a picture from an image file (with the extensions JPG, JPEG, PNG
or GIF) to a diagram.
Prerequisites
• For linked images, the required image file must be saved in the Images folder that has
been specified in the system preferences for Paths in Capital Project. You cannot
navigate to any other folder.
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Image. The cursor changes to .

2. Click on the diagram to place the first corner of the image frame that will contain the
image.

3. Click on the diagram to place the opposite corner of the image frame. The Image
Selection Dialog Box is displayed.
4. Select the required radio button to either link or embed the image (see Link or Embed
Images). If you are adding an image to a non-comment symbol in Capital Symbol, these
options do not display and the image will be added using the Link to Image method by
default.
5. Select the image file that you want to add.
For linked images, only files and sub-folders from the Images folder area available for
selection. You cannot navigate to another folder location. For embedded images, you
can navigate to any location on your file system.
6. Click Select. The image frame and picture are added to the diagram. The picture is
scaled to fit the image frame.

Note
In Capital Logic, if you click once on a pin, connector or device before clicking to
start drawing the graphic, the graphic is automatically associated with the object
(that means, if the object is moved, the graphic moves with it).

Related Topics
Changing the Picture in an Image Frame
Link or Embed Images
Controlling the Layering Order (Z-Order) of Graphical Shapes Objects and Images

182 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Graphics
Changing the Picture in an Image Frame

Changing the Picture in an Image Frame

This topic details how to change the picture that is displayed in an image frame, created by the
drawing tools.
Restrictions and Limitations
• This procedure applies to linked images only. For embedded images you must add a new
image. See “Link or Embed Images” on page 183.
Procedure
1. Select the current picture in the image frame.
2. Either:
• Press Space Bar and enter Properties.
• Right-click on the selected entity and select Properties
• Double-click on the graphical shape.
3. The Edit Properties - Propertied Graphic Dialog Box is displayed.
4. On the General tab, click the ellipsis (...) button next to the Image File field.
The Image Selection Dialog Box is displayed.
5. In the window listing files, select the image file containing the picture that you want to
add.
6. Click Select. The new picture is displayed in the image frame.
Related Topics
Adding a Picture to a Diagram
Link or Embed Images
Controlling the Layering Order (Z-Order) of Graphical Shapes Objects and Images

Link or Embed Images

When you are adding images to a diagram, there are two choices on the Image Selection Dialog
box which allow you to either Link to Image or Embed Image.

Link to Image
If you choose this option, the selected image displays in the diagram via a link to the image file
in the Images folder (as specified in the system preferences for Paths in Capital Project).

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 183

February 2016
Graphics
Adding a Comment Symbol to a Diagram

Only the path to the image file is saved with the diagram and not the image file itself. Once
saved, the diagram will not display the image if, for example, the file is moved or you export the
design to another database where the exact file and path are not present on the target system.

All diagrams that link to an image file are automatically updated if the image file is changed.

Embed Image
If you choose this option, the selected image is embedded in the diagram. This removes the need
to maintain a link to the path of the inserted image, as is the case with a linked image, because
the image data is stored with the diagram itself.

This option is available in Capital HarnessXC, Capital ModularXC, Capital Logic, Capital
Integrator, Capital Topology, Capital Publisher, and Capital Symbol (where images can be
embedded in comment symbols).

Related Topics
Image Selection Dialog Box
Adding a Picture to a Diagram
Changing the Picture in an Image Frame
Controlling the Layering Order (Z-Order) of Graphical Shapes Objects and Images

Adding a Comment Symbol to a Diagram

This topic details how to add a comment symbol, created in Capital Symbol, to a diagram and
how to associate the comment symbol with another object.
If the associated object is moved, the comment symbol moves to maintain its orientation to the
object. Comment symbols can be used to add a build note to a diagram.

Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Comment Symbol.
The Symbol Selection Dialog Box is displayed.
2. In the Symbol Selection tree, select the comment symbol.

3. Click OK. The comment symbol is displayed next to the cursor.

4. Move the cursor to position the symbol. Either:
• Click in free space so that the comment symbol is not associated with another object
• Click once on an object to create an association and click once where you want to
position the symbol in relation to the associated object

184 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Graphics
Resizing a Comment Symbol in a Diagram

Note
Once a comment symbol has been placed, you can refresh it with the latest
version of the symbol (reflecting any changes that may have been made) by
right-clicking on it and selecting Update Symbol.

Related Topics
Resizing a Comment Symbol in a Diagram

Resizing a Comment Symbol in a Diagram

This topic explains how to resize (scale) an instance of a comment symbol in a diagram.
Note
When resizing a comment symbol as described in this topic, datums and their text may not
scale correctly. In this case, use Capital Symbol to redraw the symbol at the required scales.

Procedure
1. Move the mouse cursor over the symbol; a bounding box is displayed.
2. Move the mouse cursor over a corner of the bounding box so that the stretch icon ( ) is
displayed, hold down the mouse button and drag the corner to resize the symbol. The
symbol is scaled proportionally along both the X-axis and Y-axis.
Related Topics
Adding a Comment Symbol to a Diagram

Adding Properties to a Graphical Shape

This topic details how to add a property to a graphical shape, created by the drawing tools, so
that the property value is displayed on the diagram.
Procedure
1. Select the graphical shape.
2. Do one of the following:
• Press Space Bar and enter Properties
• Right-click on the selected entity and select Properties
• Double-click on the graphical shape
3. The Edit Properties - Propertied Graphic Dialog Box is displayed.
4. On the General tab, click the New button. The New Property Dialog is displayed.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 185

February 2016
Graphics
Editing a Property Value of Graphical Shape

5. Enter the name of the property and click OK. The property is added to the Properties
table on the General tab.
6. In the Value field, enter the value of the property and specify whether the value can be a
string, integer or float in the Type field.
7. Click OK.
8. The value is displayed next to the graphical shape on the diagram.

Editing a Property Value of Graphical Shape

This topic details how to edit a displayed property value of a graphical shape, created by the
drawing tools.
Procedure
1. Select the graphical shape.
2. Do one of the following:
• Press Space Bar and enter Properties
• Right-click on the selected entity and select Properties
• Double-click on the graphical shape
3. The Edit Properties - Propertied Graphic Dialog Box is displayed.
4. On the General tab, edit the Value field for the property and click OK.
5. The new value is displayed next to the graphical shape on the diagram.

Editing the Graphical Properties of a Graphical

Shape
This topic details how to edit the appearance (color, thickness, line style and fill pattern) of the
lines of a graphical shape, created by the drawing tools.
Procedure
1. Select the graphical shape.
2. Do one of the following:
• Press Space Bar and enter Properties
• Right-click on the selected entity and select Properties
• Double-click on the graphical shape
3. The Edit Properties - Propertied Graphic Dialog Box is displayed.

186 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Graphics
Stretching a Graphical Shape

4. On the Graphical tab, edit the values as required and click OK.
5. The appearance of the graphical shape on the diagram changes accordingly.

Stretching a Graphical Shape

This topic details how to stretch a graphical shape, created by the drawing tools.
Procedure
1. Select the graphical shape.
2. Move the cursor over a graphics point ( ) on the graphical shape so that the stretch icon
( ) is displayed next to it.

3. Hold down the left mouse button and drag the graphics point to stretch the shape to its
new location.

Moving a Graphical Shape

This topic details how to move a graphical shape, created by the drawing tools.
Procedure
1. Move the cursor over the graphical shape so that the move icon ( ) is displayed next to
it.
2. Hold down the left mouse button and drag the shape.

Deleting a Graphical Shape

This topic details how to remove a graphical shape, created by the drawing tools, from a
diagram.
Procedure
1. Select the graphical shape.
2. Do one of the following:
• Press Space Bar and enter Delete
• Right-click on the selected entity and select Delete
• Press the Delete key
3. The graphical shape is removed from the diagram.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 187

February 2016
Graphics
Grouping Graphical Shapes

Grouping Graphical Shapes

This topic details how to group together graphical shapes so that they can be edited and moved
like they are one object.
Procedure
1. Select the required graphical shapes in the diagram by holding down the Ctrl key on
your keyboard and clicking them.
2. Either:
• Press Space Bar and enter Group
or
• Right-click on one of the selected shapes and select Group
3. A frame is displayed around the shapes and you can edit them as one object.
Related Topics
Ungrouping Graphical Shapes

Ungrouping Graphical Shapes

This topic details how to ungroup graphical shapes that were grouped together so that they
could be edited or moved as one object.
Procedure
1. Click one of the graphical shapes to select all of the shapes in the group.
2. Either:
• Press Space Bar and enter Ungroup
or
• Right-click on the selected group and select Ungroup
3. The frame around the shapes is deleted and you can edit them separately.
Related Topics
Grouping Graphical Shapes

188 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Graphics
Controlling the Layering Order (Z-Order) of Graphical Shapes Objects and Images

Controlling the Layering Order (Z-Order) of

Graphical Shapes Objects and Images
This topic details how to control the layering order (z-order) of overlapping graphical shapes
and objects (images, graphics, glyphs and symbols).
The following actions are available:

• Bring To Front
Brings the selected shapes to the front of the overlapping shapes.
• Send To Back
Sends the selected shapes to the back of the overlapping shapes.
• Bring Forward
Brings the selected shapes one layer forward in the overlapping shapes.
• Send Backward
Sends the selected shapes one layer backward in the overlapping shapes.
Prerequisites
• The graphical shapes must have been added to the diagram and are overlapping each
other.
Procedure
In the diagram window, select one or more graphical shapes and either:

• right-click on a selected object and select Order > Bring To Front / Send To Back
/ Bring Forward / Send Backward
• Press Space Bar and enter Bring To Front, Send To Back, Bring Forward or Send
Backward
Results
The selected shapes and objects change layer accordingly.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 189

February 2016
Graphics
Graphics Points

Graphics Points
The following topics explain how to add graphics points to graphical shapes in a diagram and
how to delete them.
A graphics point is a point at which you can stretch a graphical shape to resize or reshape it.

Adding a Graphics Point to a Graphical Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Deleting a Graphics Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Adding a Graphics Point to a Graphical Shape

This topic details how to add a graphics point to a line, polygon, or curved line, created by the
drawing tools.
Procedure
1. Select the graphical shape.
2. Either:
• Press Space Bar and enter Add graphic point
• Right-click on the selected entity and select Add.
3. Click on the graphical shape where you want to add the graphics point.
4. The graphics point is added to the graphical shape.
Related Topics
Deleting a Graphics Point

Deleting a Graphics Point

This topic details how to delete a graphics point on a graphical shape in a diagram.
Note
If you delete a graphics point that forces a line to form a corner, the line straightens to
follow the shortest route between the graphics points on either side of the deleted graphics
point.

Procedure
1. Select the graphical shape on which the graphics point is located.
2. Press Space Bar and enter Delete graphics point.

The cursor changes to .

190 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Graphics
Deleting a Graphics Point

3. Click on the graphics point.

4. The graphics point is deleted.
Related Topics
Adding a Graphics Point to a Graphical Shape

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 191

February 2016
Graphics
Grip Points

Grip Points
A grip point is point that you add to a wire or net in Capital Logic, a bundle in Capital Integrator
and a bundle in Capital Harness XC. In Capital Symbol, it can be added to an internal link. It
divides the object into graphical sections that can be resized and reshaped.
The following topics explain how to add a grip point to an object and how to delete it.

Adding a Grip Point to an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Deleting a Grip Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Adding a Grip Point to an Object

This topic details how to add a grip point to an object.
Procedure
1. Select the object.
2. Either:
• Press Space Bar and enter Add grip point
or
• Right-click on the selected entity and select Grip Point > Add
3. Click on the object where you want to add the grip point.
4. The grip point is added to the object.
Related Topics
Deleting a Grip Point

Deleting a Grip Point

This topic details how to delete a grip point on an object in a diagram.
Note
If you delete a grip point that forces an object to form a corner, the corner straightens so that
the line follows the shortest route between the grip points on either side of the deleted grip
point.

Procedure
1. Select the object on which the grip point is located.

192 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Graphics
Deleting a Grip Point

2. Either:
• Press Space Bar and enter Delete grip point
or
• Right-click on the selected entity and select Grip Point > Delete
The cursor changes to .

3. Click on the grip point.

4. The grip point is deleted.
Related Topics
Adding a Grip Point to an Object

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 193

February 2016
Graphics
Deleting a Grip Point

194 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Chapter 5
Layout

This chapter contains the following topics which explain how to perform layout-related actions.
Grouping Objects in a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Creating a Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Moving a Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Ungrouping Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Aligning Objects in a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Distributing Objects in a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Flipping Objects in a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Rotating Objects in a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Rotating Objects Around a Specified Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Defining Rotation Increments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Free Rotating Text Decorations, Comment and RED Symbols or Graphical Objects . . . . 204
Example of Applying Styling on Rotated or Flipped Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Pivoting Text About its Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Setting Snap To Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Setting Grid Defaults for a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Manual Table Splitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Using Japanese Text on a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 195

February 2016
Layout
Grouping Objects in a Diagram

Grouping Objects in a Diagram

This topic details how to group and ungroup graphical objects so that they can be selected, and
moved, aligned or distributed, as a single entity.
Creating a Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Moving a Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Ungrouping Objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Creating a Group
You can group objects as single entities.
Procedure
1. Select the objects. Either:
• Hold down the Ctrl key on your keyboard and click the objects.
• Click at one corner of the area that encloses the objects, hold down the mouse button
and drag the cursor to define an enclosing window selection.
2. Either;
• Press Space Bar and enter Group
• Right-click and select Group
A new highlight is applied to all of the selected objects, showing the outside limit of the
group.

Moving a Group
Grouped objects can be dragged to a new position on the canvas as a single entity. Clicking to
select any object in the group results in the whole group being selected, which can then be
moved by clicking and dragging the outside border.

Ungrouping Objects
It is not possible to remove a single object from a group. Instead, the collection of objects must
first be ungrouped, then a new group created minus the unwanted object.
Procedure
1. Select the group by clicking on any object within it.

196 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Layout
Aligning Objects in a Diagram

2. Either:
• Press Space Bar and enter Ungroup
• Right-click and select Ungroup
The group highlight disappears, leaving each object independently selectable.
Related Topics
Aligning Objects in a Diagram
Distributing Objects in a Diagram

Aligning Objects in a Diagram

This topic explains how to align objects in a diagram.
You can align all objects apart from tables, pins and indicators in a diagram window.

Note
If an object has pins, they move with the object. If a device and connector are connected,
they move together but the alignment depends on which of those objects has been selected.
If conductors are connected to an object, they move to maintain the connectivity.

Procedure
1. Select the objects.
2. Either:
• Hold down the Ctrl key on your keyboard and click the objects.
or
• Click at one corner of the area that encloses the objects, hold down the mouse button
and drag the cursor to define an enclosing window selection.
3. Press Space Bar and enter Align, then select the appropriate action:
• Align Left ( )

Objects align with the left-most object

Before:

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 197

February 2016
Layout
Aligning Objects in a Diagram

After:

• Align Right ( )

Objects align with the right-most object

Before:

After:

• Align Top ( )

Objects align with the top-most object

Before:

After:

198 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Layout
Aligning Objects in a Diagram

• Align Bottom ( )

Objects align with the bottom-most object

Before:

After:

• Align Vertically ( )

Object center points align along the vertical plane

Before:

After:

• Align Horizontally ( )

Object center points align along the horizontal plane

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 199

February 2016
Layout
Distributing Objects in a Diagram

Before:

After:

4. The objects are aligned accordingly.

Distributing Objects in a Diagram

This topic explains how to distribute objects in a diagram so that there is an equal distance
between them.
You can distribute all objects apart from pins and indicators in a diagram window.

Note
If an object has pins, they move with the object. If a device and connector are connected,
they move together but the alignment depends on which of those objects has been selected.
If conductors are connected to an object, they move to maintain the connectivity.

Procedure
1. Select the objects. Either:
• Hold down the Ctrl key on your keyboard and click the objects.
or
• Click at one corner of the area that encloses the objects, hold down the mouse button
and drag the cursor to define an enclosing window selection.
2. Press Space Bar and enter Distribute, then select the appropriate action:
• Distribute Horizontally ( )

The left-most and right-most objects do not move. If there is enough space, the other
selected objects move so that there is an equal horizontal distance between each of

200 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Layout
Distributing Objects in a Diagram

them. Otherwise, the objects move so that there is an equal horizontal distance
between their center points. No objects move vertically.
Before:

After:

• Distribute Vertically ( )

The top and bottom objects do not move. If there is enough space, the other selected
objects move so that there is an equal vertical distance between each of them.
Otherwise, the objects move so that there is an equal vertical distance between their
center points. No objects move horizontally.
Before:

After:

3. The objects are distributed accordingly.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 201

February 2016
Layout
Flipping Objects in a Diagram

Flipping Objects in a Diagram

This topic explains how to flip objects about a specified axis in a diagram.
Note
When an object is rotated and has styling applied again, the created decorations/shape
respect the rotation. See “Example of Applying Styling on Rotated or Flipped Objects” on
page 205.

Procedure
1. Select one or more objects that you want to flip.

Note
If you select multiple objects, they are flipped as a group around one axis.

2. Do one of the following:

• Press Space Bar and enter Flip
• Right-click on one of the selected objects and select Flip from the menu
The cursor changes to and a dashed axis line is displayed along the sides of the
object or object group as you move the cursor around the selected objects.
3. Move the cursor to the side of the objects where you want to flip them and click once.
4. The objects flip over the axis line.

202 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Layout
Rotating Objects in a Diagram

Rotating Objects in a Diagram

This topic explains how to rotate objects about a specified point in a diagram and also how to
freely rotate primitive graphical objects and comment symbols around their center point.
The following topics are available.

Rotating Objects Around a Specified Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Defining Rotation Increments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Free Rotating Text Decorations, Comment and RED Symbols or Graphical Objects . 204
Example of Applying Styling on Rotated or Flipped Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Rotating Objects Around a Specified Point

This topic explains how to rotate objects about a specified point in a diagram.
Note
When an object is rotated and has styling applied again, the created decorations/shape
respect the rotation. See “Example of Applying Styling on Rotated or Flipped Objects” on
page 205.

Procedure
1. Select one or more objects that you want to rotate.

Note
If you select multiple objects, they are rotated as a group around one point.

2. Press Space Bar and enter Rotate.

The cursor changes to .

3. Click on the point around which you want to rotate the objects.
4. The objects rotate at a 90 degree increment around the point.

Note
All text labels are orientated as part of the flip process to ensure that they can be read
correctly.

Defining Rotation Increments

This topic explains how to specify the major and minor rotation increments that are used in the
free rotation of primitive graphical objects and comment symbols around their center point.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 203

February 2016
Layout
Free Rotating Text Decorations, Comment and RED Symbols or Graphical Objects

Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Set Rotation Degrees.
2. Set the Minor Rotation Increment used for finer grained rotational control. Default value
is 1 degree.
3. Set the Major Rotation Increment used for coarser grained rotational control. Default
value is 5 degrees.
4. Click on the OK to confirm your settings.

Free Rotating Text Decorations, Comment and RED

Symbols or Graphical Objects
This topic explains how to freely rotate the following objects around their center points by a
pre-defined major or minor rotation increment.
• Style Set Text Decorations
• Comment Symbols
• Symbols styled within REDs (Related Entity Decorations)
• Primitive graphical objects
• See the Capital HarnessXC User Guide for information on Rotating a Table
Restrictions and Limitations
• Electrical Connectivity Objects and Electrical Symbols do not have free rotation
enabled.
• For RED symbols, select only the symbol you wish to rotate and exclude all other
decorations that are styled as part of the decoration set. To do this press CTRL and click
on the required symbol.
• Running Apply Style resets any rotated text decorations to their default rotation, unless
they are configured to be excluded from apply style or have their styling fixed.
• Text decorations configured in the style set to auto flip, will never display upside down
when rotated. See the Capital Diagram Styling User Guide for further information.
Procedure
1. Select one object that you want to rotate.
2. Either:
• Press CTRL + > to rotate the object clockwise by a major increment. Press Ctrl + <
to rotate counter-clockwise. For finer grained control press CTRL + Shift + > to

204 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Layout
Example of Applying Styling on Rotated or Flipped Objects

rotate the object clockwise by a minor increment. Press Ctrl + Shift + < to rotate
counter-clockwise.
or
• Press CTRL and move the clickable scroll wheel on your mouse forwards or
backwards to rotate the object clockwise or counter-clockwise by a major increment.
For finer grained control press CTRL + Shift and move the clickable scroll wheel
on your mouse forwards or backwards to rotate the object clockwise or counter-
clockwise by a minor increment.
Results
• The object rotates at the pre-defined degree increment around their center point.
Related Topics
Defining Rotation Increments

Example of Applying Styling on Rotated or Flipped

Objects
This topic provides examples of what happens when styling (as defined in a style set) is re-
applied to an object that has been rotated or flipped.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 205

February 2016
Layout
Example of Applying Styling on Rotated or Flipped Objects

Prerequisites
In this example, styling has been defined for a device as follows:

Procedure
1. Define styling for a device as follows:

206 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Layout
Example of Applying Styling on Rotated or Flipped Objects

2. When a new device is created, styling is applied as below:

• If that device is rotated by 90 degrees and styling is applied to it again, all

decorations rotate as per the rotation angle:

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 207

February 2016
Layout
Pivoting Text About its Axis

• If that device is flipped about the horizontal axis and styling is applied to it again, all
decorations respect the flip as in this example:

Related Topics
Flipping Objects in a Diagram
Rotating Objects in a Diagram

Pivoting Text About its Axis

This topic explains how to pivot text about its axis from 0 degrees to 270 degrees and vice
versa.
Procedure
1. Select one or more text strings that you want to pivot.
2. Press Space Bar and enter Pivot Text.
3. If the text is at 0 degrees on its axis, it pivots to 270 degrees. If the text is at 270 degrees
on its axis, it pivots to 0 degrees.

Setting Snap To Object

This topic explains how, when adding or modifying a comment graphic, you can position it to
automatically “Snap To” alignment with another graphic on a diagram.
Note
Snap To Object is always enabled by default. You can disable it should you wish to position
objects close together, but not touching. The Snap To Object setting only affects comment
graphics.

Procedure
1. With the diagram open, press Space Bar and enter Snap to Object.

208 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Layout
Setting Grid Defaults for a Diagram

2. Comment graphics are aligned accordingly on the diagram.

3. The following objects may be snapped to:
• Rectangle - markers for center, corner mid-point of edge, also snaps to any other
point on edge
• Circle - marker for center, top, bottom, left and right, also snaps to any point on
circumference
• Line - markers for start, end or mid-point of segment, also snaps to any point on edge
• Polygon - markers for start, end or mid-point of segment, also snaps to any point on
edge
• Arc - markers for start, end of mid-point, also snaps to any point on arc
• Curve - markers for the grip points, no snapping to the curve itself

Note
Snap to Object overrides Snap to Grid except for electrical objects. In this case
Snap to Grid settings are also retained.

Setting Grid Defaults for a Diagram

This topic explains how to specify how grid points are displayed on a diagram.
Procedure
1. With the diagram open, press Space Bar and enter Set Grid Defaults.
The Set Grid Defaults Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Specify the Major Grid Interval and Maximum Drawn Points.
3. Click OK. The grid changes accordingly on the diagram.

Manual Table Splitting

This topic explains how to manually control the way in which large tables are broken down into
smaller numbers of columns or rows, allowing more flexible placement of the table content.
Procedure
1. With the diagram open, select Override Styling > Split Table from the context menu of
the selected table.
The Split Table Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Specify the required table splitting settings.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 209

February 2016
Layout
Using Japanese Text on a Diagram

3. Click Apply. The table changes accordingly on the diagram.

Note
See the Diagram Styling User Guide for more information about all aspects of table
styling.

Using Japanese Text on a Diagram

This topic details the procedure for displaying Japanese fonts and characters in diagrams.
Procedure
Follow these guidelines:

• You must use a Japanese operating system

• You must set your Oracle installation to support Japanese. See the documentation
supplied by Oracle for information about how to do this.
• The Font for the text must be set to a Japanese font.

Caution
You can export a file with Japanese text and import it into a non-Japanese
operating system. However, you cannot make changes to that data and re-import
it into the Japanese operating system. In this case, the Japanese text remains intact
but some things, such as the diagram name, are no longer readable in the Japanese
operating system.

210 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Chapter 6
Rules and Constraints

This chapter contains details of how to apply rules and constraints to objects.
Overview of Rules and Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Object Rule Hierarchies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Editable Elements in Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Defining Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Assigning a Rule or Constraint to an Object or Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Usage Example - Using a Null Value in a Constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 211

February 2016
Rules and Constraints
Overview of Rules and Constraints

Overview of Rules and Constraints

Rules and constraints can be used in the design applications to control certain actions.
For example:

• In Capital Integrator, you can set rules and constraints to control how the system places
devices in slots, synthesizes wiring and sets properties/attributes for objects.
• In Capital Logic, you can use one constraint to set properties and attributes on objects.
• In Capital HarnessXC, you can set rules and constraints to control wire paths on a
harness diagram and to enable harness processing to optimize a harness design based on
preset criteria.

Note
If you are using rules and constraints in Capital Integrator, see the Rules and
Constraints section of the Capital Integrator User Guide for more detailed
information and usage examples.

The generative flow (and wiring synthesis in particular) rely on user-configured constraints to
control the results of the automated process.

This overview examines the following concepts:

Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Object Rule Hierarchies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Constraints
A constraint is a statement that can be applied to a whole design, or to individual objects within
a design. It can be applied as an individual constraint or as part of a rule.
For example (in Capital Integrator):

Don't place devices with property matching Name=Battery here.

If this example constraint were set for a slot, the system would not place a device with a Name
property of Battery in that slot.

You use constraint templates to define a constraint. For full lists of the standard constraint
templates available for specific design applications, see the following:

• Capital HarnessXC constraint descriptions

o Rule Based Wire Routing

212 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Rules and Constraints
Rules

o Splice Repositioning Constraints

o Set Cavity Details Generation Method Constraint
• Capital Harness Formboard constraint descriptions
• Capital Modular Harness constraint descriptions
o Module Assignation Constraints
o Set Cavity Details Generation Method Constraint
• Capital Integrator constraint descriptions
• Capital Logic constraint descriptions
• Capital Topology constraint descriptions
• The Constraint Selection Dialog Box fields
You can write your own custom constraints in Java and load them into the design applications.
For more information about writing and loading custom constraints, see the
PluginDevelopment.pdf document that is located in the doc\plugin folder of your Capital
installation. Once custom constraints are loaded into the applications, you use them in the same
way as standard constraints. An object can have both standard and custom constraints defined
for it.

The design rule check Missing Custom Constraint Check can be run to report on any custom
constraints that have been defined for an object, but are no longer loaded.

Related Topics
Creating a Strategy for Constraint Definition in Capital Integrator
Assigning a Rule or Constraint to an Object or Design

Rules
A rule can consist of one constraint or a groups of constraints and can be applied to a whole
design or to individual objects within a design. You can define rules from within the design
applications or from within Capital Project. In Capital Project, you can define rules either at a
project level or you can define rule libraries at a system level. A rule library can be added to a
project. See the Capital Project help system for more information about defining rule libraries.
Note
In Capital Logic a rule can be applied to a whole design only.

A rule can contain (reference) other rules and therefore include their constraints.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 213

February 2016
Rules and Constraints
Object Rule Hierarchies

You can create rules at a system level and import the required rules into a project when
necessary. All rules are available to every project created within Capital Project.

Related Topics
Defining Rules
Assigning a Rule or Constraint to an Object or Design

Object Rule Hierarchies

Rules can be set for different objects in a design and this means that there can be conflicts
between the rules and constraints that have been set. For this reason, rule hierarchies determine
which rule/constraint is used on each object. The rules/constraints on an object lower down a
hierarchy override the rules/constraints on objects higher up a hierarchy.
For example (in Capital Integrator):

A rule/constraint on a cavity overrides a rule/constraint on a connector. A rule/constraint on a

connector overrides a rule/constraint on a slot. A rule/constraint on a slot overrides a rule/
constraint on a diagram.

Note
For more detailed information about object rule hierarchies and hierarchical object rule
resolvers in Capital Integrator, see Object Rule Hierarchies in Capital Integrator in the
Capital Integrator User Guide.

Related Topics
Editable Elements in Constraints
Defining Rules
Assigning a Rule or Constraint to an Object or Design

Editable Elements in Constraints

Editable elements in constraints are displayed in green and red.
The following elements may be displayed:

• Only/Don't
Select Only or Don't from the drop-down list.
• Do
Select Do or Don't from the drop-down list.

214 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Rules and Constraints
Editable Elements in Constraints

• Expression
When you click on this text, a dialog box is displayed where you define an option
expression. You can type the expression manually or you can click the ellipsis (...) to
open the Edit Option Expression facility.
• Name
By default, this refers to the Name attribute of an object. When you click on this text, a
dialog box is displayed. You can select to reference either an attribute or property and
you select the specific attribute or property from the dropdown list.
• Slot Name
When you click on this text, a dialog box is displayed. If the Use Slot Name box is
checked, the Name attribute of a slot is used. If you uncheck the box, you can enter
another string.
• ObjectName
When you click on this text, a dialog box is displayed. If the Use Object Name box is
checked, the Object Name property is used. If you uncheck the box, you can enter
another property name.
• Ruled Object Name
When you click on this text, a dialog box is displayed. If the Use Ruled Object Name
box is checked, the value for the Object Name property is used. If you uncheck the box,
you can enter another property value.
• Value
This is used typically when you want to use rules to add properties and attributes to
wires, splices and multicores.
Select one of the following:
o Literal
This means it is a literal value. Enter the value string in the box. You can use
wildcards in this string. Click the OK button to exit the dialog.
o Attribute
This means the value is derived from the value of an attribute on the functional
signal or multicore. Select the attribute from the drop-down list in the box. Click the
OK button to exit the dialog.
o Property
This means the value is derived from the value of a property on the functional signal
or multicore. Enter the property name in the box. Click the OK button to exit the
dialog.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 215

February 2016
Rules and Constraints
Editable Elements in Constraints

• Num
Enter an integer.
• Object
Select an object type from the drop-down list.
• Object Type
Select an object type from the list that is displayed when you click on this.
• Spec
Enter a specification string.
• .*
This is the same as a literal value string but is a wildcard by default.
• Wire Part Specification
Select WireMaterialCode, WireColor or WireSpec from the drop-down list.
• AttrOrProp
Select either Attribute or Property. For an attribute, select the attribute name from the
drop-down list. For a property, enter the property name in the box or select from the list
of pre-defined property names in the drop-down list. Click the OK button to exit the
dialog.
If a constraint contains a clause for matching it to particular objects (for example, Object
Name = PropValue), you can also edit the match operator that is = by default. The
available operators are:
= Equal to
!= Not equal to
< Less than
> Greater than
<= Less than or equal to
>= Greater than or equal to
For example:
Only route signals with property matching Object Name != Signal01
In this example, only signals that do not have a value of Signal01 for the Object Name
property will be routed.
Do place devices with property matching Rating >= 7.5 here

216 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Rules and Constraints
Defining Rules

In this example, only devices that have a value greater than or equal to 7.5 for the
Rating property will be placed.
When specifying a property value string in a constraint, you can use wildcards.
For example:
.* is all possible strings
si.* is any string starting with si.
If you are using Wire Part Specification constraints and Terminal Type Specification
constraints and you are using wildcards when defining property value strings, prioritized
pattern matching is used if there are two constraints of the same type on an object. This
means that if two constraints of the same type can both apply to one signal, the
constraint most specific to that signal will be used.
There are three levels of match quality:
o Level 1 - a broad default. For example: ObjectName = .*
o Level 2 - a refined wildcard. For example: ObjectName = sig.*
o Level 3 - a specific match. For example: ObjectName = signal
Level 3 overrides level 2 and level 2 overrides level 1.
If there is a situation where the wildcards in constraints of the same type match, an error
will be generated. For example, the following situations would generate an error:
o ObjectName = .* in one Wire Part Specification constraint on an object and
ObjectName = .* in another Wire Part Specification constraint on the same object.
o ObjectName = si.* in one Terminal Type Specification constraint on an object and
ObjectName = sig.* in another Terminal Type Specification constraint on the
same object.
o ObjectName = signal in one Wire Part Specification constraint on an object and
ObjectName = signal in another Wire Part Specification constraint on the same
object.
Related Topics
Overview of Rules and Constraints
Defining Rules
Assigning a Rule or Constraint to an Object or Design

Defining Rules
This topic explains how to define a rule that can be used in design applications.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 217

February 2016
Rules and Constraints
Defining Rules

Note
If you are using rules and constraints in Capital Integrator, see the Rules and Constraints
section of the Capital Integrator User Guide for more detailed information and usage
examples.

Procedure
1. In a design application, press Space Bar and enter Rules; the Define Rules Dialog Box is
displayed.
2. Click New; the Rule Name dialog is displayed.
3. Specify the name of the rule and click OK; the rule name is added to the Rules window.
4. Specify the constraints that you want the rule to include:
• To add constraints, click the Add Constraint ( ) button; the Constraint Selection
Dialog Box is displayed. Select the constraints and click OK.
• To reference another rule (and therefore add its constraints), click the Add Rule
Reference ( ) button; the Rule Selection Dialog Box is displayed. Select the rule
and click OK.
The constraints are added to the Constraints window.
5. Edit the green and red elements in the constraints so that they contain the required
values. See “Editable Elements in Constraints” on page 214 for a list of editable
elements.

Note
If you have added a rule reference, the rule name is displayed. Click on it to display
the constraints included in it. You cannot edit them here.

6. Click OK to exit the dialog.

Results
The rule can be assigned to objects within the project.
Related Topics
Overview of Rules and Constraints
Editable Elements in Constraints
Assigning a Rule or Constraint to an Object or Design

218 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Rules and Constraints
Assigning a Rule or Constraint to an Object or Design

Assigning a Rule or Constraint to an Object or

Design
This topic details how to assign a rule or constraint to an object or design in a design
application.
Note
If you are using rules and constraints in Capital Integrator, see the Rules and Constraints
section of the Capital Integrator User Guide for more detailed information and usage
examples.

Procedure
1. Open the Properties dialog for the object or design and click the Rules tab; the Rules
Tab in Properties Dialog Box displays the rules and constraints that have been assigned
to the object already.

Note
It also displays the rules and constraints that have been assigned to any objects to
which the current object belongs (for example, a slot belongs to a harness, a harness
belongs to a design).

2. Specify the rules and constraints that you want to assign to the object:
• To add constraints, click the Add Constraint ( ) button; the Constraint Selection
Dialog Box is displayed. Select the constraints and click OK.
• To assign a rule (and therefore assign its constraints), click the Add Rule Reference
( ) button; the Rule Selection Dialog Box is displayed. Select the rule and click
OK.
The constraints are added to the Constraints window.
3. Edit the green and red elements in the constraints so that they contain the required
values. See “Editable Elements in Constraints” on page 214 for a list of editable
elements.

Note
If you have added a rule, the rule name is displayed. Click on it to display the
constraints included in it. You cannot edit them here.
If you want to use a customized version of a constraint (if any have been made available
via Extensibility Plugins), click the ( ) icon next to it and select the customized version
from the dropdown list.

4. Click OK to exit the Properties dialog.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 219

February 2016
Rules and Constraints
Usage Example - Using a Null Value in a Constraint

Results
The constraints will be taken into account when any related actions are performed.
Related Topics
Overview of Rules and Constraints
Editable Elements in Constraints
Defining Rules

Usage Example - Using a Null Value in a

Constraint
In this example, you add a Wire Specification constraint to a Capital Integrator diagram. The
constraint tells the system to assign a wire specification of 0.35 to wires synthesized from
signals that have a wire specification value of null (that is, a blank value).
In this case, you also want the system to copy the wire specification from signals that have one
to the wires synthesized for them. To enforce this, you add a second Wire Specification
constraint to the diagram.

Procedure
1. In Capital Integrator, right-click on the diagram name in the Design Browser (Plane tab)
at the bottom left of the application window and select Properties; the Plane: <Plane
Name> dialog box is displayed.
2. Click the Rules tab; the tab displays any rules or constraints that have been applied to
the diagram already.
3. Click the Add Constraint ( ) button; the Constraint Selection dialog box is displayed.

4. Under Attributes and Properties, double-click Wire Specification; a default Wire

Specification constraint is added to the Rules tab:
Wire Spec: AttrOrProp is Value where Signal matches Name = .*
5. Edit the constraint so that it looks like this:
Wire Spec: Wire Specification is 0.35 where Signal matches Wire Specification = ^$
^$ is a regular expression that represents a value of null.
6. Repeat steps 3 and 4; another default Wire Specification constraint is added to the Rules
tab.
7. Edit the constraint so that it looks like this:
Wire Spec: Wire Specification is ValueOf(WireSpec) where Signal matches Name = .*

220 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Rules and Constraints
Usage Example - Using a Null Value in a Constraint

8. Click OK; the Plane: <Plane Name> dialog box closes.

Results
When you use the Set Attribute/Property action from the ribbon:
• The system assigns a wire specification of 0.35 to wires synthesized from signals that
have a wire specification value of null.
• The system copies the wire specification from signals that have one to the wires
synthesized for them.
Related Topics
Overview of Rules and Constraints
Defining Rules
Assigning a Rule or Constraint to an Object or Design

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 221

February 2016
Rules and Constraints
Usage Example - Using a Null Value in a Constraint

222 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Chapter 7
Modifying Objects

This chapter contains topics which detail modifying objects on a diagram.

The following topics are available:

Editing the Properties of Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Editing Multiple Object Simultaneously . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Editing the Attributes and Properties of Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Editing an Object's General Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Specifying the Name Property of an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Editing the Display-details of the Object's Short Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Adding a Property to an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Editing Multiple Objects Simultaneously . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Deleting an Existing Property from an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Editing a Bundle's Length in Capital Integrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Assigning a New Library Part to an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Updating an Object's Library Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Unassigning a Library Part from an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Viewing the Library Part Details for an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Defining Specification Attributes for a Conductor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Specifying the Slot Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Assigning/Editing an Object's Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Assigning Module Codes (Capital Logic only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Associating a Block with a Design (Capital Logic only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Specifying a Part Number for a Harness Level in Capital Integrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Editing the Harness Levels on which a Wire Exists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Editing the Offset of Bundle Region Nodes from Bundle Ends. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Foreground, Background and Manual Color Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Specifying Option-Specific Values for Net Attributes and Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Object Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Symbol Attributes in Capital Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Editing an Object's Graphical Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Changing an Object's Primary or Secondary Graphical Color Property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Changing an Object's Graphical Thickness Property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 223

February 2016
Modifying Objects

Changing an Object's Graphical Line Style Property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

Changing the Fill Color Attribute for an Object. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Changing an Object's Graphical Fill Pattern Property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Changing the Line End Style of a Conductor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Physical Line Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Setting the Physical Line Thickness for Graphics in Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Using a Plugin Interface to Control Physical Line Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Setting the Default Physical Line Thickness for Comment Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Finding and Replacing Property Values, Attribute Values and Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Fill Pattern Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Applying Scopes to a Project or Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Advanced Naming Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Generating Names for Selected Objects in a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Generating Names for all Objects in a Build List, Design or Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Selecting a Component Part Number in the Part Selection Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Performing a Batch Update of Library Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Slice Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Slice Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Slice Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Slice Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Slice Conductors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Slicing a Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Slicing a Bundle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Reconnecting a Sliced Bundle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Navigating Between Sliced Object Instances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Slice to Trim Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Slice and Move To . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Design Logs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Viewing Design Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Opening Design Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Parameterized Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

224 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Modifying Objects
Editing the Properties of Objects

Editing the Properties of Objects

In design applications, you use the Edit Properties facilities to edit the properties and attributes
of objects.
You can select individual or multiple objects for which you want to edit properties.

Editing Multiple Object Simultaneously . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Editing the Attributes and Properties of Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Editing Multiple Object Simultaneously

You can select multiple objects in order to edit properties and attributes that apply to all of those
objects.
If you select multiple objects of different object types, the selection of tabs displayed on the
Edit Properties facility may be limited. In addition, the properties and attributes that you can
edit may be limited. This is because not all properties and attributes can be applied to all object
types.

For example:

If you select a wire and a device, a Wire Color attribute is listed but you cannot change it
because it cannot be applied to all of the selected objects.

Even if a property is not editable because it does not apply to all selected objects, you can still
change whether it is visible or not.

If any of the selected objects are frozen, you can only edit graphical properties.

Note
You cannot edit equipotential nets as part of a multiple selection.

Editing the Attributes and Properties of Objects

This topic describes multiple ways to access and use the Edit Properties dialog in different tools.
Procedure
1. In the diagram window or diagram browser window, select the objects whose attributes
you want to edit.
If you want to select multiple segments of a conductor or multiple objects, hold down
the Shift key on your keyboard and click the segments and objects. Selected objects are
displayed in red.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 225

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Editing the Attributes and Properties of Objects

If you select a conductor (net or wire) or bundle from a browser window, all segments
are selected automatically.
If you want to select a closed graphic, you must click on the border (outline) of the
graphic.
2. Right-click one of the selected segments or objects in the diagram window or a blank
area in the diagram browser window in Capital Logic or a blank area in the Topological
Plane Browser Window in Capital Integrator and select Properties from the pop-up
menu that is displayed.
Results
The Edit Properties facility is displayed.
The Edit Properties facility that is displayed, depends on the object that you right-click.
In Capital Logic/Capital Publisher:
Edit Properties facilities for objects can contain the following tabs depending on the object
selected (if you have selected multiple objects, any changes to the parameters on these tabs
apply to all selected objects):
• General (see “Editing an Object's General Properties” on page 228)
• Graphical (see “Editing an Object's Graphical Properties” on page 253)
• Symbol
The Symbol tab displays information detailing if the selected symbol instance is up-to-date by
showing its UID, modification timestamp and time, as well as which library it originated from.
• Properties (see “Adding a Property to an Object” on page 234)
The Edit Properties facilities for devices, connectors, blocks and splices includes the following
tab:
• Parameters
The Edit Properties facilities for modular connectors includes the following tab:
• Modular
See Assigning Connector Positions Using the Modular Tab in the Capital Logic User Guide.
• The Edit Properties facilities for conductors include the following tab:
• Ports
The Edit Properties facility for object name text displays the following tab:
• Text
The Edit Properties facility for a shared object and cross-reference text displays the following
tabs:
• Cross-references

226 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Modifying Objects
Editing the Attributes and Properties of Objects

See Cross-reference Rules for Pins in the Capital Logic User Guide.
• Scopes
See “Applying Scopes to a Project or Design” on page 265.
In Capital Integrator:
Edit Properties facilities for all objects (including symbol graphics) contain the following tabs
(if you have selected multiple objects, any changes to the parameters on these tabs apply to all
selected objects):
• General (see “Editing an Object's General Properties” on page 228)
• Graphical (see “Editing an Object's Graphical Properties” on page 253)
• Rules (see “Assigning a Rule or Constraint to an Object or Design” on page 219)
• Properties (see “Adding a Property to an Object” on page 234)
The Edit Properties facility for a signal displays the following tabs:
• Variance (see “Specifying Option-Specific Values for Net Attributes and Properties” on
page 249)
• Scopes
See “Applying Scopes to a Project or Design” on page 265.
In Capital Symbol:
The Edit Properties facility for symbol graphics and borders includes the following tabs:
• Graphical (see “Editing an Object's Graphical Properties” on page 253)
• Properties (see “Adding a Property to an Object” on page 234)
The Edit Properties dialog box for a border, Drill Point Datum or Fixture Placement datum
includes the following tabs:
• General (see “Editing an Object's General Properties” on page 228)
Note that the General tab for a border in Capital Symbol allows you to specify
placeholders for design information that is then displayed automatically when you add
the border to a Capital Logic or Capital Integrator diagram. See Adding Information
Placeholders to a Border in the Capital Symbol User Guide.

The General tab for a drill point datum or a fixture placement datum in Capital Symbol,
allows you to specify various attributes for use when using the datums with Capital
FormboardXC fixtures.
• Paper Layout (see Editing the Paper Layout Properties of a Border in the Capital
Symbol User Guide) - This provides information about the paper size and usable area
within the border.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 227

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Editing an Object's General Properties

Editing an Object's General Properties

This topic describes multiple ways to edit general properties in different tools.
Procedure
1. In design applications, to edit an object's general properties,
2. Right-click over the appropriate design object, select the Properties option.
3. Click the General tab in the Edit Properties dialog box.

Note
To edit the general properties of a border in Capital Symbol, you must right-click to
the side of the border in the diagram window to access the Edit Properties facility.

Results
The object's General Properties facility displays.
See the following topics for details of actions that can be performed using this dialog:
Related Topics
Specifying the Name Property of an Object
Editing the Display-details of the Object's Short Description
Object Attributes
Adding a Property to an Object
Deleting an Existing Property from an Object
Editing a Bundle's Length in Capital Integrator
Assigning a New Library Part to an Object
Updating an Object's Library Part
Unassigning a Library Part from an Object
Viewing the Library Part Details for an Object
Defining Specification Attributes for a Conductor
Specifying the Slot Type
Assigning/Editing an Object's Options
Assignation of Module Codes to Capital Logic Components
Associating a Block with a Design (Capital Logic only)
Specifying a Part Number for a Harness Level in Capital Integrator
Editing the Harness Levels on which a Wire Exists
Editing the Offset of Bundle Region Nodes from Bundle Ends

228 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Modifying Objects
Specifying the Name Property of an Object

Specifying the Name Property of an Object

You can specify the format and diagram display characteristics of an object's name. This is not
available in Capital Symbol.
Procedure
1. Right-click on the object and select Properties; the Edit Properties dialog is displayed.
2. If required, type the new name of the object in the Name box. If valid names for the
object type have been created in Capital Project, you can select a name by clicking the
ellipsis button (...) to display the Name Selection dialog.

Note
With the exception of pins, you can rename an object to have the same name as
another object in the same diagram. If you do this, the name is displayed in red and a
warning is displayed when you click the OK button.
If you are editing the properties of a multicore indicator, the multicore name is displayed
in the Name field. If you are editing the properties of a signal in Capital Integrator, you
can edit the name only if the signal is not associated with a functional source net
conductor from the associated Capital Logic design.If a shared object has been frozen,
you cannot change its name.

If you have assigned a library part to the object and usage definitions have been created
for the library part in Capital Project, the Name Selection dialog lists only the names
that are used in the usage definitions by default. You can display all available names for
the object type by unchecking the Filter on Usage box at the top of the dialog. See the
Capital Project help system for more information about usage definitions.
If you are editing the general properties for a net conductor and it connects to a device
that has a usage definition in Capital Project, the Name Selection dialog lists only the
names that have been added for the corresponding pin in the usage definition.
If a net conductor is connected to more than one device with a usage definition, the list
of net names displayed depends on the pin types to which it is connected. The pin types
can be IN, OUT, IxO, IxO Terminated, NC, PWR and GND. These are defined in
Capital Library. See the Capital Library help system for more information about
defining pin types.
In Capital Symbol, you can specify the pin type U that means that no pin type is
specified.
3. Check the Visible box if you want the specified name to be displayed with the object in
the diagram.
The name is displayed once for each object. However, in the case of conductors, you can
display the name next to more than one segment of the conductor. If name text has been

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 229

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Specifying the Name Property of an Object

added to segments previously and has not been deleted, checking the Visible box will
display the name text for each instance of name text that has been added.
4. Click the Edit Attributes button to display the Edit Name Text Attributes Dialog
Box where you can set the following attributes for the name that is displayed on the
diagram:
• Font
Select the font type for the text and whether the text is plain, bold, italic or bold/
italic. Mandatory.
• Height
Specify the height of the text and select the unit of measurement from the dropdown
list. Mandatory.
• Color
To specify the color of the text, select a color from the dropdown list; it is previewed
in the window to the right of the field. Mandatory.
As well as color names, the list contains the following options:
o Default
The default color used for text by the system.
o Background
The same color used for the background of the diagram. The color changes when
the background color is toggled.
o Foreground
If the diagram background is white, the text is black, and vice versa.
o Manual
The Choose Text Color dialog is displayed, where you can select a color.
• Opaque
Select whether object lines are visible behind the text frame boundary box, (un-
selected), or are not visible behind the text frame boundary box, (selected).
Mandatory.
• Rotation
By default this is 0 for the text to run horizontally (left to right). Enter a different
value manually or select a value from the dropdown list, for example, 270 for the
text to run vertically (bottom to top). Mandatory.
• Auto Flip

230 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Modifying Objects
Specifying the Name Property of an Object

If selected, the text flips automatically so that it is never displayed upside down
when it is rotated or flipped. If not selected, a flip or rotation can result in the text
being displayed upside down.
• Balloon Shape
Specify the balloon shape that will enclose text on a diagram. The thickness of the
encasing balloon is controlled by setting the BalloonLineThickness parameter in
Design Settings. The color of the balloon automatically matches the color setting for
the text within it.
Select available balloon styles from the dropdown list. These include:
o None
o Circle
o Rectangle
o Triangle
o Oval
o Rounded Rectangle
o Hexagon

Note
Adding a balloon shape to a diagram automatically disables the Layout
options “Clip Text to Bounding Box” and “Shrink to Fit”.

• Justification
Specify the position of the text within the text frame. Mandatory.
• Layout
The following set of options are available to control the layout of the text within its
frame.
o Clip Text to Bounding Box
If selected, specifies that the text is clipped at the edge of its bounding box.
o Shrink to Fit
If selected, specifies that the font of the text reduces as necessary so that the text
fits in its bounding box.
o Allow Text to Overflow
If selected, specifies that the text ignores the edge of its bounding box and flows
out of it.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 231

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Editing the Display-details of the Object's Short Description

o Wrap text
Specifies whether the text wraps onto multiple lines when it reaches the edge of
the text bounding box (selected) or whether the text ignores the bounding box
and continues on one line (unselected). When this is selected, if a word is too
long to fit on a single line, it is wrapped by character. Mandatory.
• Preview
Displays an preview of an example text string formatted using the currently selected
settings. Mandatory.
5. Click the OK button to exit the Edit Name Text Attributes dialog box.

Editing the Display-details of the Object's

Short Description
This topic details how to specify the format and diagram-display characteristics of the object's
short description. This is not available in Capital Symbol.
If the Short Description specified for the name has changed in Capital Project, you must
reassign the name to the object to update the Short Description in the diagram. See Specifying
the Name Property of an Object.

Procedure
1. If the object has a name that has been specified as a valid name in Capital Project and the
valid name has a short description associated with it, the short description can be
displayed with the instance of the object on the diagram. Check the Visible box next to
the Short Description field if you want to display the short description.
2. Click the Edit Attributes button to display the Edit Name Text Attributes Dialog
Box where you can set the following attributes for the name that is displayed on the
diagram:
• Font
Select the font type for the text and whether the text is plain, bold, italic or bold/
italic. Mandatory.
• Height
Specify the height of the text and select the unit of measurement from the dropdown
list. Mandatory.
• Color
To specify the color of the text, select a color from the dropdown list; it is previewed
in the window to the right of the field. Mandatory.

232 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Modifying Objects
Editing the Display-details of the Object's Short Description

As well as color names, the list contains the following options:

o Default
The default color used for text by the system.
o Background
The same color used for the background of the diagram. The color changes when
the background color is toggled.
o Foreground
If the diagram background is white, the text is black, and vice versa.
o Manual
The Choose Text Color dialog is displayed, where you can select a color.
• Opaque
Select whether object lines are visible behind the text frame boundary box, (un-
selected), or are not visible behind the text frame boundary box, (selected).
Mandatory.
• Rotation
By default this is 0 for the text to run horizontally (left to right). Enter a different
value manually or select a value from the dropdown list, for example, 270 for the
text to run vertically (bottom to top). Mandatory.
• Auto Flip
If selected, the text flips automatically so that it is never displayed upside down
when it is rotated or flipped. If not selected, a flip or rotation can result in the text
being displayed upside down.
• Justification
Specify the position of the text within the text frame. Mandatory.
• Layout
The following set of options are available to control the layout of the text within its
frame.
o Clip Text to Bounding Box
If selected, specifies that the text is clipped at the edge of its bounding box.
o Shrink to Fit
If selected, specifies that the font of the text reduces as necessary so that the text
fits in its bounding box.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 233

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Adding a Property to an Object

o Allow Text to Overflow

If selected, specifies that the text ignores the edge of its bounding box and flows
out of it.
o Wrap text
Specifies whether the text wraps onto multiple lines when it reaches the edge of
the text bounding box (selected) or whether the text ignores the bounding box
and continues on one line (unselected). When this is selected, if a word is too
long to fit on a single line, it is wrapped by character. Mandatory.
• Preview
Displays an preview of an example text string formatted using the currently selected
settings. Mandatory.
3. Click the OK button to exit the Edit Name Text Attributes dialog box.

Adding a Property to an Object

This topic details how to add a property to an object.
If the object being edited has attributes, properties are listed on a Properties tab of the Edit
Properties dialog.

If the object does not have attributes, there is a Properties section on the General tab of the
Edit Properties dialog.

In Capital Symbol, this functionality is available for borders only.

Procedure
1. Right-click on the object and select Properties; the Edit Properties dialog is displayed.
2. Click either the Properties tab or General tab as appropriate. Under the Properties
section, click New; the New Property dialog is displayed. In the Property Name box,
either select a property name from the drop-down list or enter the name of a new
property and click the OK button.

Note
The property names in the drop-down list are predefined for object types in a project
in Capital Project. See the Capital Project help system for more information on
creating them. When a project is defined in Capital Project, the valid values for a the
property can be specified. If you enter a property value that is not valid in Capital Logic
or Capital Integrator, a warning is generated.

234 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Modifying Objects
Adding a Property to an Object

3. The property is added to the properties box. In the property's row, click the following
columns to change their values:
• Name - the name of the property. This box cannot be edited.
• Value - the value of the property. This is the value that is displayed with the object
in the design if you tick the Visible box.
• Type - the type of value that the property can have. The following options are
available:
o String - a mixture of letters, numbers and special symbols.
o Integer - a whole number.
o Float - a decimal number.
• Editable (only in Capital Symbol) - check the box if you want the Value and Type
fields to be editable in other applications.
• Master (only in Capital Symbol) - if the visibility of this property on the symbol is
defined both here (using the Visible and Attributes settings) and as a property
decoration in a style set, this specifies whether the settings here or the settings in the
style set take priority when the symbol is placed in a diagram.
o symbol
If the Override Symbol Styling setting is selected in the style set applied to a
diagram, symbol specifies that only the visibility of the property (that is, whether
it is displayed on the diagram) is dictated by the style set. The font of the
property value is dictated by the settings here and the position of the property
value is dictated by where you position the property value on the symbol.
If the Override Symbol Styling setting is not selected, then the visibility and
font of the property value are dictated by the settings here and the position of the
property value is dictated by where you position the property value on the
symbol.
o style
If the Override Symbol Styling setting is selected in the style set applied to a
diagram, style specifies that:
Where a property is defined on a symbol and it is also styled in the style set, the style set
dictates the visibility, font and position of the property value in the diagram.
Where a property is defined on a symbol but is not styled in the style set, it is not
displayed in the diagram.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 235

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Adding a Property to an Object

See the Override Symbol Styling section in the Capital Diagram Styling User Guide
for further information about that setting. The effect of that setting combined with the
Master setting for a property on a symbol is summarized in the table below.

Table 7-1. Effects of Override Symbol Styling and Master Setting

Combinations
Override Symbol Property defined on Property has Master Property has Master
Styling Selected in symbol only or also setting of Style in setting of Symbol in
Style Set? as property symbol symbol
decoration in style
set?
Selected Defined both on Property value Property value
symbol and as a style visibility in diagram, visibility in diagram
set decoration font and position dictated by style set
dictated by style set Font and position
dictated by symbol
Defined on symbol Property value not Property value
only used in diagram visibility in diagram,
font and position
dictated by symbol
Not selected Defined both on Property value Property value
symbol and as a style visibility in diagram, visibility in diagram,
set decoration font and position font and position
dictated by style set dictated by symbol
Defined on symbol Property value Property value
only visibility in diagram, visibility in diagram,
font and position font and position
dictated by symbol dictated by symbol

• Visible - check the box if you want the specified Value to be displayed with the
object on the design. If style set options have been defined for the property, those
options are used to define the appearance of the value. Otherwise, the Attributes
defined in this table define the appearance.
• Attributes - click Edit to display the Edit Text Attributes facility where you can
set the following attributes for the Value text that is displayed for this property on
the diagram:
• Font
Select the font type for the text and whether the text is plain, bold, italic or bold/
italic. Mandatory.
• Height

236 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Modifying Objects
Adding a Property to an Object

Specify the height of the text and select the unit of measurement from the dropdown
list. Mandatory.
• Color
To specify the color of the text, select a color from the dropdown list; it is previewed
in the window to the right of the field. Mandatory.
As well as color names, the list contains the following options:
o Default
The default color used for text by the system.
o Background
The same color used for the background of the diagram. The color changes when
the background color is toggled.
o Foreground
If the diagram background is white, the text is black, and vice versa.
o Manual
The Choose Text Color dialog is displayed, where you can select a color.
• Opaque
Select whether object lines are visible behind the text frame boundary box, (un-
selected), or are not visible behind the text frame boundary box, (selected).
Mandatory.
• Rotation
By default this is 0 for the text to run horizontally (left to right). Enter a different
value manually or select a value from the dropdown list, for example, 270 for the
text to run vertically (bottom to top). Mandatory.
• Auto Flip
If selected, the text flips automatically so that it is never displayed upside down
when it is rotated or flipped. If not selected, a flip or rotation can result in the text
being displayed upside down.
• Justification
Specify the position of the text within the text frame. Mandatory.
• Layout
The following set of options are available to control the layout of the text within its
frame.
• Clip Text to Bounding Box

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 237

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Editing Multiple Objects Simultaneously

If selected, specifies that the text is clipped at the edge of its bounding box.
• Shrink to Fit
If selected, specifies that the font of the text reduces as necessary so that the text fits
in its bounding box.
• Allow Text to Overflow
If selected, specifies that the text ignores the edge of its bounding box and flows out
of it.
• Wrap text
Specifies whether the text wraps onto multiple lines when it reaches the edge of the
text bounding box (selected) or whether the text ignores the bounding box and
continues on one line (unselected). When this is selected, if a word is too long to fit
on a single line, it is wrapped by character. Mandatory.
• Preview
Displays an preview of an example text string formatted using the currently selected
settings. Mandatory.
4. Click OK to apply the specified property values and exit the facility.

Editing Multiple Objects Simultaneously

If you have selected multiple objects of different object types, all of the properties for all of the
selected objects are displayed, but the values do not necessarily apply to all of the selected
objects.
If a property does not currently apply to all of the selected objects, a checkbox is displayed at
the start of the Value field when you click on it. Check this box if you want the property and its
value to apply to all of the selected objects. You can change the value of the property at any
point.

If a property does apply to all of the selected objects but the objects have different values for it,
Multiple Values is displayed in the Value field with a drop-down list of the different values.
You can select one of these values and check the box at the start of the Value field to apply it to
all selected objects or you can leave the field as Multiple Values so that the objects retain their
different values. Alternatively, you can enter an entirely new value that will apply to all of the
selected objects.

If there is a list of possible values defined for a property, these are listed in the drop-down list
with the used values in the Value field. Any values that are already used on the selected objects
are displayed in bold.

238 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Modifying Objects
Deleting an Existing Property from an Object

If a property has a different Type value (string, integer or float) on different objects, then you
cannot edit it and Different Types is displayed in the Value field

Deleting an Existing Property from an Object

This topic details how to delete a property from an object.
If the object being edited has attributes, properties are listed on a Properties tab of the Edit
Properties dialog.

If the object does not have attributes, there is a Properties section on the General tab of the
Edit Properties dialog.

In Capital Symbol, this functionality is available for borders only.

Procedure
1. Right-click on the object and select Properties; the Edit Properties dialog is displayed.
2. Click either the Properties tab or General tab as appropriate. Under the Properties
section, select the property and click Delete; the property is removed from the object.
3. Click OK to apply the change and exit the dialog.

Editing a Bundle's Length in Capital Integrator

The physical length of the bundle is initially determined by the length of the bundle in the
diagram.

The bundle length is used when calculating the cost of any synthesized wiring. Overriding the
length can therefore change the result of routing logical signals because the system selects the
cheapest route.

Procedure
1. Check the Override box
2. Edit the Length to the required value.

Assigning a New Library Part to an Object

This topic details various methods of assigning a library part to an object. This is not available
in Capital Symbol.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 239

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Assigning a New Library Part to an Object

Prerequisites
• Footprint Library Parts
A library part with a footprint may, or may not have a symbol associated with it in
Capital Library. In either case, you can assign the library part to existing devices
(including shared devices) in a Capital Logic diagram.
If the library part has device connectors, device connectors are added to the device in
Capital Logic. In the case of a shared device, the device connectors are added to the
shared instances.
If a library part has a symbol associated with it, the graphical representation of the
device in Capital Logic does not change to the symbol when you assign that library part
to it.
• Library Part Usage on Shared Objects in Capital Logic
When a library part is assigned to a shared pin list, if the number of pins/cavities on the
library part is greater than the number of pins on the pin list, the number of pins
necessary to account for difference is added to the shared pin list.
When a library part is assigned to a shared device, if you have selected a symbol for the
library part, that symbol is added to the shared device and you are presented with a
dialog to map shared pins to the symbol pins.
• Library Part Usage in Capital Integrator
Library parts on slots that are included with a harness. If a slot has been included with a
harness, a library part can be assigned to the underlying physical connector. To do this,
you continue as though assigning a library part to the slot but the library part is really
assigned to the connector.
o Footprint Library Parts
In Capital Logic designs, devices can have a library part associated with them. If the
library part has a footprint associated with it, this affects what you can do in Capital
Integrator.
When the device with the footprint is placed in a slot in Capital Integrator, the
physical connectors are defined by this information. This means that you cannot
delete related virtual connectors in a slot that has such a library part assigned.
o Parts on Slots
A slot is treated like a 'room' and the physical device of the slot is the equipment that
may contain multiple devices. A library part assigned to the slot is for the equipment,
not for the device or devices placed inside the slot.
o Parts on Specialized Connectors and Generalized Connectors

240 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Modifying Objects
Assigning a New Library Part to an Object

You can assign a library part to a virtual connector or inline connector half
(generalized connectors). If you do this, you cannot use the Refine
Connector facility to define specialized connectors.
If you have defined specialized connectors for a generalized connector, you cannot
use the Edit Properties facility to assign a library part to the generalized connector.
If you want to do this, you must delete any bundle fanouts that you have created for
it.
If you have defined specialized connectors, you can use the Refine Connector
facility (see Refining Connectors in the Capital Integrator User Guide) to assign
library parts to the individual specialized connectors. If a specialized connector has
been defined by a footprint in Capital Logic, you cannot assign a library part to it in
Capital Integrator.
When adding or changing a library part for a device that has already been added to a
design, the list of devices from Capital Library is filtered to show only those with an
equal or greater number of cavities to the device in the design.
• Editing Multiple Objects Simultaneously
If you have selected multiple objects with different library parts, Multiple Part
Numbers is displayed at the top of the Library Part section. You can only remove the
library part associations in this scenario.
If you are adding a library part to multiple objects, you will have to associate pins with
each object. In addition, the information passed to the library part selector will be about
the lowest common denominator aspects of the objects. This means, if you have selected
a 4-pin device and a 6-pin device, you can select only library parts with a minimum of 6
pins.
You cannot edit library parts if the selected objects are of different object types.
If you have selected multiple multicores, library part selection is only possible if the
multicore structure is the same for all selected objects.
Procedure
1. Right-click on the object and select Properties; the Edit Properties dialog is displayed.
2. Click the Add (...) button in the Library Part section of the General tab; the Part
Selection Dialog Box is displayed.
3. Search for the library part, select it and click Insert.
4. If you are assigning a library part to a device, connector or backshell, the Associate
Pins with Cavities dialog is displayed. You must associate the cavities from the library
part with the pins on the object. When you have associated the cavities with the pins,
click the OK button.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 241

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Updating an Object's Library Part

If you are assigning a library description to a multicore, the Assign Library Multicore
dialog prompts you to assign the innercores from the library multicore to the multicore
wires in the design. When you have associated the multicore wires, click the OK button.
Results
The library part number is displayed at the top of the Library Part section of the General tab.
Note
If the details for a library description are changed in Capital Library, they are not updated
automatically in Capital Logic or Capital Integrator, you must update them manually. See
the To update an object's library part section below.

Related Topics
Part Selection Dialog Box

Updating an Object's Library Part

This topic details how to update a library part on an object. This is not available in Capital
Symbol.
Procedure
1. Right-click on the object and select Properties; the Edit Properties dialog is displayed.
2. Click the Update ( ) button in the Library Part section of the General tab.

3. The details for the library description are updated in the Edit Properties facility. Click
the OK button.

Unassigning a Library Part from an Object

This topic details how to remove a library part on an object. This is not available in Capital
Symbol.
Procedure
1. Right-click on the object and select Properties; the Edit Properties dialog is displayed.
2. Click the Remove ( ) button in the Library Part section of the General tab.
3. The details for the library description are removed from the Edit Properties facility.
Click the OK button.

242 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Modifying Objects
Viewing the Library Part Details for an Object

Viewing the Library Part Details for an Object

This topic details how to view an object’s library part details. This is not available in Capital
Symbol.
Procedure
1. Right-click on the object and select Properties; the Edit Properties dialog is displayed.
2. Click the View ( ) button in the Library Part section of the General tab.

3. The View Component facility is displayed. This is like the Part Selection facility but is
read-only. Click the Close button to exit the facility.

Defining Specification Attributes for a

Conductor
You can define the color, material, spec and CSA in the Edit Properties dialog for a conductor.
Note
When you assign a library part to the conductor, the Part Selection Dialog uses these
attributes to restrict the search for a library part.

Procedure
1. Right-click on the object and select Properties; the Edit Properties dialog is displayed.
2. In the Specification section of the General tab, specify the Color, Material, Spec and
CSA as required. If you want to display any of these attribute values next to the
conductor in the diagram, select the box next to the field and click the button to
display the Edit Graphical Attributes dialog where you specify how it is displayed.
3. Click OK to apply the specified values and exit the facility.

Specifying the Slot Type

Slot types can be equipment slots (contains normal devices), ground slots (contains ground
devices) or a junction box slots (you can route signals through a junction box slot). This topic
explains how to configure the slot type.
Procedure
1. From the drop-down list in the Slot Type field, select one of the following:
• Equipment - this indicates that the slot will contain normal devices
• Ground - this indicates that the slot will contain ground devices.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 243

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Assigning/Editing an Object's Options

• Junction Box - this indicates that signals can be routed through this slot.
2. The slot type cannot be changed after devices have been placed in the slot.

Assigning/Editing an Object's Options

This topic details how to specify the variant harness options that are applicable to design
objects.
The options specified for a design object in Capital Logic or Capital Integrator are used to
distinguish the individual variant harness designs when applying the Evaluated Designs facility
in the Capital Project application. See the Capital Project help system for more information
on Evaluated Designs. Options are not applicable to Capital Symbol.

Procedure
1. In the Option section, enter the option expression in the Expression field. You can
either enter the expression manually or click the ellipsis button (...) to display the Edit
Option Expression dialog.
After a device has been placed using variant-based placement, the General tab of the
Edit Properties facility for a device displays the Expression field under the heading
Placement to distinguish the option expression from regular option tagging.
The options that are available for assignment to the object in the Edit Option
Expression dialog box are initially created for the object's project and then assigned to
the object's design using the Applicable Options facility in the Capital Project
application. See the Capital Project help system for more information on creating and
assigning options and evaluated designs.
If no options have been assigned specifically to the design, the system displays all of the
options that have been created for the project.
If you attempt to enter an invalid option expression in the Expression box, the text is
displayed in red and the OK button is disabled.
If you attempt to enter an invalid expression in the Edit Option Expression dialog, an
error message is displayed.
2. Check the Visible box if you want the option expression to be displayed next to the
object on the diagram. You can set the attributes for the text that is displayed by clicking
the Edit Attributes button and specifying the following:
• Font
Select the font type for the text and whether the text is plain, bold, italic or bold/
italic. Mandatory.
• Height

244 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Modifying Objects
Assigning/Editing an Object's Options

Specify the height of the text and select the unit of measurement from the dropdown
list. Mandatory.
• Color
To specify the color of the text, select a color from the dropdown list; it is previewed
in the window to the right of the field. Mandatory.
As well as color names, the list contains the following options:
o Default
The default color used for text by the system.
o Background
The same color used for the background of the diagram. The color changes when
the background color is toggled.
o Foreground
If the diagram background is white, the text is black, and vice versa.
o Manual
The Choose Text Color dialog is displayed, where you can select a color.
• Opaque
Select whether object lines are visible behind the text frame boundary box, (un-
selected), or are not visible behind the text frame boundary box, (selected).
Mandatory.
• Rotation
By default this is 0 for the text to run horizontally (left to right). Enter a different
value manually or select a value from the dropdown list, for example, 270 for the
text to run vertically (bottom to top). Mandatory.
• Auto Flip
If selected, the text flips automatically so that it is never displayed upside down
when it is rotated or flipped. If not selected, a flip or rotation can result in the text
being displayed upside down.
• Justification
Specify the position of the text within the text frame. Mandatory.
• Layout
The following set of options are available to control the layout of the text within its
frame.
o Clip Text to Bounding Box

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 245

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Assigning Module Codes (Capital Logic only)

If selected, specifies that the text is clipped at the edge of its bounding box.
o Shrink to Fit
If selected, specifies that the font of the text reduces as necessary so that the text
fits in its bounding box.
o Allow Text to Overflow
If selected, specifies that the text ignores the edge of its bounding box and flows
out of it.
o Wrap text
Specifies whether the text wraps onto multiple lines when it reaches the edge of
the text bounding box (selected) or whether the text ignores the bounding box
and continues on one line (unselected). When this is selected, if a word is too
long to fit on a single line, it is wrapped by character. Mandatory.
• Preview
Displays an preview of an example text string formatted using the currently selected
settings. Mandatory.
3. Click the OK button to exit the Edit Attributes dialog.
4. Click the OK button to exit the Edit Properties dialog.

Assigning Module Codes (Capital Logic only)

See the following link for use within Capital Logic:
• Assignation of Module Codes to Capital Logic Components in the Capital Logic User
Guide.

Associating a Block with a Design (Capital

Logic only)
See the following link for use within Capital Logic:
• To associate a block with a target design seeAssociating a Block with a Design in the
Capital Logic User Guide.

Specifying a Part Number for a Harness Level

in Capital Integrator
This topic details how to specific a Part Number for a Harness Level in Capital Integrator

246 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Modifying Objects
Editing the Harness Levels on which a Wire Exists

Note
These part numbers are not used in Capital Library. If harness levels have been combined, a
part number cannot be specified for a child harness level.

Procedure
1. Open the Edit Properties facility for the harness level. To do this, right-click on the
harness level in the Configuration Setting Browser Window and select the
Properties option from the pop-up menu. Alternatively, select the harness level in the
Harness Levels facility (see Defining a Harness Level in the Capital Integrator User
Guide) and click the Properties button.
2. Enter the part number in the Part Number field and click the OK button to close the
facility.

Editing the Harness Levels on which a Wire

Exists
This topic details how to configure Harness Levels.
Harness levels are assigned to wires to indicate that those wires exist in the derivative harness
that the level represents.

When wiring is synthesized, wires are assigned to appropriate harness levels to support the
functional options that have been defined. The Edit Properties dialog for a wire enables you to
edit manually the harness levels to which a wire has been assigned.

The Configuration section also contains an Option Expression field that cannot be edited.
This contains the option expression that has been generated either by running Composite Wiring
Synthesis or by using the Generate Option Expressions facility.

Procedure
1. In the Configuration section of the Edit Properties facility, click the ellipsis (...) button
next to the Level field.
2. The Edit Levels facility is displayed. The Available window displays the available
harness levels to which the wire has not been assigned. The Selected window displays
the harness levels to which the wire has been assigned. You can assign a wire to a
harness level by clicking on it in the Available window and clicking the Add button.
You can remove a wire from a harness level by clicking on it in the Selected window
and clicking the Remove button.
3. Click the OK button to confirm the changes and to exit the Edit Levels facility.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 247

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Editing the Offset of Bundle Region Nodes from Bundle Ends

Editing the Offset of Bundle Region Nodes

from Bundle Ends
This topic details how to configure Bundle Region Node offsets
Procedure
1. Change the values for the offsets that you want to change.
The Offset section of the Edit Properties facility for a bundle region indicates the offset
from the bundle start node and bundle end node for each of the region nodes.

The fields in the Offset section are:

• Bundle Start - From - the offset from the bundle start node to the region start node.
• Bundle Start - To - the offset from the bundle start node to the region end node.
• Bundle End - From - the offset from the bundle end node to the region start node.
• Bundle End - To - the offset from the bundle end node to the region end node.
For example:
A region has the following offset values:

The following image indicates the sections of the bundle to which the offset distances
correspond:

248 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Modifying Objects
Foreground, Background and Manual Color Options

2. On the diagram, red squares indicate the new locations of the region nodes. If you have
entered conflicting offsets, the offset values are displayed in red. Click OK to accept
your changes to the offsets.
3. The bundle region changes accordingly in the diagram window.
Related Topics
Editing the Properties of Objects

Foreground, Background and Manual Color

Options
This topic details the options that are available when editing object colors.
Wherever you can select a color, as well as color names, the list contains the following options:

• Background
The same color used for the background of the diagram. The color changes when the
background color is toggled.
• Foreground
If the diagram background is white, the object is black, and vice versa.
• Manual
The Choose Object Color dialog is displayed, where you can select a color.

Specifying Option-Specific Values for Net

Attributes and Properties
In Capital Logic and Capital Integrator, the Variance tab in the Edit Properties facility for net
conductors in Capital Logic enables you to specify option-specific values for net attributes and
properties.
For example, a net conductor can have a WireColor attribute of blue when used in one option
and a WireColor attribute of green when used in another option.

When the Capital Logic design is associated with a Capital Integrator design, the Variance tab
can be viewed (but not edited) in the Edit Properties facility for signals in Capital Integrator.
The option-specific values are taken into account when composite wiring synthesis is
performed.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 249

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Specifying Option-Specific Values for Net Attributes and Properties

Note
The Variance tab will not be displayed for an object if there are no options defined in a
project or if the project preference for Mandate applicable options has been set and the
design does not have any applicable options.

Any properties specific to the individual net conductor or to the net conductor object type can
have option-specific values.

The attributes that can have option-specific values are:

• WireColor
• WireCSA
• WireMaterial
• WireSpecification
In order for these attributes or net-specific properties to be available on the Variance tab, they
must have a valid value set on the Properties tab or General tab of the Edit Properties facility.

Procedure
1. Right-click on the net conductor in the diagram or Logical Design Browser Window and
select the Properties option from the popup menu.
2. Ensure that the attribute or property has a valid value set on the Properties tab or
General tab of the Edit Properties facility. This value is used as the default value when
no option expression has been applied to the net.
3. Click on the Variance tab and click the New button in the Option Variable Attributes
or Option Variable Properties section as appropriate.
4. The Option Selection dialog is displayed. From the dropdown list, select the attribute or
property and click the OK button.
5. A row for that attribute or property is added to the appropriate table. In the Options
column, specify the option expression to which the value applies. You can click on the
ellipsis (...) button to display the Edit Option Expressions facility that helps you to
define the expression. In the Value field, specify the option-specific value.
You repeat steps 2 to 5 for each option-specific value for that attribute or property.
6. Click the OK button to exit the Edit Properties facility.

Note
There are two design rule checks that can be run in Capital Integrator that are
relevant to these option-specific values, Wire that breaks specification rule and
Option-based variance inconsistency. See Design Rule Checks Applicable to Capital
Integrator Designs.

250 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Modifying Objects
Object Attributes

7. To Delete an Option-Specific Value, click on the row for the option-specific value on
the Variance tab and click the Delete button.

Object Attributes
The Attributes section on General tab of the Edit Properties dialog, enables you to edit the
values for the attributes for that object.
Attributes must not be confused with properties on an object.

An attribute is a quality or characteristic of an object within Capital. Object attributes are built-
in to Capital and particular tool behavior is inferred by their presence and value.

A property is a user-defined name/value pair assigned to an object. You can display and report
properties, as well as use them in rules and analysis functionality.

The attributes that are displayed in the Attributes section vary depending on the type of object.

If an attribute is editable for the object, its name and value are displayed in black in the Name
and Value column, otherwise they are grayed out. If you enter an invalid value, it changes to
red.

The Show All Attributes option is selected by default. Unselect this option to display only the
editable attributes on this tab.

When you have edited the attributes, you must click the OK button to exit the Edit Properties
facility and to commit your changes.

If harness names have been created in Capital Project, you can click the ellipsis (...) button by
the Harness attribute value to select one.

In Capital Logic, you can specify the Harness attribute for an object either on the General tab
of the Edit Properties facility or using the Edit Harness Attribute facility.

Editing Multiple Objects Simultaneously

If you have selected multiple objects of different object types, all of the attributes for all of the
selected objects are displayed, but you can edit only those attributes that apply to all of the
selected objects.

If there are multiple values for an editable attribute, Multiple Values is displayed in the Value
field with a drop-down list of the different values. You can select one of these values to apply it
to all selected objects or you can leave the field as Multiple Values so that the objects retain
their different values. If a library part is assigned to any of the selected objects, the attributes
cannot be edited.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 251

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Symbol Attributes in Capital Symbol

Symbol Attributes in Capital Symbol

In Capital Symbol, the Attributes section of the General tab enables you to specify whether an
attribute value is displayed next to the symbol in a Capital Logic diagram.
Check the boxes in the Visible column of the Attribute Table next to the attributes that you
want to be displayed. You can click the corresponding row in the Attributes column of the
Attribute Table to specify the graphical attributes of the text that will be displayed on the
diagram.

When you click the OK button to exit the Edit Properties dialog, the attribute name is
displayed on the symbol diagram. You can move this name to the location where you want the
corresponding value to be displayed in Capital Logic diagrams. When the symbol is added to a
diagram, the name changes to the correct value for that instance of the symbol.

Note
The Pin Type attribute enables you to specify the type of pin. If a net conductor is
connected to more than one device with a usage definition, the list of net names displayed
depends on the pin types to which it is connected. The pin types can be IN, OUT, IxO, IxO
Terminated, NC, PWR and GND. These are defined in Capital Library. See the Capital
Library help system for more information about defining pin types. In Capital Symbol and
Capital Logic, you can specify the pin type U that means that no pin type is specified. This can
be overwritten when you assign the symbol to a library part in Capital Library.

252 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Modifying Objects
Editing an Object's Graphical Properties

Editing an Object's Graphical Properties

In design applications, when first applied to a diagram, an object assumes the application's
default graphical properties.
The Edit Object Properties dialog box, located by right-clicking the mouse cursor over an
object and selecting the Properties menu option and then the Graphical tab, permits the
changing of the default (or subsequent) attributes of an object.

The following Graphical Properties may be changed:

Changing an Object's Primary or Secondary Graphical Color Property . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Changing an Object's Graphical Thickness Property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Changing an Object's Graphical Line Style Property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Changing the Fill Color Attribute for an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Changing an Object's Graphical Fill Pattern Property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Changing the Line End Style of a Conductor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Changing an Object's Primary or Secondary

Graphical Color Property
This topic details how to change an object’s Primary or Secondary color: that is, the color of the
object as it is displayed in the diagram.
A Secondary Color, (for highways and conductors in Capital Logic/Capital Publisher, and
bundles in Capital Integrator only) is the color of the gap in a broken line style as it is displayed
in the diagram.This setting is disabled until a broken line style is selected.

Procedure
1. Select the color from the dropdown list; it is previewed in the window to the right of the
field. As well as color names, the list contains the following options:
• Default
The default color used for the object by the system.
• Background
The same color used for the background of the diagram. The color changes when the
background color is toggled.
• Foreground
If the diagram background is white, the object is black, and vice versa.
• Manual

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 253

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Changing an Object's Graphical Thickness Property

The Choose Object Color dialog is displayed, where you can select a color.
2. Click OK to apply it.

Changing an Object's Graphical Thickness

Property
This topic details how to change an object’s Thickness: the thickness of the lines of the object in
the diagram.
Procedure
1. Select the Override option from the drop-down list box to the right of the Thickness
label.
2. Select the type of thickness from the final dropdown list:
• Logical
These thicknesses do not have a physical unit of measurement. They provide a
logical progression of thickness with a default of 1. A line with thickness 2 is
displayed twice as thick as a line with thickness 1, and so on. When you zoom in or
out of a diagram, the line thickness does not appear any different.
You select the thickness from the middle dropdown list.
• Unit of measurement (mm, cm, inch)
These are physical units of measurement. The line thickness is displayed in relation
to the grid size of a diagram. When you zoom in or out of a diagram, the line grows
or shrinks to stay in scale with the grid.
When you select a unit, the middle dropdown list changes to a free text field where
you specify the thickness.
3. Click the OK button to apply the specified thickness to the object.
Related Topics
Physical Line Thickness

Changing an Object's Graphical Line Style Property

This topic details how to change an object’s Line Style: the style of the lines of the object in the
design.
Procedure
1. Select the Override option from the drop-down list box to the right of the Line Style
label.

254 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Modifying Objects
Changing the Fill Color Attribute for an Object

2. Select the required line style from the drop-down list box.
3. Click the OK button to apply the selected Property to the Object.
4. The line style will display with the color currently selected in the Primary Color
setting.

Note
If the object is a highway or conductor in Capital Logic, or a bundle in Capital
Integrator, and the line style selected is broken, then the color of the gaps in the
broken line style can be set with the Secondary Color option

Changing the Fill Color Attribute for an Object

This topic details how to change an object’s fill color. It can be used, for example, to highlight
the function of a connectivity object when producing service documentation.
It is available for Parameterized Objects (not symbols) in Capital Logic and Capital Publisher.

Note
The fill color for an object type can also be controlled by the style set applied to the
diagram. See the Fill Color option in the Styling Options - Graphics section of the Capital
Diagram Styling User Guide.

Procedure
1. Right-click on the object in the diagram and select Properties; the Properties dialog box
is displayed.
2. Click the Graphical tab and select the required color from the Fill Color dropdown list;
it is previewed in the window to the right of the field.
As well as color names, the list contains the following options:
• Default
The default color defined within the style set applied to the diagram.
• Background
The same color used for the background of the diagram. The color changes when the
background color is toggled.
• Foreground
If the diagram background is white, the object is black, and vice versa.
• Manual
The Choose Object Color dialog box is displayed, where you can select a color.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 255

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Changing an Object's Graphical Fill Pattern Property

3. Click OK.
Results
The fill color is applied to the object in the diagram.

Changing an Object's Graphical Fill Pattern

Property
This topic details how to change an object’s Fill Pattern: whether a fill pattern is used in a
polygon or closed object
Procedure
Note
If you add a fill pattern to grouped objects, the fill pattern is lost when you ungroup
them.

1. Select the Override option from the drop-down list box to the right of the Fill Pattern
label and click the Change field; the Fill Pattern Selection dialog is displayed.
2. Click on the fill pattern that you want to use.
3. Specify the foreground color and background color that you want to use for the fill
pattern. As well as color names, the lists contain the following options:
• Background
The same color used for the background of the diagram. The color changes when the
background color is toggled.
• Automatic
If the diagram background is white, the object is black, and vice versa.
• Choose Color
The Choose Object Color dialog is displayed, where you can select a color.
4. Click the OK button to exit the Fill Pattern dialog.

Changing the Line End Style of a Conductor

This topic details how to change an object’s Line End Style: the style of arrow at the end of a
line, (for lines and conductors in Capital Logic only).
Procedure
1. In the Line End Style section at the bottom of the facility, click on the Left drop-down
list and select the style of arrow that you want to display at the left end of the conductor.

256 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Modifying Objects
Changing the Line End Style of a Conductor

When you select an arrow style, it is previewed in the window below the drop-down list.
If you do not want an arrow at the end of the conductor, select the blank line from the
drop-down list.
2. Click on the Right drop-down list and select the style of arrow that you want to display
at the right end of the conductor.
3. Click the OK button to apply the selected end line styles to the object.

Note
The style is applied to every end-segment of the conductor. An end-segment is a
segment where at least one end point is not connected to another segment from the
same conductor.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 257

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Physical Line Thickness

Physical Line Thickness

Any line on a diagram or symbol (for example, a wire graphic, a device graphic or a comment
symbol) can be configured to have a thickness that maps to a physical unit (such as inch, cm or
mm).
This thickness is used when displaying the graphics in the diagram window and is displayed
relative to the grid size. It is also translated to all outputs for printing and exporting diagrams.

Note
See the topics”Setting the Physical Line Thickness for an Electrical Symbol or Border” and
“Setting the Physical Line Thickness for a Comment Symbol” in the Capital Symbol User
Guide.

Setting the Physical Line Thickness for Graphics in Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Using a Plugin Interface to Control Physical Line Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Setting the Default Physical Line Thickness for Comment Graphics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

Setting the Physical Line Thickness for Graphics in

Diagrams
The physical line thickness for graphics in diagrams is defined in styling but can be overridden
for individual instances of lines.
Prerequisites
The diagram must be open in the diagram window.

Procedure
1. In the style set that you are using, ensure that the correct unit for your diagrams has been
specified:
a. Press Space Bar and enter Styles; the Style Sets dialog is displayed.
b. In the browser on the left, select the style set that you are using for the diagram and
specify the Unit. This option specifies the unit of measurement upon which all
numerical distances on a design with this style set applied will be based.
2. Within the style set in the browser on the left, navigate to the object type for which you
want to specify a physical line thickness and select the Graphics node; a Thickness
field is displayed on the right of the dialog (among other fields).
3. In the Thickness field, select Override from the first dropdown list and Physical from
the last dropdown list. The unit that you set for the Unit is displayed next to the Physical
option.

258 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Modifying Objects
Using a Plugin Interface to Control Physical Line Thickness

4. In the field that now appears between the dropdown lists, specify the value for the line
thickness. The value can be any floating-point number up to three decimal places.
5. Click OK.
6. Apply the style set change to the diagram. See Applying Styles in the Capital Diagram
Styling User Guide.
Results
• The line thickness for objects of that type updates accordingly. Zooming in or out
maintains the line thickness with respect to the diagram grid size (for example, the lines
become thinner if you zoom out).
• You can override the line thickness for a graphic in a diagram by right-clicking it and
selecting Properties. On the Graphical tab, specify the required Thickness.
Related Topics
Physical Line Thickness

Using a Plugin Interface to Control Physical Line

Thickness
You can use a plugin interface to control all of the graphical attributes for an object type,
including the attribute Thickness.
Caution
You can use the plugin to control all attributes for an object type or just a sub-set of those
attributes. When the plugin controls only a sub-set, you must configure the other attributes
manually before assigning the plugin (as in the procedure below).

Procedure
1. In the Style Sets dialog, navigate to the style set that you are using in the browser tree on
the left.
2. Within the style set in the browser tree, navigate to the Graphics node for the object
type.
3. Specify the Graphics attributes that are not controlled by the plugin.
4. Create the plugin to set the line thickness of the object type. For information about
developing and using extensibility plugins, see the PluginDevelopment.pdf file, located
in the doc\plugin folder of your Capital installation.
5. Assign the plugin in the Style Sets dialog:
a. Within the style set in the browser tree, navigate to the Graphics node for the object
type.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 259

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Setting the Default Physical Line Thickness for Comment Graphics

b. From the Plugin Name dropdown list, select the plugin.

c. Click OK.
6. Apply the style set change to the diagram. See Applying Styles in the Capital Diagram
Styling User Guide.
Results
The line thickness for objects of that type updates accordingly (based on the plugin). Zooming
in or out maintains the line thickness with respect to the diagram grid size (for example, the
lines become thinner if you zoom out).
Related Topics
Physical Line Thickness

Setting the Default Physical Line Thickness for

Comment Graphics
By editing project preferences, you can set a default physical line thickness for comment
graphics in Capital Logic, Capital Topology and Capital Integrator.
Procedure
1. From a design application, press Space Bar and enter Project Preferences; the Project
Preferences Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Navigate to the Application Name > Comment > Graphics node and select it; the
Thickness field is displayed on the right of the dialog.
3. Select the unit of measurement from the second dropdown list for the Thickness option;
the first dropdown list changes to a free text field.
4. Specify the physical line thickness and click OK.
Results
When you add comment graphics to a diagram in the appropriate application, their line
thickness matches what you have specified. Zooming in or out maintains the line thickness with
respect to the diagram grid size (for example, the lines become thinner if you zoom out).
Related Topics
Physical Line Thickness

260 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Modifying Objects
Finding and Replacing Property Values, Attribute Values and Symbols

Finding and Replacing Property Values,

Attribute Values and Symbols
Within Capital Logic and Capital Integrator, you can find and replace attribute values, property
values and symbols across multiple designs and/or diagrams, a build list or an entire project.
Note
Changes are made to Capital Logic designs only.

Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Find and Replace. Alternatively, you can select an object and
then select the menu option.
2. The Find and Replace dialog box is displayed. Specify the following:
• Scope - select the project, build list, designs or diagrams in which you want to
search. If build lists exist, they are listed above the designs.
3. The filter symbol in the Scope section indicates whether a filter has been set or
not .

If a filter has been set and you do not want to use a filter, click the Clear Filter button.
If you want to set a filter for the search, click the Set Filter button to display the Find
and Replace Filters dialog. In that dialog, specify the following;
• Object Types - select the object types that you want to be included in the search.
You can clear the selection at any point by clicking the Clear Selection button.

Note
If you search for pins, the search results include backshell terminations, if you
search for devices, the search results also include ground devices.

• Revision - specify the design revision in which you want to search. You can check
the Latest Revision Only box to only ever search across the latest revision.
• Release Level - from the dropdown list, select either no release level (blank) or a
release level across which you want to search.
• Domain - from the dropdown list, select either no domain (blank) or a domain
across which you want to search.
• Effectivity (only visible if effectivity functionality has been enabled for the project
in Capital Project) - specify the effectivity range within which you want to search.
Click the OK button to exit the Find and Replace Filters dialog.
4. In the Find section, you specify for what you are searching and potentially want to
replace. If you use wildcards in this section, you must check the Regular Expression

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 261

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Finding and Replacing Property Values, Attribute Values and Symbols

box, otherwise the search will not use the wildcards correctly. When the Regular
Expression box is checked, an empty field is equivalent to *. You can check the Match
Case box if you want the search to be case-sensitive with regard to the specified values.
You can specify the following:

Note
In the following fields, if you want to search for a special character such as $, ensure
that you type a delimiter (\) before it. For example, \$.

• Object Name - if you want to limit the search to objects with particular names, you
can enter a full name or part of a name using wildcards.
• Attribute/Property - specify the attribute or property name. You can either enter
the name manually or select it from the drop-down list in the field.
• Matches - specify the value of the attribute or property.
If Exact Match is selected, every value string found will be fully replaced by the
content in the replace section.
If Exact Match is not selected, each and every occurrence of the string entered will
be replaced by the content in the replace section. For example, find “AB” and
replace with “C”, results in the renaming of Property=ABDAB with
Property=CDC.
If nothing is specified here, the entire value strings of the attribute/property
occurrences found will be replaced by the content in the replace section. For
example, find “” and replace with “C”, results in the renaming of
Property=ABDAB with Property=C.
• Symbol - if you want to search on objects that use a particular symbol only, you can
click the ellipsis (...) button to display the Symbol Selection dialog that enables you
to browse the available symbol libraries to select the symbol. If you select a symbol,
it is displayed in a preview window.
You can click the Clear button to clear the symbol selection.

5. In the Replace section, you can specify the following:

• Attribute/Property - the attribute or property name that you want to replace the
attribute or property names found by the search. You can either enter the name
manually or select it from the drop-down list in the field. The properties listed are
those created at the project level and are not those created on the fly for an instance
of an object. The attributes listed are only those applicable to the specified objects.
• Value - the property value that you want to replace the property values found by the
search.

262 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Modifying Objects
Finding and Replacing Property Values, Attribute Values and Symbols

• Symbol - the symbol that you want to replace the symbols found by the search. You
click the ellipsis (...) button to display the Select Symbol dialog that enables you to
browse the available symbol libraries to select the symbol. If you select a symbol, it
is displayed in a preview window.
You can click the Clear button to clear the symbol selection.

• Update Symbol Only - select this if you want to replace only the symbols used for
the found objects and not their attributes or properties. You cannot replace comment
symbols or symbols associated to library parts.
• Preserve Pin Positions
Select this if you want the pins on the symbol instances to remain where they are in
the diagram already.
• Remove Properties Not on Symbol
Select this if you want to remove any properties from the symbol instances that are
not on the symbol in the symbol library.
• Copy Attribute/Property Values from Symbol
Select this if you want to copy any properties and attributes that are on the symbol in
the symbol library to the symbol instances.
• Preserve Attribute Text
The attribute visibility settings on a diagram instance of a symbol may be different to
the attribute visibility settings on that symbol in the symbol library. If this is
selected, the attribute visibility settings on the symbol instance in the diagram are
retained. If this is not selected, the attribute visibility settings on the diagram
instance are overwritten by those on the symbol in the library.
• Preserve Diagram Pin Name
In a diagram, you can rename a pin name on a symbol instance. If this is selected, the
pin names in the diagram are retained. If this is not selected, the pin names in the
diagram are replaced by the pin names from the symbol in the symbol library.
6. Click one of the following buttons:
• Find - finds the specified attributes and properties but does not replace any values.
The output window at the bottom of the application displays the found objects on the
Find and Replace tab. You can click on an object name to view that object in a
diagram.
• Preview - previews the changes that would be made if you did a replace but does not
change the actual designs. The changes are displayed on the Find and Replace tab
of the output window at the bottom of the application but are not made to the actual
design. You can click on an object name to view that object in a diagram.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 263

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Fill Pattern Selection

• Replace - finds and replaces the specified values. This works on editable designs
only. If the replace action affects a shared object, the design is saved automatically.
This button is disabled if the Replace section does not contain valid data. The
objects with replaced values are listed on the Find and Replace tab of the output
window at the bottom of the application. You can click on an object name to view
that object in a diagram. Some replacement values may be invalid for some of the
found objects and the Find and Replace tab lists these as errors.
7. If you are replacing values, a message states that the operation is undoable and you must
confirm whether you want to proceed. You can check a box so that this message is not
displayed again.
If you are replacing symbols and the replacement symbol has a different number of pins
to the symbol instance, the Map Pins Dialog is displayed and you map the pins from the
replacement symbol to pins on the symbol instances. You also specify what data on the
symbol instance you want to preserve and what data you want to remove. After doing
this, click OK.

Fill Pattern Selection

The Fill Pattern Selection facility enables you to specify a fill pattern and color for the currently
selected object.
The following options are available:

• Fill Patterns
Select the fill pattern.
• Foreground Color
Specify the foreground color for the pattern. As well as color names, the list contains the
following options:
o Background
The same color used for the background of the diagram. The color changes when the
background color is toggled.
o Foreground
If the diagram background is white, the object is black, and vice versa.
o Manual
The Choose Object Color dialog is displayed, where you can select a color.
• Background Color

264 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Modifying Objects
Applying Scopes to a Project or Design

Specify the background color for the pattern. Click on the square to display the Choose
Object Color Dialog where you specify a color. As well as color names, the list
contains the following options:
o Background
The same color used for the background of the diagram. The color changes when the
background color is toggled.
o Foreground
If the diagram background is white, the object is black, and vice versa.
o Manual
The Choose Object Color dialog is displayed, where you can select a color.

Applying Scopes to a Project or Design

This topic details how to apply scopes to a project or design.
If scopes are defined at project level and there are no design-level scope definitions, then the
project-level scopes are used for the designs.

If scopes are defined both at project and design level, the design-level scopes are used within a
design.

Only one customer or manufacturing site scope code is allowed per design or project.

For a usage example detailing how to use component scoping, including applying it to projects
or designs see the Capital Library User Guide.

Note
You can use Extensibility Plugins to manage component scoping. If a plugin is available
then it will override the default part selection rules. For more information about developing
and using extensibility plugins, see the PluginDevelopment.pdf file that is located in the
doc\plugin folder of your Capital installation.

Prerequisites
• The required scopes must have been created in Capital Library.
Procedure
1. Right-click on the project name or design in the Project Browser Tree and select Edit;
the Edit Project dialog box or Edit Design dialog box is displayed.
2. Click Properties; an Edit Properties dialog is displayed.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 265

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Advanced Naming Functionality

3. Click the Scopes tab; the scope codes that have been created in Capital Library are
displayed in the Available window.
4. Select the scopes that you want to apply to the project or design and click Add; the
selected scopes are added to the Selected window.
5. Click OK.
Results
• The selected scopes are applied to the project or design.
• If a library component has had scopes applied to it, these dictate whether it is available
for selection within the project or design.
• For a design, if you hold your mouse cursor over the design name in the Project Browser
Tree, the applied scopes are displayed.

Advanced Naming Functionality

This functionality is available in Capital Logic and Capital Integrator.
There are three types of object names:

• Default Names - these are generated automatically.

• Fixed Names - the are names that have been defined in the Edit Properties dialog for
objects and have been set as a fixed. See “Editing the Properties of Objects” on page 225
for more information about how to do this.

Note
If the name for an object has been modified from the default in the Name field of the
Edit Properties dialog, it is set as fixed by default.

• Generated Names - these are based on the naming compositions set up in the advanced
naming functionality in Capital Project. Each name composition has a condition that
determines the objects which can be used to generated names. When a name is being
generated, each name composition is tested against the named object in the order the
compositions are defined. The first name composition to match the object is used to
generate a name.
Different types of condition entries are used to test the named object. Property and attribute
value conditions can be used to match their value to a fixed string. For example, the condition
"color"="Blue" matches all objects with the property set to "Blue".

It may be the case that some objects will not be renamed when you apply advanced naming to
them because they do not match any conditions for the naming compositions.

266 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Modifying Objects
Generating Names for Selected Objects in a Diagram

Design properties can also be included in naming compositions so the values that you have
specified for design properties influence the names that are generated. See Editing the
Information for a Design for more information about specifying design properties.

Note
Device connectors whose names are constrained by a footprint or library part cannot be
renamed using advanced naming.

If you want to use the advanced naming conventions, you can:

• Use the Generate Advanced Names dialog to generate them for specific selected
objects. See “Generating Names for Selected Objects in a Diagram” on page 267.
• Use the Generate Advanced Names dialog to generate them for all objects in a build
list, design or diagram. See “Generating Names for all Objects in a Build List, Design or
Diagram” on page 268.
Related Topics
Generating Names for Selected Objects in a Diagram
Generating Names for all Objects in a Build List, Design or Diagram

Generating Names for Selected Objects in a

Diagram
This topic details how to use Advanced Naming Functionality to generate names for selected
objects in a diagram.
Procedure
1. Select the objects for which you want to generate names, right-click on one of them and
select Generate Selected Names. Alternatively, select the objects, press Space Bar and
enter Update Selected; the Generate Advanced Names Dialog Box is displayed.
2. The objects already have names and you must select which types of names you want to
replace with newly generated names. In the Replace section, select each type of name
that you want to replace.

Note
If you want to replace names on shared objects, you must select Fixed Names
because shared object names are considered as fixed by the system.

3. Specify whether you want to “Reset Object Indices” and/or “Reset Counters”.
4. Click OK; the dialog closes and the new names for the selected objects are generated.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 267

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Generating Names for all Objects in a Build List, Design or Diagram

Related Topics
Advanced Naming Functionality
Generating Names for all Objects in a Build List, Design or Diagram

Generating Names for all Objects in a Build

List, Design or Diagram
This topic details how to use Advanced Naming Functionality to generate names for all objects
in a build list, design or diagram.
Procedure
1. With the appropriate project open, press Space Bar and enter Batch Update; the
Generate Advanced Names Dialog Box is displayed.
2. In the Scope tree, select the build list, design or diagram within which you want to
generate all object names.
3. The objects in these containers already have names and you must select which types of
names you want to replace with newly generated names. In the Replace section, select
each type of name that you want to replace.

Note
If you want to replace names on shared objects, you must select Fixed Names
because shared object names are considered as fixed by the system.

4. Specify whether you want to “Reset Object Indices” and/or “Reset Counters”.
5. Click OK; the dialog closes and the new names for the selected objects are generated.
Related Topics
Advanced Naming Functionality
Generating Names for Selected Objects in a Diagram

Selecting a Component Part Number in the

Part Selection Dialog Box
This topic explains how to use the Part Selection Dialog Box to select one or more component
part numbers when editing a field on another dialog that requires a component part number to be
entered.

268 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Modifying Objects
Performing a Batch Update of Library Parts

Procedure
1. In the Part Selection Dialog Box, enter your search criteria as required and click Search
parts using criteria specified ( ).

The search results are returned in the Parts table.

2. Select the part number that you want to use in the table and click Insert.
The Part Selection dialog box closes and the selected component part definitions are
added to the field that you are editing.

Performing a Batch Update of Library Parts

This topic explains how to perform a batch update of library part information for objects based
on the Part Number attribute for each object. The action can update library part information for
all objects in the currently active design or in a build list to which that design belongs.
Note
You can use extensibility plugins to assign part numbers to objects. Having used such a
plugin, you can then use this batch update functionality to update the association of library
parts. For more information about developing and using extensibility plugins, see the
PluginDevelopment.pdf file that is located in the doc\plugin folder of your Capital
installation.

Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Library Parts; the Confirm Batch Update Library Parts
dialog is displayed.
2. If given the choice, select whether you want to update library parts in the currently
active design or in a build list to which that design belongs.
3. Select Preserve Include on BOM attribute to maintain the current setting for an object so
it is not overwritten with its library setting.
4. Select Reset parts to preferred supplier if you wish update all objects in design(s) with a
preferred supplier part number and details. Leave the option unchecked to retain existing
supplier details on all objects in design(s).

Note
In cases where the Batch Update of Library parts action is run in Capital Logic with
the option Reset parts to preferred Supplier unchecked, on a design which has Auto
Generate Harness Connectors enabled, the supplier part number and supplier name of
footprint harness connectors are reset to preferred supplier details.

5. Click OK; a status bar indicates that the update is taking place.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 269

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Performing a Batch Update of Library Parts

6. Once the update is complete:

• The Output Window displays information regarding which objects have been
updated on an Update Library Parts tab. This tab also displays messages regarding
any objects that could not be updated. You can click on an object’s name to jump to
that object in the diagram window.
• If an object has a value specified for its Part Number attribute but does not have a
library part associated, this action creates an association to a library part for that
object.
• If an object already has an associated library part, the associated part is not changed
but the library part information is updated for that object where appropriate.

270 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Modifying Objects
Slice Objects

Slice Objects
This functionality applies to Capital Logic, Capital Publisher, Capital Integrator and Capital
Topology only.
Certain objects on diagrams can be sliced, simplifying diagram modifications and making
diagrams easier to understand.

The Slice functionality allows you to draw an intersection line across an applicable object, to
create a new instance of that object, retaining connectivity and preserving style. You can use
this to quickly partition diagram content then move it to a new diagrams, or to trim oversized
devices and connectors.

• In Capital Logic and Capital Publisher: Devices, blocks, connectors and conductors
(including multicores, overbraids and highways) can be sliced
• In Capital Integrator and Capital Topology: Slots and bundles can be sliced
• Slices can be vertical or horizontal
• Slices can not be made directly across pins or mated edges
• Inline connectors can not be sliced across just one of the inline halves.
• Slices on devices, slots or connectors must leave at least one pin on each side of the
slice. If not the object will be trimmed to the size of the slice. See Slice to Trim Objects.

Video
Slicing Objects - this video illustrates how to perform this task. Click to view it.

Slice Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

Slice Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Slice Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Slice Conductors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Slicing a Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Slicing a Bundle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Reconnecting a Sliced Bundle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Navigating Between Sliced Object Instances. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Slice to Trim Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Slice and Move To . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

Slice Devices
This topic explains how to slice devices.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 271

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Slice Devices

Prerequisites
• Valid device on open diagram
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Slice.

Note
Selecting Shift & Slice will enable the cursor to retain the Slice action and allow
repeated slices. Press Escape to return to the standard cursor.

2. The cursor changes to the Slice cursor

3. Click on the diagram to place the first end of the slice line.
4. Place the second end of the line by clicking at the desired location. In Example 7-1
below, the slice line is made horizontally across device DEV305, between conductors
COND114 and COND115.
Figure 7-1. Slice Device

Results
• The device is split as in Example 7-2 below.
Figure 7-2. Device Slice Complete

• The devices can be selected and moved apart as in Example 7-3 below.

272 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Modifying Objects
Slice Blocks

Figure 7-3. Separate Devices

Related Topics
Slice Blocks
Slice Connectors
Slice Conductors
Slice to Trim Objects
Slice and Move To

Slice Blocks
This topic explains how to slice blocks.
Prerequisites
• Valid block on open diagram
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Slice.

Note
Selecting Shift & Slice will enable the cursor to retain the Slice action and allow
repeated slices. Press Escape to return to the standard cursor.

2. The cursor changes to the Slice cursor

3. Click on the diagram to place the first end of the slice line.
4. Place the second end of the line by clicking at the desired location. In Example 7-1
below, the slice line is made horizontally across device BLOCK200, between highways
HW101 and HW102.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 273

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Slice Blocks

Figure 7-4. Slice Block

Results
• The block is split as in Example 7-2 below.
Figure 7-5. Block Slice Complete

• The blocks can be selected and moved apart as in Example 7-3 below.
Figure 7-6. Separate Blocks

Related Topics
Slice Connectors
Slice Conductors

274 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Modifying Objects
Slice Connectors

Slice to Trim Objects

Slice and Move To

Slice Connectors
This topic explains how to slice connectors.
Prerequisites
• Valid connector on open diagram
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Slice.

Note
Selecting Shift & Slice will enable the cursor to retain the Slice action and allow
repeated slices. Press Escape to return to the standard cursor.

2. The cursor changes to the Slice cursor

3. Click on the diagram to place the first end of the slice line.
4. Place the second end of the line by clicking at the desired location. In Example 7-7
below, the slice line is made horizontally across the connector Conn1, between Wire 002
and Wire 003.
Figure 7-7. Slice Connector

Results
• The connector is split as in Example 7-8 below.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 275

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Slice Conductors

Figure 7-8. Connector Slice Complete

• The connectors can be selected and moved apart as in Example 7-9 below.
Figure 7-9. Separate Connectors

Related Topics
Slice Devices
Slice Blocks
Slice Conductors
Slice to Trim Objects
Slice and Move To

Slice Conductors
This topic explains how to slice conductors.
Prerequisites
• Valid conductors on open diagram

276 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Modifying Objects
Slice Conductors

Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Slice.

Note
Selecting Shift & Slice will enable the cursor to retain the Slice action and allow
repeated slices. Press Escape to return to the standard cursor.

2. The cursor changes to the Slice cursor

3. Click on the diagram to place the first end of the slice line.
4. Place the second end of the line by clicking at the desired location. In Example 7-10
below, the slice line is made vertically across conductors 001, 002 and 003.
Figure 7-10. Slice Conductors

Results
• The conductors are sliced and display with appropriate cross-references. See
Example 7-11 below
Figure 7-11. Slice Complete

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 277

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Slicing a Slot

Related Topics
Slice Devices
Slice Blocks
Slice Connectors
Slice to Trim Objects
Slice and Move To

Slicing a Slot
In Capital Integrator or Capital Topology, you slice a slot in order to separate harness objects
that you want to move to another diagram or to create an instance with a sub-set of the
connectors on it.The separation is purely graphical, it does not break any connectivity.
Each instance represents the entire slot (that is, a device placed in the slot is available in all
instances).

Prerequisites
• A valid slot on an open diagram.
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Slice.

The cursor changes appearance ( ).

2. Click once on the diagram, drag the cursor over where you want to slice the slot. You
decide this based on which connectors you want on which instance.
Figure 7-12. Slot Before Slice

3. Click the diagram again.

Results
The slot splits so that each instance has a sub-set of the connectors. The connectors on each
instance depend on where you sliced the slot.

278 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Modifying Objects
Slicing a Bundle

Figure 7-13. Slot After Split

You can move the instances separately.

The Design Browser (Design tab) displays an Instance folder under the slot. This lists the
instances of the slot on the different diagrams and shows which connectors are on each instance.
Related Topics
Slice Objects

Slicing a Bundle
In Capital Integrator or Capital Topology, you slice a bundle to create multiple instances of it.
Instances can remain on the same diagram but you may want multiple instances in order to
separate harness objects that you want to move to another diagram.The separation is purely
graphical, it does not break any connectivity.
Prerequisites
• A valid bundle on an open diagram.
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Slice.

The cursor changes appearance ( ).

2. Click once on the diagram, drag the cursor over where you want to slice the bundle or
bundles, and click the diagram again.
Results
The bundles split but the connectivity does not break.
The Design Browser (Design tab) displays an Instances folder under the harness for the bundle.
It lists the instances of that harness. You can also expand the node for that particular bundle to
view the different instances of it.
The sliced end of the bundles have an arrowed glyph ( ) to indicate the bundles have been
sliced.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 279

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Reconnecting a Sliced Bundle

You can drag a sliced end to stretch and move a bundle.

You can move objects on either side of the slice to another diagram.
You can use styling to control whether and how cross-reference text is displayed at a sliced end
for a bundle. You apply this styling to the bundle object in your style set. See Adding a Cross-
Reference Text Decoration in the Capital Diagram Styling User Guide.
If you select a harness or bundle instance on one diagram so that it is highlighted, any instance
of the same bundle or harness will be highlighted automatically when you switch to another
diagram.
Related Topics
Reconnecting a Sliced Bundle
Slice Objects

Reconnecting a Sliced Bundle

You can reconnect instances of a sliced bundle that are on the same diagram in Capital
Integrator and Capital Topology.
Procedure
Right-click on the arrow glyph at a sliced end of a bundle and choose Join Sliced Bundle.

Results
The sliced sections of the bundle reconnect.

Navigating Between Sliced Object Instances

There are various ways to navigate between instances of sliced objects.
Prerequisites
• The instances must exist.
Procedure
Perform one of the following procedures.

If you want to... Do the following:

Highlight instances Select the object name in the Design Browser (Design tab).
The instances highlight in the diagram. If you switch to
another diagram with an instance, it is also highlighted.
Note: If you select an instance in the Design Browser,
only that instance is highlighted in the diagram.

280 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Modifying Objects
Slice to Trim Objects

If you want to... Do the following:

Zoom in to instances in the Right-click on the instance in the Design Browser (Design
diagram tab) and choose Zoom Selected. The diagram window
zooms in to that instance and highlights it.
Note: If you select the object name rather than an
instance, the diagram windows zooms in to include all
instances.
Jump to another instance Right-click on the instance you are viewing and choose
from the instance you are View Related Items. If there is only one other instance, you
viewing jump to it in the diagram window and it is highlighted. If
there are multiple instances available, you select which
instance you want from a dialog box.

Slice to Trim Objects

This topic explains how objects can be trimmed.
Prerequisites
• Valid object to be trimmed exists on the diagram. In this example a device is used.
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Slice.

Note
Selecting Shift & Slice will enable the cursor to retain the Slice action and allow
repeated slices. Press Escape to return to the standard cursor.

2. The cursor changes to the Slice cursor

3. Click on the diagram to place the first end of the slice line.
4. Place the second end of the line by clicking at the desired location. In Example 7-14
below, the slice line is made horizontally across the device below conductor 003.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 281

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Slice and Move To

Figure 7-14. Make the Slice Device

Results
• Because there were no pins on either side of the slice line, the device is trimmed to the
size of the slice. See Example 7-15 below.
Figure 7-15. Trimmed Device

Related Topics
Slice Devices
Slice Blocks
Slice Conductors
Slice Connectors
Slice and Move To

Slice and Move To

This topic explains how to slice multiple objects from sections of the diagram and move them to
a new diagram.

282 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Modifying Objects
Slice and Move To

Prerequisites
• Valid objects on the diagram that can be sliced.
• Second diagram available for selection to Move To
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Slice.

Note
Selecting Shift & Slice will enable the cursor to retain the Slice action and allow
repeated slices. Press Escape to return to the standard cursor.

2. The cursor changes to the Slice cursor

3. In this example, Example 7-16 below, we will slice and move the six speakers and their
associated connectivity from the top right of the diagram to a new diagram.
Figure 7-16. Starting Point

4. Click on the diagram to place the slice line. In Example 7-17 below, the slice line is
made vertically across the conductors.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 283

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Slice and Move To

Figure 7-17. Make the Slice

5. The Slice is made and the six speakers and their conductors have been separated. See
Example 7-18 below, cross-references are created for the new instances of the nets.
Figure 7-18. Slice Made

6. Select the objects as below in Example 7-19, press Space Bar and enter Move To.
Choose the required diagram and press OK.

284 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Modifying Objects
Slice and Move To

Figure 7-19. Select Move To

Results
• The selected objects are removed from the original diagram. See Example 7-20
Figure 7-20. Objects Removed

• The selected objects can now bee seen on the new diagram as selected in earlier step.
See Example 7-21 below.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 285

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Design Logs

Figure 7-21. Selected Objects on New Diagram

Related Topics
Slice Devices
Slice Blocks
Slice Connectors
Slice Conductors
Slice to Trim Objects

Design Logs
There are multiple processes that generate a design log file, which details the results of the
process, as well as any warnings or errors that may have occurred.
By inspecting these logs, you can investigate the causes of any problems encountered.

• Change Manager Bridge Operations

• Harness Engineering
• Module Breakdown
• Generate SBOM
• SBOM Part Number Generation
• Cost Generation
• Design Rule Checks

286 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Modifying Objects
Viewing Design Logs

• Apply stored ECO Changes

• Workbook Generation
Related Topics
Viewing Design Logs
View Design Logs Help
Design Log Viewer Help
Design Log Event Filter Options Help
Design Log Filter Options Help

Viewing Design Logs

Once a process activity is completed, you can review the design logs generated by opening them
in the Design Log Viewer dialog box.
Prerequisites
• Valid logs are available. See Design Logs.
Procedure
1. Open the relevant design.
2. Press Space Bar and enter View Design Log.
The View Design Logs Dialog Box is displayed.
3. In the Log column, double-click the log you want to view, alternatively select the
required log, and click the View button.

Note
If you are viewing the logs for a composite harness, you can expand the log structure
(by clicking on the plus [+] symbols) until the logs for any derivative, functional
module, or production module child are displayed.

Results
• The Design Log Viewer Dialog Box opens, displaying the contents of the log.
• You can repeat step 3 to open multiple Design Log Viewer Dialog boxes
simultaneously.
• All filtering controls on the View Design Logs dialog box remain active when Design
Log Viewer dialog box(es) are open.
• You are able to keep the viewer dialog box open and interact with the design.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 287

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Opening Design Logs

o However, if you invoke any action that creates a log file, then all open viewers are
automatically closed. See “Design Logs” on page 286 for details of such actions.
Related Topics
View Design Logs Help
Design Log Viewer Help
Design Log Event Filter Options Help
Design Log Filter Options Help

Opening Design Logs

Once a process activity is completed, you can review the design logs generated by opening them
in the Output Window.
Prerequisites
• Valid logs are available. See Design Logs.
Procedure
1. Open the relevant design.
2. Select Workflow > Design Log > Open from the ribbon.
The Open Design Logs dialog box displays (see View Design Logs Dialog Box).
3. In the Log column, double click the log you want to open, alternatively select the
required log, and click the Preview button.

Note
If you are viewing the logs for a composite harness, you can expand the log structure
(by clicking on the plus [+] symbols) until the logs for any derivative, functional
module, or production module child are displayed.

Results
The log opens in the Output Window, this allows you to review the log and interact with the
open design.

Parameterized Object
Parameterized objects are design objects that have no symbols and their graphics are controlled
by a configuration file. Some examples of parameterized objects are devices, connectors,
splices, and slots.

288 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Chapter 8
Printing

This chapter contains topics which detail the options available in configuring how diagrams are
output to printing devices, including diagram scaling and the configuration and selection of
print regions.
The following topics are available:

Print to a Printer or Plotter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

Printing a Single Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Printing Selected Diagrams in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Printing All Diagrams in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Printing All Diagrams in a Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Printing Selected Print Regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Print Regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Adding a Print Region to a Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Resizing a Print Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Moving a Print Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Editing a Print Region. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Deleting a Print Region. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Print to a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Printing To File - All Diagrams in a Project. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Printing To File - All Diagrams in a Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Printing To File - Single Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Printing To File - Selected Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Printing To File - Print Regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
SVG Page Settings Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Line Thickness Scale Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Minimum Line Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Display Width and Display Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Line Pattern Scale Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Fill Pattern Scale Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 289

February 2016
Printing
Print to a Printer or Plotter

Print to a Printer or Plotter

The following topics detail how to select one or more diagrams to be sent to a printer or plotter,
either installed on the local machine or available on the network.
Printing a Single Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Printing Selected Diagrams in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Printing All Diagrams in a Project. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Printing All Diagrams in a Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Printing Selected Print Regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

Printing a Single Diagram

This topic details how to print the currently open diagram.
Procedure
1. In the menu, with the diagram open, press Space Bar and enter Print. The Print Dialog
Box appears.
2. Select Diagram from the Print dropdown list.
3. Specify the printing device to which the print is to be sent by selecting the device from
the Printer dropdown list.
4. Select one of the following options from the Scaling dropdown list:
• Fit to Paper— This option specifies that the diagram should be printed to fit on a
single sheet of paper, of a size specified in the Page Setup dialog for the selected
printing device. The diagram will be resized as needed to fit.
• Print to Scale — This option specifies that the diagram should be printed at 100%
size, as dictated by the design’s grid spacing value (as specified in the currently
applied style set; see the Diagram Styling User Guide for more information).
Alternatively, the diagram can be printed larger or smaller by specifying a new
percentage value, either by overwriting the value in the field to the right, or by
clicking the up and down arrow buttons.
5. Check the Clip To Border checkbox to print only the diagram elements falling within the
border outline. Unchecked, all harness elements will be printed, including those placed
outside of the border.
6. Check the Black/White Only checkbox to generate prints using only black lines/text
against a white background, regardless of the specified text/line colors in use in a
diagram. Unchecked, prints will be generated in color.
7. Specify a Dash Multiplier setting to stretch or shrink dashes relative to the size of output
page.

290 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Printing
Printing Selected Diagrams in a Project

8. Click OK. The diagram is sent to the specified printer.

Related Topics
Printing Selected Diagrams in a Project
Printing All Diagrams in a Project
Printing All Diagrams in a Design
Printing Selected Print Regions

Printing Selected Diagrams in a Project

This topic details how to print the currently selected designs and diagrams or build list in the
Project Browser.
Prerequisites
If you want to print all diagrams in a build list (by selecting the build list), set the build list to
active.

Procedure
1. With the designs and diagrams selected in the Project Browser, press Space Bar and
enter Print. The Print Dialog Box is displayed.

Note
If you select a block of diagrams, the diagrams are printed in the order in which they
are listed in the project tree. If you select individual diagrams, the diagrams are
printed in the order in which they were selected.

2. Select Selection from the Print dropdown list.

3. Click the Configure button to the right of the Print field. The Project Diagram Settings
Dialog Box is displayed, from where you can refine the selection of diagrams to print
before clicking OK.
4. Specify the printing device to which the print is to be sent by selecting the device from
the Printer dropdown list.
5. Select one of the following options from the Scaling dropdown list:
• Fit to Paper— This option specifies that the diagram should be printed to fit on a
single sheet of paper, of a size specified in the Page Setup dialog for the selected
printing device. The diagram will be resized as needed to fit.
• Print to Scale — This option specifies that the diagram should be printed at 100%
size, as dictated by the design’s grid spacing value (as specified in the currently
applied style set; see the Diagram Styling User Guide for more information).
Alternatively, the diagram can be printed larger or smaller by specifying a new

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 291

February 2016
Printing
Printing All Diagrams in a Project

percentage value, either by overwriting the value in the field to the right, or by
clicking the up and down arrow buttons.
6. Check the Clip To Border checkbox to print only the diagram elements falling within the
border outline. Unchecked, all harness elements will be printed, including those placed
outside of the border.
7. Check the Black/White Only checkbox to generate prints using only black lines/text
against a white background, regardless of the specified text/line colors in use in a
diagram. Unchecked, prints will be generated in color.
8. Specify a Dash Multiplier setting to stretch or shrink dashes relative to the size of output
page.
9. Click OK. The selection of diagrams are sent to the specified printer.
Related Topics
Printing a Single Diagram
Printing All Diagrams in a Project
Printing All Diagrams in a Design
Printing Selected Print Regions

Printing All Diagrams in a Project

This topic details how to print all diagrams belonging to the currently open project.
Procedure
1. With the project open, press Space Bar and enter Print. The Print Dialog Box is
displayed.
2. Select Project from the Print dropdown list.
3. Click the Configure button to the right of the Print field. The Project Diagram Settings
Dialog Box is displayed, from where you can refine the selection of diagrams to print
before clicking OK.
4. Specify the printing device to which the print is to be sent by selecting the device from
the Printer dropdown list.
5. Select one of the following options from the Scaling dropdown list:
• Fit to Paper— This option specifies that the diagram should be printed to fit on a
single sheet of paper, of a size specified in the Page Setup dialog for the selected
printing device. The diagram will be resized as needed to fit.
• Print to Scale — This option specifies that the diagram should be printed at 100%
size, as dictated by the design’s grid spacing value (as specified in the currently

292 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Printing
Printing All Diagrams in a Design

applied style set; see the Diagram Styling User Guide for more information).
Alternatively, the diagram can be printed larger or smaller by specifying a new
percentage value, either by overwriting the value in the field to the right, or by
clicking the up and down arrow buttons.
6. Check the Clip To Border checkbox to print only the diagram elements falling within the
border outline. Unchecked, all harness elements will be printed, including those placed
outside of the border.
7. Check the Black/White Only checkbox to generate prints using only black lines/text
against a white background, regardless of the specified text/line colors in use in a
diagram. Unchecked, prints will be generated in color.
8. Specify a Dash Multiplier setting to stretch or shrink dashes relative to the size of output
page.
9. Click OK. The diagrams are sent to the specified printer.
Related Topics
Printing a Single Diagram
Printing Selected Diagrams in a Project
Printing All Diagrams in a Design
Printing Selected Print Regions

Printing All Diagrams in a Design

This topic details how to print all diagrams belonging to the currently open design.
Procedure
1. Open any diagram belonging to the design for which you want to print all diagrams.
2. Press Space Bar and enter Print. The Print Dialog Box is displayed.
3. Select Design from the Print dropdown list.
4. Specify the printing device to which the print is to be sent by selecting the device from
the Printer dropdown list.
5. Select one of the following options from the Scaling dropdown list:
• Fit to Paper— This option specifies that the diagram should be printed to fit on a
single sheet of paper, of a size specified in the Page Setup dialog for the selected
printing device. The diagram will be resized as needed to fit.
• Print to Scale — This option specifies that the diagram should be printed at 100%
size, as dictated by the design’s grid spacing value (as specified in the currently
applied style set; see the Diagram Styling User Guide for more information).

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 293

February 2016
Printing
Printing Selected Print Regions

Alternatively, the diagram can be printed larger or smaller by specifying a new

percentage value, either by overwriting the value in the field to the right, or by
clicking the up and down arrow buttons.
6. Check the Clip To Border checkbox to print only the diagram elements falling within the
border outline. Unchecked, all harness elements will be printed, including those placed
outside of the border.
7. Check the Black/White Only checkbox to generate prints using only black lines/text
against a white background, regardless of the specified text/line colors in use in a
diagram. Unchecked, prints will be generated in color.
8. Specify a Dash Multiplier setting to stretch or shrink dashes relative to the size of output
page.
9. Click OK. The diagrams are sent to the specified printer.
Related Topics
Printing a Single Diagram
Printing Selected Diagrams in a Project
Printing All Diagrams in a Project
Printing Selected Print Regions

Printing Selected Print Regions

This topic details how to print sections of a design by selecting one or more Print Regions to be
printed.
Procedure
1. With the diagram open, press Space Bar and enter Print. The Print Dialog Box is
displayed.
2. Select Print Region from the Print dropdown list.
3. Click the Configure button to the right of the Print field. The Edit Print Region Groups
Dialog Box is displayed.
4. Select the Active option for each print region to be included in the print, then click OK.
5. Specify the printing device to which the print is to be sent by selecting the device from
the Printer dropdown list.
6. Select one of the following options from the Scaling dropdown list:
• Fit to Paper— This option specifies that the diagram should be printed to fit on a
single sheet of paper, of a size specified in the Page Setup dialog for the selected
printing device. The diagram will be resized as needed to fit.

294 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Printing
Printing Selected Print Regions

• Print to Scale — This option specifies that the diagram should be printed at 100%
size, as dictated by the design’s grid spacing value (as specified in the currently
applied style set; see the Diagram Styling User Guide for more information).
Alternatively, the diagram can be printed larger or smaller by specifying a new
percentage value, either by overwriting the value in the field to the right, or by
clicking the up and down arrow buttons.
7. Check the Clip To Border checkbox to print only the diagram elements falling within the
border outline. Unchecked, all harness elements will be printed, including those placed
outside of the border.
8. Check the Black/White Only checkbox to generate prints using only black lines/text
against a white background, regardless of the specified text/line colors in use in a
diagram. Unchecked, prints will be generated in color.
9. Specify a Dash Multiplier setting to stretch or shrink dashes relative to the size of output
page.
10. Click OK. The diagrams are sent to the specified printer.
Related Topics
Printing a Single Diagram
Printing Selected Diagrams in a Project
Printing All Diagrams in a Project
Printing All Diagrams in a Design

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 295

February 2016
Printing
Print Regions

Print Regions
The following topics detail how to add print regions to a design, with additional topics on
resizing, moving and editing print regions once created.
It is possible to create print regions within a border symbol, which will then be added to a
design as the border is selected.

It is also possible to create one or more print regions for comment symbols that contain
connector and splice information on a harness diagram.

Topics detailing the creation and maintenance of border and comment symbol print regions are
available in the Capital Symbol User Guide.

Adding a Print Region to a Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

Resizing a Print Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Moving a Print Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Editing a Print Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Deleting a Print Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

Adding a Print Region to a Design

This topic details how to create one or more print regions by drawing directly onto a design.
Procedure

1. Press Space Bar and enter Add print region. The cursor changes to .

2. Click to place the first corner of the print region, then drag out a rectangle until the
region is of the required size.
3. Click to confirm the placement of the print region.

Note
Multiple print regions can be placed without reselecting the Add Print Region tool.
Once a print region has been placed, single-clicking again will place the first corner
of a new print region.

4. Double-click or press Enter to finish. The Edit Print Region Groups Dialog Box is
displayed.
5. Either accept the default Print Region Name offered, or enter your own.
6. By default, print regions are set to Active and the Visible setting is unselected; change
these settings if required.

296 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Printing
Resizing a Print Region

7. Click OK.
Results
The print region is placed onto the design.The following print region entities are displayed:
• The print region outline
• The print region name
Related Topics
Resizing a Print Region
Moving a Print Region
Editing a Print Region
Deleting a Print Region

Resizing a Print Region

This topic details how to increase or decrease the size of a print region on a design.
Note
Print regions configured against the border applied to the design can only be resized by
editing the border symbol in Capital Symbol. See Editing a Print Region in the Capital
Symbol User Guide.

Procedure
1. Either:
• Hover the cursor over the print region outline
or
• Click on the print region outline to select it
2. The gray boxes identifying the draggable corners are displayed.
3. Click on one of the gray boxes and drag until the outline is of the required size.
Related Topics
Moving a Print Region
Editing a Print Region
Deleting a Print Region

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 297

February 2016
Printing
Moving a Print Region

Moving a Print Region

This topic details how to reposition a print region on a design.
Note
Print regions configured against the border applied to the design can only be moved by
editing the border symbol in Capital Symbol. See Editing a Print Region in the Capital
Symbol User Guide.

Procedure
1. Click on any edge of the print region outline (not on the corners).
2. Drag the print region to the new location and release the mouse button.

Note
Begin dragging as soon as you click on the print region outline; if you wait too long
before starting to drag, the Panning Tool will activate.

Related Topics
Adding a Print Region to a Design
Resizing a Print Region
Editing a Print Region
Deleting a Print Region

Editing a Print Region

This topic details how to change the name and behavior of a print region on a design.
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Print Region Settings. The Edit Print Region Groups Dialog
Box is displayed.
2. Make any changes required before clicking OK.

Note
Print regions configured against the border applied to the design can only be
renamed by editing the border symbol in Capital Symbol. See Editing a Print Region
in the Capital Symbol User Guide. However the Active and Visible status can be
amended within the design.

Related Topics
Adding a Print Region to a Design

298 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Printing
Deleting a Print Region

Resizing a Print Region

Moving a Print Region
Deleting a Print Region

Deleting a Print Region

This topic details how to remove a print region from a design.
Note
Print regions configured against the border applied to the design can only be deleted from
the border symbol in Capital Symbol

Procedure
1. Select the print region to be deleted.
2. Either:
• Press Space Bar and enter Delete
• Right-click and select Delete
• Press the Delete key
Results
The print region is removed from the design.
Related Topics
Adding a Print Region to a Design
Resizing a Print Region
Moving a Print Region
Editing a Print Region

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 299

February 2016
Printing
Print to a File

Print to a File
The following topics detail how to export the design data from one or more diagrams to either
PDF, DXF, CGM or SVG format.
Printing To File - All Diagrams in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Printing To File - All Diagrams in a Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Printing To File - Single Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Printing To File - Selected Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Printing To File - Print Regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

Printing To File - All Diagrams in a Project

This topic details how to export all the diagrams in the currently open Project to PDF, DXF,
CGM or SVG format.
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Print to File. The Print to File Dialog Box is displayed.
2. From the Export dropdown list, select Project.
3. Click the Configure button to the right of the Export field. The Project Diagram
Settings Dialog Box is displayed, from where you can refine the selection of diagrams to
print before clicking OK.
4. Select the Format in which the data should be exported. Available formats are PDF,
DXF, CGM or SVG.

Note
If you select PDF, DXF, CGM or SVG in the Format field, the Configure button to
the right of the field is enabled, offering access to either the PDF Page Settings
Dialog Box, the DXF Page Settings Dialog Box, the CGM Page Settings Dialog Box or
the SVG Page Settings Dialog Box, from where you can configure a number of PDF,
DXF, CGM or SVG specific generation parameters.

5. Either:
• Accept the default Filename of {Diagram}, in which case the data files created will
be named based on the diagram name appended with the file extension appropriate
to the selected export Format.
• Click the ellipsis (...) button to the right of the Filename field to display the Edit File
Name Dialog Box and configure a new file name template.
6. Click the ellipsis (...) button to the right of the Location field and use the file browser
dialog to navigate to the directory in which the exported data file(s) should be placed.

300 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Printing
Printing To File - All Diagrams in a Design

7. Click OK.
Results
The design data is exported and the generated file(s) placed in the specified location.
Related Topics
Printing To File - All Diagrams in a Design
Printing To File - Single Diagram
Printing To File - Selected Diagrams
Printing To File - Print Regions

Printing To File - All Diagrams in a Design

This topic details how to export all the diagrams in the currently open Design to PDF, DXF,
CGM or SVG format.
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Print to File. The Print to File Dialog Box is displayed.
2. From the Export dropdown list, select Design.
3. Select the Format in which the data should be exported. Available formats are PDF,
DXF, CGM or SVG.

Note
If you select PDF, DXF, CGM or SVG in the Format field, the Configure button to
the right of the field is enabled, offering access to either the PDF Page Settings
Dialog Box, the DXF Page Settings Dialog Box, the CGM Page Settings Dialog Box or
the SVG Page Settings Dialog Box, from where you can configure a number of PDF,
DXF, CGM or SVG specific generation parameters.

4. Either:
• Accept the default Filename of {Diagram}, in which case the data files created will
be named based on the diagram name appended with the file extension appropriate
to the selected export Format.
• Click the ellipsis (...) button to the right of the Filename field to display the Edit File
Name Dialog Box and configure a new file name template.
5. Click the ellipsis (...) button to the right of the Location field and use the file browser
dialog to navigate to the directory in which the exported data file(s) should be placed.
6. Click OK.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 301

February 2016
Printing
Printing To File - Single Diagram

Results
The design data is exported and the generated file(s) placed in the specified location.
Related Topics
Printing To File - All Diagrams in a Project
Printing To File - Single Diagram
Printing To File - Selected Diagrams
Printing To File - Print Regions

Printing To File - Single Diagram

This topic details how to export the design data from a single diagram to PDF, DXF, CGM or
SVG format.
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Print to File. The Print to File Dialog Box is displayed.
2. From the Export dropdown list, select Diagram.
3. Select the Format in which the data should be exported. Available formats are PDF,
DXF, CGM or SVG.

Note
If you select PDF, DXF, CGM or SVG in the Format field, the Configure button to
the right of the field is enabled, offering access to either the PDF Page Settings
Dialog Box, the DXF Page Settings Dialog Box, the CGM Page Settings Dialog Box or
the SVG Page Settings Dialog Box, from where you can configure a number of PDF,
DXF, CGM or SVG specific generation parameters.

4. Either:
• Accept the default Filename of {Diagram}, in which case the data files created will
be named based on the diagram name appended with the file extension appropriate
to the selected export Format.
• Click the ellipsis (...) button to the right of the Filename field to display the Edit File
Name Dialog Box and configure a new file name template.
5. Click the ellipsis (...) button to the right of the Location field and use the file browser
dialog to navigate to the directory in which the exported data file(s) should be placed.
6. Click OK.
Results
The design data is exported and the generated file(s) placed in the specified location.

302 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Printing
Printing To File - Selected Diagrams

Related Topics
Printing To File - All Diagrams in a Project
Printing To File - All Diagrams in a Design
Printing To File - Selected Diagrams
Printing To File - Print Regions

Printing To File - Selected Diagrams

This topic details how to export the currently selected designs and diagrams or build list in the
Project Browser to PDF, DXF, CGM or SVG format.
Prerequisites
If you want to print all diagrams in a build list (by selecting the build list), set the build list to
active.

Procedure
1. With the designs and diagrams or build list selected in the Project Browser, press Space
Bar and enter Print to File. The Print to File Dialog Box is displayed.

Note
If you select a block of diagrams, the diagrams are printed in the order in which they
are listed in the project tree. If you select individual diagrams, the diagrams are
printed in the order in which they were selected.

2. From the Export dropdown list, select the Selection option.

3. Click the Configure button to the right of the Export field. The Project Diagram
Settings Dialog Box is displayed, from where you can refine the selection of diagrams to
print before clicking OK.
4. Select the Format in which the data should be exported. Available formats are PDF,
DXF, CGM or SVG.

Note
If you select PDF, DXF, CGM or SVG in the Format field, the Configure button to
the right of the field is enabled, offering access to either the PDF Page Settings
Dialog Box, the DXF Page Settings Dialog Box, the CGM Page Settings Dialog Box or
the SVG Page Settings Dialog Box, from where you can configure a number of PDF,
DXF, CGM or SVG specific generation parameters.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 303

February 2016
Printing
Printing To File - Print Regions

5. Either:
• Accept the default Filename of {Diagram}, in which case the data files created will
be named based on the diagram name appended with the file extension appropriate
to the selected export Format.
• Click the ellipsis (...) button to the right of the Filename field to display the Edit File
Name Dialog Box and configure a new file name template.
6. Click the ellipsis (...) button to the right of the Location field and use the file browser
dialog to navigate to the directory in which the exported data file(s) should be placed.
7. Click OK.
Results
The design data is exported and the generated file(s) placed in the specified location.
Related Topics
Printing To File - All Diagrams in a Project
Printing To File - All Diagrams in a Design
Printing To File - Single Diagram
Printing To File - Print Regions

Printing To File - Print Regions

This topic details how to export active Print Regions in the diagram currently open to PDF,
DXF, CGM format. Print Regions can not be exported to SVG format.
Procedure
1. With a diagram open that has active print regions, press Space Bar and enter Print to
File. The Print to File Dialog Box is displayed.
2. From the Export dropdown list, select Print Regions.
3. Click the Configure button to the right of the Export field. The Edit Print Region
Groups Dialog Box is displayed.
4. Select the Active checkbox for each print region to be exported, then click OK.
5. Select the Format in which the data should be exported. Available formats are PDF,
DXF or CGM.

304 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Printing
Printing To File - Print Regions

Note
If you select PDF, DXF or CGM in the Format field, the Configure button to the
right of the field is enabled, offering access to either the PDF Page Settings Dialog
Box, the DXF Page Settings Dialog Box or the CGM Page Settings Dialog Box, from
where you can configure a number of PDF, DXF or CGM specific generation
parameters.

6. Either:
• Accept the default Filename of {Diagram}, in which case the data files created will
be named based on the diagram name appended with the file extension appropriate
to the selected export Format.
• Click the ellipsis (...) button to the right of the Filename field to display the Edit File
Name Dialog Box and configure a new file name template.
7. Click the ellipsis (...) button to the right of the Location field and use the file browser
dialog to navigate to the directory in which the exported data file(s) should be placed.
8. Click OK.
Results
The design data is exported and the generated file(s) placed in the specified location.
Related Topics
Printing To File - All Diagrams in a Project
Printing To File - All Diagrams in a Design
Printing To File - Single Diagram
Printing To File - Selected Diagrams

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 305

February 2016
Printing
SVG Page Settings Examples

SVG Page Settings Examples

As source diagrams in Capital Design Tools can differ in size, scale, detail and complexity, the
settings used to generate SVG diagrams may need to be adjusted to create accurate rendering.
The SVG Page Settings Dialog Box contains multiple settings that allow you to adjust the
rendering when generating SVG files using Print to File.

Note
It may be necessary to adjust a combination of the Page Settings to achieve accurate
rendering.

The following examples detail each of the available settings, explaining why they may be used
and show the effects that changing the settings have on the final output SVG file. Some
examples have used exaggerated settings to emphasize the effects of the changes.

Line Thickness Scale Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

Minimum Line Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Display Width and Display Height. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Line Pattern Scale Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Fill Pattern Scale Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

Line Thickness Scale Factor

This setting applies a percentage increase or decrease to the thickness of any lines on the output
SVG.
It can be used when the display of lines on an output SVG file is considered too faint or too
bold. See also “Minimum Line Width” on page 307 for other line width controls.

Example 8-1 below shows an SVG that has been created with the Line Thickness Scale Factor
set to 0.7. The lines appear faint.

306 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Printing
Minimum Line Width

Figure 8-1. Before Factor Increase

By increasing the Line Thickness Scale Factor to 2.0 and regenerating the SVG from the same
source diagram, the output file displays as in Example 8-2 below.

Figure 8-2. After Factor Increase

Minimum Line Width

This setting, specified in pixel width, automatically applies a minimum line width to all lines in
generated SVG files. It can be used to ensure that a minimum line width is applied as a default
across any SVG renderings.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 307

February 2016
Printing
Minimum Line Width

See also “Line Thickness Scale Factor” on page 306 on page 255 for other line width controls

Example 8-3 below shows a set of differing width lines drawn in a design tool.

Figure 8-3. Source Design

Example 8-4 below shows a section of an SVG that has been created from the above source
diagram, with the Minimum Line Width set to 30 pixels. All the lines have a line width of 30
pixels or more so the Minimum Line Width has not been applied and the rendering is as in the
source diagram.

Figure 8-4. First Minimum Width Increase

By increasing the Minimum Line Width to 180 pixels and regenerating the SVG from the same
source diagram, the output file displays as in Example 8-5 below. The Minimum Line Width
has been applied and has had the effect of rendering all the lines at a minimum width of 180
pixels.

Figure 8-5. Second Minimum Width Increase

308 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Printing
Display Width and Display Height

Display Width and Display Height

As the size of source diagrams can vary, it may be necessary to change the display size of the
output SVG to give accurate display detail. The Display Width and Display Height settings,
specified in pixel width/height, allow you to amend the display size of any output SVG.
Example 8-6 below shows a section of an SVG, created with Display Width and Display
Height set to 1024 x 768, that is zoomed in to its maximum. The cavity details on the connector
symbol are difficult to read.

Figure 8-6. Insufficient Detail

By increasing the Default Width and Default Height setting to 5000 x 4000, and regenerating
the SVG from the same source diagram, a much larger SVG is created and the maximum zoom
now displays the same object in more detail see Example 8-7 below.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 309

February 2016
Printing
Line Pattern Scale Factor

Figure 8-7. More Detail

Line Pattern Scale Factor

As the size of source diagrams can vary, it may be necessary to amend the way that linestyles
(doted or dashed) are rendered on any generated SVG to ensure than are consistent with the
source.

310 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Printing
Fill Pattern Scale Factor

The Line Pattern Scale Factor setting applies a percentage increase/decrease to spacing of any
lines styles on the output SVG to ensure an accurate and consistent rendering.

Example 8-8 below shows a source diagram linestyle.

Figure 8-8. Source Diagram Linestyle

Example 8-9 below, shows the same linestyle, rendered on an SVG that has been created with
the Line Pattern Scale Factor set to 2.0. The linestyle spacing has not been maintained

Figure 8-9. Inconsistent Linestyle

By decreasing the Line Pattern Scale Factor to 0.5 and regenerating the SVG from the same
source diagram, the linestyle renders as a more accurate representation of the original source
diagram. See Example 8-10 below.

Figure 8-10. Correctly Rendered Linestyle

Fill Pattern Scale Factor

As the size of source diagrams can vary, it may be necessary to amend the way that fill patterns
are rendered on any generated SVG to ensure than are consistent with the source.
The Fill Pattern Scale Factor setting applies a percentage increase/decrease to spacing of any
fill patterns on the output SVG to ensure an accurate and consistent rendering.

Example 8-11 below shows a source diagram fill pattern.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 311

February 2016
Printing
Fill Pattern Scale Factor

Figure 8-11. Source Diagram Fill Pattern

Example 8-12 below, shows the same fill pattern, rendered on an SVG that has been created
with the Fill Pattern Scale Factor set to 2.0. The linestyle spacing has not been maintained

Figure 8-12. Inconsistent Fill Pattern

By decreasing the Fill Pattern Scale Factor to 0.5 and regenerating the SVG from the same
source diagram, the fill pattern renders as a more accurate representation of the original source
diagram. See Example 8-13 below.

Figure 8-13. Correctly Rendered Fill Pattern

Related Topics
Printing To File - All Diagrams in a Project
Printing To File - All Diagrams in a Design
Printing To File - Single Diagram

312 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Printing
Fill Pattern Scale Factor

Printing To File - Selected Diagrams

Printing To File - Print Regions

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 313

February 2016
Printing
Fill Pattern Scale Factor

314 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Chapter 9
Trace and Navigate, Compare and Propagate

Trace and navigate functionality provides you with the ability to trace related objects across
design revisions and abstractions, and to navigate to those objects.
Compare and propagate functionality provides you with the ability to compare objects in
designs, and generate a To Do list to help propagate changes that ensure your designs and build
lists are consistent.

Trace and Navigate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Tagging Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Working Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Adding Designs to a Working Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Tracing an Object across Designs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Trace Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Trace Relationships. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Configuring Tagging Tasks to Run in the Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Configuring Stale Tag Cleanup Tasks to Run in the Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Compare and Propagate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Viewing the To Do List for a Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
To Do List Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Troubleshooting Tagging Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
ANSTagGenerationTask or ANSStaleTagCleanupTask Fails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
ANSTagGenerationTask or ANSStaleTagCleanupTask Runs for a Long Time . . . . . . . . 333
CapitalRunner Log File Indicates Out-of-Memory Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Tagging Tasks Have Not Started After Data Migration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
First Tagging Task Takes a Long Time After Data Migration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 315

February 2016
Trace and Navigate, Compare and Propagate
Trace and Navigate

Trace and Navigate

Trace and navigate functionality provides you with the ability to trace related objects across
design revisions and abstractions, and to navigate to those objects. For example, you can see
how a signal is implemented by wires.
The scope of this functionality is dictated by a user-defined working set of designs and build
lists. You can trace and navigate to objects in designs in the working set only. The initial object
that you select need not be in a design in the working set but all trace results will be from the
working set.

Video
To see how trace and navigate works, see the video “Using Trace and Navigate”.

Tagging Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Working Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Adding Designs to a Working Set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Tracing an Object across Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Trace Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Trace Relationships . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Configuring Tagging Tasks to Run in the Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Configuring Stale Tag Cleanup Tasks to Run in the Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

Tagging Service
The trace functionality refers to tags that the system generates for various containers in the
Capital database (for example, designs, SBOMs).
Tags are named pieces of data that the system generates for an object in a container and stores
for querying. For example, you can have a tag with type “signal” and value “POWER +12V”.
That tag represents the signal of an object in a design. Wires and nets implementing that signal
have that tag.

The tagging service is triggered by various user actions that run for containers:

• When you edit a container. For example, when you edit and save a design.
• When you delete a container. For example, when you delete a design.
• When you import a project or design.
• When you edit a shared object in a Capital Logic design.
• When you add a design to the working set.

316 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Trace and Navigate, Compare and Propagate
Working Set

• When you revise or copy a Capital Integrator, Capital HarnessXC, or Capital Topology
design.
In addition, you can modify the schedule of the tagging service and its related parameters. See
Configuring Tagging Tasks to Run in the Background.

When containers are deleted from the database, any tags related to them remain. You can
configure the system to check for these stale tags and remove them on a fixed schedule. See
Configuring Stale Tag Cleanup Tasks to Run in the Background.

Related Topics
Trace and Navigate
Working Set
Adding Designs to a Working Set
Configuring Tagging Tasks to Run in the Background
Configuring Stale Tag Cleanup Tasks to Run in the Background

Working Set
Your working set contains designs that are relevant to your work. You can trace and navigate to
objects in designs in your working set only.
You add individual designs of any type or build lists to the working set. Included designs and
build lists are indicated by a green dot ( ) overlaid on top of the icon for the design or build list
in the Project Browser Window.

The system saves your working set on your computer. If you close and re-open Capital (and the
project) on that computer, the working set is still available. If you access Capital on a different
computer, the working set is not available.

You can filter the Project Browser Window in any design application to display only the designs
in your working set. To do this, select the Show designs and build lists in Working Set icon
( ) at the bottom right of the Project Browser Window.

Related Topics
Adding Designs to a Working Set

Adding Designs to a Working Set

Adding a design, design folder, or build list to a working set means you can trace and navigate
to objects in any of the included designs.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 317

February 2016
Trace and Navigate, Compare and Propagate
Tracing an Object across Designs

Procedure
In the Project Browser Window at the top left of any design application window, right-click on
the design, design folder, or build list and select Add to Working Set.

Note
You can select multiple designs and design folders.

Results
• In the Project Browser Window, a green dot is added to the icon for the design, design
folder, or build list (for example, ).

• Trace and navigate functionality can trace and navigate to objects in that design, design
folder, or build list.
• If multiple revisions of the same design are included in a design folder, the system adds
the latest revision only.
• The working set is saved on the computer on which you are working. If you close and
re-open Capital (and the project) on that computer, the working set is still available. If
you access Capital on another computer, the working set is not available and you will
have to set it up on that computer again.
• You can filter the Project Browser Window in any design application to display only the
designs in your working set. To do this, select the Show designs and build lists in
Working Set icon ( ) at the bottom right of the Project Browser Window.

• You can remove a design, design folder, or build list from a working set by right-
clicking on it in the Project Browser Window and selecting Remove from Working
Set. To remove everything from a working set, right-click the project name in the
Project Browser Window and select Remove from Working Set.
Related Topics
Trace and Navigate
Working Set

Tracing an Object across Designs

You can select an object in a design and trace (find) related objects in other designs from your
working set. The related objects are presented as a list from which you can navigate to those
designs in the appropriate applications.
Procedure
Right-click on the object and select Trace or click the object and press CTRL-T; a Trace Tab
appears in the Output Window at the bottom of the application window.

318 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Trace and Navigate, Compare and Propagate
Trace Tab

Note
If Trace is disabled, the tool tip on it explains why. The most common reasons are
you have multiple objects selected or have an empty working set.

Results
• The Trace tab displays the related objects.
• Click a related object’s name to navigate to it. The appropriate application and design
opens with the related object highlighted and a Trace tab opens for that object.

Note
If you traced from an object that is not in the working set, the Trace tab displays
only related objects that are in the working set.

Related Topics
Trace and Navigate
Working Set
Trace Relationships

Trace Tab
A Trace tab is displayed in the Output Window at the bottom of a design application window
when you use trace functionality to find related objects to the object currently selected in the
design.
The tab displays a table listing the related objects with the following contents:

Table 9-1. Trace Tab Contents

Field Description
Click to go back in history If you have clicked the icon in the Name column to view
Click to go forward in trace results for related objects, you can navigate backwards
history and forwards through the results for each viewed object.
The viewed objects are listed alongside these buttons. The
grayed-out name indicates the object whose results are
displayed currently. You can click a blue object name to
view the results for it. You can click on earlier objects that
you viewed to see their results again and the listed objects
remain the same until you click the icon for an object not
yet viewed.
Refresh the contents of the Refreshes the contents of the tab with any related updates
table made for the current object in the other designs.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 319

February 2016
Trace and Navigate, Compare and Propagate
Trace Tab

Table 9-1. Trace Tab Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Abstraction The abstraction assigned to the design containing the related
object. If you have not assigned an abstraction for the
design, the design type displays.
Name The name of the related object. You can click this name to
navigate to it. The design opens in the appropriate
application with the object highlighted and a Trace tab
opens for that object.
If you do not want to open the other design, you can hold
the mouse cursor over this field and click the icon to
display the trace results for that related object. That is, what
the Trace tab would display if you had right-clicked the
related object in the other application and selected Trace.
Relationship The relationship between the selected object and the related
object. Hold your mouse cursor over the relationship to
view a tool tip that explains what the relationship means.
See also “Trace Relationships” on page 321 for descriptions
of relationships.
Design The name of the design in which the related object is
located.
Build List The name of the build list containing the design with the
related object. “None” displays if the design is not part of
any build list.

Usage Notes
You can tear this tab from the interface so that it is a free-floating, re-sizable dialog box. To do
this, click the tab name and drag it. If you do not tear the tab from the interface, the results are
replaced when you use the trace function for another object. If you tear off the tab, it remains
unchanged when you use the trace function for another object and a separate tab is created. To
return the tab to the Output Window, close the dialog box.

When free-floating, the name of the tab also includes the selected object. For example,
Trace:BUN387.

Related Topics
Tracing an Object across Designs
Trace Relationships

320 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Trace and Navigate, Compare and Propagate
Trace Relationships

Trace Relationships
The Trace functionality identifies various relationships between objects.
The Trace tab results can include the following relationships between objects.

Table 9-2. Trace Relationships

Relationship Description
Same Name This object in the list has the same name as the
traced object regardless of the object kind.
For example: When you create a revision or a
copy of a Capital Logic design, the same pins
across revisions appear in trace results. Note that
the ‘same name for pins’ trace looks only within a
single device. It does not trace all pins with the
same name across all devices.
Same Signal This object in the list has the same value for the
signal attribute or property as the traced object
regardless of the object kind.
For example: When you create a revision of a
Capital Logic design and convert nets to wires in
it, the trace results for a wire show the nets
corresponding to it in the original revision.
Same Connectivity This object in the list has the same end point
connectivity as the traced object. Must be an exact
match.
Same Ancestry This object in the list has the same ancestry as the
traced object. Through the various types of data
management activities, these two objects are
related. It is not necessary that one be a direct
descendant of the other. Note that copying a
design will not retain any ancestry relationships.
For example: When you create a revision of a
source Capital Logic design, a revised wire in the
revision has the same base ID as an original wire
in the source. This means, when you trace one of
them, the other appears in the trace results as
sharing the same ancestry.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 321

February 2016
Trace and Navigate, Compare and Propagate
Trace Relationships

Table 9-2. Trace Relationships (cont.)

Relationship Description
Direct Descendant This object in the list was derived from the traced
object through a data management task such as
revisioning the design, or harness synchronization.
For example: When you create a revision of a
source Capital Logic design, a revised device in
the revision has a parent ID equal to the ID of an
original device in the source. This means, when
you trace the original device, the revised device
appears in the trace results as direct descendant.
Direct Ancestor This object in the list was sourced from the traced
object through a data management task such as
revisioning the design, or harness synchronization.
For example, when you create a revision of a
source Capital Logic design, a revised device in
the revision has a parent ID equal to the ID of an
original device in the source. This means, when
you trace the revised device, the original device
appears in the trace results as direct ancestor.
Platform Implementation This object in the list is the representation (Capital
Integrator/Topology): signal(s), slot(s), splice(s),
connector(s), wire(s) in the topology of the traced
object.
That means, the trace result is showing the
implementation object in a Capital Integrator
design for an object in an associated Capital Logic
design.
Platform Source This object in the list is the source (in Capital
Logic) of the traced topology object.
That means, the trace result is showing the object
in an associated Capital Logic design when an
object in a Capital Integrator design is traced.

Related Topics
Trace Tab
Tracing an Object across Designs

322 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Trace and Navigate, Compare and Propagate
Configuring Tagging Tasks to Run in the Background

Configuring Tagging Tasks to Run in the

Background
In order for you to use the trace functionality, the system must tag design data. You can modify
the schedule of the task that does this and its related parameters.
The tagging task runs mainly for data that has been edited since the last time it was tagged.

See Tagging Service for further information about tagging.

Prerequisites
• You should be a system administrator.
• You must have configured Capital Integration Server (CIS) in the clientprops.xml file in
the config directory of your installation. The specified user must have access to all
domains that require tagging. See the Capital Integration Server (CIS) entry in the
“clientprops.xml File Format” topic of the Capital Configuration Files Reference Guide
for further information.
Procedure
1. Navigate to the config directory of your Capital installation where you run Capital
Integration Server and open the indexing-configuration.xml file for editing.
2. Find the ANSTagGenerationTask line and edit the parameters:
• autoschedule
Set this to true to enable the background indexing and tagging. The scheduling
specified by the cronexpression runs from when the Capital Integration Server
starts.
• cronexpression
Enter a cron expression to schedule how often the indexing and tagging task runs.
Click here for information and examples of how to define cron expressions. You will
need your SupportNet login details.
For example:
<ANSTagGenerationTask autoschedule="true" cronexpression="0 0 0/1 * * ?" />
3. Find the TaskParameters line and edit the parameters:
• batchsize
The indexing and tagging task processes batches of design containers. Specify how
many design containers are included in each batch.
• waittime

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 323

February 2016
Trace and Navigate, Compare and Propagate
Configuring Tagging Tasks to Run in the Background

Specify how much time (in milliseconds) the system waits between finishing one
batch of design containers and starting on the next batch. This frees up the system
for any other scheduled tasks.
• cleanupfiles
As the ANSTagGeneration task (and related ANSStaleTagCleanup task) run
frequently, they accumulate task parameter files and log files quickly. Specify “true”
if you want the system to clean up (delete) these files automatically.
Specify “false” if you do not want to run clean-up functionality. If you want to
archive the files rather than delete them, you can implement your own OS batch
script.
• cleanuptype
If you have set cleanupfiles to “true”, this specifies how the files are cleaned up.
Specify one of the following values:
o simple
Deletes all the parameter files and log files for the task, excluding the files for
the current task run.
o retainbytime
Deletes all the files that are older than a specified retention time (retentiontime
parameter).
o retainbycount
Deletes all the files, excluding those for the specified number of last task
executions (retentioncount parameter).
o retentiontime
Relates to the cleanuptype parameter with value retainbytime. Specify the
maximum age (in milliseconds) of the parameter files and log files that are not
deleted.
o retentioncount
Relates to the cleanuptype parameter with value retainbycount. Specify the
number of last executions for which the parameter files and log files are not
deleted.
Default parameters:
With the following default parameters, the system indexes and tags 100 design
containers, then leaves 15000 milliseconds before indexing and tagging the next 100
design containers, and so on. It deletes parameter and log files but retains those with an

324 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Trace and Navigate, Compare and Propagate
Configuring Tagging Tasks to Run in the Background

age up to 604800000 milliseconds. Recommended during tagging on larger databases

(as this can take days and you do not want to lose log files that are generated early).
<TaskParameters batchsize="100" waittime="15000" cleanupfiles="true"
cleanuptype="retainbytime" retentiontime="604800000"/>
For example:
In the following example, the system indexes and tags 100 design containers, then
leaves 15000 milliseconds before indexing and tagging the next 100 design containers,
and so on. It deletes parameter and log files but retains those with an age up to 14400000
milliseconds.
<TaskParameters batchsize="100" waittime="15000" cleanupfiles="true"
cleanuptype="retainbytime" retentiontime="14400000"/>
In the next example, it deletes the parameter and log files, but retains those from last
four execution runs of the task.
<TaskParameters batchsize="100" waittime="15000" cleanupfiles="true"
cleanuptype="retainbycount" retentioncount="4"/>

Caution
The TaskParameters are shared with any Stale Tag Cleanup tasks configured in the
indexing-configuration.xml file.

4. Save and close the indexing-configuration.xml file.

Results
• When Capital Integration Server starts, the system follows the scheduling specified by
the cronexpressions to run the indexing and tagging tasks.
• For each execution of the task, the system creates two files in the temp directory for your
Capital installation:
o An XML task parameter file whose name starts with “ANSTagGenerationTask”
followed by a unique identifier.
o An execution log file whose name starts with “CapitalRunner” followed by the same
unique identifier.
• You can use the trace functionality after the system has run tagging at least once.
• You can monitor the tasks in the Tasks tab in Output Window, from which you can also
access log files. You can also access the log files in your temp directory.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 325

February 2016
Trace and Navigate, Compare and Propagate
Configuring Stale Tag Cleanup Tasks to Run in the Background

Note
If you need to kill a tagging task, for example, when you need to reboot the system
while it is running. You can kill it from your Task Manager. However, check that the
status of the task on the Tasks tab changes to FAILED. If the status is still RUNNING,
see “ANSTagGenerationTask or ANSStaleTagCleanupTask Runs for a Long Time” on
page 333 for instructions on how to reset it.

Related Topics
Configuring Stale Tag Cleanup Tasks to Run in the Background
Tagging Service
Troubleshooting Tagging Tasks

Configuring Stale Tag Cleanup Tasks to Run in the

Background
When you use the trace functionality, the system runs indexing and tagging tasks in the
background. The tags are stored in the Capital database. However, when design containers are
deleted from the database, any tags related to them remain. You can configure the system to
check for these stale tags and remove them on a fixed schedule.
Prerequisites
• You should be a system administrator.
• You must have configured Capital Integration Server (CIS) in the clientprops.xml file in
the config directory of your installation. The specified user must have access to all
domains that require tagging. See the Capital Integration Server (CIS) entry in the
“clientprops.xml File Format” topic of the Capital Configuration Files Reference Guide
for further information.
Procedure
1. Navigate to the config directory of your Capital installation where you run Capital
Integration Server and open the indexing-configuration.xml file for editing.
2. Find the ANSStaleTagCleanupTask line and edit the parameters:
• autoschedule
Set this to true to enable the background cleanup of tags. The scheduling specified
by the cronexpression runs from when the Capital Integration Server starts.
• cronexpression
Enter a cron expression to schedule how often the cleanup task runs. Click here for
information and examples of how to define cron expressions. You will need your
SupportNet login details.

326 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Trace and Navigate, Compare and Propagate
Configuring Stale Tag Cleanup Tasks to Run in the Background

For example:
<ANSStaleTagCleanupTask autoschedule="true" cronexpression="0 0 0/1 * * ?" />
3. Find the TaskParameters line and edit the parameters:
• batchsize
The cleanup task processes batches of design containers. Specify how many design
containers are included in each batch.
• waittime
Specify how much time (in milliseconds) the system waits between finishing one
batch of design containers and starting on the next batch. This frees up the system
for any other scheduled tasks.
• cleanupfiles
As the ANSStaleTagCleanup task (and related ANSTagGeneration task) run
frequently, they accumulate task parameter files and log files quickly. Specify “true”
if you want the system to clean up (delete) these files automatically.
Specify “false” if you do not want to run clean-up functionality. If you want to
archive the files rather than delete them, you can implement your own OS batch
script.
• cleanuptype
If you have set cleanupfiles to “true”, this specifies how the files are cleaned up.
Specify one of the following values:
o simple
Deletes all the parameter files and log files for the task, excluding the files for
the current task run.
o retainbytime
Deletes all the files that are older than a specified retention time (retentiontime
parameter).
o retainbycount
Deletes all the files, excluding those for the specified number of last task
executions (retentioncount parameter).
o retentiontime
Relates to the cleanuptype parameter with value retainbytime. Specify the
maximum age (in milliseconds) of the parameter files and log files that are not
deleted.
o retentioncount

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 327

February 2016
Trace and Navigate, Compare and Propagate
Configuring Stale Tag Cleanup Tasks to Run in the Background

Relates to the cleanuptype parameter with value retainbycount. Specify the

number of last executions for which the parameter files and log files are not
deleted.
Default parameters:
With the following default parameters, the system indexes and tags 100 design
containers, then leaves 15000 milliseconds before indexing and tagging the next 100
design containers, and so on. It deletes parameter and log files but retains those with an
age up to 604800000 milliseconds.
<TaskParameters batchsize="100" waittime="15000" cleanupfiles="true"
cleanuptype="retainbytime" retentiontime="604800000"/>
For example:
In the following example, the system indexes and tags 100 design containers, then
leaves 15000 milliseconds before indexing and tagging the next 100 design containers,
and so on. It deletes parameter and log files but retains those with an age up to 14400000
milliseconds.
<TaskParameters batchsize="100" waittime="15000" cleanupfiles="true"
cleanuptype="retainbytime" retentiontime="14400000"/>
In the next example, it deletes the parameter and log files, but retains those from last
four execution runs of the task.
<TaskParameters batchsize="100" waittime="15000" cleanupfiles="true"
cleanuptype="retainbycount" retentioncount="4"/>

Caution
The TaskParameters are shared with any Indexing and Tagging tasks configured in
the indexing-configuration.xml file.

4. Save and close the indexing-configuration.xml file.

Results
• When Capital Integration Server starts, the system follows the scheduling specified by
the cronexpressions to run the cleanup task.
• For each execution of the task, the system creates two files in the temp directory for your
Capital installation:
o An XML task parameter file whose name starts with “ANSStaleTagCleanupTask”
followed by a unique identifier.
o An execution log file whose name starts with “CapitalRunner” followed by the same
unique identifier.

328 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Trace and Navigate, Compare and Propagate
Configuring Stale Tag Cleanup Tasks to Run in the Background

• You can monitor the tasks in the Tasks tab in Output Window, from which you can also
access log files. You can also access the log files in your temp directory.

Note
If you need to kill a tagging task, for example, when you need to reboot the system
while it is running. You can kill it from your Task Manager. However, check that the
status of the task on the Tasks tab changes to FAILED. If the status is still RUNNING,
see “ANSTagGenerationTask or ANSStaleTagCleanupTask Runs for a Long Time” on
page 333 for instructions on how to reset it.

Related Topics
Configuring Tagging Tasks to Run in the Background
Tagging Service
Troubleshooting Tagging Tasks

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 329

February 2016
Trace and Navigate, Compare and Propagate
Compare and Propagate

Compare and Propagate

You can compare objects in designs and use a To Do list to propagate changes that ensure your
designs and build lists are consistent. For example, you have added a device to a system design
but you have not yet added it to an associated wiring design.
The To Do list displays all differences between the designs and enables you to navigate to the
objects that require a change.

Video
To see how compare and propagate works, see the video “Using Compare and Propagate”.

Viewing the To Do List for a Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

To Do List Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Viewing the To Do List for a Design

When using compare and propagate functionality, you use the To Do list to view which objects
require updating in a related design. For example, you have added a device to a system design
but you have not yet added it to an associated wiring design.
Procedure
1. In the Project Browser Window, navigate to a design for which you want to identify
objects that need updating. Right-click on it and select To Do List: the To Do List Tab
displays on the bottom left of the application. The design is selected in the “to Update”
drop-down.
2. From the Use drop-down, select the design that has been updated and whose changes
need to be reflected in the “to Update” design.
3. Click the Refresh ( ) button; the To Do list displays on the tab. The lines list objects
that have been added/changed/deleted in the “Use” design. Click the arrow at the start of
these lines to view the tasks that need to be completed in the “to Update” design.
Where possible, objects are hyperlinks that you click to navigate to them in the diagram
window (other applications open when required). If multiple instances of the object
exist, the system opens the target instance from the hyperlink but also opens a Trace tab
for that object that lists the other instances.
4. Update the objects in the “to Update” design as required.

330 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Trace and Navigate, Compare and Propagate
To Do List Tab

Note
You can swap the designs in the Use and “to Update” fields by right-clicking on the
To Do List tab and choosing Swap. When you complete one or more tasks and click
Refresh, the system strikes the tasks off the list but does not remove them. If you
complete all tasks for an object, the entire group of tasks are struck off and the group
moves to the bottom of the list. To remove all completed tasks from the list, right-click
on the tab and select Restart.

Related Topics
To Do List Tab
Compare and Propagate

To Do List Tab
A To Do List tab is displayed at the bottom left of a design application window when you right-
click a design in the Project Browser Window and select To Do List. You can hide the tab by
right-clicking it and selecting Remove To Do Tab.
The tab displays a list of objects that require updating in a “to update” design due to changes
that have been made in a “Use” design. For example, you have added a device to a system
design (“Use” design) but you have not yet added it to an associated wiring design (“to Update”
design).

Table 9-3. To Do List Tab Contents

Field Description
Use Select the design that has been updated and whose changes
need to be reflected in other related designs (“to Update”
designs). You can swap the designs in the Use and “to
Update” fields by right-clicking on the To Do List tab and
choosing Swap.
to Update Select the design that you need to update to make it
consistent with changes already made in the “Use” design.
By default, the design that you right-clicked in the Project
Browser Window is selected.
If you have defined a Working Set, the designs in that set
are listed for selection.
Select Choose if you want to select a design outside of the
working set, using the Design Revision - Build List
Selection Dialog Box.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 331

February 2016
Trace and Navigate, Compare and Propagate
To Do List Tab

Table 9-3. To Do List Tab Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Refresh To Do List Having selected a “Use” design and “to Update” design,
click this to display the To Do list on this tab.
After you have changed objects in the “to Update” design,
you can refresh the To Do list on this tab.
When you have changed all “to Update” objects for a “Use”
object and click Refresh ( ), a line appears through the
name of the “Use” object.
To remove all completed tasks from the list, right-click on
the tab and select Restart.
To Do list The grey lines list objects that have been added/changed/
deleted in the “Use” design. Click the arrow at the start of
these lines to view tasks that need to be updated in the “to
Update” design.
Where possible, objects are hyperlinks that you click to
navigate to them in the diagram window (other applications
open when required). If multiple instances of the object
exist, the system opens the target instance from the
hyperlink but also opens a Trace tab for that object that lists
the other instances.

Related Topics
Viewing the To Do List for a Design
Compare and Propagate

332 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Trace and Navigate, Compare and Propagate
Troubleshooting Tagging Tasks

Troubleshooting Tagging Tasks

You can encounter the following scenarios when tagging tasks are running.
ANSTagGenerationTask or ANSStaleTagCleanupTask Fails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
ANSTagGenerationTask or ANSStaleTagCleanupTask Runs for a Long Time . . . . . 333
CapitalRunner Log File Indicates Out-of-Memory Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Tagging Tasks Have Not Started After Data Migration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
First Tagging Task Takes a Long Time After Data Migration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

ANSTagGenerationTask or
ANSStaleTagCleanupTask Fails
ANSTagGenerationTask or ANSStaleTagCleanupTask has a FAILED status in the Tasks tab
displayed in the Output Window of your Capital application.
Solution
Look at the corresponding XML task parameter file and execution log file for this task
execution to view the reason for the failure. The files are located in the temp directory for your
Capital installation on the computer where the task is or was being executed. The Machine
column on the Tasks tab indicates which computer this is.

ANSTagGenerationTask or
ANSStaleTagCleanupTask Runs for a Long Time
ANSTagGenerationTask or ANSStaleTagCleanupTask has a RUNNING status for a long time
in the Tasks tab displayed in the Output Window of your Capital application.
Solution
Check your Task Manager to see whether a CapitalRunner is visible in the processes.

If CapitalRunner is not visible in Task Manager:

This means the status of the task is stuck in RUNNING, when actually it is not running. For
example, this can occur if Capital Manager shut down during a forced computer restart. Reset
the task so that it starts running as per schedule again.

1. Select the task in the Tasks tab.

2. Click the cross icon at the top right of the tab.
3. Choose one of the following options:
o Deleting the Task

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 333

February 2016
Trace and Navigate, Compare and Propagate
CapitalRunner Log File Indicates Out-of-Memory Issues

Deletes all records of the task.

o Marking it as Stopped
Marks the task as stopped but does not delete records of it.
4. Restart Capital Integration Server; the tasks run as per schedule again.
If Capital Runner is visible in Task Manager:

Look at the corresponding XML task parameter file and execution log file for this task
execution. The files are located in the temp directory for your Capital installation on the
computer where the task is or was being executed. The Machine column on the Tasks tab
indicates which computer this is.

If the log file reports that the task execution is complete, then the status on the Tasks tab has not
updated. Reset the task as described above.

If the log file does not report that the task execution is complete, it will report any exceptions
that have occurred.

CapitalRunner Log File Indicates Out-of-Memory

Issues
The CapitalRunner log file generated for a tagging task indicates that there is not sufficient
memory to complete the task.
Solution
Allocate more memory to the task. Do this in the clientprops.xml file in the config directory of
your installation. In the cismaster node, increase the value for application_memory_alloc.

For full details of how to configure the cismaster node, see the Flexible Execution Manager
(FEM) section in the Capital Configuration Files Reference Guide. The guide is available from
SupportNet and from InfoHub when you install a Capital client.

Tagging Tasks Have Not Started After Data

Migration
When you start Capital Integration Server for the first time after migrating your data, the
tagging tasks have not started.
Solution
Immediately after migration, Capital executes indexing tasks. All other tasks are suspended
during this time. Once the indexing tasks are complete, the tagging tasks will start executing as
per schedule.

334 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Trace and Navigate, Compare and Propagate
First Tagging Task Takes a Long Time After Data Migration

First Tagging Task Takes a Long Time After Data

Migration
The first tagging task execution after the data migration takes a long time.
Solution
This is because it is tagging all containers (designs, SBOMs, and so on). You can monitor the
progress by viewing the log messages in the corresponding CapitalRunner log file. Note that the
scheduled tagging task never runs simultaneously with this first execution. If the schedule is, for
example, every hour and the current execution is still running when the next hour arrives, it will
skip that next hour.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 335

February 2016
Trace and Navigate, Compare and Propagate
First Tagging Task Takes a Long Time After Data Migration

336 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Chapter 10
Dialog and Field Reference

This chapter offers a description of the dialogs available in multiple Capital applications. For
each dialog, all fields are listed, along with a full description of the field’s function.
Project-related Dialogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Edit Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Edit Project Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Project Folders Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Import Designs to Project Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Import Designs to Project Wizard Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Select Project Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
New Project Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Open Project Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Choose Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Project Preferences Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Copy Design Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Create New Design Revision Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Editing Action Dialogs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Applicable Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Graphics Related Dialogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Edit Border Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Add Text Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Image Selection Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Symbol Selection Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Update Symbol - Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Edit Properties - Propertied Graphic Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Fill Pattern Selection Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Layout Related Dialogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Set Grid Defaults Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Split Table Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
Miscellaneous Dialogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Edit Diagram Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
New Property Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Plugins Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
Plugin Details Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
Batch Translate Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
Edit Capital Configuration Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
Release Designs Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 337

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference

Engineering Change Orders Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501

Engineering Change Orders Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Change Manager Apply ECO Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
Options (Apply ECO) Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
Change Manager Preview ECO Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Printing Dialogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
CGM Page Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
DXF Page Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
PDF Page Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
SVG Page Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
Print Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
Edit Print Region Groups Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
Print to File Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
Project Diagram Settings Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
Edit File Name Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
Rules and Constraints Dialogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
Constraint Selection Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
Define Rules Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
Rule Selection Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
Rules Tab in Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
Warning Dialogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
Undoable Operation Confirmation Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
Design Log Dialogs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
Design Log Event Filter Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
Design Log Filter Options Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
Design Log Viewer Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
View Design Logs Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
Help Button Landing Pages for Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
Edit Properties Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
Edit Project Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
Project Folders Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
Import Designs to Project Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
Import Designs to Project Wizard Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
New Project Dialog Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
Open Project Dialog Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
Options Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
Choose Options Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
Project Preferences Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
Copy Design Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
Create New Design Revision Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
Build Lists Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
Design Effectivity Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
Edit Build List Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
Applicable Options Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566

338 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference

Compare Designs Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566

Design Revision/Build List Selection Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
Design Rule Checks Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
Edit Breakout/Spot Tape Details Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
Edit Design Properties Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
Edit Effectivity Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
Edit Option Expression Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
Generate Advanced Names Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
Map Equivalent Devices Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
New Property Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
Part Selection Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
Project Usages Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
Select by Attribute/Property Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
Select By Name Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
Edit Border Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
Add Text Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
Image Selection Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
Symbol Selection Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
Update Symbol - Options Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
Edit Properties: Propertied Graphic Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
Fill Pattern Selection Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
Set Grid Defaults Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
Split Table Dialog Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
New Property Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
Plugins Dialog Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
Plugin Details Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
Batch Translate Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
Edit Capital Configuration Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
Release Designs Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
Engineering Change Orders Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
Options (Apply ECO) Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
Change Manager Apply ECO Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
Change Manager Preview ECO Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
Query Criteria Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
CGM Page Settings Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
DXF Page Settings Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
PDF Page Settings Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
SVG Page Settings Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
Print Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
Edit Print Region Groups Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
Print to File Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
Project Diagram Settings Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
Edit File Name Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
Constraint Selection Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
Define Rules Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 339

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference

Rule Selection Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576

Rules Tab in Properties Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
Undoable Operation Confirmation Dialog Box Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
Design Log Event Filter Options Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
Design Log Filter Options Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
Design Log Viewer Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
View Design Logs Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577

340 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Project-related Dialogs

Project-related Dialogs
This section offers a description of all dialogs used to open and create projects. For each dialog,
all fields are listed, along with a full description of the field’s function.
Edit Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Edit Project Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Project Folders Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Import Designs to Project Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Import Designs to Project Wizard Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Select Project Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
New Project Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Open Project Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Choose Options Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Project Preferences Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 341

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Edit Properties Dialog Box

Edit Properties Dialog Box

To access: Click the Properties button on the Edit Project Dialog Box.
Used to specify properties for a project.
Objects

Table 10-1. Edit Properties Dialog Contents

Field Description
Properties
Tab
Name A unique identifier for the property. Read-only.
Value The value assigned to the property. Optional.
Type The data type of the value. Mandatory. If you enter a Value that is
not supported by the selected Type, the Value is displayed in red
text and the OK button is disabled. The following types are
available:
• String - a mix of letters, number or special characters
• Integer - a whole number
• Float - a number including a decimal (floating) point
Scopes Tab This tab is used to configure the Scope Codes that apply to the
project.
Available Displays a list of available scope codes that can be applied to the
design. You can select scopes in this list.
Add Moves the selected scopes in the Available window to the Selected
window.
Add All Moves all scopes in the Available window to the Selected window.
Remove Moves the selected scopes in the Selected window to the Available
window.
Remove All Moves all scopes in the Selected window to the Available window.
Selected Displays the names of the scopes applied to the design.

Usage Notes
To add a property to the project, click the New button, enter a Property Name in the New
Property Dialog Box then click OK. The new property is added to the list. To delete a property
from the list, select it and click the Delete button, then click OK to confirm the deletion.

Related Topics
Edit Project Dialog Box

342 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Edit Properties Dialog Box

Applying Scopes to a Project or Design

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 343

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Edit Project Dialog Box

Edit Project Dialog Box

To access: Right-click the project name in the Project Browser Window and select Edit.
Used to specify attributes and properties for a project.
Objects

Table 10-2. Edit Project Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Name The unique name of the project.
Properties Click this to display the Edit Properties Dialog Box where
you can specify properties for the project.
Description A description of the project.
Domain The domain for the project. See the Domains in the Capital
Project help system for more information about domains.
Folder Enables you to specify a folder structure in which this
project will be listed in any dialog where you select a project
from a tree (for example, the Open Project dialog). You use
\ as a separator between the folders in the structure. For
example, if you enter New Projects\October, the projects
tree will contain a folder New Projects with a sub-folder
October. The project that you are editing will be listed
under the sub-folder. Maximum path length is 512
characters. You can click the ellipsis (...) button next to the
field to display the Project Folders Dialog Box where you
can select an existing project folder in which you want to list
the project. You can click the red cross next to the field to
clear it. Optional.

Related Topics
Edit Properties Dialog Box

344 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Project Folders Dialog Box

Project Folders Dialog Box

To access: Clicking the ellipsis (...) button next to the Folder field on the Edit Project Dialog
Box.
Used to select a project folder in which you want a project to be listed in any dialog where you
select a project from a tree (for example, the Open Project dialog). Also, used to create, delete
or rename project folders.
Objects

Table 10-3. Project Folders Dialog Box Help

Field Description
Project Tree Click the one in which you want the project to be listed and
press OK
New To create a new folder, right-click on a folder node in the
project tree and select New; a new sub-folder is created
below the selected folder.
Rename To rename a folder, right-click on a folder and select
Rename.
Delete To delete a folder, right-click on it and select Delete.

Usage Notes
You cannot rename or delete a project folder that contains a project. If you want to place a
project in a differently named folder, create that folder and select it. Any unused folders do not
display when you next open this dialog box.

Related Topics
Edit Project Dialog Box

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 345

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Import Designs to Project Dialog Box

Import Designs to Project Dialog Box

To access: Press Space Bar and enter Import Designs, and select a design XML file to import.
Used to specify details for designs when importing them from outside of the database into a
project or when copying them from one project to another within the database.
Objects

Table 10-4. Import Designs to Project Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Target Project Displays the name of the project into which you are importing designs.
If you want to import the designs into a project other than the one that
is open, you can click the ellipsis (...) next to the field to display the
Select Project Dialog Box where you select a different project.
Mandatory.
Source Project The name of the project from which the design was exported. Read-
only.
Source Design The name of the design in the source project. Read-only.
Name A unique label to identify the design in the target project. Enter a new
name. The contents of this field are displayed in red if they are not
unique within the project. Mandatory.
Short Description Enter a line of descriptive text to provide more information about the
design. Optional.
Description This is a free-text field into which you can enter additional comments
or notes relevant to this design. Optional.
Revision Specifies the version of the design, allowing multiple updated versions
of the same design to exist in the database. When creating a new
design, the initial version number or letter should be entered.
Subsequent revisions receive a new revision number as part of their
creation. Mandatory.
Release Level A number of system-defined release levels are available. It is possible
to create custom levels in Capital Project (see Creating the Release
Levels for a Project). Regardless of the number of custom levels
available, they must correspond to one of the system-defined release
levels. Mandatory.
Abstraction If you are using design abstractions, select the abstraction to which the
design belongs, from the dropdown list. Maintained in Capital Project,
Abstractions allow you to group related harnesses together for
reporting purposes, providing a “view” of a subset of a vehicle’s
wiring. See Creating Design Abstractions for a Project. Optional.

346 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Import Designs to Project Dialog Box

Table 10-4. Import Designs to Project Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Effectivity Displayed only if Effectivity is enabled in the target project and if Copy
Effectivity is selected. See Managing Effectivity” for information
about what effectivity is.
Displays the effectivity range that is applied to the design.
Overwrite If a design revision with the Name exists in the target project already,
specify whether you want to overwrite the existing design revision
(selected) or not (unselected). An import of a design with an existing
name is possible only when this is selected. Mandatory if a design with
the same name exists.
Copy As Revision Select this if you want to add the copy of the design into the target
project as a revision of an existing design within the target project.
You also need to select this if you want to copy multiple designs and
retain their revision hierarchy.
You must edit the Name of the revision copy to match the target design
and you must specify an appropriate Revision and Short Description.
Do not select this if you want the copy to be treated as an entirely new
design in the target project. Any connection with the source design is
lost and the Name must not match an existing design name in the target
project.
If this option is not selected, any revision of the design from the source
cannot be copied to the target project with the same name.
The setting of this option also effects the copying of shared conductors
and pin lists on the diagram. With this option checked, all copied
shared objects will retain their mutual parent-child revision
relationships; with this option unselected, any revision relationships
will be lost, and the copied objects will be created as new shared
objects in the target project, with a default revision of 1.
The (Draft only) release levels that appear in the drop-down list are
determined by the selections made in the destination project's Release
Level facility (see Creating the Release Levels for a Project). Unless
selected otherwise, all copied designs are automatically assigned the
first Draft release level in the destination project if you are not
copying the design as a revision.
Mandatory.
Copy Effectivity Displayed only if Effectivity is enabled in the target project. See
Managing Effectivity for information about what effectivity is.
If you select this, any effectivity ranges assigned to the designs are
copied with them.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 347

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Import Designs to Project Dialog Box

Table 10-4. Import Designs to Project Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Advanced Opens the Import Designs to Project Wizard Dialog Box that offers
you advanced options when importing designs into a project (either
from outside of the database or from another project in the database).
Optional.

Related Topics
Select Project Dialog Box
Import Designs to Project Wizard Dialog Box
Importing Designs into a Project

348 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Import Designs to Project Wizard Dialog Box

Import Designs to Project Wizard Dialog Box

To access: Click the Advanced button on the Import Designs to Project Dialog Box.
Used to specify advanced options when importing designs into a project.
Objects

Table 10-5. Import Designs to Project Wizard Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Designs Tab Used to map design s from the source designs (designs being
copied) to the design s in the target project. Mandatory.
Source Designs Design column lists the design s from the source designs
(designs being copied).
Mapped column indicates the design (in the Target Project
Designs) to which the source design is mapped. If blank, this
means the design is not mapped.
If a design exists in both the source designs and the target
project, it is mapped automatically.
If a design exists just in the source designs, it is created
automatically in the Target Project Designs and the from the
source designs is mapped to it.
Note that two design s from the source designs can be
mapped to one design in the target project.
Associate Creates a mapping between the currently-selected design s in
the Source Designs and Target Project Designs fields.
Dis-Associate Clears the currently-selected mapping in the Source Designs
and Target Project Designs fields.
Auto Associate Maps any unmapped design s in the Source Designs to design
s with matching names in the Target Project Designs.
Auto Create Creates Target Project Designs for unmapped Source Designs
and maps them to each other.
Clear Associations Clears all mappings in the Source Designs and Target Project
Designs fields.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 349

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Import Designs to Project Wizard Dialog Box

Table 10-5. Import Designs to Project Wizard Dialog Box Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Target Project Designs Design column lists the design s in the target project (to
which the designs are being copied or imported).
Mapped column indicates the design (in the Source Designs)
to which the target design is mapped. If blank, this means the
design is not mapped.
If a design exists in both the source designs and the target
project, it is mapped automatically.
If a design exists just in the source designs, it is created
automatically in this table and the from the source designs is
mapped to it.
Note that two design s from the source designs can be
mapped to one design in the target project.
Design Details Tab
Design Details Table Lists the source projects and source designs along with the
details for the new designs that will be created in the target
project. Click on a row to select a source design and the
details of its target design; the fields below the table are
updated to display the existing values.
New Adds a new row to the Design Details table, which can then
be populated by specifying values in the fields below it
before clicking Update.
Update Updates the selected row in the Design Details table with the
contents of the fields below it.
Reset Returns the cells in the Design Details table to their previous
state. This means that:
• If you have created a new row, all fields are cleared or
returned to their default selection.
• If you are editing an existing row for a design, the fields
are returned to their previous values.
Delete Deletes the selected row in the Design Details table.
Name A unique label to identify the design in the target project.
Enter a new name or click the ellipsis (...) button to the right
of the field to select from a list of pre-specified design names
maintained in the project’s Object Type Information. The
contents of this field are displayed in red if they are not
unique within the current project. Mandatory.

350 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Import Designs to Project Wizard Dialog Box

Table 10-5. Import Designs to Project Wizard Dialog Box Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Part Number Enabled only if a Capital HarnessXC design is selected in the
Design Details table.
By default, the current part number will be displayed in red,
indicating that the number is not unique within the database.
Specify a unique identifier for the derivative harness in the
database. The combination of this field and the Revision must
be unique within the database; if the combination already
exists, the contents of both fields are displayed in red.
Mandatory.
There are two ways to ensure uniqueness for the part number
of the new design:
• Overwrite the part number with a new, unique number.
• Enter a new code in the Revision field. Note that entering
a new revision code will not result in the copied design
being created as a revision of the existing design; to create
the copy as a revision, you must select the Copy As
Revision option.
Revision Specifies the version of the design, allowing multiple updated
versions of the same design (and, hence, the same Part
Number) to exist in the database. When creating a new
design, the initial version number or letter should be entered.
Subsequent revisions receive a new revision number as part
of their creation.
The combination of this field and the Part Number must be
unique within the database; if the combination already exists,
the contents of both fields are displayed in red. Mandatory.
Short Description Enter a line of descriptive text to provide more information
about the derivative design. Optional.
Description This is a free-text field into which you can enter additional
comments or notes relevant to this design. Optional.
Release Level A number of system-defined release levels are available. It is
possible to create custom levels in Capital Project (see
Creating the Release Levels for a Project). Regardless of the
number of custom levels available, they must correspond to
one of the system-defined release levels. Mandatory.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 351

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Import Designs to Project Wizard Dialog Box

Table 10-5. Import Designs to Project Wizard Dialog Box Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Design If you are using design s, select the to which the design
belongs, from the dropdown list. Maintained in Capital
Project, s allow you to group related harnesses together for
reporting purposes, providing a “view” of a subset of a
vehicle’s wiring. See Creating the Design s for a a Project.
Optional.
Copy Associated Logic A design can have one or more associated Capital Logic
Designs designs. This option specifies whether these associated
designs are copied with this design (selected) or not
(unselected). Mandatory.
Effectivity Displayed only if Effectivity is enabled in the target project.
See Managing Effectivity for information about what
effectivity is.
Displays the effectivity range that is applied to the design.
Copy Generated Wiring A Capital Integrator design may have had wiring generated
for it. This option specifies whether you want to copy the
generated wiring with the design (selected) or not
(unselected). Mandatory.
Overwrite Revision If a design revision with the Name exists in the target project
already, specify whether you want to overwrite the existing
design revision (selected) or not (unselected). An import of a
design with an existing name is possible only when this is
selected. Mandatory if a design with the same name exists.
Copy As Revision To copy the design as a revision, you must select this option.
This means that the design created in the destination project
is a revision of the source design. In this case, you cannot edit
the name of the design but you must edit the revision level
and/or short description.
If you do not select this option, the design is treated as an
entirely new design in the destination project and any
connection with the source design is lost.
The setting of this option also effects the copying of shared
conductors and pin lists on the diagram. With this option
checked, all copied shared objects will retain their parent-
child revision relationships; with this option unselected, any
revision relationships will be lost, and the copied objects will
be created as new shared objects in the target project, with a
default revision of 1.
Mandatory.

352 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Import Designs to Project Wizard Dialog Box

Table 10-5. Import Designs to Project Wizard Dialog Box Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Shared Conductors Tab Used to configure the shared conductors used by the selected
designs.
Shared Conductors Table Lists the shared conductor revisions in the source designs.
If the designs being copied or imported contain any shared
conductors, but the target project does not contain any shared
conductors, the shared conductors are copied automatically to
the target project and are listed for reference only in this
table.
If the designs being copied or imported contain any shared
conductors, and the target project contains shared conductors,
you can select to:
• Copy a source shared conductor to the target project
without associating it with a target shared conductor.
To do this, select the source shared conductor in the table,
select Coo and click Update.
• Not copy a source shared conductor to the target project
but instead associate it with one in the target project.
To do this, select the source shared conductor in the table,
unselect Copy Shared Conductor, specify a Project
Shared Conductor and click Update. Note that you can
only associate shared conductors of the same type (for
example, net with net, wire with wire).
New Not used.
Update Updates the selected row in the Shared Conductors table with
the contents of the fields below it.
Reset Returns the cells in the Shared Conductors table to their
previous state.
Delete Not used.
Shared Conductor The name and revision of the shared conductor from the
source designs. Read-only.
Project Shared Conductor The name and revision of the shared conductor (from the
target project) that is associated with the Shared Conductor.
Select the target shared conductor from the drop-down list.
Mandatory only if Copy Shared Conductor is unselected.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 353

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Import Designs to Project Wizard Dialog Box

Table 10-5. Import Designs to Project Wizard Dialog Box Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Copy Shared Conductor Specifies whether the source shared conductor that is selected
in the Shared Conductors table is copied to the target project
(selected) or whether it is not copied but is associated with a
shared conductor in the target project (unselected). If not
copied, the target shared conductor is specified by Project
Shared Conductor. Mandatory.
Shared Pin Association
Defaults Tab
Automatic Association If the designs being copied or imported contain any shared
Configuration Mode pin lists, this option specifies the method of association
between the pins on the source designs and the pins in the
target project:
• Merge Unrestricted pins - reuse existing pins where
there is a match between names. Unrestricted pins remain
unrestricted. If a reserved pin is used in more than one
design being copied or imported, then it becomes
unrestricted.
• Merge Reserved pins - always reuse existing pins where
there is a match between names. Unrestricted pins remain
unrestricted. Manually reserved pins remain manually
reserved to designs where used. Automatic reservation
pins remain automatic reservation pins and their usages
are updated with all copied or imported designs.
Mandatory.
Automatically Associate Specifies whether any pin lists (and their pins) of the same
name on the source design and target project are associated
automatically (selected) or not (unselected).
If you do not select this, you manually associate the source
pin lists with the target pin lists on the Shared Pin Lists tab.
Note that if this option is selected, any pin lists in the source
design that are not already present in the project will be
automatically be created and associated in the target project.
Mandatory.
Shared Pin Lists Tab Enables you to associate shared pin lists and their pins from
the source designs with shared pin lists in the target project.
Associate Pin Lists Used to associate shared pin lists in the source designs with
shared pin lists in the target project.

354 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Import Designs to Project Wizard Dialog Box

Table 10-5. Import Designs to Project Wizard Dialog Box Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Source Design Table Source Design column lists the shared pin lists from the
source designs (designs being copied).
Mapped to column indicates the shared pin list (in the Target
Project table) to which the source shared pin list is mapped. If
blank, this means the shared pin list is not mapped.
The following rules apply to the mapping of pin lists:
• If you have selected Automatically Associate on the
Shared Pin Association Defaults tab, pins are
automatically associated when pin lists are associated.
• You can map a pin list on the source design only to one of
the same type on the target project (that is, device to
device, plug to plug, and so on).
• A shared inline pin list can be mapped to only a target
inline pin list that possesses the same, or a greater number
of pins.
• Any target pin lists that are not permitted to be mapped to
the selected source pin list, are unavailable for selection
(grayed-out).
• Before you can proceed to the next tab, you must have
mapped all of the pin lists (and their pins) on the source
design, with pin lists on the target project.
See Rules for Shared Objects When Copying, Importing or
Exporting Designs for further information about rules that
apply to shared objects.
Associate Maps the selected shared pin list in the Source Design table to
the selected shared pin list in the Target Project table.
Disassociate Clears the currently-selected mapping in the Source Design
table and Target Project table fields.
Disassociate All Clears all mappings in the Source Design table and Target
Project table fields.
Associate All Creates mappings for all shared pin lists in the Source Design
table.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 355

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Import Designs to Project Wizard Dialog Box

Table 10-5. Import Designs to Project Wizard Dialog Box Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Target Project Table Target Project column lists the shared pin lists in the target
project (to which the designs are being copied or imported).
Mapped from column indicates the shared pin list (in the
Source Design table) to which the target shared pin list is
mapped. If blank, this means the shared pin list is not
mapped.
The following rules apply to the mapping of pin lists:
• If you have selected Automatically Associate on the
Shared Pin Association Defaults tab, pins are
automatically associated when pin lists are associated.
• You can map a pin list on the source design only to one of
the same type on the target project (that is, device to
device, plug to plug, and so on).
• A shared inline pin list can be mapped to only a target
inline pin list that possesses the same, or a greater number
of pins.
• Any target pin lists that are not permitted to be mapped to
the selected source pin list, are unavailable for selection
(grayed-out).
• Before you can proceed to the next tab, you must have
mapped all of the pin lists (and their pins) on the source
design, with pin lists on the target project.
See Rules for Shared Objects When Copying, Importing or
Exporting Designs for further information about rules that
apply to shared objects.
Add Adds a new shared pin list to the Target Project table and
maps the selected shared pin list in the Source Design table to
it. The new shared pin list is named using the default object
naming protocol for the target project.
Remove Removes the selected shared pin list from the Target Project
table.
Associate Pins Used to associate pins from the selected shared pin list in the
Source Design table with pins from the associated shared pin
list in the Target Project table.

356 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Import Designs to Project Wizard Dialog Box

Table 10-5. Import Designs to Project Wizard Dialog Box Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Source Pins Table Once you have associated a source shared pin list (Source
Design table) with a target shared pin list (Target Project
table), you can associate their pins.
Source Pins column lists the shared pins from the source pin
list selected in the Source Design table.
Mapped to column indicates the shared pin (in the Target
Pins table) to which the source shared pin is mapped. If
blank, this means the shared pin is not mapped.
If there are duplicate pin names in a pin list, you can double-
click on a pin in a table to display the attributes for the pin.
Associate Maps the selected shared pin in the Source Pins table to the
selected shared pin in the Target Pins table.
Disassociate Clears the currently-selected mapping in the Source Pins
table and Target Pins table fields.
Disassociate All Clears all mappings in the Source Pins table and Target Pins
table fields.
Associate All Creates mappings for all shared pins in the Source Pins table.
Target Pins Table Once you have associated a source shared pin list (Source
Design table) with a target shared pin list (Target Project
table), you can associate their pins.
Target Pins column lists the shared pins in the target pin list
selected in the Target Project table.
Mapped from column indicates the shared pin (in the Source
Pins table) to which the target shared pin list is mapped. If
blank, this means the shared pin list is not mapped.
If there are duplicate pin names in a pin list, you can double-
click on a pin in a table to display the attributes for the pin.
Add Adds a new shared pin to the Target Pins table and maps the
selected shared pin in the Source Pins table to it. The new
shared pin is named using the default object naming protocol
for the target project.
Remove Removes the selected shared pin from the Target Pins table.
Pin Reservations Enables you to specify whether the pins listed in the Target
Pins table are automatic reservation or unrestricted.
Automatic Reservations Table List any automatic reservation pins from the Target Pins
table.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 357

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Import Designs to Project Wizard Dialog Box

Table 10-5. Import Designs to Project Wizard Dialog Box Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Add Converts the selected automatic reservation pin in the
Automatic Reservations Table to an unrestricted pin and
moves it to the Unrestricted Pins Table. You can select
multiple pins by using the Shift or Ctrl keys with your
mouse.
Add All Converts all automatic reservation pins in the Automatic
Reservations Table to unrestricted pins and moves them to
the Unrestricted Pins Table.
Remove Converts the selected unrestricted pin in the Unrestricted Pins
Table to an automatic reservation pin and moves it to the
Automatic Reservations Table. You can select multiple pins
by using the Shift or Ctrl keys with your mouse.
Remove All Converts all unrestricted pins in the Unrestricted Pins Table
to automatic reservation pins and moves them to the
Automatic Reservations Table.
Unrestricted Pins Table List any unrestricted pins from the Target Pins table.
Summary Tab Displays a summary of the options that you have selected in
the wizard.

Related Topics
Select Project Dialog Box
Import Designs to Project Dialog Box
Importing Designs into a Project

358 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Select Project Dialog Box

Select Project Dialog Box

To access: Click the ellipsis (...) next to the Target Project field on the Import Designs to
Project Dialog Box or press Space Bar and enter Select Project to Export.
Used to select a project when importing a design or exporting a project.
Objects
File chooser dialog.
Related Topics
Importing Designs into a Project
Import Designs to Project Dialog Box
Import Designs to Project Wizard Dialog Box

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 359

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
New Project Dialog Box

New Project Dialog Box

To access: Press Space Bar and enter New Project.
Used to specify the name for a project.
Objects

Table 10-6. New Project Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Name Enter a unique identifier for the project. If you enter a name already in
use by a project in the database, upon clicking OK, a message is
displayed to warn you and you are prevented from proceeding.
Create Select this if want to create a design in the new project. In the drop-
down list, select the type of design. If you select this, a New Design
dialog is displayed when you click OK. Optional.

360 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Open Project Dialog Box

Open Project Dialog Box

To access: Press Space Bar and enter Open. Otherwise opened automatically when starting the
application for the first time when On Startup is set to Display Open Project Dialog
Used to select a project to open.
Objects

Table 10-7. Open Project Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Create New Project Select this if you want to create a new project. Optional, displayed
only when starting application for the first time.
Create Select this if want to create a design in the new project. In the drop-
down list, select the type of design. If you select this, a New Design
dialog is displayed when you click OK. Optional, enabled only if
Create New Project is selected.
Open Existing Select this if you want to open an existing project. Select the project in
Project the window. Optional.
On Startup Specifies whether a project opens by default the next time that you
start the application. Mandatory.
You can select the following:
• Always open last project
The last project that you opened in the application opens
automatically.
• Display Open Project Dialog
The Open Project dialog is opened automatically.
• Do nothing
No project opens and the Open Project dialog is not opened
automatically.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 361

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Options Dialog Box

Options Dialog Box

To access: With the project open, press Space Bar and enter Options.
Used to define option relationships within a project.
Objects

Table 10-8. Options Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Options Browser Located at the left of the dialog. Blank when no options exist.
Displays a tree of options ( ) and variant options ( ) grouped
within option folders ( ). When you edit options at project level,
option combinations ( ) are listed too.
When you select an option folder, option combination or option in
the tree, details for the selected item are displayed in fields on the
right of the dialog.
You can drag and drop items in the tree to:
• Change their order. Dragging an option or folder to a space
between two other items moves it there. Dropping an option or
folder over another folder adds it as the last child node of that
folder. This order of option folders and options controls the
order of options when they are listed in other dialogs in Capital
applications.
• Add an option to an option combination. In this case, the option
is copied in the tree.
Delete selected objects Keyboard shortcut: Delete
Deletes the option folders, option combinations and options that are
selected in the Options Browser.
Create a new option Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl+O
Creates a new option in the Options Browser. If a folder or option is
selected in the tree, the new option is added below it. You cannot
add an option below an option combination.
Create a New Folder Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl+F
Creates a new option in the Options Browser. If a folder or option is
selected in the tree, the new folder is added below it. You cannot
add a folder below an option combination.
Create a new Creates a new option combination node in the Options Browser.
Combination If a combination is selected in the tree, the new combination is
added below it. Available only at project level.

362 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Options Dialog Box

Table 10-8. Options Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Sort selected folders by Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl+S
name/ Sort selected
Sorts the selected folders and their contents alphanumerically. The
folders by description
resulting order is presented in all dialogs where the options are
displayed.
You can sort all folders and options in the tree by selecting the root
Options folder and clicking this button.
The sorting action behaves as follows:
• Options and variant options are considered equivalent for the
purpose of sorting.
• Each selected folder (including the root Options folder) is sorted
recursively, that is, sub-folders in selected folders are also
sorted.
• If no folder is selected, the sorting behaves as though the root
Options folder is selected.
• If only options or empty folders are selected, this button is
disabled.
• Folders and options (or variant options) are sorted as two groups
whereby folders always appear above options.
• Clicking this when content is already sorted alphanumerically
reverses the sort order.
• When option descriptions are displayed, the sorting is based on
those descriptions and not on the option names. Folders are still
sorted by name.
Name Specifies the identifier for the selected option folder, option
combination or option in the Options Browser. Mandatory.
Description Specifies a descriptive string for the option selected in the Options
Browser. Optional, enabled only for an option.
Group Specifies particular relationships between the options in the folder
selected in the Options Browser. Optional, displayed only for an
option folder.
The following options are available:
• Mutually Exclusive
Indicates that none of the options within this folder can be
selected together in a vehicle.
• Mandatory
Indicates that at least one of the options within this folder must
be selected in a vehicle.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 363

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Options Dialog Box

Table 10-8. Options Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Electrical Specifies whether the option selected in the Options Browser is
electrical or non-electrical. Unselect this only if you are
uninterested in this option as it will become invisible in all dialog
boxes except in the Options Browser and when you edit product
plans.
Obsolete Specifies whether the option selected in the Options Browser is
Obsolete, and can not be used. Display only.
Variant Specifies whether the option selected in the Options Browser is a
variant option (selected) or not (unselected). Mandatory, displayed
only for an option.
Inclusive Lists the options that are required with the option selected in the
Options Browser. Optional, displayed only for options at project
level.
Click to display the Choose Options Dialog Box where you select
the inclusive options.
To remove an option from the Inclusive window, select it and click
.
Exclusive Lists the options that cannot be used with the option selected in the
Options Browser. Optional, displayed only for options at project
level.
Click to display the Choose Options Dialog Box where you select
the exclusive options.
To remove an option from the Exclusive window, select it and click
.
Valid Selections Lists the options in the option combination selected in the Options
Browser; each option is a column in the table. A row represents a
valid selection of the options. Click to add a row to the table.
Click to delete a row from the table. Within a row select the
options that you want to be included in that valid selection. The
Name column specifies unique identifiers for the valid selections.
Available only for option combinations at project level.

Related Topics
Creating an Option Folder at Project Level
Defining Inclusive and Exclusive Relationships for an Option
Creating an Option Combination at Project Level
Adding a Valid Selection to an Option Combination
Deleting a Valid Selection from an Option Combination

364 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Choose Options Dialog Box

Choose Options Dialog Box

To access: Click next to a field on the Options Dialog Box.
Used to select options.
Objects

Table 10-9. Choose Options Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Available Lists the options that are available for selection. Select the
options and click Add to move them to the Selected
window. Click Add All to move all available options to the
Selected window.
Selected Lists the options have been selected. To remove options
from the list, select them and click Remove to move them to
the Available window. To empty the list, click Remove All.

Related Topics
Creating an Option Folder at Project Level
Defining Inclusive and Exclusive Relationships for an Option
Creating an Option Combination at Project Level
Adding a Valid Selection to an Option Combination
Deleting a Valid Selection from an Option Combination

Project Preferences Dialog Box

To access: In the design applications, press Space Bar and enter Project Preferences. In Capital
Project, open a project, expand the Project Browser Tree for that project and double-click
the Preferences node.
Used to specify the Project Preferences for the currently open project.
• Fields in the Project Preferences Dialog Box
• Project Preferences for Capital Harness MPM and Capital Harness TVM Designs
• Project Preferences for Capital HarnessXC and Capital ModularXC Designs
• Project Preferences for Capital Integrator Designs
• Project Preferences for Capital Logic Designs
• Project Preferences for Capital Topology Designs

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 365

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Project Preferences Dialog Box

• Project Preferences for Design Rule Checks

• General Project Preferences Applicable to all Applications

Table 10-10. Fields in the Project Preferences Dialog Box

Field Description
Project Preferences Located on the left of the dialog box, this tree allows you to select
browser the type of project preferences that you want to edit. The
corresponding project preferences are displayed in Project
Preferences pane on the right of the dialog box.
Project Preferences Located on the right of the dialog box, this displays the project
pane preferences for the type selected in the Project Preferences browser.
For full descriptions of the preferences see:
• “Project Preferences for Capital Harness MPM and Capital
Harness TVM Designs” on page 366
• “Project Preferences for Capital HarnessXC and Capital
ModularXC Designs” on page 370
• “Project Preferences for Capital Integrator Designs” on page 390
• “Project Preferences for Capital Logic Designs” on page 400
• “Project Preferences for Capital Topology Designs” on page 425
• “Project Preferences for Design Rule Checks” on page 435
• “General Project Preferences Applicable to all Applications” on
page 436

Table 10-11. Project Preferences for Capital Harness MPM and Capital
Harness TVM Designs
Field Description
Capital Harness MPM Displayed in the Project Preferences browser.
node Displays project preferences for Capital Harness MPM and Capital
Harness TVM designs.
Sub-assembly name Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
prefix Harness MPM in the Project Preferences browser.
Setting used to specify a prefix for sub-assemblies such as project or
design name. This is combined with a system generated suffix to
identify where a particular sub-assembly fits in the SBOM structure.

366 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Project Preferences Dialog Box

Table 10-11. Project Preferences for Capital Harness MPM and Capital
Harness TVM Designs (cont.)
Field Description
Sub-assembly part Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
number prefix Harness MPM in the Project Preferences browser.
Setting used to specify a prefix for sub-assembly part number. This
is combined with a system generated suffix to help identify common
cross-harness sub-assemblies for maximum reuse and optimization.
Part Number Displayed under Capital Harness MPM in the Project Preferences
Rationalization browser.
Tolerance Used by the Set Master Part Numbers Dialog Box to filter the
display of similar sub-assembly part numbers whose wire/multicore
length differences are greater than but within the defined tolerance
value when configuring sub-assembly part number rationalization.
Mandatory.
Checks node Displayed under Capital Harness MPM in the Project Preferences
browser.
Displays project preferences for running design rule checks on a
Capital Harness MPM/Capital Harness TVM SBOM and Costing
Generation. See Design Rule Checks Applicable to Capital
HarnessXC and Capital ModularXC Designs for full details of
available checks.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 367

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Project Preferences Dialog Box

Table 10-11. Project Preferences for Capital Harness MPM and Capital
Harness TVM Designs (cont.)
Field Description
Running Mode Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Harness MPM > Checks in the Project Preferences browser.
Located at the top of the dialog, this enables you to select a running
mode for design rule checks from a dropdown list.
Select a running mode and a Design Abstraction to specify a
scenario for running design rule checks (that is, running checks in a
particular mode on a design with a particular abstraction). You can
then use the Design Rule Checks browser to select the design rule
checks that are run automatically and their severity for this particular
scenario. The running modes are:
• Manual
When you run design rule checks manually in a design
application by pressing Space Bar and entering DRCs and
selecting the checks that you want to run. The Check tab of the
output window displays the results.
• Background
When design rule checks are run automatically in the background
in a design application. Background runs occur when the
background mode has been activated and after changes have
been made to objects in the design to which the currently active
diagram belongs. The Check tab of the output window displays
the results.
You should set as small a number as possible of checks to run in
the background as they will use memory.
• On Save
When design rule checks are run automatically on saving a
diagram in a design application. If there are any failures of
severity Error, the save is canceled and the Check tab of the
Output Window displays the failures. By default, no design rule
checks are run for the On Save mode. If you want checks to run
when you save, you must specify preferences for this mode.
You should set as small a number as possible of checks to run in
the background as they will use memory.
• On Release
When design rule checks are run automatically on releasing a
diagram. The Check tab of the output window displays the
results.

368 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Project Preferences Dialog Box

Table 10-11. Project Preferences for Capital Harness MPM and Capital
Harness TVM Designs (cont.)
Field Description
Design Abstraction Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Harness MPM > Checks in the Project Preferences browser.
Located at the top of the dialog, enables you to select a design
abstraction from a dropdown list.
Select a Running Mode and a design abstraction to specify a
scenario for running design rule checks (that is, running checks in a
particular mode on a design with a particular abstraction). You can
then use the Design Rule Checks browser to select the design rule
checks that are run automatically and their severity for this particular
scenario.
The list of design abstractions depends on those available in the
project. You can select an empty row from the dropdown list that
represents designs without a design abstraction. Designs which
reference an abstraction which no longer exists also default to the
empty abstraction rule check configuration.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 369

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Project Preferences Dialog Box

Table 10-11. Project Preferences for Capital Harness MPM and Capital
Harness TVM Designs (cont.)
Field Description
Design Rule Checks Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
browser Harness MPM > Checks in the Project Preferences browser.
Lists the available design rule checks, grouped into categories, in a
tree where you can set preferences for each check.
See Design Rule Check Descriptions for a detailed explanation of
each available Design Rule Check.
The preferences for each check apply only to the selected
combination of Running Mode and Design Abstraction. When you
change the preferences for a particular combination, ensure that you
click Apply at the bottom of the dialog before selecting a new
running mode or design abstraction.
Select a design rule check in the tree if you want it to run
automatically. Unselect it if you do not want it to run automatically.
If you select or unselect a design rule check category (for example,
Connectivity), all of the checks under that category are selected or
unselected.
Right-click on the symbol next to a design rule check to specify
whether a failure for that check generates an error, a warning or a
notification (information).
In addition, right-click on the symbol and select or unselect Show to
specify whether the check is (selected) or is not (unselected) listed in
the Design Rule Checks dialog (used for manually running checks)
in the design application. If Show is unselected, the check is grayed
out in the tree, although you can still right-click on it to edit its
preferences. In addition to not being listed for selection, a check with
Show unselected will not run.
The tree includes installed custom design rule checks but their
preferences come from the plug-in and cannot be edited here.

Table 10-12. Project Preferences for Capital HarnessXC and Capital

ModularXC Designs
Field Description
Applicable Options Displayed in the Project Preferences browser under the Capital
node HarnessXC node.
Displays project preferences for applicable options on Capital
HarnessXC designs.

370 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Project Preferences Dialog Box

Table 10-12. Project Preferences for Capital HarnessXC and Capital

ModularXC Designs (cont.)
Field Description
Mandate Applicable Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Options HarnessXC > Applicable Options in the Project Preferences
browser.
Specifies:
• whether you can edit object expressions on an object in a Capital
HarnessXC design only when that design has applicable options
specified for it (selected)
or
• whether you can edit object expressions on an object in a Capital
HarnessXC design regardless of whether any applicable options
are specified for the design (unselected).
Assembly node Displayed in the Project Preferences browser under the Capital
HarnessXC node.
Click on Assembly and select the check box(es) in the Project
Preferences pane to include the following components, by default,
inside their owner’s assembly:
• Additional Components
• Modular Connector Children
• Connector Backshells
• Backshell Plugs
• Backshell Seals
• Cavity Terminals
• Cavity Seals
• Cavity Plugs
• Extra Cavity Components
• Wire End Components

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 371

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Project Preferences Dialog Box

Table 10-12. Project Preferences for Capital HarnessXC and Capital

ModularXC Designs (cont.)
Field Description
BOM ID Naming Displayed under Capital HarnessXC in the Project Preferences
browser.
This node contains sub-nodes for object types. Selecting one of the
sub-nodes displays settings for creating unique BOM IDs for library
parts used in a design. This unique ID is created when a component
is added to a design and is a component attribute that can be seen in
the BOM.
BOM IDs can be created for the following component types:
• Assembly (bought-in only)
• Backshell
• Cavity Plug
• Cavity Seal
• Clip
• Connector
• Device
• Grommet
• IDC Connector
• Multicore (non in-house only)
• Other
• Overbraid
• Splice (not including Ultrasonic Welds)
• Tape
• Terminal
• Tube
• Wire
Prefix Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
HarnessXC > BOM ID Naming > [Object Type] in the Project
Preferences browser.
The prefix added to the start of the BOM ID for library parts of this
object type.
Start Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
HarnessXC > BOM ID Naming > [Object Type] in the Project
Preferences browser.
The number used for the first BOM ID generated for this object type.

372 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Project Preferences Dialog Box

Table 10-12. Project Preferences for Capital HarnessXC and Capital

ModularXC Designs (cont.)
Field Description
Increment Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
HarnessXC > BOM ID Naming > [Object Type] in the Project
Preferences browser.
The increment applied to the number in the BOM ID each time a
new BOM ID is generated for this object type.
Checks node Displayed under Capital HarnessXC in the Project Preferences
browser.
Displays project preferences for running design rule checks on a
Capital HarnessXC design. See Design Rule Checks Applicable to
Capital HarnessXC and Capital ModularXC Designsfor full details
of available checks.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 373

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Project Preferences Dialog Box

Table 10-12. Project Preferences for Capital HarnessXC and Capital

ModularXC Designs (cont.)
Field Description
Running Mode Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
HarnessXC > Checks in the Project Preferences browser.
Located at the top of the dialog, this enables you to select a running
mode for design rule checks from a dropdown list.
Select a running mode and a Design Abstraction to specify a
scenario for running design rule checks (that is, running checks in a
particular mode on a design with a particular abstraction). You can
then use the Design Rule Checks browser to select the design rule
checks that are run automatically and their severity for this particular
scenario. The running modes are:
• Manual
When you run design rule checks manually in a design
application by pressing Space Bar and entering DRCs, and
selecting the checks that you want to run. The Check tab of the
output window displays the results.
• Background
When design rule checks are run automatically in the background
in a design application. Background runs occur when the
background mode has been activated and after changes have
been made to objects in the design to which the currently active
diagram belongs. The Check tab of the output window displays
the results.
You should set as small a number as possible of checks to run in
the background as they will use memory.
• On Save
When design rule checks are run automatically on saving a
diagram in a design application. If there are any failures of
severity Error, the save is canceled and the Check tab of the
Output Window displays the failures. By default, no design rule
checks are run for the On Save mode. If you want checks to run
when you save, you must specify preferences for this mode.
You should set as small a number as possible of checks to run in
the background as they will use memory.
• On Release
When design rule checks are run automatically on releasing a
diagram. The Check tab of the output window displays the
results.

374 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Project Preferences Dialog Box

Table 10-12. Project Preferences for Capital HarnessXC and Capital

ModularXC Designs (cont.)
Field Description
Design Abstraction Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
HarnessXC > Checks in the Project Preferences browser.
Located at the top of the dialog, enables you to select a design
abstraction from a dropdown list.
Select a Running Mode and a design abstraction to specify a
scenario for running design rule checks (that is, running checks in a
particular mode on a design with a particular abstraction). You can
then use the Design Rule Checks browser to select the design rule
checks that are run automatically and their severity for this particular
scenario.
The list of design abstractions depends on those available in the
project. You can select an empty row from the dropdown list that
represents designs without a design abstraction. Designs which
reference an abstraction which no longer exists also default to the
empty abstraction rule check configuration.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 375

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Project Preferences Dialog Box

Table 10-12. Project Preferences for Capital HarnessXC and Capital

ModularXC Designs (cont.)
Field Description
Design Rule Checks Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
browser HarnessXC > Checks in the Project Preferences browser.
Lists the available design rule checks, grouped into categories, in a
tree where you can set preferences for each check.
See Design Rule Check Descriptions for a detailed explanation of
each available Design Rule Check.
The preferences for each check apply only to the selected
combination of Running Mode and Design Abstraction. When you
change the preferences for a particular combination, ensure that you
click Apply at the bottom of the dialog before selecting a new
running mode or design abstraction.
Select a design rule check in the tree if you want it to run
automatically. Unselect it if you do not want it to run automatically.
If you select or unselect a design rule check category (for example,
Connectivity), all of the checks under that category are selected or
unselected.
Right-click on the symbol next to a design rule check to specify
whether a failure for that check generates an error, a warning or a
notification (information).
In addition, right-click on the symbol and select or unselect Show to
specify whether the check is (selected) or is not (unselected) listed in
the Design Rule Checks dialog (used for manually running checks)
in the design application. If Show is unselected, the check is grayed
out in the tree, although you can still right-click on it to edit its
preferences. In addition to not being listed for selection, a check with
Show unselected will not run.
The tree includes installed custom design rule checks but their
preferences come from the plug-in and cannot be edited here.
Composite BOM node Displayed under Capital HarnessXC in the Project Preferences
browser.
Allows you to configure the display of objects on the Composite
BOM Table. See Composite BOM in the Capital HarnessXC User
Guide.
Object Type Lists all the objects that can be displayed in a Composite BOM
Table.
Show Total? Select this to display a “Total number of ...” row in the Composite
BOM table for this object type.
Include Objects? Select this to display a total row for individual component part
numbers of the object type.

376 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Project Preferences Dialog Box

Table 10-12. Project Preferences for Capital HarnessXC and Capital

ModularXC Designs (cont.)
Field Description
Total Rows Position Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
HarnessXC > Composite BOM in the Project Preferences browser.
Whether the total rows are displayed at the top or bottom of the
Composite BOM Table.
Diagram node Displayed under Capital HarnessXC in the Project Preferences
browser.
Displays project preferences to define the default physical scale and
grid space unit and value settings of Capital HarnessXC designs and
diagrams.
Physical Scale Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
HarnessXC > Diagram in the Project Preferences browser.
Specifies the real-world distance represented by the separation of
two points on the drawing grid, expressed in units defined by the
setting of the dropdown list to the right.
Grid Space Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
HarnessXC > Diagram in the Project Preferences browser.
Specifies the distance between two points of the drawing grid as it is
represented when printed, expressed in units defined by the setting
of the dropdown list to the right.
Major Grid Interval Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
HarnessXC > Diagram in the Project Preferences browser.
Specifies at which interval larger grid points are displayed. For
example, a value of 5 would display a larger grid point for every 5th
grid point.
Harness Engineering Displayed under Capital HarnessXC in the Project Preferences
node browser.
Displays project preferences for configuring the engineering
parameters used during harness processing.
If you amend any of these parameters then you should either refresh
the project or close and re-open it so that the new parameters are
correctly applied.
Add-On Per Junction Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
HarnessXC > Harness Engineering in the Project Preferences
browser.
The system calculates and adds this amount onto wire lengths, per
junction that the wire passes through. Default value of 3.0.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 377

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Project Preferences Dialog Box

Table 10-12. Project Preferences for Capital HarnessXC and Capital

ModularXC Designs (cont.)
Field Description
Percentage Add-On Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
HarnessXC > Harness Engineering in the Project Preferences
browser.
The percentage add on value is calculated for and added to each wire
in the harness. Default value is 0. The limits of the resulting add on
are controlled by the Minimum and Maximum percentage value.
Minimum Percentage Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Value HarnessXC > Harness Engineering in the Project Preferences
browser.
If a percentage add-on is calculated for a wire and is found to be less
than this value, then the value in this field shall be used as the add-on
instead of the percentage add-on calculated. The default value is 0.0.
Maximum Percentage Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Value HarnessXC > Harness Engineering in the Project Preferences
browser.
If a percentage add-on is calculated for a wire and is found to be
greater than this value, then the value in this field shall be used as the
add-on instead of the percentage add-on calculated. The default
value is 0.0.
Wire Length Rounding Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Method HarnessXC > Harness Engineering in the Project Preferences
browser.
You must select one of the following methods to round wire lengths:
• None - select this if you do not want wire lengths to be rounded.
• Nearest - select this if you want the system to round the
calculated wire length to the nearest unit specified in the Wire
Length Rounding Value field. This means the length can be
rounded up or down.
• Up - select this option if you want the system to round the
calculated wire length Up to the nearest unit specified in the
Wire Length Rounding Value field.
Wire Length Rounding Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Value HarnessXC > Harness Engineering in the Project Preferences
browser.
Calculated wire lengths can be rounded using the value in this field
along with the method selected in the Rounding options. Default
value is 1.0.

378 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Project Preferences Dialog Box

Table 10-12. Project Preferences for Capital HarnessXC and Capital

ModularXC Designs (cont.)
Field Description
Default Link Lead Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Length HarnessXC > Harness Engineering in the Project Preferences
browser.
This is used as the length value for looped wires that have the same
start and end node and where the calculated length is zero. Applies to
single wires. Default value is 100. Add-on and knock-off values are
applied as normal. If the link lead has a through node set, then the
default value is ignored and the base length of the wire is calculated
as twice the distance to the through node.
Looped Splice Add-On Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Value HarnessXC > Harness Engineering in the Project Preferences
browser.
Each looped splice wire can have an add-on value applied. This is
the amount to add on when a wire is looped by being “moved” to the
other side as part of the forced entry direction splice balancing
action.
Default Splice Strip Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Length HarnessXC > Harness Engineering in the Project Preferences
browser.
Each wire end can have a strip length applied. i.e. the amount of
insulation that is to be removed to facilitate crimping/splicing of the
conductor. The system shall apply the required strip length to each
end (or window strip) of a wire as defined at the instance of the
terminating object. Where the splice also supports a separate
definition for multi-strip, a default value field shall also be made
available for this attribute.
Default Solder Sleeve Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Strip Length HarnessXC > Harness Engineering in the Project Preferences
browser.
Each wire end can have a strip length applied. i.e. the amount of
insulation that is to be removed to facilitate crimping/splicing of the
conductor. The system shall apply the required strip length to each
end (or window strip) of a wire as defined at the instance of the
terminating object.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 379

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Project Preferences Dialog Box

Table 10-12. Project Preferences for Capital HarnessXC and Capital

ModularXC Designs (cont.)
Field Description
Default Ultrasonic Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Weld Strip Length HarnessXC > Harness Engineering in the Project Preferences
browser.
Each wire end can have a strip length applied. i.e. the amount of
insulation that is to be removed to facilitate crimping/splicing of the
conductor. The system shall apply the required strip length to each
end (or window strip) of a wire as defined at the instance of the
terminating object.
Default Center Strip Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Length HarnessXC > Harness Engineering in the Project Preferences
browser.
Each wire can have a center strip or window strip length specified,
i.e. the amount of insulation that is to be removed to facilitate
crimping/splicing of the conductor.
Bundle CSA Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Multiplication Factor HarnessXC > Harness Engineering in the Project Preferences
browser.
In order to accommodate inaccuracies in the bundle calculation due
to assembly variances you are able to define a CSA Multiplication
Factor that will be applied to the resultant diameters.
Mandatory Spot Tape Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Layer HarnessXC > Harness Engineering in the Project Preferences
browser.
This is the branch insulation layer assigned to spot tape that is
automatically added to the harness because it is a mandatory
component. Default = 1000.
Replacement Splice Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Wire Prefix HarnessXC > Harness Engineering in the Project Preferences
browser.
Specifies the prefix to be used for any wires created when running
Composite Breakdown with Remove Splices With 2 Identical
Wires? and Generate Replacement Wire Names? selected.
Default value is SPL.
Tube Mandatory Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Component Positions HarnessXC > Harness Engineering in the Project Preferences
browser.
Specify the positions for mandatory components when added on a
tube. Options are Start/End; Start/Middle/End; None and Middle.
Default setting is None.

380 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Project Preferences Dialog Box

Table 10-12. Project Preferences for Capital HarnessXC and Capital

ModularXC Designs (cont.)
Field Description
Overlap/Spiral Tape Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Calculation Method HarnessXC > Harness Engineering in the Project Preferences
browser.
Determines how the calculated lengths for Overlap and Spiral tape
are derived during Harness Engineering calculations. If Nodes is
selected, the node diameter, (which can be greater than the bundle
diameter ending there due to extra wires passing through the node in
other bundles), is used when calculating the length added due to
multiple turns of tape at the bundle end; if Bundles is entered, the
bundle diameter before it reaches the node is used. Default = Nodes.
Housing Definition Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Nesting Level HarnessXC > Harness Engineering in the Project Preferences
browser.
Used to set the nesting limit when adding mandatory items in nested
housing definitions. Default = 0.
Tape Usage Percentage Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Add-On HarnessXC > Harness Engineering in the Project Preferences
browser.
This value is calculated as a percentage of each length of tape. The
result is then added to the tape length. It is used to over-estimate tape
usage. This cannot be overridden as it is used by the Engineering
Calculations routine. Default = 0.0, Min = 0.000000, Max =
100.000000.
Default Grease Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Application Method HarnessXC > Harness Engineering in the Project Preferences
browser.
When grease is specified, a value of Node indicates that the grease
part number should be added once as an extra component at the
node. When the value is Cavity the part number will be added once
for each cavity of the component.
Default Grease Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Component HarnessXC > Harness Engineering in the Project Preferences
browser.
If Node is specified at Default Grease Application Method, this is
the part number that is added to the greased node. Type = Internal
Part Number.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 381

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Project Preferences Dialog Box

Table 10-12. Project Preferences for Capital HarnessXC and Capital

ModularXC Designs (cont.)
Field Description
Default Grease Packing Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Component HarnessXC > Harness Engineering in the Project Preferences
browser.
If Node is specified at Default Grease Application Method, this part
number is also added to the node, however it will only be added once
per node. Type = Internal Part Number.
Tube Selection Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Tolerance HarnessXC > Harness Engineering in the Project Preferences
browser.
This allows you to define how much shorter a tube may be when
selected by the Tube Selection process during Engineering
Calculations. This is used in conjunction with shorter length tube
selection. The tolerance will always be applied to the length of tube
required. In all cases the system is being asked to choose a tube of a
certain length, this length is usually the combined bundle lengths
that the tubes span apart from when cut-back is applied. In that case
it is still a specific length of tube that is being asked to be selected.
The tolerance should always act on the required tube length and not
the bundle. Default = 0.0, Min = 0.000000, Max =999999.999999

382 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Project Preferences Dialog Box

Table 10-12. Project Preferences for Capital HarnessXC and Capital

ModularXC Designs (cont.)
Field Description
Tube Selection Order Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
HarnessXC > Harness Engineering in the Project Preferences
browser.
This allows you to set the order in which logic will be applied by the
Tube Selection process when selecting tubes during Engineering
Calculations. This applies if the system is unable to match a tube
with the exact length required.
Click the ellipsis (...) button to open the Tube Selection Order
Dialog. Options are:
• CutShorter - the system chooses a shorter or exact length tube
which matches the Standard Selection Criteria and whose unit of
measure is Each, Per Roll/Reel components will not be able to be
selected for CutShorter.
• CutExact - The system chooses an exact match length tube which
matches the Standard Selection Criteria and whose unit of
measure is Each, Per Roll/Reel components will not be able to be
selected for CutExact.
• FromReel - The system chooses a tube component which
matches the Standard Selection Criteria and whose unit of
measure is Per Roll/Reel, Each components that match exact
length will not be able to be selected for FromReel.
At least one order must be specified and each value can occur only
once.
Distance from Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Connector Calculation HarnessXC > Harness Engineering in the Project Preferences
Method browser.
Specifies how placement of component insulation is treated.
• If the preference value is Instance at Connector, then any
component insulation instance will be placed at the node where
the connector exists, when the Distance From Connector value is
0.
• If the preference value is Even Distribution, then any
component insulation instance will NOT be placed at the node
where the connector exists, (even if the Distance From
Connector value is 0).
• By default, the preference value is set to Instance at Connector.
• See Add Insulation Layer for information about setting Distance
From Connector values

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 383

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Project Preferences Dialog Box

Table 10-12. Project Preferences for Capital HarnessXC and Capital

ModularXC Designs (cont.)
Field Description
Backshell Termination Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Wire Length HarnessXC > Harness Engineering in the Project Preferences
Calculation browser.
For wires that terminate at a backshell, this preference allows you to
specify whether any Add On or Knock Off attribute values, that are
used during Harness Processing wire length calculations, are taken
from the connector (Use Connector Attributes) or the backshell
(Use Backshell Attributes). Default is Use Connector Attributes.
By default, the Add on and Knock off fields may not display on the
Capital Library Component Maintenance Backshell dialog Base
Tab. The fields can be enabled using Capital Library Configurable
User Interface functionality.
Use Break-Out Tape Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Thickness for Tape HarnessXC > Harness Engineering in the Project Preferences
Calculation browser.
Select Yes to include Break-Out tape thickness in bundle thickness
calculations. Select No to exclude Break-Out tape thickness from
bundle thickness calculations.
Check Properties and Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Values when Merging HarnessXC > Harness Engineering in the Project Preferences
Bundles browser.
This setting controls the merging of bundles that have properties
defined against them, when Composite Breakdown or Modular
Breakdown is run with the option Merge Bundles and Identical
Insulation? selected.
Default setting is No.
If Yes is selected, bundles that have properties defined against them,
will only be merged where all the following conditions are satisfied:
• The number of properties is the same.
• The property names are all the same.
• The property values are all the same.
All properties are retained on any merged bundle.

384 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Project Preferences Dialog Box

Table 10-12. Project Preferences for Capital HarnessXC and Capital

ModularXC Designs (cont.)
Field Description
Bundle Size Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Calculation Method HarnessXC > Harness Engineering in the Project Preferences
browser.
Select one of the following options to set the method used for
calculating bundle diameters during Harness Engineering. See
Bundle Size Calculations for a full description of the methods.
• Worst Case - Basic (Default)
• Worst Case - Enhanced
• Navy Table
• Summed CSA x Factor
Parent/Composite Diagram and design level properties on a parent harness (composite
properties values harness or modular parent) are inherited by children harnesses
overwrite modules/ (derivatives or modules).
derivatives upon If a property exists on both parent and child with a different value,
breakdown you can specify which takes precedence (that is either the parent
property overwrites the child's or child's remain as is).
• Any property present on a parent is always inherited by the
children
• If the property only exists on a child, it is preserved regardless of
the parent not having this property.
Default is Yes.
Harness Sync/General Displayed under Capital HarnessXC in the Project Preferences
node browser. Applies to Capital HarnessXC and Capital ModularXC.
Consider XC as the Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Harness
primary author for Sync/General in the Project Preferences browser.
modular connectors Select this checkbox to preserve any existing modular connector
parent child hierarchy defined in Capital HarnessXC during harness
synchronization.
Allow synchronization Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Harness
without build lists Sync/General in the Project Preferences browser.
With this option selected, you have the option of running Harness
Synchronization in Capital HarnessXC without using build lists or
change management.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 385

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Project Preferences Dialog Box

Table 10-12. Project Preferences for Capital HarnessXC and Capital

ModularXC Designs (cont.)
Field Description
Capital Integrator Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Harness
Mastered Options Sync/General in the Project Preferences browser.
Capital Integrator options are considered master when
Synchronizing from a Capital Integrator Design. Check this box to
remove all existing options from the composite and any associated
derivative design. Options on the composite are then set by the
harness from which it is being synchronized.
Options for existing derivatives are set from their associated level's
options if they have been previously mapped. Option information for
derivatives and levels that are not mapped will not be synchronized.
For information see Mapping Harness Levels to Derivative Designs.
Only allow XC- Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Harness
authored wires & Sync/General in the Project Preferences browser. Default is not set.
muticores to be edited With this preference selected:
and deleted
• you can only edit or delete wires and multicores that have been
authored in Capital HarnessXC.
• A message is displayed on opening the Edit Wires and Edit
Multicores dialog boxes to warn that this editing restriction is set.
Module Codes, Displayed under Capital HarnessXC in the Project Preferences
Options, Levels node browser. Applies to Capital ModularXC only.
Displays project preferences to override the exclusive module codes
checks in certain circumstances and also to pre-define which 'tag
fields' such as option expressions, harness levels and module code
fields are available on the Edit Object dialogs of Capital ModularXC
designs and diagrams, for any given project.

386 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Project Preferences Dialog Box

Table 10-12. Project Preferences for Capital HarnessXC and Capital

ModularXC Designs (cont.)
Field Description
Allow Exclusive Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Module Codes On HarnessXC > Module Codes, Options, Levels in the Project
Module Child Designs Preferences browser.
In a typical flow a module child design represents the data associated
with a single buildable module design and as such the system by
default stops you making mutually exclusive codes applicable to a
module design.
In some circumstances however it may be desirable to allow
mutually exclusive content to exist in the same module design, for
example, when the design is being used to generate a diagram for a
Formboard that supports mutually exclusive content. Turning on this
preference allows mutually exclusive codes to be applied to module
child designs. The default setting is Off.
A tooltip indicates that there are exclusive module codes on the
design and a design rule check reports the fact, however with this
preference set you are still able to proceed and generate the design.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 387

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Project Preferences Dialog Box

Table 10-12. Project Preferences for Capital HarnessXC and Capital

ModularXC Designs (cont.)
Field Description
Enable and Display Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
HarnessXC > Module Codes, Options, Levels in the Project
Preferences browser.
Select the required option to display or suppress the following. The
default for all settings is On.
• Option Expressions
Allows you to add object expressions to objects. Additionally it
enables the New Derivative menu for harness designs in the
project window and the Applicable Options menu in the New/
Edit Harness dialog (see the Capital ModularXC help system for
more information).
• Harness Levels
Specifies whether, or not, harness levels are synchronized from a
Capital Integrator design with derivative modular harness
designs created in Capital ModularXC. Also allows the
automatic creation of child harness designs based on the level
configurations synchronized into the parent harness.
• Functional Module Codes
Allows you to add Functional Module codes to objects.
Additionally it enables the Functional Module menu for harness
designs in the project window and the Applicable Functional
Module Codes menu in the New/Edit Harness dialog (see the
Capital ModularXC help system for more information).
• Production Module Codes
Allows you to add Production Module codes to objects.
Additionally it enables the Production Module menu for harness
designs in the project window and the Applicable Production
Module Codes menu in the New/Edit Harness dialog (see the
Capital ModularXC help system for more information).
Composite Behavior - Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Populate child designs HarnessXC > Module Codes, Options, Levels in the Project
by default during Preferences browser.
Revise/Copy of a Used to configure the automatic creation of child design diagrams
composite (applies to during the copy or revision of a parent design.
derivatives and
modules) With the preference set, whenever you select the Revise or Copy
checkbox on the Select Child Designs Dialog Box, the Populate
column is automatically selected, (you can manually override this by
deselecting the Populate check box)
The default setting is selected.

388 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Project Preferences Dialog Box

Table 10-12. Project Preferences for Capital HarnessXC and Capital

ModularXC Designs (cont.)
Field Description
Technical Module Displayed under Capital HarnessXC in the Project Preferences
Code Assignation node browser. Applies to Capital ModularXC only.
Displays project preferences to define how combinations are used
for technical module code assignation, and if codes are reused, or
created. Assignation Order can also be specified.
Technical module codes can be automatically generated for each of
the following objects types:
• Breakout Tape
• Clip
• Connector
• Grommet
• Insulation Run
• Multi-Location Component
• Multi Crimp
• Other
• Overbraid
• Splice
• Spot Tape
Assignation Order Displayed under Capital HarnessXC > Technical Mode Code
node Assignation in the Project Preferences browser. Applies to Capital
ModularXC only.
Displays project preferences to enable you to determine the
assignation order for splices and multi-crimps, where there are
connections from a splice into a multi-crimp that could be assigned
to either the splice technical module code, or the multi-crimp
technical module code. Specify the order in which assignation
should occur, based on manufacturing preferences or equipment
availability.
Assign Splices before Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Multi-crimps HarnessXC > Technical Module Code Assignation > Assignation
Order in the Project Preferences browser.
Technical Module Code assignation analyzes and assigns codes to
splices before multi-crimps.
Assign Multi-crimps Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
before Splices HarnessXC > Technical Module Code Assignation > Assignation
Order in the Project Preferences browser.
Technical Module Code assignation analyzes and assigns codes to
multi-crimps before splices.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 389

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Project Preferences Dialog Box

Table 10-12. Project Preferences for Capital HarnessXC and Capital

ModularXC Designs (cont.)
Field Description
Only use pre-defined Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
combinations HarnessXC > Technical Module Code Assignation > [Object
Type] in the Project Preferences browser.
Technical Module Code assignation only uses the user pre-defined
combinations in the module code manager.
Try the pre-defined Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
combinations, HarnessXC > Technical Module Code Assignation > [Object
otherwise generate a Type] in the Project Preferences browser.
combination Technical Module Code assignation first tries to use the user pre-
defined combinations in the module code manager. If none match, a
generated combination is created. For this option a combination limit
can be set.
Max number of Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
combinations before HarnessXC > Technical Module Code Assignation > [Object
failure Type] in the Project Preferences browser.
If the Create a Combination option is checked then this setting
stipulates the maximum number of combinations that are created for
the current object being evaluated. This does not limit the total
number of combinations generated for the design.
Reuse existing code Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
HarnessXC > Technical Module Code Assignation > [Object
Type] in the Project Preferences browser.
If the code is assigned to the matching combination row then that is
the code used.
Create new code Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
HarnessXC > Technical Module Code Assignation > [Object
Type] in the Project Preferences browser.
If the code is assigned to the matching combination row then a new
code for the object is also created.

Table 10-13. Project Preferences for Capital Integrator Designs

Field Description
Bundle calculation Displayed under Capital Integrator in the Project Preferences
node browser.
Displays project preferences for calculating a bundle diameter for a
bundle width report.

390 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Project Preferences Dialog Box

Table 10-13. Project Preferences for Capital Integrator Designs (cont.)

Field Description
Wire Gap Coefficient Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Integrator > Bundle Calculation in the Project Preferences
browser.
Specifies the coefficient that is used to represent the air gap between
adjacent wires when calculating a bundle diameter. The value must
be a float (decimal number) of 1 or higher. By default, this is 1.154.
A value of 1 indicates that there is no air gap.
If a multicore has an OutsideDiameter attribute, it is treated as one
wire by these calculations. Otherwise, its constituent wires are
processed.
Bundle diameter (DBundle) is calculated in the following ways
(given a number of wires of diameter DWire):
• If the bundle contains one wire:
DBundle = DWire
• If the bundle contains two wires:
DBundle =
• If the bundle contains three or more wires:
DBundle =

where is calculated from DWire

The cross-sectional area of a wire ( ) is calculated in a

variety of ways (depending on what data exists):
• If the OutsideDiameter attribute exists on a wire, this is used as-
is. This also applies if a multicore has an OutsideDiameter
attribute. In this case, the wires within the multicore are ignored.
• If a wire has no OutsideDiameter attribute but has both a
WireMaterial attribute and a WireCSA attribute defined, the
WireCSA attribute is used to calculate the copper diameter and
an insulation thickness determined from Capital Library (from
the Wire Insulation Thickness Dialog) is added to calculate
DWire.
• If the OutsideDiameter attribute does not exist on a wire, the
WireCSA attribute is used to calculate the copper diameter and
the value specified for the Default Insulation Thickness project
preference is added to calculate DWire. If a multicore does not
have an OutsideDiameter attribute, then its constituent wires are
processed individually in this way.
In all these cases, this value of DWire is used to calculate the overall
CSA of copper plus insulation.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 391

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Project Preferences Dialog Box

Table 10-13. Project Preferences for Capital Integrator Designs (cont.)

Field Description
Default Insulation Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Thickness Integrator > Bundle Calculation in the Project Preferences
browser.
Specifies the insulation thickness that is used by default when
calculating the bundle diameter. The value must be a float (decimal
number). By default, this is 0.0.
Checks node Displayed under Capital Integrator in the Project Preferences
browser.
Displays project preferences for running design rule checks on a
Capital Integrator design. See Design Rule Checks Applicable to
Capital Integrator Designsfor full details of available checks.

392 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Project Preferences Dialog Box

Table 10-13. Project Preferences for Capital Integrator Designs (cont.)

Field Description
Running Mode Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Integrator > Checks in the Project Preferences browser.
Located at the top of the dialog, this enables you to select a running
mode for design rule checks from a dropdown list.
Select a running mode and a Design Abstraction to specify a
scenario for running design rule checks (that is, running checks in a
particular mode on a design with a particular abstraction). You can
then use the Design Rule Checks browser to select the design rule
checks that are run automatically and their severity for this particular
scenario. The running modes are:
• Manual
When you run design rule checks manually in a design
application by pressing Space Bar and entering DRCs, and
selecting the checks that you want to run. The Check tab of the
output window displays the results.
• Background
When design rule checks are run automatically in the background
in a design application. Background runs occur when the
background mode has been activated and after changes have
been made to objects in the design to which the currently active
diagram belongs. The Check tab of the output window displays
the results.
You should set as small a number as possible of checks to run in
the background as they will use memory.
• On Save
When design rule checks are run automatically on saving a
diagram in a design application. If there are any failures of
severity Error, the save is canceled and the Check tab of the
Output Window displays the failures. By default, no design rule
checks are run for the On Save mode. If you want checks to run
when you save, you must specify preferences for this mode.
You should set as small a number as possible of checks to run in
the background as they will use memory.
• On Release
When design rule checks are run automatically on releasing a
diagram. The Check tab of the output window displays the
results.
• Design Assistant
When design rule checks are run from the Design Assistant. If
there are any failures, the Design Assistant displays them.
• Harness Transfer
When a harness is imported into a design using Integrator
Harness Exchange functionality.
Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 393
February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Project Preferences Dialog Box

Table 10-13. Project Preferences for Capital Integrator Designs (cont.)

Field Description
Design Abstraction Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Integrator > Checks in the Project Preferences browser.
Located at the top of the dialog, enables you to select a design
abstraction from a dropdown list.
Select a Running Mode and a design abstraction to specify a
scenario for running design rule checks (that is, running checks in a
particular mode on a design with a particular abstraction). You can
then use the Design Rule Checks browser to select the design rule
checks that are run automatically and their severity for this particular
scenario.
The list of design abstractions depends on those available in the
project. You can select an empty row from the dropdown list that
represents designs without a design abstraction. Designs which
reference an abstraction which no longer exists also default to the
empty abstraction rule check configuration.

394 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Project Preferences Dialog Box

Table 10-13. Project Preferences for Capital Integrator Designs (cont.)

Field Description
Design Rule Checks Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
browser Integrator > Checks in the Project Preferences browser.
Lists the available design rule checks, grouped into categories, in a
tree where you can set preferences for each check.
See Design Rule Check Descriptions for a detailed explanation of
each available Design Rule Check.
The preferences for each check apply only to the selected
combination of Running Mode and Design Abstraction. When you
change the preferences for a particular combination, ensure that you
click Apply at the bottom of the dialog before selecting a new
running mode or design abstraction.
Select a design rule check in the tree if you want it to run
automatically. Unselect it if you do not want it to run automatically.
If you select or unselect a design rule check category (for example,
Connectivity), all of the checks under that category are selected or
unselected.
Right-click on the symbol next to a design rule check to specify
whether a failure for that check generates an error, a warning or a
notification (information).
In addition, right-click on the symbol and select or unselect Show to
specify whether the check is (selected) or is not (unselected) listed in
the Design Rule Checks dialog (used for manually running checks)
in the design application. If Show is unselected, the check is grayed
out in the tree, although you can still right-click on it to edit its
preferences. In addition to not being listed for selection, a check with
Show unselected will not run.
The tree includes installed custom design rule checks but their
preferences come from the plug-in and cannot be edited here.
Comment node Displayed under Capital Integrator in the Project Preferences
browser.
Expands to display further nodes of project preferences for comment
graphics created by drawing tools.
Graphic node Displayed under Capital Integrator > Comment in the Project
Preferences browser.
Displays project preferences for graphics created by drawing tools.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 395

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Project Preferences Dialog Box

Table 10-13. Project Preferences for Capital Integrator Designs (cont.)

Field Description
Style Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Integrator > Comment > Graphic in the Project Preferences
browser.
Specifies the line style used for comment graphics created by
drawing tools in a diagram.
Thickness Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Integrator > Comment > Graphic in the Project Preferences
browser.
Specifies the line thickness used for comment graphics created by
drawing tools in a diagram.
Select the type of thickness from the second dropdown list:
• Logical
These thicknesses do not have a physical unit of measurement.
They provide a logical progression of thickness with a default of
1. A line with thickness 2 is displayed twice as thick as a line
with thickness 1, and so on. When you zoom in or out of a
diagram, the line thickness does not appear any different.
You select the thickness from the first dropdown list.
• Physical (unit of measurement)
These are physical units of measurement. The line thickness is
displayed in relation to the grid size of a diagram. When you
zoom in or out of a diagram, the line grows or shrinks to stay in
scale with the grid.
When you select a unit, the first dropdown list changes to a free
text field where you specify the thickness. The value can be any
floating-point number up to three decimal places.
See Physical Line Thickness in the Capital Design Tools -
Common Functions User Guide for a definition and links to
related task flows.
Text node Displayed under Capital Integrator > Comment in the Project
Preferences browser.
Displays project preferences for text created by drawing tools.
Name Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Integrator > Comment > Text in the Project Preferences browser.
Specifies the type of font used for text in a text frame and whether it
is bold and/or italic. Select the values from the dropdown lists.

396 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Project Preferences Dialog Box

Table 10-13. Project Preferences for Capital Integrator Designs (cont.)

Field Description
Height Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Integrator > Comment > Text in the Project Preferences browser.
Specifies the height of text in a text frame and the units of
measurement for this height. Select the values from the dropdown
lists.
Justification Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Integrator > Comment > Text in the Project Preferences browser.
Specifies where text is placed in a text frame. The Preview window
shows you how the justification will look.
Connector node Displayed under Capital Integrator in the Project Preferences
browser.
Displays project preferences for connector graphics.
Connector Width Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Integrator > Connector in the Project Preferences browser.
Specifies the width of a connector graphic in pin grids. Select the
value from the dropdown list.
Name node Displayed under Capital Integrator in the Project Preferences
browser.
Expands to display nodes of project preferences for object name text
in Capital Integrator diagrams.
Text node Displayed under Capital Integrator > Name in the Project
Preferences browser.
Displays project preferences for object name text in Capital
Integrator diagrams.
Name Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Integrator > Name > Text in the Project Preferences browser.
Specifies the type of font used for the object name text and whether
it is bold and/or italic. Select the values from the dropdown lists.
Height Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Integrator > Name > Text in the Project Preferences browser.
Specifies the height of the object name text and the units of
measurement for this height. Select the values from the dropdown
lists.
Justification Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Integrator > Name > Text in the Project Preferences browser.
Specifies the justification of the text. The Preview window shows
you how the justification will look.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 397

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Project Preferences Dialog Box

Table 10-13. Project Preferences for Capital Integrator Designs (cont.)

Field Description
Option Expression Displayed under Capital Integrator in the Project Preferences
node browser.
Displays project preferences related to the generation of option
expressions in Capital Integrator.
Simplify by vehicle Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
model Integrator > Option Expression in the Project Preferences
browser.
If this is selected, option expressions generated in Capital Integrator
are simplified to remove any terms that are not supported by any
vehicle model. This removal of unnecessary terms can shorten the
generated option expressions and makes them easier to understand.
For example, if the vehicle models are defined such that AWD is
only available with the 2.0D engine, then an option expression such
as (AWD && 1.4 || AWD && 1.6 || AWD && 2.0D) would be
simplified to (AWD && 2.0D).
This is selected by default for newly created projects. It is not
selected by default for projects created in Capital v2012.1 or earlier.
Plane node Displayed under Capital Integrator in the Project Preferences
browser.
Displays project preferences for the grid spacing on a plane diagram
in Capital Integrator.
Grid Spacing Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Integrator > Plane in the Project Preferences browser.
Defines the size represented by the visible grid on a diagram.
Specify a decimal number and select the unit of measurement from
the drop-down list. This setting will effect the size of objects (such
as devices and connectors) when a diagram is printed. The position
of electrical objects are constrained by this grid (purely graphical
objects are constrained by the drawing grid).
You can specify how this grid is displayed using the Set Grid
Defaults dialog in Capital Integrator.
You can use the Modify Physical Scale dialog in Capital Integrator
to specify the physical scale of objects in a design.

398 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Project Preferences Dialog Box

Table 10-13. Project Preferences for Capital Integrator Designs (cont.)

Field Description
Drawing Grid Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Integrator > Plane in the Project Preferences browser.
In addition to the visible grid on a diagram, there is the drawing grid
that is invisible. When you place a drawing object that does not have
any pins nor connects to any pins on the diagram, the object will
snap to the drawing grid. This setting enables you to specify how
many points of the drawing grid are between the points of the visible
grid using a percentage of the print scale. For example, if you
specify 50, there will be one invisible drawing point halfway
between each point on the visible grid.
Major Grid Interval Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Integrator > Plane in the Project Preferences browser.
Specifies at which interval larger grid points are displayed. For
example, a value of 5 would display a larger grid point for every 5th
grid point.
Maximum Drawn Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Points Integrator > Plane in the Project Preferences browser.
Specifies the maximum number of grid points that can be displayed
in any one row or column when you zoom out of the diagram. When
the specified number of grid points is exceeded, the grid is no longer
displayed.
Property node Displayed under Capital Integrator in the Project Preferences
browser.
Expands to display nodes of project preferences for object property
text in Capital Integrator diagrams.
Text node Displayed under Capital Integrator > Property in the Project
Preferences browser.
Displays project preferences for object property text in Capital
Integrator diagrams.
Name Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Integrator > Property > Text in the Project Preferences browser.
Specifies the type of font used for the object property text and
whether it is bold and/or italic. Select the values from the dropdown
lists.
Height Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Integrator > Property > Text in the Project Preferences browser.
Specifies the height of the object property text and the units of
measurement for this height. Select the values from the dropdown
lists.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 399

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Project Preferences Dialog Box

Table 10-13. Project Preferences for Capital Integrator Designs (cont.)

Field Description
Justification Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Integrator > Property > Text in the Project Preferences browser.
Specifies the justification of the object property text. The Preview
window shows you how the justification will look.

Table 10-14. Project Preferences for Capital Logic Designs

Field Description
Capital Logic node Displayed in the Project Preferences browser.
Expands to display nodes of project preferences for Capital Logic
designs.
Applicable Options Displayed in the Project Preferences browser under the Capital
node Logic node.
Displays project preferences for applicable options on Capital Logic
designs.
Mandate Applicable Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Options Logic > Applicable Options in the Project Preferences browser.
Specifies:
• whether you can edit object expressions on an object in a Capital
Logic design only when that design has applicable options
specified for it (selected)
or
• whether you can edit object expressions on an object in a Capital
Logic design regardless of whether any applicable options are
specified for the design (unselected).
Assembly node Displayed in the Project Preferences browser under the Capital
Logic node.
Click on Assembly and select the check box(es) in the Project
Preferences pane to include the following components, by default,
inside their owner’s assembly:
• Connector Backshells
Attribute node Displayed under Capital Logic in the Project Preferences browser.
Expands to display nodes of project preferences for object attribute
text in Capital Logic diagrams.

400 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Project Preferences Dialog Box

Table 10-14. Project Preferences for Capital Logic Designs (cont.)

Field Description
Text node Displayed under Capital Logic > Attribute in the Project
Preferences browser.
Displays project preferences for object attribute text in Capital Logic
diagrams.
Name Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Logic > Attribute > Text in the Project Preferences browser.
Specifies the type of font used for the object attribute text and
whether it is bold and/or italic. Select the values from the dropdown
lists.
Height Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Logic > Attribute > Text in the Project Preferences browser.
Specifies the height of the object attribute text and the units of
measurement for this height. Select the values from the dropdown
lists.
Justification Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Logic > Attribute > Text in the Project Preferences browser.
Specifies the justification of the object attribute text. The Preview
window shows you how the justification will look.
Checks node Displayed under Capital Logic in the Project Preferences browser.
Displays project preferences for running design rule and name
uniqueness checks on a Capital Logic design. See Design Rule
Checks Applicable to Capital Logic Designsfor full details of
available checks.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 401

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Project Preferences Dialog Box

Table 10-14. Project Preferences for Capital Logic Designs (cont.)

Field Description
Running Mode Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Logic > Checks in the Project Preferences browser.
Located at the top of the dialog, this enables you to select a running
mode for design rule checks from a dropdown list.
Select a running mode and a Design Abstraction to specify a
scenario for running design rule checks (that is, running checks in a
particular mode on a design with a particular abstraction). You can
then use the Design Rule Checks browser to select the design rule
checks that are run automatically and their severity for this particular
scenario. The running modes are:
• Manual
When you run design rule checks manually in a design
application by pressing Space Bar and entering DRCs, and
selecting the checks that you want to run. The Check tab of the
output window displays the results.
• Background
When design rule checks are run automatically in the background
in a design application. Background runs occur when the
background mode has been activated and after changes have
been made to objects in the design to which the currently active
diagram belongs. The Check tab of the output window displays
the results.
You should set as small a number as possible of checks to run in
the background as they will use memory.
• On Save
When design rule checks are run automatically on saving a
diagram in a design application. If there are any failures of
severity Error, the save is canceled and the Check tab of the
Output Window displays the failures. By default, no design rule
checks are run for the On Save mode. If you want checks to run
when you save, you must specify preferences for this mode.
You should set as small a number as possible of checks to run in
the background as they will use memory.
• On Release
When design rule checks are run automatically on releasing a
diagram. The Check tab of the output window displays the
results.

402 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Project Preferences Dialog Box

Table 10-14. Project Preferences for Capital Logic Designs (cont.)

Field Description
Design Abstraction Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Logic > Checks in the Project Preferences browser.
Located at the top of the dialog, enables you to select a design
abstraction from a dropdown list.
Select a Running Mode and a design abstraction to specify a
scenario for running design rule checks (that is, running checks in a
particular mode on a design with a particular abstraction). You can
then use the Design Rule Checks browser to select the design rule
checks that are run automatically and their severity for this particular
scenario.
The list of design abstractions depends on those available in the
project. You can select an empty row from the dropdown list that
represents designs without a design abstraction. Designs which
reference an abstraction which no longer exists also default to the
empty abstraction rule check configuration.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 403

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Project Preferences Dialog Box

Table 10-14. Project Preferences for Capital Logic Designs (cont.)

Field Description
Design Rule Checks Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
browser Logic > Checks in the Project Preferences browser.
Lists the available design rule checks, grouped into categories, in a
tree where you can set preferences for each check.
See Design Rule Check Descriptions for a detailed explanation of
each available Design Rule Check.
The preferences for each check apply only to the selected
combination of Running Mode and Design Abstraction. When you
change the preferences for a particular combination, ensure that you
click Apply at the bottom of the dialog before selecting a new
running mode or design abstraction.
Select a design rule check in the tree if you want it to run
automatically. Unselect it if you do not want it to run automatically.
If you select or unselect a design rule check category (for example,
Connectivity), all of the checks under that category are selected or
unselected.
Right-click on the symbol next to a design rule check to specify
whether a failure for that check generates an error, a warning or a
notification (information).
In addition, right-click on the symbol and select or unselect Show to
specify whether the check is (selected) or is not (unselected) listed in
the Design Rule Checks dialog (used for manually running checks)
in the design application. If Show is unselected, the check is grayed
out in the tree, although you can still right-click on it to edit its
preferences. In addition to not being listed for selection, a check with
Show unselected will not run.
The tree includes installed custom design rule checks but their
preferences come from the plug-in and cannot be edited here.

404 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Project Preferences Dialog Box

Table 10-14. Project Preferences for Capital Logic Designs (cont.)

Field Description
Uniqueness Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Logic > Checks > Uniqueness in the Project Preferences browser.
Lists selection criteria that work in conjunction with each other and
also design rule name checks enabling you to inspect, and report on,
where there are duplicate names across object types within a single
design or all designs in a build list, including variants in option
expressions and/or harness attributes.
The Across Object Types and Option Expressions preferences are
selected by default. Selecting the preferences individually, or in
combination enables you to scale the depth of your checks.
For example, selecting only the Across Object Types preference
means the system will report instances where, a Splice and a
Connector may have the same name.
However, if both the Across Object types and the Option expression
preferences are checked and the same Splice and Connector have
differing option expressions of RHD and LHD, then they will not be
highlighted in the report.
Tick the checkbox to include the required criteria when running
name checks.
The available criteria for checking if names are unique are:
• Across Object Type (e.g. device, connector etc.)
Object types checked include:
• Devices
• Wires
• Nets
• Overbraids
• Multicores
• Ring Terminals
• Splice
• Plugs / Inline Plugs
• Receptacles / Inline Receptacles
• Shield Terminations
• Option Expression
• Harness Attribute
Note: Highways are not included in these checks.
Comment node Displayed under Capital Logic in the Project Preferences browser.
Expands to display further nodes of project preferences for comment
graphics created by drawing tools.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 405

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Project Preferences Dialog Box

Table 10-14. Project Preferences for Capital Logic Designs (cont.)

Field Description
Graphic node Displayed under Capital Logic > Comment in the Project
Preferences browser.
Displays project preferences for graphics created by drawing tools.
Style Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Logic > Comment > Graphic in the Project Preferences browser.
Specifies the line style used for comment graphics created by
drawing tools in a diagram.
Thickness Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Logic > Comment > Graphic in the Project Preferences browser.
Specifies the line thickness used for comment graphics created by
drawing tools in a diagram.
Select the type of thickness from the second dropdown list:
• Logical
These thicknesses do not have a physical unit of measurement.
They provide a logical progression of thickness with a default of
1. A line with thickness 2 is displayed twice as thick as a line
with thickness 1, and so on. When you zoom in or out of a
diagram, the line thickness does not appear any different.
You select the thickness from the first dropdown list.
• Physical (unit of measurement)
These are physical units of measurement. The line thickness is
displayed in relation to the grid size of a diagram. When you
zoom in or out of a diagram, the line grows or shrinks to stay in
scale with the grid.
When you select a unit, the first dropdown list changes to a free
text field where you specify the thickness. The value can be any
floating-point number up to three decimal places.
See Physical Line Thickness in the Capital Design Tools -
Common Functions User Guide for a definition and links to
related task flows.
Text node Displayed under Capital Logic > Comment in the Project
Preferences browser.
Displays project preferences for text created by drawing tools.
Name Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Logic > Comment > Text in the Project Preferences browser.
Specifies the type of font used for text in a text frame and whether it
is bold and/or italic. Select the values from the dropdown lists.

406 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Project Preferences Dialog Box

Table 10-14. Project Preferences for Capital Logic Designs (cont.)

Field Description
Height Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Logic > Comment > Text in the Project Preferences browser.
Specifies the height of text in a text frame and the units of
measurement for this height. Select the values from the dropdown
lists.
Justification Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Logic > Comment > Text in the Project Preferences browser.
Specifies where text is placed in a text frame. The Preview window
shows you how the justification will look.
Conductor node Displayed under Capital Logic in the Project Preferences browser.
Expands to display nodes of project preferences for conductor cross-
references in Capital Logic diagrams.
Cross-reference node Displayed under Capital Logic > Conductor in the Project
Preferences browser.
Displays project preferences for conductor cross-references in
Capital Logic diagrams.
These settings are used for cross- references if the Diagram node
preference “Use Style Set Cross-reference” is un-checked.
Show Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Logic > Conductor > Cross-reference in the Project Preferences
browser.
Specify whether you want to display cross-references for conductors
in diagrams (selected) or not (unselected).
Limit references per Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
line Logic > Conductor > Cross-reference in the Project Preferences
browser.
Specify the maximum number of cross-references that can be
displayed on one line when there are multiple cross-references for an
object. By default, this is 1. Select the box to enable the field and
specify the number.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 407

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Project Preferences Dialog Box

Table 10-14. Project Preferences for Capital Logic Designs (cont.)

Field Description
Limit lines per block Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Logic > Conductor > Cross-reference in the Project Preferences
browser.
Specify the maximum number of lines that can be in a block of
cross-references in a diagram. If the number of cross-references for
an instance of a shared object is greater than this value, the cross-
references are displayed in multiple blocks. If you move a cross-
reference in a block to another location in a diagram, all of the cross-
references in that block move with it. Cross-references in other
blocks for that instance do not move. By default, there is no limit.
Select the box to enable the field and specify the number.
Template Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Logic > Conductor > Cross-reference in the Project Preferences
browser.
Specify the format of the cross-references.
Specify a string that combines text with references to variables. The
system interprets text in braces as a variable. This will be replaced
by the appropriate value in a cross-reference. Valid variables are as
follows:
• DESIGN.* where * is the name of a design attribute
• DIAGRAM.* where * is the name of a diagram attribute
• ZONE.* -where * is the name of a zone attribute
• EQUIV.* - if a shared net conductor is part of an equivalence set
and you specify this variable in the format, the cross-reference
text will also include the name of the other shared net conductor
from the equivalence set.
• PIN.NAME - the name(s) of the pins and pinlists that the
conductor is connected to. This variable is only available for use
in the template field of the form for conductors, pins and pinlists.
For example, you could have the format:
/{DESIGN.NAME}:{DIAGRAM.NAME} {ZONE.X}:{EQUIV.X}
If a shared net conductor, Net-2, is in the same equivalence set as the
shared net conductor by which the cross-reference is displayed, and
if Net-2 is in the zone with an X coordinate of 3, in the diagram
Audio_1, of the design Audio, the cross-reference would be:
/Audio:Audio_1 3:Net-2
If a variable is undefined in the cross-reference, the variable name is
replaced with an empty string.

408 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Project Preferences Dialog Box

Table 10-14. Project Preferences for Capital Logic Designs (cont.)

Field Description
Delimiter Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Logic > Conductor > Cross-reference in the Project Preferences
browser.
If the Limit References per line setting is greater than 1, specify a
text string to place between cross-references on the same line.
Text node Displayed under Capital Logic > Conductor > Cross-reference in
the Project Preferences browser.
Displays project preferences for conductor cross-reference text.
Name Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Logic > Conductor > Cross-reference > Text in the Project
Preferences browser.
Specifies the type of font used for conductor cross-reference text and
whether it is bold and/or italic. Select the values from the dropdown
lists.
Height Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Logic > Conductor > Cross-reference > Text in the Project
Preferences browser.
Specifies the height of conductor cross-reference text and the units
of measurement for this height. Select the values from the dropdown
lists.
Justification Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Logic > Conductor > Cross-reference > Text in the Project
Preferences browser.
Specifies where conductor cross-reference text is placed in a text
frame. The Preview window shows you how the justification will
look.
Connector node Displayed under Capital Logic in the Project Preferences browser.
Displays project preferences for connector graphics in a Capital
Logic diagram.
Connector Width Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Logic > Connector in the Project Preferences browser.
The width of a connector graphic in pin grids. Select the value from
the dropdown list.
Device node Displayed under Capital Logic in the Project Preferences browser.
Displays project preferences for devices in Capital Logic diagrams.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 409

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Project Preferences Dialog Box

Table 10-14. Project Preferences for Capital Logic Designs (cont.)

Field Description
Display - Device Pin Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Name Logic > Device in the Project Preferences browser.
Specifies whether device pin names are displayed on diagrams
(selected) or not (unselected).
Display - Device Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Connector Cavity Logic > Device in the Project Preferences browser.
Name Specifies whether device connector cavity names are displayed on
diagrams (selected) or not (unselected).
Device Connector Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Width Logic > Device in the Project Preferences browser.
Specifies the width of device connectors in pin grids. Select the
value from the dropdown list.
Diagram node Displayed under Capital Logic in the Project Preferences browser.
Displays project preferences for grid spacing in Capital Logic
diagrams.
Grid Spacing Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Logic > Diagram in the Project Preferences browser.
Defines the size represented by the visible grid on a diagram.
Specify a decimal number and select the unit of measurement from
the drop-down list. This setting will effect the size of objects (such
as devices and connectors) when a diagram is printed. The position
of electrical objects are constrained by this grid (purely graphical
objects are constrained by the drawing grid).
Drawing Grid Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Logic > Diagram in the Project Preferences browser.
In addition to the visible grid on a diagram, there is the drawing grid
that is invisible. When you place a drawing object that does not have
any pins nor connects to any pins on the diagram, the object will
snap to the drawing grid. This setting enables you to specify how
many points of the drawing grid are between the points of the visible
grid using a percentage of the print scale. For example, if you
specify 50, there will be one invisible drawing point halfway
between each point on the visible grid.
Major Grid Interval Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Logic > Diagram in the Project Preferences browser.
Specifies at which interval larger grid points are displayed. For
example, a value of 5 would display a larger grid point for every 5th
grid point. Mandatory.

410 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Project Preferences Dialog Box

Table 10-14. Project Preferences for Capital Logic Designs (cont.)

Field Description
Maximum Drawn Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Points Logic > Diagram in the Project Preferences browser.
Specifies the maximum number of grid points that can be displayed
in any one row or column when you zoom out of the diagram. When
the specified number of grid points is exceeded, the grid is no longer
displayed. Mandatory.
Use Style Set Cross- Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
reference Logic > Diagram in the Project Preferences browser.
Specifies whether you use the project preferences settings for cross-
references (unselected) or you use cross-reference settings from style
sets (selected).
If you toggle this setting from unselected to selected, all existing
cross-reference blocks on open diagrams are deleted and re-created
based on applied style sets. This creates cross-reference blocks at
default locations. To position them relative to other decorations, you
must use the Apply Style functionality on the diagrams.
If you toggle this setting from selected to unselected, all existing
cross-reference blocks are deleted and re-created based on project
preferences.
Update Cross-reference Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
On Read Only Diagram Logic > Diagram in the Project Preferences browser.
Specifies whether Read-only diagrams should have their cross-
references updated.
Highway node Displayed under Capital Logic in the Project Preferences browser.
Expands to display nodes of project preferences for highway cross-
references in Capital Logic diagrams.
Cross-reference node Displayed under Capital Logic > Highway in the Project
Preferences browser.
Displays project preferences for highway cross-references in Capital
Logic diagrams.
These settings are used for cross- references if the Diagram node
preference “Use Style Set Cross-reference” is un-checked.
Show Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Logic > Highway > Cross-reference in the Project Preferences
browser.
Specify whether you want to display cross-references for highways
in diagrams (selected) or not (unselected).

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 411

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Project Preferences Dialog Box

Table 10-14. Project Preferences for Capital Logic Designs (cont.)

Field Description
Limit references per Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
line Logic > Highway > Cross-reference in the Project Preferences
browser.
Specify the maximum number of cross-references that can be
displayed on one line when there are multiple cross-references for an
object. By default, this is 1. Select the box to enable the field and
specify the number.
Limit lines per block Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Logic > Highway > Cross-reference in the Project Preferences
browser.
Specify the maximum number of lines that can be in a block of
cross-references in a diagram. If the number of cross-references for
an instance of a shared object is greater than this value, the cross-
references are displayed in multiple blocks. If you move a cross-
reference in a block to another location in a diagram, all of the cross-
references in that block move with it. Cross-references in other
blocks for that instance do not move. By default, there is no limit.
Select the box to enable the field and specify the number.

412 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Project Preferences Dialog Box

Table 10-14. Project Preferences for Capital Logic Designs (cont.)

Field Description
Template Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Logic > Highway > Cross-reference in the Project Preferences
browser.
Specify the format of the cross-references.
Specify a string that combines text with references to variables. The
system interprets text in braces as a variable. This will be replaced
by the appropriate value in a cross-reference. Valid variables are as
follows:
• DESIGN.* where * is the name of a design attribute
• DIAGRAM.* where * is the name of a diagram attribute
• ZONE.* -where * is the name of a zone attribute
• EQUIV.* - if a shared net conductor is part of an equivalence set
and you specify this variable in the format, the cross-reference
text will also include the name of the other shared net conductor
from the equivalence set.
• PIN.NAME - the name(s) of the pins and pinlists that the
conductor is connected to. This variable is only available for use
in the template field of the form for conductors, pins and pinlists.
For example, you could have the format:
/{DESIGN.NAME}:{DIAGRAM.NAME} {ZONE.X}:{EQUIV.X}
If a shared net conductor, Net-2, is in the same equivalence set as the
shared net conductor by which the cross-reference is displayed, and
if Net-2 is in the zone with an X coordinate of 3, in the diagram
Audio_1, of the design Audio, the cross-reference would be:
/Audio:Audio_1 3:Net-2
If a variable is undefined in the cross-reference, the variable name is
replaced with an empty string.
Delimiter Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Logic > Highway > Cross-reference in the Project Preferences
browser.
If the Limit References per line setting is greater than 1, specify a
text string to place between cross-references on the same line.
Text node Displayed under Capital Logic > Highway > Cross-reference in
the Project Preferences browser.
Displays project preferences for highway cross-reference text.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 413

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Project Preferences Dialog Box

Table 10-14. Project Preferences for Capital Logic Designs (cont.)

Field Description
Name Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Logic > Highway > Cross-reference > Text in the Project
Preferences browser.
Specifies the type of font used for highway cross-reference text and
whether it is bold and/or italic. Select the values from the dropdown
lists.
Height Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Logic > Highway > Cross-reference > Text in the Project
Preferences browser.
Specifies the height of highway cross-reference text and the units of
measurement for this height. Select the values from the dropdown
lists.
Justification Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Logic > Highway > Cross-reference > Text in the Project
Preferences browser.
Specifies where highway cross-reference text is placed in a text
frame. The Preview window shows you how the justification will
look.
Module Codes, Displayed under Capital Logic in the Project Preferences browser.
Options Displays project preferences to pre-define which 'tag fields' such as
option expressions and module code fields are available on the Edit
Object dialogs of Capital Logic designs and diagrams, for any given
project.

414 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Project Preferences Dialog Box

Table 10-14. Project Preferences for Capital Logic Designs (cont.)

Field Description
Enable and Display Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Logic > Module Codes, Options in the Project Preferences
browser.
Select the required option to display or suppress the following. The
default for all settings is On.
• Option
Allows you to add object expressions to objects and designs.
When selected, the Applicable Options and Option fields display
on the Capital Logic Edit Designs dialog, and the Options field
displays on the Capital Logic Edit Object Properties dialog. The
default setting is On. (See the Capital Logic help system for more
information).
• Modules
Allows you to add Module Codes to objects and designs. When
selected, the Applicable Modules field displays on the Capital
Logic Edit Designs dialog, and the Modules field displays on the
Capital Logic Edit Object Properties dialog. The default setting
is Off. (See the Capital Logic help system for more information).
• Show Legacy Module Code
Allows you to control the display of the Module Code attribute
on Capital Logic objects. When selected, the Module Code
attribute displays on any relevant Capital Logic object properties
dialog. The default setting is Off. (See the Capital Logic help
system for more information).
The Show Legacy Module Code check box is set to Off when
importing and opening any project created prior to Capital
version 2012.1.
Multicore node Displayed under Capital Logic in the Project Preferences browser.
Displays project preferences for multicores in Capital Logic
diagrams.
Split Indicators Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Logic > Multicore in the Project Preferences browser.
Specifies whether multicore indicators are split where the conductors
in the multicore connect to different pin lists (selected) or whether
the indicators stretch across all of the conductors in the multicore
(unselected).
Indicator node Displayed under Capital Logic > Multicore in the Project
Preferences browser.
Displays project preferences for multicore indicators in Capital
Logic diagrams.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 415

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Project Preferences Dialog Box

Table 10-14. Project Preferences for Capital Logic Designs (cont.)

Field Description
Indicator Width Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Logic > Multicore > Indicator in the Project Preferences browser.
Specifies the width of multicore indicators in pin grids. Select the
value from the dropdown list.
Separate Hookups at Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
different levels Logic > Multicore > Indicator in the Project Preferences browser.
For nested multicores, this specifies whether indicator hookups on
different multicore levels are displayed at unique grid positions or
not.
If this is not selected, hookups for different multicore levels are
displayed at the same position.
If this is selected, hookups corresponding to an inner multicore
indicator are placed next to the indicator and hookups belonging to
the next level indicator are placed further away. The space between
the hookups is specified by Number of grids to separate hookups.

For example:
Number of grids to Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
separate hookups Logic > Multicore > Indicator in the Project Preferences browser.
Specifies the number of grid spaces that separate hookups from the
indicator and from each other if Separate Hookups at different
levels is selected.

416 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Project Preferences Dialog Box

Table 10-14. Project Preferences for Capital Logic Designs (cont.)

Field Description
Preserve Indicator Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Widths Logic > Multicore > Indicator in the Project Preferences browser.
If you have a nested multicore (that is, a parent multicore that
contains a child multicore), the multicore indicators for the parent
and child overlap each other.
With this option unselected, the indicators for the multicores are

different widths (the parent multicore’s indicator is wider).

With this option selected, the indicators for the multicores are the

same width.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 417

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Project Preferences Dialog Box

Table 10-14. Project Preferences for Capital Logic Designs (cont.)

Field Description
Max Grid Distance for Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Toggle Indicator Logic > Multicore > Indicator in the Project Preferences browser.
This enables you to specify the maximum distance (in terms of the
Pin Grid) between the bottom left extent of the conductors of a
multicore which will be evaluated by the Toggle/Add indicator
action for tyeing together with single indicator.
If the toggle action is performed with a default setting of 3 specified
in the pin grid field, then the indicator would not stretch, as shown
below

.
If the pin grid preference is changed, for example to 6 and the toggle
action is performed, then the indicator would stretch as shown below
and both these wires are grouped, as the distance between the bottom
left extent of these wires (a setting of 5 in the pin grid field) is still
within the project preference specified (a setting of 6 in the pin grid
field).

Name node Displayed under Capital Logic in the Project Preferences browser.
Expands to display nodes of project preferences for object name text
in Capital Logic diagrams.

418 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Project Preferences Dialog Box

Table 10-14. Project Preferences for Capital Logic Designs (cont.)

Field Description
Text node Displayed under Capital Logic > Name in the Project Preferences
browser.
Displays project preferences for object name text in Capital Logic
diagrams.
Name Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Logic > Name > Text in the Project Preferences browser.
Specifies the type of font used for the object name text and whether
it is bold and/or italic. Select the values from the dropdown lists.
Height Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Logic > Name > Text in the Project Preferences browser.
Specifies the height of the object name text and the units of
measurement for this height. Select the values from the dropdown
lists.
Justification Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Logic > Name > Text in the Project Preferences browser.
Specifies the justification of the text. The Preview window shows
you how the justification will look.
Net node Displayed under Capital Logic in the Project Preferences browser.
Displays project preferences for net conductors in Capital Logic
diagrams.
Net Join Display Type Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Logic > Net in the Project Preferences browser.
Specifies how a pin is displayed when a net is connected to it. Select
either Square or Circle.
Net Join Display Size Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Logic > Net in the Project Preferences browser.
Specifies the size (in grid spaces) of the square or circle that is
displayed where nets join in a diagram. By default, this is 0.25 grid
spaces.
Overbraid node Displayed under Capital Logic in the Project Preferences browser.
Displays project preferences for overbraids in Capital Logic
diagrams.
Indicator node Displayed under Capital Logic > Overbraid in the Project
Preferences browser.
Displays project preferences for overbraid indicators in Capital
Logic diagrams.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 419

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Project Preferences Dialog Box

Table 10-14. Project Preferences for Capital Logic Designs (cont.)

Field Description
Indicator Width Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Logic > Overbraid > Indicator in the Project Preferences browser.
Specifies the width of overbraid indicators in pin grids. Select the
value from the dropdown list.
Pin node Displayed under Capital Logic in the Project Preferences browser.
Expands to display nodes of project preferences for pin cross-
references in Capital Logic diagrams.
Cross-reference node Displayed under Capital Logic > Pin in the Project Preferences
browser.
Displays project preferences for pin cross-references in Capital
Logic diagrams.
These settings are used for cross- references if the Diagram node
preference Use Style Set Cross-reference is un-checked.
Show Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Logic > Pin > Cross-reference in the Project Preferences browser.
Specify whether you want to display cross-references for pins in
diagrams (selected) or not (unselected).
Limit references per Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
line Logic > Pin > Cross-reference in the Project Preferences browser.
Specify the maximum number of cross-references that can be
displayed on one line when there are multiple cross-references for an
object. By default, this is 1. Select the box to enable the field and
specify the number.
Limit lines per block Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Logic > Pin > Cross-reference in the Project Preferences browser.
Specify the maximum number of lines that can be in a block of
cross-references in a diagram. If the number of cross-references for
an instance of a shared object is greater than this value, the cross-
references are displayed in multiple blocks. If you move a cross-
reference in a block to another location in a diagram, all of the cross-
references in that block move with it. Cross-references in other
blocks for that instance do not move. By default, there is no limit.
Select the box to enable the field and specify the number.

420 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Project Preferences Dialog Box

Table 10-14. Project Preferences for Capital Logic Designs (cont.)

Field Description
Template Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Logic > Pin > Cross-reference in the Project Preferences browser.
Specify the format of the cross-references.
Specify a string that combines text with references to variables. The
system interprets text in braces as a variable. This will be replaced
by the appropriate value in a cross-reference. Valid variables are as
follows:
• DESIGN.* where * is the name of a design attribute
• DIAGRAM.* where * is the name of a diagram attribute
• ZONE.* -where * is the name of a zone attribute
• EQUIV.* - if a shared net conductor is part of an equivalence set
and you specify this variable in the format, the cross-reference
text will also include the name of the other shared net conductor
from the equivalence set.
• PIN.NAME - the name(s) of the pins and pinlists that the
conductor is connected to. This variable is only available for use
in the template field of the form for conductors, pins and pinlists.
For example, you could have the format:
/{DESIGN.NAME}:{DIAGRAM.NAME} {ZONE.X}:{EQUIV.X}
If a shared net conductor, Net-2, is in the same equivalence set as the
shared net conductor by which the cross-reference is displayed, and
if Net-2 is in the zone with an X coordinate of 3, in the diagram
Audio_1, of the design Audio, the cross-reference would be:
/Audio:Audio_1 3:Net-2
If a variable is undefined in the cross-reference, the variable name is
replaced with an empty string.
Delimiter Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Logic > Pin > Cross-reference in the Project Preferences browser.
If the Limit References per line setting is greater than 1, specify a
text string to place between cross-references on the same line.
Text node Displayed under Capital Logic > Pin > Cross-reference in the
Project Preferences browser.
Displays project preferences for pin cross-reference text.
Name Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Logic > Pin > Cross-reference > Text in the Project Preferences
browser.
Specifies the type of font used for pin cross-reference text and
whether it is bold and/or italic. Select the values from the dropdown
lists.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 421

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Project Preferences Dialog Box

Table 10-14. Project Preferences for Capital Logic Designs (cont.)

Field Description
Height Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Logic > Pin > Cross-reference > Text in the Project Preferences
browser.
Specifies the height of pin cross-reference text and the units of
measurement for this height. Select the values from the dropdown
lists.
Justification Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Logic > Pin > Cross-reference > Text in the Project Preferences
browser.
Specifies where pin cross-reference text is placed in a text frame.
The Preview window shows you how the justification will look.
Pin List node Displayed under Capital Logic in the Project Preferences browser.
Expands to display nodes of project preferences for pin list cross-
references in Capital Logic diagrams.
Cross-reference node Displayed under Capital Logic > Pin List in the Project Preferences
browser.
Displays project preferences for pin list cross-references in Capital
Logic diagrams.
These settings are used for cross- references if the Diagram node
preference “Use Style Set Cross-reference” is un-checked.
Show Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Logic > Pin List > Cross-reference in the Project Preferences
browser.
Specify whether you want to display cross-references for pin lists in
diagrams (selected) or not (unselected).
Limit references per Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
line Logic > Pin List > Cross-reference in the Project Preferences
browser.
Specify the maximum number of cross-references that can be
displayed on one line when there are multiple cross-references for an
object. By default, this is 1. Select the box to enable the field and
specify the number.

422 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Project Preferences Dialog Box

Table 10-14. Project Preferences for Capital Logic Designs (cont.)

Field Description
Limit lines per block Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Logic > Pin List > Cross-reference in the Project Preferences
browser.
Specify the maximum number of lines that can be in a block of
cross-references in a diagram. If the number of cross-references for
an instance of a shared object is greater than this value, the cross-
references are displayed in multiple blocks. If you move a cross-
reference in a block to another location in a diagram, all of the cross-
references in that block move with it. Cross-references in other
blocks for that instance do not move. By default, there is no limit.
Select the box to enable the field and specify the number.
Template Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Logic > Pin List > Cross-reference in the Project Preferences
browser.
Specify the format of the cross-references.
Specify a string that combines text with references to variables. The
system interprets text in braces as a variable. This will be replaced
by the appropriate value in a cross-reference. Valid variables are as
follows:
• DESIGN.* where * is the name of a design attribute
• DIAGRAM.* where * is the name of a diagram attribute
• ZONE.* -where * is the name of a zone attribute
• EQUIV.* - if a shared net conductor is part of an equivalence set
and you specify this variable in the format, the cross-reference
text will also include the name of the other shared net conductor
from the equivalence set.
• PIN.NAME - the name(s) of the pins and pinlists that the
conductor is connected to. This variable is only available for use
in the template field of the form for conductors, pins and pinlists.
For example, you could have the format:
/{DESIGN.NAME}:{DIAGRAM.NAME} {ZONE.X}:{EQUIV.X}
If a shared net conductor, Net-2, is in the same equivalence set as the
shared net conductor by which the cross-reference is displayed, and
if Net-2 is in the zone with an X coordinate of 3, in the diagram
Audio_1, of the design Audio, the cross-reference would be:
/Audio:Audio_1 3:Net-2
If a variable is undefined in the cross-reference, the variable name is
replaced with an empty string.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 423

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Project Preferences Dialog Box

Table 10-14. Project Preferences for Capital Logic Designs (cont.)

Field Description
Delimiter Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Logic > Pin List > Cross-reference in the Project Preferences
browser.
If the Limit References per line setting is greater than 1, specify a
text string to place between cross-references on the same line.
Text node Displayed under Capital Logic > Pin List > Cross-reference in the
Project Preferences browser.
Displays project preferences for pin list cross-reference text.
Name Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Logic > Pin List > Cross-reference > Text in the Project
Preferences browser.
Specifies the type of font used for pin list cross-reference text and
whether it is bold and/or italic. Select the values from the dropdown
lists.
Height Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Logic > Pin List > Cross-reference > Text in the Project
Preferences browser.
Specifies the height of pin list cross-reference text and the units of
measurement for this height. Select the values from the dropdown
lists.
Justification Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Logic > Pin List > Cross-reference > Text in the Project
Preferences browser.
Specifies where pin list cross-reference text is placed in a text frame.
The Preview window shows you how the justification will look.
Property node Displayed under Capital Logic in the Project Preferences browser.
Expands to display nodes of project preferences for object property
text in Capital Logic diagrams.
Text node Displayed under Capital Logic > Property in the Project
Preferences browser.
Displays project preferences for object property text in Capital Logic
diagrams.
Name Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Logic > Property > Text in the Project Preferences browser.
Specifies the type of font used for the object property text and
whether it is bold and/or italic. Select the values from the dropdown
lists.

424 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Project Preferences Dialog Box

Table 10-14. Project Preferences for Capital Logic Designs (cont.)

Field Description
Height Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Logic > Property > Text in the Project Preferences browser.
Specifies the height of the object property text and the units of
measurement for this height. Select the values from the dropdown
lists.
Justification Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Logic > Property > Text in the Project Preferences browser.
Specifies the justification of the object property text. The Preview
window shows you how the justification will look.
Wire node Displayed under Capital Logic in the Project Preferences browser.
Displays project preferences for wires in Capital Logic diagrams.
Poke Home Arrow Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Style Logic > Wire in the Project Preferences browser.
The arrow style used to represent poke homes. Select from the
dropdown list.
Treat Wires Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Terminating On A Logic > Wire in the Project Preferences browser.
Different Harness As Ensure that this is selected if you are working with poke home wires
Poke Home in Capital Logic.

Table 10-15. Project Preferences for Capital Topology Designs

Field Description
Bundle Calculation Displayed in the Project Preferences browser under the Capital
Topology node.
Displays project preferences used when calculating a bundle
diameter for a bundle width report.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 425

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Project Preferences Dialog Box

Table 10-15. Project Preferences for Capital Topology Designs (cont.)

Field Description
Wire Gap Coefficient Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Topology > Bundle Calculation in the Project Preferences browser.
Specifies the coefficient that is used to represent the air gap between
adjacent wires when calculating a bundle diameter. The value must
be a float (decimal number) of 1 or higher. By default, this is 1.154.
A value of 1 indicates that there is no air gap.
If a multicore has an OutsideDiameter attribute, it is treated as one
wire by these calculations. Otherwise, its constituent wires are
processed.
Bundle diameter (DBundle) is calculated in the following ways
(given a number of wires of diameter DWire):
• If the bundle contains one wire:
DBundle = DWire
• If the bundle contains two wires:
DBundle =
• If the bundle contains three or more wires:
DBundle =

where is calculated from DWire

The cross-sectional area of a wire ( ) is calculated in a

variety of ways (depending on what data exists):
• If the OutsideDiameter attribute exists on a wire, this is used as-
is. This also applies if a multicore has an OutsideDiameter
attribute. In this case, the wires within the multicore are ignored.
• If a wire has no OutsideDiameter attribute but has both a
WireMaterial attribute and a WireCSA attribute defined, the
WireCSA attribute is used to calculate the copper diameter and
an insulation thickness determined from Capital Library (from
the Wire Insulation Thickness Dialog) is added to calculate
DWire.
• If the OutsideDiameter attribute does not exist on a wire, the
WireCSA attribute is used to calculate the copper diameter and
the value specified for the Default Insulation Thickness project
preference is added to calculate DWire. If a multicore does not
have an OutsideDiameter attribute, then its constituent wires are
processed individually in this way.
In all these cases, this value of DWire is used to calculate the overall
CSA of copper plus insulation.

426 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Project Preferences Dialog Box

Table 10-15. Project Preferences for Capital Topology Designs (cont.)

Field Description
Default Insulation Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Thickness Topology > Bundle Calculation in the Project Preferences browser.
Specifies the insulation thickness that is used by default when
calculating the bundle diameter. The value must be a float (decimal
number). By default, this is 0.0.
Checks node Displayed under Capital Topology in the Project Preferences
browser.
Displays project preferences for running design rule checks on a
Capital Topology design. See Design Rule Checks Applicable to
Capital Topology Designsfor full details of available checks.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 427

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Project Preferences Dialog Box

Table 10-15. Project Preferences for Capital Topology Designs (cont.)

Field Description
Running Mode Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Topology > Checks in the Project Preferences browser.
Located at the top of the dialog, this enables you to select a running
mode for design rule checks from a dropdown list.
Select a running mode and a Design Abstraction to specify a
scenario for running design rule checks (that is, running checks in a
particular mode on a design with a particular abstraction). You can
then use the Design Rule Checks browser to select the design rule
checks that are run automatically and their severity for this particular
scenario. The running modes are:
• Manual
When you run design rule checks manually in a design
application by pressing Space Bar and entering DRCs and
selecting the checks that you want to run. The Check tab of the
output window displays the results.
• Background
When design rule checks are run automatically in the background
in a design application. Background runs occur when the
background mode has been activated and after changes have
been made to objects in the design to which the currently active
diagram belongs. The Check tab of the output window displays
the results.
You should set as small a number as possible of checks to run in
the background as they will use memory.
• On Save
When design rule checks are run automatically on saving a
diagram in a design application. If there are any failures of
severity Error, the save is canceled and the Check tab of the
Output Window displays the failures. By default, no design rule
checks are run for the On Save mode. If you want checks to run
when you save, you must specify preferences for this mode.
You should set as small a number as possible of checks to run in
the background as they will use memory.
• On Release
When design rule checks are run automatically on releasing a
diagram. The Check tab of the output window displays the
results.
• Design Assistant
When design rule checks are run from the Design Assistant. If
there are any failures, the Design Assistant displays them.
• Harness Transfer
When a harness is imported into a design using Integrator
Harness Exchange functionality.
428 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1
February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Project Preferences Dialog Box

Table 10-15. Project Preferences for Capital Topology Designs (cont.)

Field Description
Design Abstraction Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
HarnessXC > Checks in the Project Preferences browser.
Located at the top of the dialog, enables you to select a design
abstraction from a dropdown list.
Select a Running Mode and a design abstraction to specify a
scenario for running design rule checks (that is, running checks in a
particular mode on a design with a particular abstraction). You can
then use the Design Rule Checks browser to select the design rule
checks that are run automatically and their severity for this particular
scenario.
The list of design abstractions depends on those available in the
project. You can select an empty row from the dropdown list that
represents designs without a design abstraction. Designs which
reference an abstraction which no longer exists also default to the
empty abstraction rule check configuration.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 429

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Project Preferences Dialog Box

Table 10-15. Project Preferences for Capital Topology Designs (cont.)

Field Description
Design Rule Checks Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
browser HarnessXC > Checks in the Project Preferences browser.
Lists the available design rule checks, grouped into categories, in a
tree where you can set preferences for each check.
See Design Rule Check Descriptions for a detailed explanation of
each available Design Rule Check.
The preferences for each check apply only to the selected
combination of Running Mode and Design Abstraction. When you
change the preferences for a particular combination, ensure that you
click Apply at the bottom of the dialog before selecting a new
running mode or design abstraction.
Select a design rule check in the tree if you want it to run
automatically. Unselect it if you do not want it to run automatically.
If you select or unselect a design rule check category (for example,
Connectivity), all of the checks under that category are selected or
unselected.
Right-click on the symbol next to a design rule check to specify
whether a failure for that check generates an error, a warning or a
notification (information).
In addition, right-click on the symbol and select or unselect Show to
specify whether the check is (selected) or is not (unselected) listed in
the Design Rule Checks dialog (used for manually running checks)
in the design application. If Show is unselected, the check is grayed
out in the tree, although you can still right-click on it to edit its
preferences. In addition to not being listed for selection, a check with
Show unselected will not run.
The tree includes installed custom design rule checks but their
preferences come from the plug-in and cannot be edited here.
Comment node Displayed under Capital Topology in the Project Preferences
browser.
Expands to display further nodes of project preferences for comment
graphics created by drawing tools.
Graphic node Displayed under Capital Topology > Comment in the Project
Preferences browser.
Displays project preferences for graphics created by drawing tools.

430 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Project Preferences Dialog Box

Table 10-15. Project Preferences for Capital Topology Designs (cont.)

Field Description
Style Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Topology > Comment > Graphic in the Project Preferences
browser.
Specifies the line style used for comment graphics created by
drawing tools in a diagram.
Thickness Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Topology > Comment > Graphic in the Project Preferences
browser.
Specifies the line thickness used for comment graphics created by
drawing tools in a diagram.
Select the type of thickness from the second dropdown list:
• Logical
These thicknesses do not have a physical unit of measurement.
They provide a logical progression of thickness with a default of
1. A line with thickness 2 is displayed twice as thick as a line
with thickness 1, and so on. When you zoom in or out of a
diagram, the line thickness does not appear any different.
You select the thickness from the first dropdown list.
• Physical (unit of measurement)
These are physical units of measurement. The line thickness is
displayed in relation to the grid size of a diagram. When you
zoom in or out of a diagram, the line grows or shrinks to stay in
scale with the grid.
When you select a unit, the first dropdown list changes to a free
text field where you specify the thickness. The value can be any
floating-point number up to three decimal places.
See Physical Line Thickness in the Capital Design Tools -
Common Functions User Guide for a definition and links to
related task flows.
Text node Displayed under Capital Topology > Comment in the Project
Preferences browser.
Displays project preferences for text created by drawing tools.
Name Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Topology > Comment > Text in the Project Preferences browser.
Specifies the type of font used for text in a text frame and whether it
is bold and/or italic. Select the values from the dropdown lists.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 431

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Project Preferences Dialog Box

Table 10-15. Project Preferences for Capital Topology Designs (cont.)

Field Description
Height Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Topology > Comment > Text in the Project Preferences browser.
Specifies the height of text in a text frame and the units of
measurement for this height. Select the values from the dropdown
lists.
Justification Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Topology > Comment > Text in the Project Preferences browser.
Specifies where text is placed in a text frame. The Preview window
shows you how the justification will look.
Connector node Displayed under Capital Topology in the Project Preferences
browser.
Displays project preferences for connector graphics in a Capital
Topology diagram.
Connector Width Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Topology > Connector in the Project Preferences browser.
The width of a connector graphic in pin grids. Select the value from
the dropdown list.

432 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Project Preferences Dialog Box

Table 10-15. Project Preferences for Capital Topology Designs (cont.)

Field Description
Render back-face Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Topology > Connector in the Project Preferences browser.
Specifies how virtual connectors are drawn in Capital Topology
diagrams.
When this is selected, the connector has a line that runs along the
extent of the slot. For example:

Here you can see there is a bright green line drawn for the part of P1
that is flush with the slot. The line for the slot is then drawn over that
bright green line.
If this option is not selected, no connector line is drawn flush with
the slot.
Name node Displayed under Capital Topology in the Project Preferences
browser.
Expands to display nodes of project preferences for object name text
in Capital Topology diagrams.
Text node Displayed under Capital Topology > Name in the Project
Preferences browser.
Displays project preferences for object name text in Capital
Topology diagrams.
Name Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Topology > Name > Text in the Project Preferences browser.
Specifies the type of font used for the object name text and whether
it is bold and/or italic. Select the values from the dropdown lists.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 433

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Project Preferences Dialog Box

Table 10-15. Project Preferences for Capital Topology Designs (cont.)

Field Description
Height Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Topology > Name > Text in the Project Preferences browser.
Specifies the height of the object name text and the units of
measurement for this height. Select the values from the dropdown
lists.
Justification Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Topology > Name > Text in the Project Preferences browser.
Specifies the justification of the text. The Preview window shows
you how the justification will look.
Plane node Displayed under Capital Topology in the Project Preferences
browser.
Displays project preferences for the grid spacing on a plane diagram
in Capital Topology.
Grid Spacing Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Topology > Plane in the Project Preferences browser.
Defines the size represented by the visible grid on a diagram.
Specify a decimal number and select the unit of measurement from
the drop-down list. This setting will effect the size of objects (such
as devices and connectors) when a diagram is printed. The position
of electrical objects are constrained by this grid (purely graphical
objects are constrained by the drawing grid).
You can specify how this grid is displayed using the Set Grid
Defaults dialog in Capital Integrator.
You can use the Modify Physical Scale dialog in Capital Topology
to specify the physical scale of objects in a design.
Drawing Grid Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Topology > Plane in the Project Preferences browser.
In addition to the visible grid on a diagram, there is the drawing grid
that is invisible. When you place a drawing object that does not have
any pins nor connects to any pins on the diagram, the object will
snap to the drawing grid. This setting enables you to specify how
many points of the drawing grid are between the points of the visible
grid using a percentage of the print scale. For example, if you
specify 50, there will be one invisible drawing point halfway
between each point on the visible grid.
Major Grid Interval Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Topology > Plane in the Project Preferences browser.
Specifies at which interval larger grid points are displayed. For
example, a value of 5 would display a larger grid point for every 5th
grid point.

434 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Project Preferences Dialog Box

Table 10-15. Project Preferences for Capital Topology Designs (cont.)

Field Description
Maximum Drawn Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Points Topology > Plane in the Project Preferences browser.
Specifies the maximum number of grid points that can be displayed
in any one row or column when you zoom out of the diagram. When
the specified number of grid points is exceeded, the grid is no longer
displayed.
Property node Displayed under Capital Topology in the Project Preferences
browser.
Expands to display nodes of project preferences for object property
text in Capital Topology diagrams.
Text node Displayed under Capital Topology > Property in the Project
Preferences browser.
Displays project preferences for object property text in Capital
Topology diagrams.
Name Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Topology > Property > Text in the Project Preferences browser.
Specifies the type of font used for the object property text and
whether it is bold and/or italic. Select the values from the dropdown
lists.
Height Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Topology > Property > Text in the Project Preferences browser.
Specifies the height of the object property text and the units of
measurement for this height. Select the values from the dropdown
lists.
Justification Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Capital
Topology > Property > Text in the Project Preferences browser.
Specifies the justification of the object property text. The Preview
window shows you how the justification will look.

Table 10-16. Project Preferences for Design Rule Checks

Field Description
Check node Displayed in the Project Preferences browser.
Displays project preferences applied to design rule checks in all
applications.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 435

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Project Preferences Dialog Box

Table 10-16. Project Preferences for Design Rule Checks (cont.)

Field Description
Annotate by Default Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Check in
the Project Preferences browser.
If this is selected, the Annotate results field on the Design Rule
Checks Dialog Box and Release Designs Dialog Box is selected by
default and cannot be unselected.
If this is not selected, a user can choose whether to select the
Annotate results field.
Annotation of the design will only occur if the design contains a
border with a [CHECK_RESULTS] property (assigned to the
border using Capital Symbol).
Annotation Template Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select Check in
the Project Preferences browser.
Enables the specification of the information and text that is to be
automatically inserted into the design when design rule checks are
run.
By default, the annotation includes the date and the ID of the user
who ran the checks. You can add other default text by typing into the
box.
Enforce Design Rule If this is not selected, users can release a design by selecting a
Checks on release of release level of type Released in its Edit Design dialog.
designs If this is selected, users cannot do that. In this case, the only way to
release designs is by pressing Space Bar and entering Release. This
also runs design rule checks. See “Releasing Designs with Enforced
Design Rule Checks” on page 113.

Table 10-17. General Project Preferences Applicable to all Applications

Field Description
General node Displayed in the Project Preferences browser.
Displays project preferences applied to all applications.
Purge unplaced objects Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select General
on Save in the Project Preferences browser.
Specifies whether any design wide objects, currently listed as
connectivity objects in Unplaced folders in the Design Browser
Window, are deleted when you save the design (selected), or not,
(unselected).

436 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Project Preferences Dialog Box

Table 10-17. General Project Preferences Applicable to all Applications

Field Description
Effectivity Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select General
in the Project Preferences browser.
Specifies whether you want to use the effectivity functionality with
the project (selected) or not (unselected).
Disallow pin Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select General
duplication within a in the Project Preferences browser.
design If this is not selected (the default behavior), you can add multiple
instances of shared or unshared pins within a design.
If this is selected, you can not add further instances of pins unless
you make shared pins Unrestricted or you add the pins as Reference
Pins.
Note: Stud pins are specifically excluded from the check, as they
can be placed a number of times to facilitate the mating of
multiple ring terminals
Show non-optioned Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select General
objects in the Project Preferences browser.
Specifies whether you want to include objects that do not have
options assigned to them when you generate an evaluated design
(selected) or not (unselected). If unselected, any evaluated designs
that are generated will include only those objects with options
assigned to them.
Update Symbol on Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select General
Library Part Update in the Project Preferences browser.
When running Library Part Update in Capital Logic, this preference
allows you to simultaneously update the diagram with any symbol
changes that may have occurred (selected), or not.
If the option is deselected and library parts with associated symbols
are assigned to a parameterized device then the device will remain
parameterized. However, if the option is enabled then the associated
symbol will replace the existing parameterized symbol.
Poke home prefix Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select General
in the Project Preferences browser.
Specifies a prefix that is added to wires that are poke homes when a
report is generated for the project.
Part Selection - Current Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select General
components only in the Project Preferences browser.
Specifies whether you wish to use only Capital Library components
that have the Status of Current on designs (selected) or not
(unselected).

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 437

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Project Preferences Dialog Box

Table 10-17. General Project Preferences Applicable to all Applications

Field Description
Part Selection - Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select General
Preferred components in the Project Preferences browser.
only Specifies whether you wish to use only preferred Capital Library
components (selected) or not (unselected).
Allowed Domains Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select General
in the Project Preferences browser.
These options allow you to restrict access to library components
from within designs to only those belonging to domains flagged as
allowed for the project, or those that do not belong to a domain.
The Available list displays all domains to which the currently
logged-in user has access (read-only or read-write).
• To specify a domain as allowed for this project, first select it in
the Available list, then click the Add button to move it into the
Selected list.
• To disallow a domain from the project, select it in the Selected
list before clicking Remove.
The Add All and Remove All buttons are available to speed up
selection.
Customer Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select General
in the Project Preferences browser.
Specifies the default Customer that will be used when creating
Harness Designs. Select the name from the dropdown list.
Manufacturing site Displayed in the Project Preferences pane when you select General
in the Project Preferences browser.
Specifies the default Manufacturing Site that will be used when
creating Harness Designs. Select the name from the dropdown list.

438 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Copy Design Dialog Box

Copy Design Dialog Box

To access: In a design tool, right-click on a design in the Project Browser Window and select
Copy.
Used to copy an existing design.

Objects

Object Description
Standard design fields This dialog box contains the standard
fields used when creating a new design.
For a Capital Integrator design, see
Creating a New Design.
For a Capital Topology design, see New
Topology Design Dialog.
Retain Generated Names Select this if you want the copy to retain
object names that have been generated
using Advanced Naming. If you do not
select this, object names return to default
object names in the copy.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 439

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Create New Design Revision Dialog Box

Create New Design Revision Dialog Box

To access: Right-click on a design in the Project Browser Window and select Create Revision.
Used to create a new design revision for a design.

Objects

Object Description
Standard design fields This dialog box contains the standard fields
listed when creating a design.
For a Capital Integrator design, see Creating
a New Design.
For a Capital Topology design, see New
Topology Design Dialog.

440 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Editing Action Dialogs

Editing Action Dialogs

This section offers a description of various dialogs used for editing designs and objects. For
each dialog, all fields are listed, along with a full description of the field’s function.
Applicable Options Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 441

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Applicable Options Dialog Box

Applicable Options Dialog Box

To access: Click the ellipsis (...) next to the Applicable Options field on the,
• Edit Design Dialog.
• Design tab on the Autoview Generate Wiring Diagram dialog
• Design tab on Autoview Query and Generate Design dialog
Used to select the options that can be assigned to an object.
Objects

Table 10-18. Applicable Options Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Applicable • Available
Options Lists the options that are available. Select the options
that can be assigned to the object that you are editing and
click Add to move them to the Selected window. Click
Add All to move all available options to the Selected
window.
• Selected
Lists the options that can be assigned to the object that
you are editing. To remove options from the list, select
them and click Remove to move them to the Available
window. To empty the list, click Remove All.

Usage Notes
For composite harness designs, the order of the options in the Selected window controls the
order in which they are displayed in the composite table in the design. To change the order,
select an option and click either:

• Moves the selected option to the top of the list.

• Moves the selected option up one position in the list.

• Moves the selected option down one position in the list.

• Moves the selected option to the bottom of the list.

Note
Where applicable - Derivative designs inherit the option order from their composite, hence
these buttons are not available when editing a derivative design. As options are added to the
Selected list, they will adopt the order defined for the composite.

442 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Applicable Options Dialog Box

Compare Designs Dialog Box

To access: Click OK on the Design Revision - Build List Selection Dialog Box.
Used to specify settings for a design comparison.
Objects

Table 10-19. Compare Designs Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Comparison Type Select one of the following to specify how objects are treated in the
comparison. Displayed only when comparing Capital Logic and
Capital Integrator or Capital Topology designs. Mandatory.
• Topology Only
Only topological data is considered. None of the connectivity
items on the selected designs appear in the comparison results.
Enabled only when comparing two Capital Integrator or Capital
Topology designs.
• Exact
Nets and wires are treated as different types of object, and all
objects are treated as equivalent if they have the same base UID
(when comparing revisions of the same design) or if they have the
same name (when comparing designs that are unrelated).
• Conductor Equivalent
Nets and wires are treated as the same type of object. Devices are
treated as equivalent if they have the same name. Enabled only
when comparing a Capital Logic design.
If there is a net between two pins on one design revision and two
wires separated by a splice between the same pins on a second
design revision, these are treated as the same.
• Device and Conductor Equivalent
Functions like the Conductor Equivalent comparison type.
However, device names are not used to determine whether
devices in design revisions are equivalent. You must click Map
Equivalent Devices to display the Map Equivalent Devices
Dialog Box, where you designate devices from the first design as
equivalent to specific devices in the second design revision. Only
available when comparing individual design revisions.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 443

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Applicable Options Dialog Box

Table 10-19. Compare Designs Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Traverse • Connectors
Specifies whether connectors are considered in the comparison
(unselected) or are ignored in the comparison (selected). Enabled
only when comparing a Capital Logic design. Mandatory.
• Splices
Specifies whether splices are considered in the comparison
(unselected) or are ignored in the comparison (selected). Enabled
only when comparing a Capital Logic design. Mandatory.
Compare • Attributes and Properties
Specifies whether to compare the attributes and properties of
objects in the design revisions (selected) or to ignore the
attributes and properties of objects (unselected). Mandatory.
• Internal Connectivity
Specifies whether the internal connectivity of devices is
considered in the comparison (unselected) or is ignored in the
comparison (selected). Enabled only when comparing a Capital
Logic design. Mandatory.
Design 1 [D1] The first design being compared. By default, this is the currently
open design revision. You can click the ellipsis (...) to display the
Design Revision - Build List Selection Dialog Box again where you
can select a different design revision. Displayed only if you are
comparing individual design revisions. Optional.
Design 2 [D2] The second design being compared. You can click the ellipsis (...) to
display the “Design Revision - Build List Selection” dialog box again
where you can select a different design revision. Displayed only if
you are comparing individual design revisions. Optional.
BuildList 1 [BL1] The first build list being compared. You can click the ellipsis (...) to
display the “Design Revision - Build List Selection” again where you
can select a different build list. Displayed only if you are comparing
build lists. Optional.
BuildList [BL2] The first build list being compared. You can click the ellipsis (...) to
display the “Design Revision - Build List Selection” again where you
can select a different build list. Displayed only if you are comparing
build lists. Optional.
Compare Runs the comparison. The results for which, are displayed in the
Differences window. Mandatory.
Export Enables you to export and save the comparison results in an HTML
file. Click this to display the Design Compare Report Dialog where
you select a location to save the file and specify the file name.
Optional.

444 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Applicable Options Dialog Box

Table 10-19. Compare Designs Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Differences Lists the results of the design comparison in a tree. The tree displays
each design revision and the objects being compared in each design.
If an object appears on a design revision or build list, the field in the
column for that design revision or build list is selected.
If you are comparing properties and option expressions on objects,
these are listed under the appropriate objects. If the property or option
expression is set for the object in a design revision or build list, the
field in the column for that design revision or build list is selected.
If filtering has been applied to the diagram windows for the designs,
(Filter Active) is displayed in the head for the Differences column.
Note: If you click on an object in the Differences window, the
diagram or plane containing that object is opened and the object is
highlighted.
Show Differences Displays the differences between the design revisions graphically by
fading (filtering out) objects that are common in the diagram
windows. You move the slider control up and down to control how
much the common objects are faded. Objects that are different
between the design revisions are displayed normally. When clicked
this button changes to Hide Differences. Optional, not available
when comparing build lists.
Note: If filtering has been applied to the diagram windows for the
design revisions, (Filter Active) is displayed in the head for the
Differences column. This means, some objects may have been faded
in the diagram window as a result of the filtering and not as a result of
showing differences. If harnesses have been faded on the basis of
their lock status, this fading is undone when you click Show
Differences and any fading is a result of the design comparison.
Hide Differences Displays all objects in the diagram windows normally, regardless of
whether they are common to the design revisions or not. When
clicked this button changes to Show Differences. Optional, not
available when comparing build lists.
Slider Control Move the slider up and down to control how much common objects
are faded out (filtered) when Show Differences has been clicked.
Optional, not available when comparing build lists.

Related Topics
Comparing Objects and Their Properties in Design Revisions or Build Lists

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 445

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Applicable Options Dialog Box

Design Revision - Build List Selection Dialog Box

To access: Press Space Bar and enter Compare Design with a diagram or plane open or by
clicking the Add button on the Edit Build List Dialog Box.
Used to select build lists or designs so that the objects and attributes within them can be
compared.
Objects

Table 10-20. Design Revision/Build List Selection Dialog Contents

Field Description
Projects Displays the projects from which you can select designs or build
lists. Click on the project.
Build Lists Displays the available build lists that you can compare. Select the
two build lists that you want to compare or do not select any if you
want to compare individual design revisions.
Design Revisions Displays the design revisions contained in the selected project in a
browser tree. If you want to compare individual design revisions,
click on the design revision that you want to compare with the
currently open design revision. If you are comparing build lists, do
not select a design revision.
Enter Filter String ( ) In the field next to the Enter Filter String icon ( ), enter a series of
/ Clear Filter String characters. A filter is applied to the Design Revisions window so that
( ) only designs with names containing that series of characters are
listed.
Click the Clear Filter String icon ( ) to clear the filter and view all
designs in the project.
Design Filter ( ) Click the dropdown list to filter the designs displayed in the Design
Revisions window to those of a particular type, all designs in the
project or all designs in the currently active build list.

Related Topics
Comparing Objects and Their Properties in Design Revisions or Build Lists

446 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Applicable Options Dialog Box

Design Rule Checks Dialog Box

To access: Press Space Bar and enter DRCs.
Used to run design rule checks against designs to identify errors.
Objects

Table 10-21. Design Rule Checks Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Build List Select this tab if you want to run checks against a build list. Select the
build list from the list at the top of the tab. Displayed only in Capital
Logic or Capital Design. Optional.
Integrator Design Select this tab if you want to run checks against a Capital Integrator
design. Select the design from the list at the top of the tab. Displayed
only in Capital Integrator or Capital Design. Optional.
Logic Design Select this tab if you want to run checks against a Capital Logic
design. Select the design from the list at the top of the tab. Displayed
only in Capital Logic or Capital Design. Optional.
Topology Design Select this tab if you want to run checks against a Capital Topology
design. Select the design from the list at the top of the tab. Displayed
only if Capital Topology is enabled in Capital Logic. Optional.
Harness Design Select this tab if you want to run checks against a Capital HarnessXC
design. Select the design from the list at the top of the tab. Displayed
only in Capital HarnessXC. Optional.
Function Design Select this tab if you want to run checks against a Capital Systems
Capture design. Select the design from the list at the top of the tab.
Displayed only in Capital Systems Capture or Capital Systems
Architect. Optional.
Function Build List Select this tab if you want to run checks against a function design
build list. Select the build list from the list at the top of the tab.
Displayed only in Capital Systems Capture or Capital Systems
Architect. Optional.
Platform Design Select this tab if you want to run checks against a platform design in
Capital Systems Architect. Select the design from the list at the top of
the tab. Displayed only in Capital Systems Architect. Optional.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 447

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Applicable Options Dialog Box

Table 10-21. Design Rule Checks Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Design Rule Checks Displays the checks that you can run and whether a check generates an
browser error ( ), a warning ( ) or an information message ( ) when it
identifies something. See “Design Rule Check Descriptions” on
page 84 for descriptions of checks.
Click a plus sign (+) to expand a section of the browser. Click a minus
sign (-) to collapse a section of the browser.
Select the checks that you want to run and click OK to run them.
Mandatory.

448 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Applicable Options Dialog Box

Details Dialog Box

To access: Select a component in the Part Selection Dialog Box and click View Part Details
( ).
Used to display the component details tabs for a component.
Objects
See Component Details in the Capital Library User Guide for more information about the
fields on the tabs.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 449

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Applicable Options Dialog Box

Edit Breakout/Spot Tape Details Dialog Box

To access: Click the Edit ellipsis (...) button underneath the Edit tab of the Edit Insulation
Codes window.
Used to create and edit the short cut code and attributes of breakout and spot tape from a list of
codes created for the object type in Capital Project. For further information see the Capital
Project User Guide.
Objects

Table 10-22. Edit Breakout/Spot Tape Details Contents

Field Description
Library Part Select the appropriate insulation library part number by
clicking the ellipsis (...) button. Optional.
Color Code Specifies the color of the breakout tape. Select a code from
the dropdown list of values available. Optional.
Material Code Specifies the material from which the breakout tape is made.
Select a code from the dropdown list of values available.
Optional.
Number Of Specifies the number of times the tape should be wrapped
Turns (Spot around the center of the junction. Optional.
Tape Only)
Thickness Specifies the thickness of the tape. This value is used when
calculating the extra diameter added to a bundle by the
application of a spot tape. Optional.
Turns At Specifies the number of times the tape should be wrapped
Breakout around the center of the junction. Optional.
(Breakout Tape
Only)
Turns On Specifies the number of times the tape should be wrapped
Branch around each bundle leaving the junction. Optional.
(Breakout Tape
Only)
Type Code Offers a list of component type codes, as maintained in
Capital Library, which can be used to filter the selection of
components displayed when searching for a tape using the
Part Selection Dialog. Optional.
Unmodified The unmodified length of the tape. Optional.
Length
Width Specifies the width of the tape. Optional.

450 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Applicable Options Dialog Box

Usage Notes
Click the OK button to save the breakout code information to the object type and close the
dialog.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 451

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Applicable Options Dialog Box

Edit Design Properties Dialog Box

To access: Click Properties on the Edit Design Dialog or click Properties on a New Design
Dialog. The ECO Tab lists the Engineering Change Orders that impact the design
Used to add, edit and delete properties for a design.
Objects

Table 10-23. Properties Tab

Field Description
Properties To add a property to the design, click the New button, enter
a Property Name in the New Property Dialog Box then
click OK. The new property is added to the list. A property
consists of the following fields:
• Name
A unique identifier for the property. Read-only.
• Value
The value assigned to the property. Optional.
• Type
The data type of the value. Mandatory. If you enter a
Value that is not supported by the selected Type, the
Value is displayed in red text and the OK button is
disabled. The following types are available:
• String - a mix of letters, number or special characters
• Integer - a whole number
• Float - a number including a decimal (floating) point

Table 10-24. Rules Tab

Field Description
Add Rule/ Allows you to set rules and constraints on the design. For
Constraint information how to set actual rules and constraints, see
“Assigning a Rule or Constraint to an Object or Design” on
page 219. Optional.

Table 10-25. Scopes Tab

Field Description
Available Displays a list of available scope codes that can be applied
to the design. You can select scopes in this list.

452 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Applicable Options Dialog Box

Table 10-25. Scopes Tab (cont.)

Field Description
Add Moves the selected scopes in the Available window to the
Selected window.
Add All Moves all scopes in the Available window to the Selected
window.
Remove Moves the selected scopes in the Selected window to the
Available window.
Remove All Moves all scopes in the Selected window to the Available
window.
Selected Displays the names of the scopes applied to the design.

Table 10-26. ECO Tab

Field Description
Category Displays the category of the engineering change order.
Read-only.
Name Displays the name of the engineering change order. Read-
only.
Short Displays the short description for the engineering change
Description order. Read-only.
Date Displays the date on which the engineering change order
Created was created. Read-only.
Date Displays the date on which the engineering change order
Updated was last updated. Read-only.
Release Displays the release level for the engineering change order.
Level Read-only.
Design Indicates the implementation status of the ECO on the
Status impacted design(s).
For Capital HarnessXC and Capital ModularXC only,
change the status to capture Design Snapshots. See “Capture
and Apply a Change Within an ECO” on page 128
If an ECO is associated with multiple designs, the
Completion value of the ECO only changes to Completed
when the Design Status of all associated designs has been
changed to Completed. Mandatory.
Details Click to opens the Engineering Change Orders Dialog Box
in read-only mode.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 453

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Applicable Options Dialog Box

Related Topics
Applying Scopes to a Project or Design

454 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Applicable Options Dialog Box

Edit Effectivity Dialog Box

To access: Click the ellipsis (...) button next to an Effectivity field on a dialog for creating or
editing a design. See Managing Effectivity in the Capital Project User Guide for an
overview of using effectivity.
Use this dialog to specify effectivity ranges for the design revision that is being edited.
Objects

Table 10-27. Edit Effectivity Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Effectivity Table Displays the effectivity ranges that have been specified
already for this design revision.
Start The start value for the effectivity range. See Valid Start
and End Values for Effectivity Ranges in the Capital
Project User Guide for guidance on valid values.
Mandatory.
End The end value for the effectivity range. See Valid Start
and End Values for Effectivity Ranges in the Capital
Project User Guide for guidance on valid values.
Mandatory.
Create new effectivity Adds a new row for an effectivity range to the Effectivity
range table.

Delete selected effectivity Deletes the selected row in the Effectivity table.
range
Revisions Lists the existing revisions of the design and the
effectivity ranges that have been specified for those
revisions. Read-only.
For example: if 1[1..10] is listed, this means that the
range 1 to 10 has been specified for revision 1 of this
design.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 455

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Applicable Options Dialog Box

Edit Graphical Attributes Dialog Box

To access: From an Edit Properties dialog box, click the Edit Attributes ( ) button to the right
of an attribute or property.
Use this dialog box to specify the graphical attributes of the attribute or property value when it
is displayed in a diagram.
Objects

Table 10-28. Edit Graphical Attributes Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Font Specifies the font used for the text.
Plain / Bold / Italic / Specifies whether the text is displayed bold and/or italic.
Bold/Italic
Number and unit of Specifies the size of the text.
measurement
Default / Foreground Specifies the color of the text. The selected color is previewed in the
/ Background / Colors block next to the dropdown list.
Note the following:
• Background
The same color used for the background of the diagram. The color
changes when the background color is toggled.
• Foreground
If the diagram background is white, the text is black, and vice
versa.
Opaque When the text and objects overlap in the diagram:
• If this is selected, object lines are not visible behind the text.
• If this is not selected, object lines are visible behind the text.
Rotation Rotates the text to change the angle at which it is displayed. By default
this is 0 which displays the text running left to right following the
horizontal axis: . Enter a different value manually or select a

value from the dropdown list, for example, 270 .

Auto flip If selected, the text flips automatically so that it is never displayed
upside down when it is rotated or flipped.
If not selected, a flip or rotation can result in the text being displayed
upside down.
Justification Where you want the text to be displayed in relation to the object.

456 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Applicable Options Dialog Box

Table 10-28. Edit Graphical Attributes Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Layout Specifies the layout of the text in relation to its bounding box in the
diagram:
• Clip text to bounding box
If selected, specifies that the text is clipped at the edge of its
bounding box.
• Shrink to fit
If selected, specifies that the font of the text reduces as necessary
so that the text fits in its bounding box.
• Allow text to overflow
If selected, specifies that the text ignores the edge of its bounding
box and flows out of it.
• Wrap text
Specifies whether the text wraps onto multiple lines when it
reaches the edge of the text bounding box (selected) or whether the
text ignores the bounding box and continues on one line
(unselected). When this is selected, if a word is too long to fit on a
single line, it is wrapped by character.
The Preview shows the behavior that you have selected.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 457

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Applicable Options Dialog Box

Table 10-28. Edit Graphical Attributes Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Number Format If the text is a numerical value, this specifies how the value is
formatted:
• Preview
Displays a preview of how numerical values will be represented on
the diagram according to the value entered in the Decimal Places
field. Read-only.
• Rounding
Specify the method the system should use for rounding the
numerical value. Available settings are:
• Default. The setting specified in Design Settings of your style
set is used.
• Nearest - the system should round up or down to the nearest
multiple of the rounding value.
• None (if selected all other number formatting options are
dimmed).
• Up - the system should round up to the nearest multiple of the
rounding value.
• Decimal Places
Specify the number of decimal places from 0 to 6. This value will
be displayed in the Preview field. If you specify Default, the
number of places value is inherited from the Design Settings of
your style set.
• Delimiter
Specify the delimiter to be used in place of a decimal point, if
required. This can either be Default (a decimal point) or From
Locale, where it is derived from the parameter set at the Design
Settings of your style set.

458 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Applicable Options Dialog Box

Edit Name Text Attributes Dialog Box

To access: From an Edit Properties dialog box, click the Edit Attributes ( ) button to the right
of a Name field, Short Description field or Option.
Use this dialog box to specify the graphical attributes of the object name, short description,
option expression or attribute value when it is displayed in a diagram.
Objects

Table 10-29. Edit Name Text Attributes Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Font Specifies the font used for the text.
Plain / Bold / Italic / Specifies whether the text is displayed bold and/or italic.
Bold/Italic
Number and unit of Specifies the size of the text.
measurement
Default / Foreground Specifies the color of the text. The selected color is previewed in the
/ Background / Colors block next to the dropdown list.
Note the following:
• Background
The same color used for the background of the diagram. The color
changes when the background color is toggled.
• Foreground
If the diagram background is white, the text is black, and vice
versa.
Opaque When the text and objects overlap in the diagram:
• If this is selected, object lines are not visible behind the text.
• If this is not selected, object lines are visible behind the text.
Rotation Rotates the text to change the angle at which it is displayed. By default
this is 0 which displays the text running left to right following the
horizontal axis: . Enter a different value manually or select a

value from the dropdown list, for example, 270 .

Auto flip If selected, the text flips automatically so that it is never displayed
upside down when it is rotated or flipped.
If not selected, a flip or rotation can result in the text being displayed
upside down.
Justification Where you want the text to be displayed in relation to the object.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 459

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Applicable Options Dialog Box

Table 10-29. Edit Name Text Attributes Dialog Box Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Layout Specifies the layout of the text in relation to its bounding box in the
diagram:
• Clip
If selected, specifies that the text is clipped at the edge of its
bounding box.
• Shrink to fit
If selected, specifies that the font of the text reduces as necessary
so that the text fits in its bounding box.
• Overflow
If selected, specifies that the text ignores the edge of its bounding
box and flows out of it.
• Wrap text
Specifies whether the text wraps onto multiple lines when it
reaches the edge of the text bounding box (selected) or whether the
text ignores the bounding box and continues on one line
(unselected). When this is selected, if a word is too long to fit on a
single line, it is wrapped by character.
The Preview shows the behavior that you have selected.

Related Topics
Specifying the Name Property of an Object
Editing the Display-details of the Object's Short Description

460 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Applicable Options Dialog Box

Edit Option Expression Dialog Box

To access: Click the ellipsis (...) button to the right of an Option or Option Expression field.
Used to assign one or more options to an object.
Objects

Table 10-30. Edit Option Expression Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Options All applicable options assigned to the design. To add an
option to the expression, double-click the option name.
Mandatory.
Operators The mathematical symbols available from which you can
construct an option expression. Optional.
To add an operator to the expression, double-click the
operator. The operators available are:
• && [and]
The component to which the option expression is
assigned appears on only those derivatives with both
options assigned.
• || [or]
The component to which the option expression is
assigned appears on those derivatives with either option
assigned.
• ! [not]
The component to which the option expression is
assigned appears on only those derivatives without the
option assigned.
• ( and )
An opening and closing parenthesis. Enclosing a subset
of an option expression in parentheses allows you to
construct more complex option expressions that include
precedence (the part of the expression in parentheses
must be evaluated separately before being evaluated as
part of the complete expression).
Expression Contains the complete expression constructed from the
options and operators available. You also have the option to
type an expression into this field instead of selecting from
the lists above. Mandatory.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 461

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Applicable Options Dialog Box

Generate Advanced Names Dialog Box

To access: When generating names for selected objects: Select the objects for which you want
to generate names, right-click on one of them and select Generate Selected Names.
Alternatively, select the objects, press Space Bar and enter Update Selected.
When generating names for all objects in a build list, design or diagram: With the appropriate
project open, press Space Bar and enter Update Selected.
Use this dialog box to generate names for selected objects or all objects in a build list/design/
diagram.
Objects

Table 10-31. Generate Advanced Names Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Scope tree Displayed only when generating names for all objects in a build list,
design or diagram.
Select the build list, design or diagram in which you want to generate
object names.
Enter Filter String In the field next to the Enter Filter String icon ( ), enter a series of
characters. A filter is applied to the Scope tree so that only designs
with names containing that series of characters are listed.
Click the Clear Filter String icon ( ) to clear the filter and view all
designs in the project.
Show all designs Click the dropdown list to filter the designs displayed in the Scope
Filter tree to those of a particular type, all designs in the project or all
designs in the currently active build list.

Replace Specify the types of existing object names that you want to replace
with newly generated names:
• Default Names - the names generated automatically when an
object is created.
• Generated Names - names that have been generated previously
using the advanced naming functionality. You may want to select
this if naming compositions and conditions have been updated in
Capital Project.
• Fixed Names - these have been defined in the Edit Properties
dialog for objects and have been set as fixed.

462 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Applicable Options Dialog Box

Table 10-31. Generate Advanced Names Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Reset Object Indices Select this if you want to replace the indices for the counters on the
objects. New indices start at the next number after the counters last
value.
For example:
If you replace the indices for three objects with the indices 1, 2 and 3,
the new indices will be 4, 5 and 6. If you replace the indices again,
they become 7, 8 and 9.
See the Usage Notes below about selecting both this and Reset
Counters.
Reset Counters Check this box if you want to reset the indices for the counters on the
objects to begin counting from 1.
For example:
If you reset a counter for three objects that currently have the indices
7, 8 and 9, the indices become 1, 2 and 3.
See the Usage Notes below about selecting both this and Reset Object
Indices.

Usage Notes
If you check both the Replace Object Indices box and the Reset Counters box, the indices on
the objects will start from 1.

If the Reset Counters box is checked and the Replace Object Indices box is not checked, the
indices on the selected objects do not change but the counter will start from 1 again when you
create new objects.

For example:

If you have three objects with the indices 4, 5 and 6, those indices will remain 4, 5 and 6.
However, when you create a new object that uses that counter, it will have the index value 1.
The next new object created after that will have the index value 2, and so on.

Related Topics
Generating Names for Selected Objects in a Diagram
Generating Names for all Objects in a Build List, Design or Diagram

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 463

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Applicable Options Dialog Box

Map Equivalent Devices Dialog Box

To access: Click the ellipsis (...) button next to the Device and Conductor Equivalent option
on the Compare Designs Dialog Box.
If you have selected the Device and Conductor Equivalent comparison type when comparing
designs, you must map devices in the first design to equivalent devices in the second design.
Objects

Table 10-32. Map Equivalent Devices Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Tables List the devices from the two design being compared. Click on the
title of any column to sort the table according to the contents of
that column.
The second design must contain equivalent devices for all of the
devices in the first design for mapping to occur. The second design
can contain devices that do not have equivalents in the first design
but not vice versa.
Associate Enabled only when valid devices for mapping are selected in each
table.
To map a device from one design to a device in the other, select
them in the tables and click Associate.
Assist Attempts to map devices automatically. It may be the case that it
cannot map all devices and you need to map some manually. When
you click the Assist button, the Suggestions field displays any
suggested mappings that the system has identified.
Disassociate Enabled only when devices mapped to each other are selected.
To unmap one device association, select the mapped device in
each table and click Disassociate.
Clear Clears all mappings.
Suggestions When you click the Assist button, this window displays any
suggested mappings that the system has identified.

Related Topics
Comparing Objects and Their Properties in Design Revisions or Build Lists

464 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Applicable Options Dialog Box

Name Selection Dialog Box

To access: From the Details panel on component maintenance dialogs: click the ellipsis (...)
button to the right of a Name field.
Used to select the name of an object from a list of names created for the object type in Capital
Project.
Objects

Table 10-33. Name Selection Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Find Enter a string to limit the listed names to those that start with
that string. Optional.
Filter on If you have assigned a library part to the object and usage
Usage definitions have been created for the library part, this
specifies whether the dialog displays all available names for
the object type (unselected) or just those names used in the
usage definitions by default (selected). Optional.
Name The name created in Capital Project. To select a name for an
object, click it and click OK. Read-only.
Description The description that is applied to the object with the name.
Read-only.
Short The description that is applied to the object with the name.
Description Read-only.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 465

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Applicable Options Dialog Box

New Property Dialog Box

To access: click the New button from property maintenance dialogs or tabs.
Used to enter a name for a component, design or project property.
Objects

Table 10-34. New Property Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Property Offers a list of every property configured for the project-
Name level object type information of the selected object type in
Capital Project. Either select a property from the dropdown
list or enter the name of a property to be created later.
Mandatory.

466 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Applicable Options Dialog Box

Part Selection Dialog Box

To access: when adding library parts via an Edit Properties dialog, Press Space Bar and enter
From Library in Capital Logic or an Edit dialog for an object in Capital HarnessXC.
You can also access Part Selection Dialog functionality from the Parts tab on the left of the
application. This tab can be dragged from its location to display it as a separate floating
dialog. Close the dialog to return it to the original tab location. See the Parts Browser topic
in the User Guide for the application that you are using.
• Capital HarnessXC Parts Browser
• Capital Integrator Parts Browser
• Capital Logic Parts Browser
Used to select a library part and assign its definition to an object in a design.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 467

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Applicable Options Dialog Box

Objects

Table 10-35. Part Selection Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Search By Use the dropdown list to specify whether you want to search for an
internal, customer or supplier part number and enter a partial or full
part number in the field next to that dropdown list. Mandatory.
As you type a part number, a dropdown list suggests part numbers that
match the entered string. If ... is displayed at the bottom of the list, this
indicates that more matching part numbers are available. When the
entry ... is selected, a component search with the currently entered part
number string combined with other defined search criteria is
performed.
You can use the following characters to restrict the part numbers
returned in the search results:
• * (star symbol)
Represents any number of characters when used in a string. For
example, entering C-00*E represents values that start C-00,
followed at any position by an E. Example results are C-002-
BLUE, C-003-GREEN, C-004-GREY, C-005-RED.
• ? (question mark character)
Represents any single character when used in a string. For
example, entering A??X (an A, two question marks and an X) into
a field represents only 4-character values that have an A as their
first character and an X as their fourth character. Example results
are ABCX, A11X, ABCXAB.
• Single letter
Entering a single letter into the field, returns only part numbers
that begin with that letter. For example, typing the character C into
a box will list only that box's records that begin with C - regardless
of their length.
Search parts using Displays parts matching the criteria entered in the Search By and
criteria specified Filter Table in the Parts Table.

468 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Applicable Options Dialog Box

Table 10-35. Part Selection Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Filter Table Enables you to enter advanced search criteria. To enter a criteria, click
Add restriction ( ) to add a new row to the table. For that row,
select an Attribute Name, an Operator and a Value from the
dropdown lists in the columns. To remove a criteria, select that row
and click Remove restriction(s) ( ). To remove all criteria, click
Revert to initial criteria ( ). These criteria are applied when you
click Search parts using criteria specified.
If you are using the Parts tab, the table is not displayed until you add
a criteria.
If you are editing the part number for a shared device or connector,
two filters for No. Cavities/Pins are displayed. The first filter cannot
be edited and the value indicates the number of pins that have been
used in diagrams. The second filter indicates the current shared pin
count (the sum of used and unused shared pins on the device). You
can edit this second filter and this allows you to increase or decrease
the number of pins on the shared object.
Preferred If you have multiple customer or supplier part numbers for the
component, this specifies whether the part number is the preferred part
number (selected) or not (unselected). Mandatory.
Latest With this option selected, any parts belonging to a revision history in
which they are not the latest revision will not be returned by a search.
Mandatory.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 469

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Applicable Options Dialog Box

Table 10-35. Part Selection Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Parts Table Displays the results of a search for part numbers when you click
Search parts using criteria specified. To select a part number for
assigning to an object, click on the library part in the table and click
Insert.
If you want to view the details for the part, click View part details
( ) to display the Select Details Dialog Box. When using the Parts
tab, you can right-click the part and select View Details.
If the selected part has details that require you to make a choice, the
Set details to be selected ( ) button is enabled. Click this to display
the Select Details dialog box where you select the details that you
want to apply. When using the Parts tab, you can right-click the part
and select Select Details.
If you want to view where the selected part has been used elsewhere,
click the View Project Usages ( ) button to display the Project
Usages Dialog Box that lists the projects and designs where it has
been used.
When using the Parts tab, you can right-click on part numbers for
certain component types and add a component to a harness with that
part number. See the Parts Browser topic in the User Guide for the
application that you are using.
Insert Click this to assign the part number that is selected in the Parts table to
the object that you are editing.

470 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Applicable Options Dialog Box

Project Usages Dialog Box

To access: Click the View Project Usages ( ) button on the Part Selection Dialog Box or on
the Parts Browser (Parts tab at the bottom left of the application) with a part selected.
Used to view where a component part has been used in projects. This dialog contains a table
with columns that can be filtered by selecting an item from the dropdown list below the column
header
Objects

Table 10-36. Project Usages Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Project The project in which the component is used.
Design The design in which the component is used.
Design The type of design in which the component is used.
Type
Release The release level of the design in which the component is
Level used.
Object The name of the object instance where the component is
Name used.
Object Type The type of object where the component is used.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 471

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Applicable Options Dialog Box

Select by Attribute/Property Dialog Box

To access: Press Space Bar and enter Select By Attribute/Property.
Used to search for an object in a diagram by using a value for an attribute or property.
Objects

Table 10-37. Select by Attribute/Property Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Attribute/Property Enter the name of the attribute or property
Value Enter the value to search for. Regular Expression wildcard search
characters can be used if the Regular Expression check-box is
selected.
Regular Expression Select this if the string in the Value field contains Regular
Expression wildcard search characters. Leave un-selected if the
string is an exact value that must be matched. See “Finding and
Selecting Objects by Attribute or Property” on page 160 for
examples of common Regular Expression wildcards.

472 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Applicable Options Dialog Box

Select By Name Dialog Box

To access: Press Space Bar and enter Select By Name.
Used to search for an object in a diagram by using its name.
Objects

Table 10-38. Select by Name Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Name Enter the name for which you want to search. The Regular
Expression option specifies whether the value in this field is treated
as a complete name that must be matched or as a partial string.
Mandatory.
Regular Expression Select this if the string in the Name field contains Regular
Expression wildcard search characters. Leave un-selected if the string
is an exact value that must be matched. See “Finding and Selecting
Objects by Name” on page 159 for examples of common Regular
Expression wildcards.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 473

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Applicable Options Dialog Box

Select Color Dialog Box

To access: Press Space Bar and enter Selection Color, or when editing a field that requires a
color to be selected.
Used to select a color.
Objects
Provides three methods (on separate tabs) of selecting a color.
Related Topics
Specifying the Highlight Color of Selected Objects in a Diagram

474 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Applicable Options Dialog Box

Details Dialog Box

To access: Select a component in the Part Selection Dialog Box and click the View Part Details
( ). The button is also available on Parts tab at bottom left of application window.
Used to display the component details tabs for a component.
Objects
See Component Details in the Capital Library User Guide for more information about the
fields on the tabs.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 475

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Applicable Options Dialog Box

Select Details Dialog Box

To access: select a component in the Part Selection Dialog Box and clicking Set details to be
selected ( ). The button is also available on Parts tab at bottom left of application window.
Used to choose what details you want to apply to the instance of the part currently selected in
the Part Selection Dialog Box or Parts Tab, where the part has multiple choices to choose from
like multiple customer or supplier part numbers.
Objects
The details to be chosen are displayed in tables, select the rows for the settings that you want to
apply.

476 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Graphics Related Dialogs

Graphics Related Dialogs

This section offers a description of various dialogs used for editing graphics. For each dialog, all
fields are listed, along with a full description of the field’s function.
Edit Border Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Add Text Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Image Selection Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Symbol Selection Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Update Symbol - Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Edit Properties - Propertied Graphic Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Fill Pattern Selection Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 477

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Edit Border Dialog Box

Edit Border Dialog Box

To access: Press Space Bar and enter Border.
Used to select a border created in Capital Symbol that you want to add to a diagram.
Objects

Table 10-39. Edit Border Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Border Selection Browse through the border libraries in the tree and select the border to
add to the diagram. Mandatory.
Properties Displays the properties that have been specified for the selected
border in Capital Symbol. If a property is editable, you can edit its
value in the Value column. Optional.

Usage Notes
If a placeholder was used as the value for a property in Capital Symbol, you cannot edit it here.
See Adding Information Placeholders to a Border in the Capital Symbol User Guide for more
information.

478 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Add Text Dialog Box

Add Text Dialog Box

To access: Press Space Bar and enter Text, and then create a text frame boundary box on the
diagram. See “Adding Text Frames to a Diagram” on page 181
Used to specify text and its format in a text frame.
Objects

Table 10-40. Add Text Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Large window at top Enter the text. Mandatory.
of dialog
Font Select the font type for the text and whether the text is plain, bold,
italic or bold/italic. Mandatory.
Height Specify the height of the text and select the unit of measurement from
the dropdown list. Mandatory.
Color To specify the color of the text, select a color from the dropdown list;
it is previewed in the window to the right of the field. Mandatory.
As well as color names, the list contains the following options:
• Default
The default color used for text by the system.
• Background
The same color used for the background of the diagram. The color
changes when the background color is toggled.
• Foreground
If the diagram background is white, the text is black, and vice
versa.
• Manual
The Choose Text Color dialog is displayed, where you can select
a color.
Opaque Select whether object lines are visible behind the text frame boundary
box, (un-selected), or are not visible behind the text frame boundary
box, (selected). Mandatory.
Rotation By default this is 0 for the text to run horizontally (left to right). Enter
a different value manually or select a value from the dropdown list, for
example, 270 for the text to run vertically (bottom to top). Mandatory.
Auto Flip If selected, the text flips automatically so that it is never displayed
upside down when it is rotated or flipped. If not selected, a flip or
rotation can result in the text being displayed upside down.
Justification Specify the position of the text within the text frame. Mandatory.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 479

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Add Text Dialog Box

Table 10-40. Add Text Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Layout The following set of options are available to control the layout of the
text within its frame.
• Clip Text to Bounding Box
If selected, specifies that the text is clipped at the edge of its
bounding box.
• Shrink to Fit
If selected, specifies that the font of the text reduces as necessary
so that the text fits in its bounding box.
• Allow Text to Overflow
If selected, specifies that the text ignores the edge of its bounding
box and flows out of it.
• Wrap text
Specifies whether the text wraps onto multiple lines when it
reaches the edge of the text bounding box (selected) or whether the
text ignores the bounding box and continues on one line
(unselected). When this is selected, if a word is too long to fit on a
single line, it is wrapped by character. Mandatory.
Preview Displays an preview of an example text string formatted using the
currently selected Layout settings. Mandatory.

480 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Image Selection Dialog Box

Image Selection Dialog Box

To access: Press Space Bar and enter Image.
Used to navigate to and select an image file containing a picture to be added to a diagram.
Objects

Table 10-41. Image Selection Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Look in Defaults to your central image repository folder. Mandatory.
Window listing files Displays the image files in your Images folder (as specified in the
system preferences for Paths in Capital Project). Select the image file
to be added to the diagram. The image is previewed to the right of this
window. Only files and sub-folders from the Images folder area
available for selection. You cannot navigate to another folder location.
Mandatory.
Link to Image / Specify how the image is added. See “Link or Embed Images” on
Embed Image page 183.These options do not display if you are adding an image to
non-comment symbol in Capital Symbol. In that case the image is
added by default using the Link to Image method. Mandatory.
File name Displays the name of the selected image file.
Files of type Specify what types of file you want to display in the window listing
files. Mandatory.

Related Topics
Link or Embed Images

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 481

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Symbol Selection Dialog Box

Symbol Selection Dialog Box

To access: Press Space Bar and enter Comment Symbol.
Used to navigate to a symbol in a symbol library and to select the symbol.
Objects

Table 10-42. Symbol Selection Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Select A Library Set A drop-down selector displays available Library sets. A library set is a
group of symbols available to a particular design, see Capital Styling
User Guide for information on creating library sets.
Symbol Selection In the tree, navigate to a symbol and select it. The selected symbol is
displayed in the window to the right of the tree.

482 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Update Symbol - Options Dialog Box

Update Symbol - Options Dialog Box

To access: Right-click on a symbol on the diagram and select Update Symbol.
Used to control the source of symbol properties and/or attributes when updating a symbol.
Objects

Table 10-43. Update Symbol - Options Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Preserve Diagram Pin Select this if you want the pins on the symbol instance to remain
Position where they are in the diagram already. Optional. Not available in
Capital HarnessXC.
Remove Properties With this option selected, any properties applied to the comment
not on Symbol symbol on the design are removed during the update if they do not
exist in the original symbol definition. Optional.
Copy Attribute/ With this option selected, where properties with matching names, but
Property Values from different values, exist on both the symbol instance and the original
Symbol symbol definition, the instance values are updated with the values
from the original symbol. Optional.
Preserve Attribute Select this if you want to maintain the visibility of the object attributes
Text on the diagram. If you do not select this, they will no longer be
displayed. Optional. Not available in Capital HarnessXC.
Preserve Pin Names Select this if you want to maintain any pin names that have been
changed manually on the diagram. If you do not select this, they will
be replaced with pin names from the symbol library. Optional. Not
available in Capital HarnessXC.
Update all xx This checkbox displays if the system has identified other instances of
instances of this the selected comment symbol on the diagram. xx denotes the number
symbol on the of instances found. Select the checkbox to update all instances at the
diagram. same time. Optional.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 483

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Edit Properties - Propertied Graphic Dialog Box

Edit Properties - Propertied Graphic Dialog Box

To access: Select the graphical shape and either:
• Press Space Bar and enter Properties
• Right-click on the selected entity and select Properties
• Double-click on the graphical shape
Used to:
• add and edit properties to a graphical shape
• edit the appearance of a graphical shape
• change the picture displayed in an image frame
Handles operations related to properties.
Objects

Table 10-44. Edit Properties - Propertied Graphic Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Properties To add a property to the graphical shape, click the New button, enter a
Property Name in the New Property Dialog Box then click OK. The
new property is added to the list. A property consists of the following
fields:
• Name
A unique identifier for the property. Read-only.
• Value
The value assigned to the property. Optional.
• Type
The data type of the value. Mandatory. If you enter a Value that is
not supported by the selected Type, the Value is displayed in red
text and the OK button is disabled. The following types are
available:
• String - a mix of letters, number or special characters
• Integer - a whole number
• Float - a number including a decimal (floating) point
To delete a property from the list, select it and click the Delete button,
then click OK to confirm the deletion.
Image File Click on the ellipsis (...) to display the Image Selection Dialog Box
where you select the image that you want to display in the image
frame. Displayed only for a linked image. See “Link or Embed
Images” on page 183. Mandatory.

484 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Edit Properties - Propertied Graphic Dialog Box

Table 10-44. Edit Properties - Propertied Graphic Dialog Box Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Graphics Tab
Primary Color Select a color from the dropdown list; it is previewed in the window to
the right of the field. As well as color names, the list contains the
following options:
• Default
The default color used for the object by the system.
• Background
The same color used for the background of the diagram. The color
changes when the background color is toggled.
• Foreground
If the diagram background is white, the object is black, and vice
versa.
• Manual
The Choose Object Color dialog is displayed, where you can
select a color.
Thickness Specify the thickness of the lines of the graphical shape. Mandatory.
To use the default thickness, select Default from the dropdown list.
To use a different thickness, select Override from the first dropdown
list and select the type of thickness from the final dropdown list:
• Logical
These thicknesses do not have a physical unit of measurement.
They provide a logical progression of thickness with a default of 1.
A line with thickness 2 is displayed twice as thick as a line with
thickness 1, and so on. When you zoom in or out of a diagram, the
line thickness does not appear any different.
You select the thickness from the middle dropdown list.
• Physical (unit of measurement)
The physical unit of measurement that has been specified as the
Unit in the style set applied to the diagram. The line thickness is
displayed in relation to the grid size of a diagram. When you zoom
in or out of a diagram, the line grows or shrinks to stay in scale
with the grid.
When you select a unit, the middle dropdown list changes to a free
text field where you specify the thickness. The value can be any
floating-point number up to three decimal places.
See “Physical Line Thickness” on page 258 for a definition and
links to related task flows.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 485

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Edit Properties - Propertied Graphic Dialog Box

Table 10-44. Edit Properties - Propertied Graphic Dialog Box Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Line Style Specify the style of the lines of the graphical shape. Mandatory. To
use the default style, select Default from the dropdown list.
To use a different style, select Override from the dropdown list and
select the style from the second dropdown list that is displayed.
Fill Pattern Selection Specify the fill pattern of the graphical shape. To use the default fill
pattern, select Default from the dropdown list. To use a different fill
pattern, select Override from the dropdown list and click Change to
display the Fill Pattern Selection Dialog Box where you select a fill
pattern. Mandatory

Usage Notes
Displayed only for a graphical shape that encloses space.

486 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Fill Pattern Selection Dialog Box

Fill Pattern Selection Dialog Box

To access: clicking Default or Change when overriding the Fill Pattern Selection in the Edit
Properties: Propertied Graphic Dialog.
Used to select a fill pattern for a graphical shape on a diagram.
Objects

Table 10-45. Fill Pattern Selection Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Fill Patterns Select the fill pattern.
Foreground Specify the foreground color for the pattern. As well as color
Color names, the list contains the following options:
• Background
The same color used for the background of the diagram.
The color changes when the background color is toggled.
• Foreground
If the diagram background is white, the object is black,
and vice versa.
• Manual
The Choose Object Color dialog is displayed, where
you can select a color.
Background Specify the background color for the pattern. Click on the
Color square to display the Choose Object Color Dialog where
you specify a color. As well as color names, the list contains
the following options:
• Background
The same color used for the background of the diagram.
The color changes when the background color is toggled.
• Foreground
If the diagram background is white, the object is black,
and vice versa.
• Manual
The Choose Object Color dialog is displayed, where
you can select a color.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 487

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Layout Related Dialogs

Layout Related Dialogs

This section details various dialogs used for editing designs and objects. For each dialog, all
fields are listed, along with a full description of the field’s function.
Set Grid Defaults Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Split Table Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490

488 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Set Grid Defaults Dialog Box

Set Grid Defaults Dialog Box

To access: Press Space Bar and enter Set Grid Defaults.
Used to specify how grid points are displayed on a diagram.
Objects

Table 10-46. Set Grid Defaults Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Show Grid Specifies whether grid points are displayed on the diagram. Even if you
uncheck this box so that the grid points are not displayed, they still exist
and objects with pins snap to them. Optional.
Major Grid Specifies at which interval larger grid points are displayed. For example, a
Interval value of 5 would display a larger grid point for every 5th grid point.
Mandatory.
Maximum Drawn Specifies the maximum number of grid points that can be displayed in any
Points one row or column when you zoom out of the diagram. When the
specified number of grid points is exceeded, the grid is no longer
displayed. Mandatory.
Drawing Grid Specifies how many invisible grid points are between the visible grid
points. You specify this as a percentage of the print scale. For example, if
you specify 50, there is one invisible drawing grid point halfway between
each visible grid point. Drawing objects without pins snap to these
invisible grid points. Optional.
Non-resizable Specifies whether the symbol can (unselected) or cannot (selected) be
resized when placed in a diagram. Mandatory, displayed only when
editing a comment symbol in Capital Symbol.
Use Physical Specifies whether you want to use a physical scale as specified by Grid
Scale Size for a comment symbol when placing it in diagrams. If not selected, a
comment symbol will be scaled based on pin grid points. Mandatory,
displayed only when editing a comment symbol in Capital Symbol.
Grid Size Specifies the physical distance between the visible grid points. A
comment symbol uses this physical scale and retains its physical size
when placed in a diagram regardless of the diagram’s pin grid settings.
Displayed only when editing a comment symbol in Capital Symbol,
disabled if Use Physical Scale is not selected.

Usage Notes
The co-ordinates displayed at the bottom right of the Capital Symbol application use the units
specified for Grid Size.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 489

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Split Table Dialog Box

Split Table Dialog Box

To access: Select Override Styling > Split Table from the context menu of the selected table.
Used to control the way in which large tables are broken down into smaller number of columns
or rows, allowing more flexible placement of the table content.
Objects

Table 10-47. Split Table Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Single Instance Click the check box to disable splitting and force the table to remain
as a single instance. All options are disabled. Clear the check box to
enable the splitting of tables to which this style is applied, and the
options for configuring splitting. Choose from the following:
Split After • Rows
Selecting this option will result in the table being split beneath the
number of rows specified in the Count field.
• Columns
Selecting this option will result in the table being split to the right
of the number of columns specified in the Count field.
• Count
Specifies the number of rows or columns (as selected, above) after
which the table will be split. Mandatory.

490 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Split Table Dialog Box

Table 10-47. Split Table Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Layout These options control how each subset of split table rows or columns
will be placed relative to the initial table block. The following options
are available:
• Fused
Only available when a table is split by Rows, this option results in
subsequent blocks of rows being abutted to the right of the
previous table block.
• Horizontal
This option places subsequent table blocks to the right of the
previous block, separated by the distance specified in the Offset
field, below.
• Vertical
This option places subsequent table blocks beneath the previous
block, separated by the distance specified in the Offset field,
below.
• Offset
Specifies the distance at which subsequent table blocks should be
placed relative to the previous block. The units in which this value
is specified are set using the Unit option, and are displayed to the
right of the field. Mandatory.

Related Topics
Manual Table Splitting

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 491

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Miscellaneous Dialogs

Miscellaneous Dialogs
This section offers a description of various miscellaneous dialogs. For each dialog, all fields are
listed, along with a full description of the field’s function.
Edit Diagram Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
New Property Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Plugins Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
Plugin Details Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
Batch Translate Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
Edit Capital Configuration Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
Release Designs Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
Engineering Change Orders Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Engineering Change Orders Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Change Manager Apply ECO Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
Options (Apply ECO) Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
Change Manager Preview ECO Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517

492 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Edit Diagram Properties Dialog Box

Edit Diagram Properties Dialog Box

To access: Click the Properties button next to the Diagram Details - Name field on a New
Design dialog box.
Used to specify user-defined properties for a new diagram.

Objects

Object Description
Properties To add a property tjo the design, click the New button,
enter a property name in the New Property dialog box, then
click OK. The new property is added to the list. A property
consists of the following fields:
• Name
A unique identifier for the property. Read-only.
• Value
The value assigned to the property. Optional.
• Type
The data type of the value. Mandatory. If you enter a
Value that is not supported by the selected Type, the
Value is displayed in red text and the OK button is
disabled. The following types are available:
• String - a mix of letters, number or special characters
• Integer - a whole number
• Float - a number including a decimal (floating) point

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 493

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
New Property Dialog Box

New Property Dialog Box

To access: Click the New button on the Properties tab of a dialog for editing an object.
Used to specify the name of a new property on an object.
Objects

Table 10-48. New Property Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Property Specify the name for the property.
Name

494 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Plugins Dialog Box

Plugins Dialog Box

To access: Press Space Bar and enter Plugins.
Used to view the details of any extensibility plugins that you have installed, to reload
extensibility plugins and to select an extensibility plugin when specifying one in a field.
Objects

Table 10-49. Plugins Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Available Plugins Lists the details for the extensibility plugins that you have installed.
• Name
The name of the plugin. Read-only.
• Version
The version of the plugin. Read-only.
• Type
The type of plugin (for example, Constraint or DRC). Read-only.
• Language
The language of the plugin, either Java or Script. Read-only.
• Path
The absolute path of the parent folder for the script plug-in or the
absolute path of the JAR file for a Java plugin). Read-only.
• File
The file name for a script or the class name for Java plugin. Read-
only.
Details Click this to open the Plugin Details Dialog Box, where you can view
the plugin details, description and the implemented plugin interfaces
for the currently selected plugin. Optional.
Reload All Click this to reload the installed extensibility plugins if you have
changed a plugin and do not want to restart the application in which
you are working. Optional.
OK Click this to exit the dialog after selecting an extensibility plugin.
Optional.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 495

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Plugin Details Dialog Box

Plugin Details Dialog Box

To access: Select a plugin and click Details on the Plugins Dialog.
Used to view the details of any extensibility plugins that you have installed and to reload
extensibility plugins.
Objects

Table 10-50. Plugin Details Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Name The name of the plugin. Read-only.
Version The version of the plugin. Read-only.
Type The type of plugin (for example, Constraint or DRC). Read-
only.
Language The language of the plugin, either Java or Script. Read-only.
Path The absolute path of the parent folder for the script plug-in
or the absolute path of the JAR file for a Java plugin). Read-
only.
File The file name for a script or the class name for Java plugin.
Read-only.
URL Either the URL value for the Script plug-in, or the Java
plugin. Read-only.
Description A description of the plugin. Read-only.
Classpath The absolute paths to the Java plugin classes. Read-only.
Implemented A list of the plugin interfaces. Read-only.
plugin interfaces

496 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Batch Translate Dialog Box

Batch Translate Dialog Box

To access: In a design application, press Space Bar and enter Translation.
Use this dialog to perform a batch conversion of free text strings that exactly match existing
translations for the currently active language into translation strings. For example, text strings
with a gray background that change when the active language changes.
Objects

Table 10-51. Batch Translate Dialog Contents

Field Description
Scope tree Displays all of the designs and diagrams in the currently
open project. Select the designs and diagrams in which you
want to perform the Batch Translate action.
Enter Filter String In the field next to the Enter Filter String icon ( ), enter a
series of characters. A filter is applied to the Scope tree so
that only designs with names containing that series of
characters are listed.
Click the Clear Filter String icon ( ) to clear the filter and
view all designs in the project.
Show all designs Filter Click the dropdown list to filter the designs displayed in the
Scope tree window to those of a particular type, all designs in
the project or all designs in the currently active build list.

Related Topics
Converting Free Text Strings into Translations

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 497

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Edit Capital Configuration Dialog Box

Edit Capital Configuration Dialog Box

To access: Click the Configuration option from the Support section of the Capital Launcher.
Used to specify the maximum amount of physical memory (on a client computer) that each
Capital application is permitted to use during their operation. Also used to enable some
applications as detailed below.
Objects

Table 10-52. Edit Capital Configuration Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Application The name of the Capital application. Read-only.
Name
Memory Specifies the maximum amount of physical memory (in
Allocation megabytes) that the application can use. Select either 128,
(MB) 256, 512, 768, 1024, 1280 or 1536 from the dropdown
menu. By default, this is 512 MB. Alternatively, manually
enter another value. Mandatory.
Enable Select this to enable Capital Insight functionality when
Insight using Capital Insight as an add-on application to Capital
Integrator, Capital Topology, Capital HarnessXC or Capital
ModularXC. Note that you must have a valid license for this
functionality.
Enable Select this to enable Capital Topology functionality when
Topology using Capital Topology as an add-on application to Capital
Design Logic. Note that you must have a valid license for this
functionality.
Enable Select this to enable Capital Level Manager - Product
Product Planner functionality when using Capital Level Manager as
Planner an add-on application. Note that you must have a valid
license for this functionality.
Enable Select this to enable Capital Level Manager - Harness Level
Harness Optimization functionality when using Capital Level
Optimizatio Manager as an add-on application. Note that you must have
n a valid license for this functionality.

498 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Release Designs Dialog Box

Release Designs Dialog Box

To access: In a design application, press Space Bar and enter Release.
Used to select designs that you want to release and to specify settings for the release process.
Objects

Table 10-53. Release Designs Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Designs browser Displays the designs available for editing from the open project
in the design application that you are using. Select the designs
that you want to release.
In Capital HarnessXC, you can right-click a composite design
and select Select Child Designs to select all of its derivative
designs.
In Capital ModularXC, you can right-click a parent design and
select Select Child Designs to select all of its child designs.
Enter Filter String ( ) / In the field next to the Enter Filter String icon ( ), enter a
Clear Filter String ( ) series of characters. A filter is applied to the Designs browser
so that only designs with names containing that series of
characters are listed.
Click the Clear Filter String icon ( ) to clear the filter and
view all available designs again.
Show designs in active build Displayed only in Capital Logic when Capital Topology is
list / Show only Logic enabled or when a build list is active.
Designs / Show only Filters the Designs browser so that only designs in the active
Topology Designs build list, only Capital Logic designs or only Capital Topology
designs are displayed.

Design rule checks browser Displays the design rule checks that will be run on the designs
when you click OK.
These are specified in the Project Preferences for an
application (the appropriate preferences are displayed when
you select the Checks node for an application in the Project
Preferences Dialog Box).
Release Level Lists the release levels of type Released that are available.
Select the release level with which you want to release the
designs.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 499

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Release Designs Dialog Box

Table 10-53. Release Designs Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Annotate results If a diagram has a border with the property
CHECK_RESULTS and you check this box, the diagram will
be annotated to show that the design has been verified after a
successful run of the design rule checks. The annotation
includes the date and the ID of the user who ran the checks. See
Creating a Border in the Capital Symbol User Guide for further
information about creating a border to add to diagrams.
If the checks find an error and are therefore unsuccessful, the
diagram will not be annotated and any pre-existing annotation
in the value of the border's CHECK_RESULTS property is
deleted.
Treat warnings as errors If this box is not checked, the system considers a design rule
check unsuccessful if it has a severity level of error and finds a
problem.
If you check this box, the system treats any checks with a
severity level of warning like checks with a severity level of
error. That means, a design rule check is unsuccessful if it has a
severity level of error or warning and finds a problem.

Related Topics
Releasing Designs with Enforced Design Rule Checks

500 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Engineering Change Orders Dialog Box

Engineering Change Orders Dialog Box

To access: In a design application,
• Press Space Bar and enter Engineering Change Order.
or
• Select More, from the popup menu displayed from the Name column in the Engineering
Change Orders Tab.
The dialog box displays in read-only mode when accessed by:
• Clicking the button on the Assigned ECOs panel of The Build lists Dialog Box

• Clicking the “Details” button on ECO Tab of the Edit Design Properties Dialog Box
Use this dialog box to create, edit, import/export and delete Engineering Change Orders
(ECOs).
Objects

Table 10-54. Engineering Change Orders Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Category Window Lists the ECO categories and the individual ECOs that belong
to those categories. Click the Add New Engineering Change
Order Category ( ) button to create a new category.
To add a new ECO under a category, click by that category
name.
To delete an ECO from a category, select it and click .
To edit a category or ECO name, double-click it. An ECO
name must be unique within a project.
Empty categories are deleted from the list when the dialog
box is closed.
You can drag and drop an ECO from one category to another.
If you hold your mouse cursor over an ECO name, a tooltip
displays information about who created it, when it was
created and who has modified it.
<ECO name> panel This section displays the details for the ECO selected in the
Category window.
Short Description Enter a line of descriptive text to provide more information
about the ECO. Optional.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 501

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Engineering Change Orders Dialog Box

Table 10-54. Engineering Change Orders Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Release Level The release level for the ECO. Note that this does not refer to
the design release level assigned to the impacted designs.
Select the release level for the ECO from the drop-down list.
The release levels that you can assign depend on the
permissions that have been set for your user account in
Capital User. See the Capital User help system for more
information about setting permissions for a user account.
If an ECO is associated with multiple designs, this Release
Level value of the ECO can only be changed to Released
when the Completion Status of all associated designs in the
ECO have been changed to Completed. Mandatory.
Description This is a free-text field into which you can enter additional
comments or notes relevant to this design. Optional.
Properties Enables you to add properties to the ECO.
To add a property, click ; the New Property dialog box is
displayed where you specify a name for it. For the property,
specify the value and the data type of the value. If you enter a
value that is not supported by the selected Type, the Value is
displayed in red text and the OK button is disabled. The
following types are available:
• String - a mix of letters, number or special characters
• Integer - a whole number
• Float - a number including a decimal (floating) point
To remove a property, select it and click .
Notes Notes about what changed during this ECO. Editable only if
the Release Level is set to Released.

502 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Engineering Change Orders Dialog Box

Table 10-54. Engineering Change Orders Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Impacted Designs This table lists the ECO Impacted Designs (design revisions)
associated with the ECO.
A row in italics indicates that it has been imported (see “ECO
Import and Export” on page 147).
• ( ) - Click to open the Design Revision - Build List
Selection Dialog Box, and select a design revision to
associate with the ECO.
• ( ) - Click to dis-associate the selected design revision
and any images from the ECO.
• ( ) Click to update the selected impacted design to its
latest revision. Enabled only when the selected design is
not the latest revision.
• - Click to import an ECO impacted design. See “ECO
Import and Export” on page 147.
• - Click to export the currently selected ECO
impacted design. Enabled only where the selected record
has a Completion Status of “Completed - Changes
Captured”. See “ECO Import and Export” on page 147.
• - Click to delete all ECO recorded capture information
and any images associated with selected row.
Latest A tick ( ) in this column indicates that this is the latest
revision of the design.
Full Name The full name of the associated design.
Release Level The release level of the associated design.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 503

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Engineering Change Orders Dialog Box

Table 10-54. Engineering Change Orders Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Completion Status Indicates the implementation status of the ECO on the
impacted design(s). Read-only.
For Capital HarnessXC and Capital ModularXC only:
• Not Started - Action has not started implementing the
ECO.
• In Progress - Action has started to implement the ECO
but you have chosen not to create a recording baseline.
• In Progress (Capturing Changes) - Action has started to
record the ECO and the system has created a baseline.
• Completed - ECO implementation action has finished.
No recording has been made.
• Completed (Changes Captured) - Action has finished
implementing the ECO and a recording has been captured.
For all tools:
• Not Started - Action has not started implementing the
ECO.
• In Progress - Action has started implementing the ECO.
• Completed - Action has finished implementing the ECO.
The status values are changed in:
• The Design Status column on the ECO Tab of the Edit
Design Properties Dialog Box.
• The Completion menu setting in the Name column of the
Engineering Change Orders Tab.

504 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Engineering Change Orders Dialog Box

Table 10-54. Engineering Change Orders Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Images This panel displays any image files you have added to help
illustrate the ECO.
Image files are added using the following buttons:
• - Paste from Clipboard. This adds an image file to the
panel, created from the current content of the clipboard.
The button is disabled when the clipboard is empty.
• - Take a screenshot. This takes a screenshot of
current visible area of the active diagram canvas and adds
it as an image file to the panel. The button is disabled if a
diagram is not open.
• - Add from file. This opens a file browser where you
can select a valid PNG, JPG or JPEG file to add to the
panel.
• - Select an image file from the panel and click this
button to remove it.
The buttons are disabled when nothing is selected in the
Impacted Designs panel and when the dialog box displays in
read-only mode.
Image Viewer Double-click a file in the Images panel to open it in the Image
Viewer.
- Click this button to open a file browser and select a
location to save the currently open image in PNG format.
- Click this button to copy the currently open image to
the clipboard.

Related Topics
Capture and Apply a Change Within an ECO
Creating an Engineering Change Order
Engineering Change Orders Tab
Change Manager Apply ECO Dialog Box
Options (Apply ECO) Dialog Box
Apply Change Output Window
Change Manager Preview ECO Dialog Box
Applicable Changes Dialog Box
Simulate Change Output Window

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 505

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Engineering Change Orders Tab

Engineering Change Orders Tab

To access: Press Space Bar and enter ECOs in any of the design tools.
The Engineering Change Orders Tab displays in the output window at the bottom right hand
side of the design tool application.
• If there is a diagram currently open, the output window displays only the ECOs that are
associated with the diagram. The Name ellipsis button is enabled.
• If there is no diagram currently open, the output window displays all the ECOs that are
associated with the project. The Name ellipsis button is not enabled.
Fill in the fields as shown in the table.
Objects

Table 10-55. Engineering Change Orders Output Window

Field Description
Name The name of the relevant ECOs.
If there is a diagram open, then each Name cell displays an
ellipsis button. Click to display the following popup menu items:
• Take a Screenshot
Select this to take a screenshot of current visible area of the
active diagram canvas. The screenshot is automatically added
to the Images panel of the selected ECO for this design.
• Completion Status
Enables you to change the status of the ECO on the impacted
design. Select from Not Started, In Progress, Completed.
For Capital HarnessXC and Capital ModularXC only, change
the status to start and stop recording the change. See “Capture
and Apply a Change Within an ECO” on page 128
• More
Select this to open the Engineering Change Orders Dialog
Box in full edit mode for the selected ECO.
Short Description Descriptive text about the ECO. Read-only.
Category Lists the ECO categories for the individual ECOs that belong to
those categories. Read-only.
Release Level The release level for the ECO. Note that this is not the same
release level assigned to the impacted design revisions. Read-
only.
Created By The name of the user who created the selected ECO. Read-only.
Modified By The name of the last user to modify the selected ECO. Read-only.

506 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Engineering Change Orders Tab

Table 10-55. Engineering Change Orders Output Window (cont.)

Field Description
Refresh Click to refresh the displayed list.
Filter If there is a diagram open, click this button to toggle the list
of displayed ECOs between those that are applicable to the
currently open design and those that are applicable to all designs
in the currently open project.
Filter by Release Level Select this to filter the list of available ECOs by their Release
Level, select from Draft, Pending, Released.

Usage Notes
• The columns are sortable by clicking in the column header. The columns are filterable
by clicking in the first cell of each column.
Related Topics
Capture and Apply a Change Within an ECO
Creating an Engineering Change Order
Change Manager Apply ECO Dialog Box
Engineering Change Orders Dialog Box
Options (Apply ECO) Dialog Box
Apply Change Output Window
Change Manager Preview ECO Dialog Box
Applicable Changes Dialog Box
Simulate Change Output Window

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 507

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Change Manager Apply ECO Dialog Box

Change Manager Apply ECO Dialog Box

To access: Click the Apply Change button on the Applicable Changes Dialog Box.
Use this dialog box to control how the changes are applied to the harness design.
• Source
The changes in the selected ECO Impacted Design that are to be applied.
• Target
The currently open harness design
The Table below lists the available menus and fields.
Note
Applies to Capital HarnessXC and Capital ModularXC only.

Objects

Table 10-56. Change Manager Apply ECO Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
File
Options Opens the Options (Apply ECO) Dialog Box where you configure
the settings used when applying the ECO.
Actions
Place Creates a new object (subject to any change policy specified in the
Options (Apply ECO) dialog box) in the target harness using the
attributes belonging to the object selected in the Harness Objects
Grid or in the Change Manager Preview ECO Dialog Box.
The placement behavior varies depending on the object type; see
Harness Object Behavior on Applying ECO Changes for more
information.
Any module code expressions are assigned to the object.
Upon placing a selected object, the Link and Synchronize Object
actions are invoked automatically. If the object is created without
issues, the Status field for that object in the Harness Objects Grid
grid is updated and the Origin field displays Linked.

508 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Change Manager Apply ECO Dialog Box

Table 10-56. Change Manager Apply ECO Dialog Box Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Auto Link All objects for which a match can be found will have their source
ids synchronized when a Synchronize Object action is performed.
This is to allow you to compare changes on the object after linking
or auto-linking. The Status field for those objects in the Harness
Objects Grid displays Successful and the Origin field displays
Linked.
See the Link action, below, for a description of the behavior of
linked objects.
Link Creates a permanent association between the target object and its
counterpart in the source. This link is maintained by updating the
Target object with the Source ID of the Source object. If required
the appropriate module code expressions are also assigned to the
object.
To link an object, first select it in the Harness Objects Grid or in
the Change Manager Preview ECO Dialog Box, then press Space
Bar and enter Link, and finally click the object in the open harness
diagram to which the object should be linked. The Status field for
the object displays Successful and the Origin field displays
Linked.
Note: You can cancel the linking process without selecting an
object by pressing Space Bar and entering Cancel.
Upon linking an object, its source id is synchronized whenever a
Synchronize Object action is performed. See the Synchronize
Object action, below, for more information.
Once linked, selecting an object in either the Change Manager
Apply ECO Dialog Box, Change Manager Preview ECO dialog
box or the open diagram for the current harness, results in the same
object being selected in the other two views.
Synchronize Object Updates the attributes and properties of the Target object with the
values belonging to the linked object in the Source, subject to any
change policy specified in the Options (Apply ECO) Dialog Box.
User-defined properties are also synchronized. Filters declared in
adaptors.xml (found in your capital_home/adaptors folder) are
also taken into account. (See “Filters” in the Bridging Data In and
Out of Capital User Guide for further information).
Where applicable, Length rounding rules are honored (see
“Harness Shape Parameters” in the Capital Diagram Styling User
Guide).
The effects of synchronization vary for different objects; see
Harness Object Behavior on Applying ECO Changes for more
information.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 509

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Change Manager Apply ECO Dialog Box

Table 10-56. Change Manager Apply ECO Dialog Box Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Unlink Clears the value in the selected Capital object’s External ID
attribute, breaking the link with the Source object.
Report Generates a list of all supported object attributes and the values
contained within the Target and Source objects. All applied
changes are reported. Where a mismatch between the two is found,
the issue is reported as a warning. The report is displayed on the
Apply Change Output Window tab.
Map Derivatives This option opens the Derivative Mapping dialog box which
performs the following action (subject to any change policy
specified in the Options (Apply ECO) Dialog Box).
• If any derivatives exist in the Source harness that are not
currently mapped to Target derivative designs, the dialog box
is displayed enabling you to either map to an existing
derivative, or create a new one using the derivative details in
the Source data.
Map Modules This option opens the Module Mapping dialog box which
performs the following action (subject to any change policy
specified in the Options (Apply ECO) Dialog Box).
• If any modules exist in the Source data, the Module Mapping
dialog box is displayed enabling you to either map to an
existing module design, or create a new one using the module
details in the Source data.
Auto Link Harness Performs an auto-linking on all Source harness objects. Objects for
Objects which a match can be found based on the autolink criteria will
have their source ids synchronized when a Synchronize Object
action is performed. This is to allow you to compare changes on
the object after linking or auto-linking. The Status field for those
objects in the Harness Objects Grid displays Successful and the
Origin field displays Linked.
See the Link action, for a description of the behavior of linked
objects.

510 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Change Manager Apply ECO Dialog Box

Table 10-56. Change Manager Apply ECO Dialog Box Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Process This single action is a combination of Place, Auto Link, and
Synchronize Object. Once the action is selected a progress bar
appears indicating the current status of the action.
This option also performs the following actions (subject to any
change policy specified in the Options (Apply ECO) Dialog Box):
• Updates and synchronizes the attributes and properties of the
objects in the Target harness. If, for any reason, some of the
links were broken, the Auto-Link Criteria will be applied to re-
establish the link.
• Creates new options in the current project if any found in the
changed harness data do not already exist.
• Updates the applicable options on the Target harness with
those in the Source harness (if different).
View
Display Report With this option selected:
• The Apply Change Output Window displays when the ECO is
processed.
• When the harness is validated - either automatically or
manually - a report is generated.
With this option unselected, no report is generated, and a warning
message is issued only if an error is encountered during validation.
Detailed Report Toggles the Change Manager report content between condensed
short reports or full detailed reports.
View Toggles the display of the Change Manager Preview ECO Dialog
Box.
Filter Filters the items displayed in the Harness Objects grid of the
Change Manager Apply ECO Dialog Box.
Refresh Refreshes the Harness Objects grid.
Zoom Selected (Design) Select this option, or press Z, to immediately locate and highlight
the selected object on the harness diagram.
Zoom Selected (Preview) Select this option, or press P, to immediately locate and highlight
the selected harness object in the Preview window.
Harness Objects Grid This grid lists all supported objects found in the ECO change.
Certain actions in the Harness Objects grid are available by right-
clicking and accessing the context menu.
Type The component type, such as Bundle, Clip, Tube, and so on.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 511

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Change Manager Apply ECO Dialog Box

Table 10-56. Change Manager Apply ECO Dialog Box Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Origin Specifies whether the object exists only in the source data or, the
Target harness design, or whether it has been linked and is
therefore present in both.
Status Provides feedback on the results of the last linking action
performed for the object. If the linking was not successful, an
appropriate warning is displayed. Where an issue is encountered,
further information on the problem is provided on the Change
Manager tab in the Output Window.
Target The design-level name assigned to the object in the Target harness.
Source The name assigned to the object in the Source.
User FM The user generated functional modules codes assigned to the
object in the Source. It is possible to filter on these by typing the
filter string in the text field of the column header. Capital
ModularXC only
Generated FM The system generated functional modules codes assigned to the
object in the Source. It is possible to filter on these by typing the
filter string in the text field of the column header. Capital
ModularXC only
User PM The user generated production modules codes assigned to the
object in the Source. It is possible to filter on these by typing the
filter string in the text field of the column header. Capital
ModularXC only
Generated PM The system generated production modules codes assigned to the
object in the Source. It is possible to filter on these by typing the
filter string in the text field of the column header. Capital
ModularXC only
Source ID The unique identifier given to the object in the Source. It is this
value that is inserted into the target object’s ID field, creating the
link between the two.
Toolbar The Change Manager toolbar provides quick access to certain
commands on the Actions and View menus. Results of operations
executed from the toolbar are immediately applied to the Change
Manager Preview ECO Dialog Box.
Auto Link Performs an auto-linking on Source harness objects. See Auto
Link.
View Toggles the display of the Change Manager Preview ECO dialog
box.
Filter Used to filter the items displayed in the Harness Objects grid of the
Change Manager Preview ECO dialog box.

512 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Change Manager Apply ECO Dialog Box

Table 10-56. Change Manager Apply ECO Dialog Box Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Refresh Refreshes the Harness Objects Grid.
Process Initiates the Process action, which is a single action that performs
all required steps automatically to apply changes, while adhering
to defined policies.
The Source data applied to the Target harness.
• Objects are Auto-Linked.
• Existing linked objects are synchronized (updated).
• Obsolete objects are deleted.
• New objects are added.
Note: Existing bundles with topology changes are re-connected
using the incoming structure if “Optimize Bundle Topology
Match” was selected on the Applicable Changes Dialog Box.

Related Topics
Capture and Apply a Change Within an ECO
Creating an Engineering Change Order
Simulate Change Output Window
Engineering Change Orders Tab
Engineering Change Orders Dialog Box
Options (Apply ECO) Dialog Box
Apply Change Output Window
Change Manager Preview ECO Dialog Box
Applicable Changes Dialog Box

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 513

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Options (Apply ECO) Dialog Box

Options (Apply ECO) Dialog Box

To access: Choose File > Options from the main menu on the Change Manager Apply ECO
Dialog Box
Use this dialog box to control a number of different options including translation settings,
change policies and setup.
Note
Applies to Capital HarnessXC and Capital ModularXC only.

Description
These are used when applying changes from an ECO Impacted Designusing the “Change
Manager Apply ECO” dialog box. The different options are organized on separate tab pages to
ease accessibility.

Objects

Table 10-57. Options (Apply ECO) Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Translation Tab The settings on the Translation tab control both the translation of
part numbers and codes, as well as the update of components.
Note: Part number and code translation settings specified will be
stored into user settings and will be available in the next session.
Translate Option This option results in the conversion of option expression
Expression operators, based on the mappings in the adaptors.xml file, see
“Customizing Bridges” in the Bridging Data In and Out of
Capital User Guide for more information on configuring
translations.
Translate Codes Only applicable if the ECO has been imported from another
database.
Applies any code mappings configured for the current project in
Capital Project when applying changes from an ECO Impacted
Design. See “Code Translation” in the Capital Project User
Guide for more information on creating and maintaining a
project’s code mappings. The following mappings are supported:
Material Codes, Color Codes and Wire Specification Codes.
If no translation mapping is available for a given code, the library
will be searched for the imported code; if this cannot be found, a
warning will be generated.

514 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Options (Apply ECO) Dialog Box

Table 10-57. Options (Apply ECO) Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Incoming Part Number Only applicable if the ECO has been imported from another
database.
This option allows you to specify the source of incoming part
numbers, allowing the library to be searched for the correct part
number when attempting to find a match with an imported part.
Select from Internal, Customer or Supplier.
If an issue is encountered during translation, the part will not be
assigned and a warning will be generated.
Translate Parts This option allows you to specify the part numbers to be used
when the change is applied through the Change Manager Apply
ECO Dialog Box. With this option enabled, you can specify
whether Customer or Supplier part numbers are used. If you
select the Customer option, the list panel displays all customers
configured on your system. Select the customer whose part
numbers you want to use. If you select the Supplier option, a list
of suppliers is offered for selection.
Change Policy Tab This tab is used to specify the change policies that may be applied
during the apply ECO process. Change policies, configured by
project in Capital Project, allow you to define a set of rules to
govern the update of harness components with incoming source
information. Refer to “Creating a Change Policy” in the Capital
Project User Guide for more information on creating and
maintaining Change Policies.
Change Policy This option to allows you to select a Change Policy to apply to the
ECO processing.
Synchronize Cavity If this option is selected, then performing a synchronize action on
Components a connector will also synchronize all its cavity components. If it is
left unchecked, cavity components are not synchronized.
Setup Tab This tab enables the selection of custom plugin processors. These
processors modify the data prior to, or after, the application of the
selected bridge adaptor during import or export operations. See
Extensibility Plugins for more information on deploying plugins.
Bridge Processor This option allows you to specify the processor plugin. There can
be multiple plugins for the same application and this enables the
switching between them depending on the adaptor or customer.

Related Topics
Capture and Apply a Change Within an ECO
Creating an Engineering Change Order
Simulate Change Output Window

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 515

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Options (Apply ECO) Dialog Box

Engineering Change Orders Tab

Engineering Change Orders Dialog Box
Applicable Changes Dialog Box
Apply Change Output Window
Change Manager Preview ECO Dialog Box

516 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Change Manager Preview ECO Dialog Box

Change Manager Preview ECO Dialog Box

To access: On the Change Manager Apply ECO Dialog Box, choose View > View from the
main menu or click the View ( ) button on the toolbar.
Used to display a graphical representation of the target harness with the ECO changes applied.
Note
Applies to Capital HarnessXC and Capital ModularXC only.

Objects

Table 10-58. Change Manager Preview ECO Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Preview Menu Items The dialog box menu - and the icon shortcuts on the toolbar -
offer a number of options for controlling the display of the
harness, as well as mirroring the placement and linking options
available within the “Change Manager Apply ECO” dialog box.
File
Exit Closes the Change Manager Preview ECO dialog box (and the
“Change Manager Apply ECO” dialog box if it is also open).
You can also click the icon to exit.
The system stores the status of the two dialog boxes on exit, and if
both were open, reopens both when the Change Manager Apply
ECO dialog box is opened again.
Actions See the Actions section in the topic “Change Manager Apply ECO
Dialog Box” on page 508

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 517

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Change Manager Preview ECO Dialog Box

Table 10-58. Change Manager Preview ECO Dialog Box Contents (cont.)
Field Description
View The following options control the way in which the harness is
displayed in the preview window, but do not affect the harness
topology in any way.
• Zoom In
Increases the size at which the preview is displayed. Can also
be accessed by clicking the icon on the toolbar.
• Zoom Out
Decreases the size at which the preview is displayed. Can also
be accessed by clicking the icon on the toolbar.
• Zoom All
Sets the size of the preview such that it comfortably fills the
window. Can also be accessed by clicking the icon on the
toolbar.
• Zoom Synchronized
Sets the zoom level of the preview to match that defined for
the active diagram window. Can also be accessed by clicking
the icon on the toolbar.
• Show Labels
Toggles the display of component names in the preview
window. Can also be accessed by clicking the icon on the
toolbar.
• Show Splices

Toggles the display of splices (indicated by the symbol).

Can also be accessed by clicking the icon on the toolbar.
• Show Fixings

Toggles the display of fixings (indicated by the symbol).

Can also be accessed by clicking the icon on the toolbar.

518 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Change Manager Preview ECO Dialog Box

Table 10-58. Change Manager Preview ECO Dialog Box Contents (cont.)
Field Description
View (continued) • Show Protections
Toggles the display of protections (indicated by a thicker
linestyle than an unprotected bundle). Can also be accessed by
clicking the icon on the toolbar.
• Show Connectors

Toggles the display of connectors (indicated by the

symbol). Can also be accessed by clicking the icon on the
toolbar.
• Show Devices
Toggles the display of devices (indicated by the symbol).

Can also be accessed by clicking the icon on the toolbar.

• Text and Symbol Size
Displays the Adjusting Text and Symbol Sizes dialog box,
from where you can scale the display and visibility of graphics
and text objects. Can also be accessed by clicking the icon
on the toolbar.
• Display Report
Toggles the display of a the Harness Validation report during
Harness Validation. Select the option to enable reporting (the
option will be ticked to indicate selection); select the option
again to disable it.
Note: With this option disabled, Harness Validation will
result in the generation of an error dialog box if an error was
detected, instead of the full report.
• Change Manager - Apply ECO
Toggles the display of the Change Manager Apply ECO
Dialog Box. Can also be accessed by clicking the icon on
the toolbar.
Tools • Validate
Triggers an automatic validation process to run on the
incoming source data. The process is described fully in the
“Harness Validation” topic in the Bridging Data In and Out of
Capital User Guide.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 519

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Change Manager Preview ECO Dialog Box

Usage Notes
The following actions are supported in the preview window:

• Bundles are represented as lines, nodes as the intersections between them. Text labels
can also be displayed, together with splices, connectors, protections and fixings. A
color-coding scheme is used to represent different preview objects as follows:
o Green denotes an unlinked bundle, connector, or device.
o Blue denotes an unlinked splice, fixing or protection.
o Grey denotes a linked bundle or device.
o Red denotes a selected item.
• Object Selection
The preview includes a representation of all of the objects in the recorded change that
can be illustrated graphically. Selecting an object in the preview pane results in the same
object being selected in both the Change Manager Apply ECO Dialog Box and in the
diagram window.
o Select a single object by left-clicking on it.
o Select multiple objects by clicking and dragging out a rectangular selection; upon
releasing the mouse button, all objects falling wholly or partly within the rectangle
are selected.
o Deselect all objects by clicking on an empty area of the window.
• Panning
Middle-click within the preview window and drag to move the window contents.

Note
Middle click is also referred to as mouse button 3, and is activated by pressing down
on the mouse scroll wheel, where available.

• Zooming
If your mouse has a scroll wheel, you can use it to zoom into/out of the preview.

520 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Change Manager Preview ECO Dialog Box

Simulate Change Output Window

To access: Click Apply Change on the Applicable Changes Dialog Box.
The Simulate Change Output tab displays in the output window below the open diagram. It
reports the results of applying the ECO, without the design changes being committed.
You can click on the hyperlinked object names in the tab to jump to them on the target design.
Note
Applies to Capital HarnessXC and Capital ModularXC only.

Objects
• An example is shown below.

Usage Notes
Figure 10-1. Simulate Change Tab

Related Topics
Capture and Apply a Change Within an ECO
Creating an Engineering Change Order
Change Manager Preview ECO Dialog Box
Engineering Change Orders Tab
Engineering Change Orders Dialog Box
Applicable Changes Dialog Box
Apply Change Output Window
Change Manager Apply ECO Dialog Box

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 521

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Change Manager Preview ECO Dialog Box

Apply Change Output Window

To access: Click Process on the Applicable Changes Dialog Box. The Apply Change tab
displays in the output window below the diagram.
The Apply Change tab is an automatically created report which summarizes the top-level design
details and object content in the ECO design change that is being applied. Any validation errors
or warnings identified are listed in the report.
Note
Applies to Capital HarnessXC and Capital ModularXC only.

Objects

Table 10-59. Apply Change Output Window

Field Description
Severity Whether the result is an error ( ), a warning ( ) or an
information message ( ).
Operation The particular type of activity that has been run.
Object Type The specific object type on which the activity has been run.
To make the list more manageable, it can be filtered to show
only the required object types.
Action The specific object on which the activity has been run
(Deleted, Updated, and so on).
Message Detailed message about the activity that has occurred.
Source The name of the object in the Source harness.
Target The name of the object in the Target harness.

Usage Notes
• You can click any hyperlinked object in the report to jump to that object in the diagram
window.
• The columns are sortable by clicking in the column header. The columns are filterable
by clicking in the first cell of each column.
• Click the icon at the top right of the tab to display a popup menu:

o Clear
Clears the Apply Change output window.
o Show All
Displays the complete report generated during the current design session.

522 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Change Manager Preview ECO Dialog Box

o Save to CSV
If required for future reference, the report can be saved as a comma separated
variable (CSV) file. A dialog box is displayed where you specify the file name and
where you want to save it.
Related Topics
Capture and Apply a Change Within an ECO
Creating an Engineering Change Order
Change Manager Preview ECO Dialog Box
Engineering Change Orders Tab
Engineering Change Orders Dialog Box
Applicable Changes Dialog Box
Change Manager Apply ECO Dialog Box

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 523

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Change Manager Preview ECO Dialog Box

Applicable Changes Dialog Box

To access: Press Space Bar and enter Apply Change.
Used to select an ECO design change record to be replayed on a design.
Note
Applies to Capital HarnessXC and Capital ModularXC only.

Objects

Table 10-60. Applicable Changes Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Design Change A list of ECO Impacted Designs with recorded changes that are
applicable to the currently open design.
Optimize Bundle Select this option to apply ECOs that involve complex topology
Topology Match changes such as:
• Creating new bundles by splitting existing bundles.
• Deleting bundles by merging any two adjacent bundles in series.
• Moving existing bundles.
• Bundle connectivity moves to different nodes
Selecting this option, a match is found between the bundle’s
topological location in the source data and that based on the
corresponding bundle in the target design (rather than matching by
name).
Leave this option unselected if you are applying ECOs that involve
simple topology changes such as adding or deleting bundles. In this
case bundles are matched by name.
Apply Change Click to open the Change Manager Apply ECO dialog box.

Related Topics
Capture and Apply a Change Within an ECO
Creating an Engineering Change Order
Change Manager Preview ECO Dialog Box
Engineering Change Orders Tab
Engineering Change Orders Dialog Box
Change Manager Apply ECO Dialog Box
Apply Change Output Window
Simulate Change Output Window

524 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Change Manager Preview ECO Dialog Box

Query Criteria Dialog Box

To access: Choose View > Filter from the main menu on the Change Manager Apply ECO
Dialog Box. Alternatively click the Filter button.
Used to filter the items displayed in the Harness Objects grid of the Change Manager Apply
ECO dialog box.
Note
Applies to Capital HarnessXC and Capital ModularXC only.

Objects

Table 10-61. Query Criteria Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Show Insulation Run Specifies whether insulations included in an insulation run are
Content displayed as objects. Default is selected.
Origin The following options allow you to specify the harness objects to
display in the grid, based on their origin:
• Source
With this option selected, the grid lists all supported objects
found in the ECO change record.
• Target
With this option selected, the grid lists all supported objects
found in the open target harness design.
Unlinked Objects Specifies whether harness objects that are not linked should be
listed in the grid (selected) or not (unselected).
No Longer Linked This option is only available when the Origin is set to Target.
Objects With this option selected, objects in the open harness design that
retain an source id attribute, from an object in the source data that
has since been deleted, are displayed.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 525

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Change Manager Preview ECO Dialog Box

Table 10-61. Query Criteria Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Linked Objects Specifies whether linked objects should be displayed (selected) or
not (unselected). Upon selecting this option, the following options
are all selected by default:
• Connectivity Mismatch
Specifies whether linked objects, for which connectivity (the
number of cavities, wire terminations, and so on) is different,
are displayed (selected) or not displayed (unselected).
• Attr\Prop Mismatch
Specifies whether linked objects for which one or more
attributes or properties are different are displayed (selected) or
not (unselected).
• Synchronized
Specifies whether objects that have been synchronized
(connectivity and properties match in both linked objects)
should be displayed (selected) or not (unselected).

Related Topics
Capture and Apply a Change Within an ECO
Creating an Engineering Change Order
Change Manager Preview ECO Dialog Box
Engineering Change Orders Tab
Engineering Change Orders Dialog Box
Change Manager Apply ECO Dialog Box
Apply Change Output Window
Simulate Change Output Window

526 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Change Manager Preview ECO Dialog Box

Report Builder Dialog Box

To access: Press Space Bar and enter Build.
Use this dialog box to specify, create and modify customized reports for viewing as tables on
diagrams, in Design Inspectors, for internal reports, and in Capital Enterprise Reporter.
Objects

Table 10-62. Report Builder Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Enables the creation of a new report
Loads an existing report (as a plugin). Opens the Plugins folder
allowing you to select the required file.
Compiles and saves the report.
Makes the report available in Capital Logic. The objects available
for inclusion in the report depend on the tool selected.
Makes the report available in Capital Integrator and Capital
Topology. The objects available for inclusion in the report depend
on the tool selected.
Makes the report available in Capital HarnessXC. The objects
available for inclusion in the report depend on the tool selected.
Click this icon to generate output as an embedded report.
Click this icon to generate output as a table to be used in a style
set.
Click this icon to generate a design inspector report.
Click to add columns to the report.
Click to remove the selected column from the report.
Click to specify the contents of the column.
Displays the objects that can be reported according to the tool(s)
selected. Click the icons to include in, or remove from the report.

Related Topics
Using the Report Builder
Design Inspectors

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 527

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Printing Dialogs

Printing Dialogs
This section offers a description of dialogs related to printing functions. For each dialog, all
fields are listed, along with a full description of the field’s function.
CGM Page Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
DXF Page Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
PDF Page Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
SVG Page Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
Print Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
Edit Print Region Groups Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
Print to File Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
Project Diagram Settings Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
Edit File Name Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545

528 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
CGM Page Settings Dialog Box

CGM Page Settings Dialog Box

To access: click the Configure button to the right of the Format field on the Print to File Dialog
Box with a format of CGM selected.
Used to configure the creation of a CGM file format document from exported design data.
Note
The default values displayed in this dialog, font mapping choices and diagnostics can be
amended in the file cgmprops.xml located in your Capital_home/config installation folder.
Amendments will have a system wide effect and should only be made by your CGM expert
System Administrator.

Objects

Table 10-63. CGM Page Settings Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Line Allows you to specify a factor by which line thickness will
Thickness be adjusted to maintain the display rendering accuracy
Scale Factor between the Capital data and the .cgm format. Default value
is 1.0.
Line Pattern Allows you to specify a factor by which line patterns, such
Scale Factor as dotted lines and dot and dash size, will be adjusted to
maintain the display rendering accuracy between the Capital
data and the .cgm format. Default value is 1.0.
Hatching Allows you to specify a factor by which hatching patterns
Pattern will be adjusted to maintain the display rendering accuracy
Scale Factor between the Capital data and the .cgm format. Default value
is 1.0.
Resolution Select a resolution of either Standard or High from the
dropdown list. Standard resolution creates CGM files using
16-bit coordinates, suitable for most standard paper sizes.
High resolution creates CGM files using 32-bit coordinates.
This should be selected if the paper size exceeds 15 meters.
Please note the created file size will be larger when using
High resolution.

Related Topics
Print to a File
DXF Page Settings Dialog Box
PDF Page Settings Dialog Box
SVG Page Settings Dialog Box

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 529

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
CGM Page Settings Dialog Box

Print to File Dialog Box

530 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
DXF Page Settings Dialog Box

DXF Page Settings Dialog Box

To access: click the Configure button to the right of the Format field on the Print to File Dialog
Box with a format of DXF selected.
Used to configure the creation of a DXF file format document from exported design data.
Objects

Table 10-64. DXF Page Settings Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Write Extended Check this to write out the full font name in the DXF file.
Font This will aid any future mapping that is required.
Information

Related Topics
Print to a File
CGM Page Settings Dialog Box
PDF Page Settings Dialog Box
SVG Page Settings Dialog Box
Print to File Dialog Box

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 531

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
PDF Page Settings Dialog Box

PDF Page Settings Dialog Box

To access: click the Configure button to the right of the Format field on the Print to File Dialog
Box with a format of PDF selected.
Used to configure the creation of a PDF document from exported design data.
Objects

Table 10-65. PDF Page Settings Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Page Size Drop-down list of supported page sizes and their
dimensions. Select Custom to enable the Width, Height and
Units fields below. Mandatory.
Width Displays the width relevant to the page size selected in the
Page Size field above. If Custom is selected as the Page
Size, this field is enabled and a manual width can be entered.
Otherwise this field is read-only. Mandatory.
Height Displays the height relevant to the page size selected in the
Page Size field above. If Custom is selected as the Page
Size, this field is enabled and a manual height can be
entered. Otherwise this field is read-only. Mandatory.
Units Displays the dimension units, in mm, cm or inches, relevant
to the page size selected in the Page Size field above. If
Custom is selected as the Page Size, this field is enabled and
a manual selection can be made. Otherwise this field is read-
only. Mandatory.
Orientation Specifies whether the PDF file should be generated with the
page(s) in Landscape (horizontal) or Portrait (vertical)
layout. Mandatory.
Color Specifies whether the PDF file should be generated in Color
or Black & White. Mandatory.
Printable Specifies the parts of the diagram that will be included in the
Area export. Mandatory. Select from:
Fit To Page
Everything on the diagram is added to the export and the
output is sized to fit on the Page Size selected.
Fit To Border
The output is sized so that the border reaches the edges of
the Page Size selected. Any design elements placed outside
the border are not included in the export.

532 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
PDF Page Settings Dialog Box

Table 10-65. PDF Page Settings Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Output File When multiple diagrams have been selected for export, this
setting specifies whether the diagrams should be exported as
a Single File, in which each diagram is printed to a single
page, or as Multiple Files, in which case each diagram is
exported as a single file with a unique file name. Mandatory.
Dash Allows you to set a dash multiplier figure that stretches or
Multiplier shrinks dashes relative to the size of output page. This
allows for greater control over the rendering of dashed lines.
Optional.

Related Topics
Print to a File
CGM Page Settings Dialog Box
DXF Page Settings Dialog Box
SVG Page Settings Dialog Box
Print to File Dialog Box

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 533

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
SVG Page Settings Dialog Box

SVG Page Settings Dialog Box

To access: click the Configure button to the right of the Format field on the Print to File Dialog
Box with a format of SVG selected. Examples of the effects of the settings on rendered
SVG’s can be found here “SVG Page Settings Examples” on page 306
Used to configure the creation of a SVG file format document from exported design data.
Note
The default values displayed in this dialog, and various other SVG configuration parameters
can be amended in the file svgprops.xml located in your Capital_home/config installation
folder. Amendments will have a system wide effect and should only be made by your SVG
expert System Administrator.

Objects

Table 10-66. SVG Page Settings Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Line Allows you to specify a factor by which line thickness will
Thickness be adjusted to maintain the display rendering accuracy
Scale Factor between the Capital data and the .svg format. Default value
is 1.0.
Minimum Allows you to specify a minimum SVG line width. Default
Line Width value is 1.0.
Display Allows you to specify an initial size for the width of the
Width created SVG. Default value is 1024.0.
Display Allows you to specify an initial size for the height of the
Height created SVG. Default value is 768.0.
Line Pattern Allows you to specify a factor by which line patterns, such
Scale Factor as dotted lines and dot and dash size, will be adjusted to
maintain the display rendering accuracy between the Capital
data and the.svg format. Default value is 0.5.
Fill Pattern Allows you to specify a factor by which fill patterns will be
Scale Factor adjusted to maintain the display rendering accuracy between
the Capital data and the.svg format. Default value is 0.5.

Related Topics
Print to a File
CGM Page Settings Dialog Box
DXF Page Settings Dialog Box
PDF Page Settings Dialog Box

534 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
SVG Page Settings Dialog Box

Print to File Dialog Box

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 535

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Print Dialog Box

Print Dialog Box

To access: Press Space Bar and enter Print.
Used to configure one or more diagrams for printing.
Objects

Table 10-67. Print Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Print Specifies the diagrams or print regions to be included in the print.
Mandatory. Select one of the following options from the dropdown list:
• Project
All diagrams belonging to the open project are included in the print. With
this option selected, clicking Configure to the right of the field displays
the Project Diagram Settings Dialog Box, from where you can refine the
selection of diagrams to be printed.
• Design
All diagrams belonging to the current design are included in the print.
• Diagram
Only the currently open diagram is printed.
• Selection
Only the designs and diagrams selected in the Project Browser are
printed.
• Print Region
Only the content within the specified print regions (belonging to the
currently open diagram) is included in the print. With this option
selection, clicking on the ellipsis (...) button to the right of the field
displays the Edit Print Region Groups Dialog Box, from where you can
specify the print regions to be printed.
Configure This button has a function dictated by the setting of the Print option:
If Project or Selection are selected, clicking this button displays the Project
Diagram Settings Dialog Box, allowing you to specify whether to print all or
only the latest design revisions, and whether to include derivative designs in
the print.
If Print Regions is selected, clicking this button displays the Edit Print
Region Groups Dialog Box, allowing you to specify the regions to be
included in the print.
Printer Displays the name of the currently selected print device. Mandatory.
Printer Setup Displays a generic Print dialog, allowing you to select and configure any
printer or print device that is available to you. Optional.

536 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Print Dialog Box

Table 10-67. Print Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Plotter Select this option when sending a print to a plotter. This ensures that the
device’s continuous paper feed is handled correctly. Optional.
Scaling Specifies the size at which the selected diagram(s) are printed. Mandatory.
Select one of the following options:
• Fit to Paper
This option specifies that each diagram should be printed to fit on a single
sheet of paper, of a size specified in the Page Setup dialog for the selected
printing device. Diagrams are resized as needed to fit.
• Print to Scale
This option specifies that each diagram should be printed at 100% size, as
dictated by the design’s grid spacing value (as specified in the currently
applied style set; see the Diagram Styling User Guide for more
information). Alternatively, diagrams can be printed larger or smaller by
specifying a new percentage value, either by overwriting the value in the
field to the right, or by clicking the up- and down-arrow buttons.
Clip To Border With this option selected, only those diagram elements falling within the
border outline are printed; any harness elements falling outside of the border
will be ignored. With this option unselected, all harness elements are printed,
even those placed outside of the border. Mandatory.
Black/White With this option selected, printed output is generated using only black lines/
Only text against a white background, regardless of the specified text/line colors in
use in a diagram. Optional.
Dash Allows you to set a dash multiplier figure that stretches or shrinks dashes
Multiplier relative to the size of output page. This allows for greater control over the
rendering of dashed lines. Optional.

Usage Notes
• The option to create multiple diagrams is a licensed operation; if you do not have the
required license, yet are attempting to print a diagram from a design with multiple
diagrams, no printed output is generated.
• If a diagram has an associated border, the “Clip To Border” option will be selected by
default. If the “Clip To Border” option is selected for a diagram without an associated
border, the setting will be ignored when the diagram is printed.
Related Topics
Print to a Printer or Plotter
Printing a Single Diagram
Printing All Diagrams in a Project
Printing All Diagrams in a Design

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 537

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Print Dialog Box

Printing Selected Print Regions

538 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Edit Print Region Groups Dialog Box

Edit Print Region Groups Dialog Box

To access: Press Space Bar and enter Print Region Settings, or launched automatically when
placing a print region in a design or border symbol. Also accessed by clicking the ellipsis
(...) button at the top of the Print Dialog Box when a Print type of Print Region is selected.
Used to configure print regions on a design, whether created within the design or imported as
part of a border symbol. Also used to select print regions for printing.
Objects

Table 10-68. Edit Print Region Groups Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Print Region Name A unique label used to identify the print region, both within this dialog
on the design, where it is displayed in the bottom-left corner of the
print region outline. Print regions are given a default name of Print
Region followed by an incrementing number, but this can be
overridden as long as the new name is unique within the design.
Mandatory.
If launched from within a tool other than Capital Symbol, this column
also lists any print regions configured within the border symbol in use.
These print regions will be displayed with the border name appended
to the Print Region Name, and a icon is displayed at the beginning
of the row, indicating that this print region cannot be renamed. Print
regions created within the current design are preceded by a icon,
indicating that they can be renamed.
Active Specifies whether the print region is available for selection in the Print
dialog box (selected) or whether it is disabled and unavailable for
selection (unselected). Mandatory.
When accessed from the Print dialog box, this setting indicates
whether the print region should be included in the print.
Visible Specifies whether the print region is displayed on the design (selected)
or whether it is hidden (unselected). Mandatory.
This option is not available when the dialog is launched from the Print
dialog box.
Order The order in which print regions appear in the dialog defines the order
in which the they are printed. If a number of print regions exist they
are grouped together by type. You may rearrange the order of print
regions within their group, or push a whole group up or down. You
cannot move a print region outside of its group. The print order is
maintained when the design is saved.
This option is not available when the dialog is launched from the
Print Dialog.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 539

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Edit Print Region Groups Dialog Box

Usage Notes
To move a print region within the list, first select it, then click one of the following:

• to move the selected print region or group to the top of the list.

• to move the selected print region or group up one position in the list.

• to move the selected print region or group down one position in the list.

• to move the selected print region or group to the bottom of the list.

540 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Print to File Dialog Box

Print to File Dialog Box

To access: Press Space Bar and enter Print to File.
Used to configure the export of one or more diagrams to either PDF, DXF, CGM or SVG
format.
Objects

Table 10-69. Print to File Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Export Specifies the diagrams to be included in the export. Mandatory. Select
one of the following options from the dropdown list:
• Project
All diagrams belonging to the open project are included in the
export. With this option selected, clicking the Configure button to
the right of the field displays the Project Diagram Settings Dialog
Box, from where you can refine the selection of diagrams to be
exported.
• Design
All diagrams belonging to the current design are included in the
export.
• Diagram
Only the currently open diagram is exported.
• Selection
Only the designs and diagrams selected in the Project Browser are
printed. With this option selected, clicking the Configure button
to the right of the field displays the Project Diagram Settings
dialog box, from where you can refine the selection of diagrams to
be exported.
• Print Regions
Only the content within the specified print regions (belonging to
the currently open diagram) is included in the print. With this
option selection, clicking on the Configure button to the right of
the field displays the Edit Print Region Groups Dialog Box, from
where you can specify the print regions to be printed.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 541

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Print to File Dialog Box

Table 10-69. Print to File Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Configure This button has a function dictated by the setting of the Export option:
If Project or Selection are selected, clicking this button displays the
Project Diagram Settings Dialog Box, allowing you to specify
whether to print all or only the latest design revisions, and whether to
include derivative designs in the print.
If Design or Diagram is selected then this button is not enabled.
If Print Regions is selected, clicking this button displays the Edit
Print Region Groups Dialog Box, allowing you to specify the regions
to be included in the print.
Format Specifies the target format to which the diagram is exported.
Mandatory. Select from:
• PDF
Exports the design data in Adobe’s Portable Document Format
(.pdf). With this option selected, clicking the Configure button to
the right of the field displays the PDF Page Settings Dialog Box
from where you can configure the export.
• DXF
Exports the design data in AutoCAD DXF (Drawing Interchange
Format, or Drawing Exchange Format) format. With this option
selected, clicking the Configure button to the right of the field
displays the DXF Page Settings Dialog Box from where you can
configure the export.
• CGM
Exports the design data in the W3C group WebCGM format
(.cgm). With this option selected, clicking the Configure button to
the right of the field displays the CGM Page Settings Dialog Box
from where you can configure the export.
• SVG
This format is not available if the Export type of Print Regions is
selected. Exports the design data as a Lean SVG, (Mentor
Graphics proprietary Scalar Vector Graphics format). With this
option selected, clicking the Configure button to the right of the
field displays the SVG Page Settings Dialog Box from where you
can configure the export.
Filename Displays the currently configured format used to construct the
filename(s) for the exported data. This defaults to {Diagram}
indicating that the diagram name will be used and appended with the
file extension appropriate to the selected format. Clicking the ellipsis
(...) button to the right of the field displays the Edit File Name Dialog
Box, which allows you to specify the way in which file names are
constructed.

542 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Print to File Dialog Box

Table 10-69. Print to File Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Location Displays the path to the directory in which the exported files will be
placed. Clicking the ellipsis (...) button to the right of the field
displays a file browser dialog, which you can use to navigate to the
required location, which will be displayed in the field upon selection.

Related Topics
Print to a File

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 543

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Project Diagram Settings Dialog Box

Project Diagram Settings Dialog Box

To access: click the Configure button to the right of the Export option on the Print to File Dialog
Box when the Export option is set to Project or Selection
or
click the Configure button to the right of the Print option on the Print Dialog Box when the Print
option is set to Project or Selection.
Used to refine the selection of diagrams to be printed.
Objects

Table 10-70. Project Diagram Settings Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Latest Design Revisions / Specify whether to print all revisions of each design, or only
All Design Revisions the latest revision. Mandatory.
Include Derivative Select this option to send any derivatives for printing along
Diagrams with the selected composite design. With this option
unselected, only the composite design is printed. Mandatory.

Related Topics
Printing All Diagrams in a Project
Print to a Printer or Plotter

544 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Edit File Name Dialog Box

Edit File Name Dialog Box

To access: clicking the ellipsis (...) button to the right of the Filename field on the Print to File
Dialog Box.
Used to specify the way in which the file names of exported design data are created.
Objects

Table 10-71. Edit File Name Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Keyword This field offers a list of all diagram attributes that can be
included in a filename. To select an attribute, first click on it,
then click the Add button to move it into the Entries list.
When the data is exported and the filename generated, the
value of the selected attribute is extracted and inserted into
the filename.
Text This field allows the entry of a string of alphanumeric
characters for insertion into the filename. Enter the
characters to be used, then click the Add button to move the
string into the Entries field. When the filename is generated,
any text entries will be inserted as entered here.
Entries This field displays all attributes and text inserts (in quotation
marks) in the order they will be used when constructing
filenames for exported design data, with the entry at the top
of the list being used first. To change the order of items in
the list, first click on an item to move, then click the Up or
Down button as appropriate. To delete an item from the list,
first click to select it, then click the Remove button.
Preview This field displays a preview of how the filename,
constructed from the Entries and Text entered above, will
look.

Related Topics
Print to a File

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 545

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Rules and Constraints Dialogs

Rules and Constraints Dialogs

This section offers a description of dialogs related to rules and constraints. For each dialog, all
fields are listed, along with a full description of the field’s function.
Constraint Selection Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
Define Rules Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
Rule Selection Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
Rules Tab in Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550

546 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Constraint Selection Dialog Box

Constraint Selection Dialog Box

To access: Click the Add Constraint ( ) button on the Define Rules Dialog Box or the Add
Constraint ( ) button on the Rules Tab in Properties Dialog Box of an object.
Use this dialog box to select constraints that you want to apply to an object or add to a rule.
Objects

Table 10-72. Constraint Selection Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Constraints browser Expand the browser to view the available constraints. The
constraints are grouped under the applications in which they
can be used. Click a constraint to select it. You can select
multiple constraints.
Note that when you are applying constraints to an object,
only constraints that are applicable to that object are
displayed.

Related Topics
Defining Rules
Assigning a Rule or Constraint to an Object or Design

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 547

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Define Rules Dialog Box

Define Rules Dialog Box

To access: Press Space Bar and enter Rules.
Use this dialog to create, edit, rename or delete rules that can be used in a project.
Objects

Table 10-73. Define Rules Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Rules window Lists the rules that have been created.
New Used to create a new rule that can be used in the project. Displays
the Rule Name dialog where you specify a name for it. When you
click OK, the rule name is added to the Rules window.
Rename Used to rename the selected rule in the Rules window. Displays the
Rename Rule dialog where you specify the new name. When you
click OK, the new name is displayed in the Rules window.
Delete Deletes the selected rule in the Rules window.
Add Rule Reference Used to add the constraints from one rule to the rule selected in the
Rules window. Displays the Rule Selection Dialog Box where you
select the rule whose constraints you are adding. When you click
OK, the constraints are displayed in the Constraints window
(grouped under the name of the rule from which they come).
Add Constraint Used to add one or more constraints to the rule selected in the Rules
window. Displays the Constraint Selection Dialog Box where you
select the constraints. When you click OK, the constraints are
displayed in the Constraints window.
Constraints window Displays the constraints included in the rule selected in the Rules
window. You can edit the constraints in this window.
indicates a rule reference (where the constraints from another
rule have been added to this rule). Click the rule name to display its
constraints directly below it. Alternatively, you can hold your
mouse cursor over the rule name and its constraints are displayed in
a tooltip. You cannot edit those constraints here. You can only edit
them by editing the rule itself.
indicates a standard constraint. Click this icon to display a
dropdown list from which you can select a customized version of
the constraint (if any have been made available via Extensibility
Plugins).
Click to delete a constraint.

548 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Define Rules Dialog Box

Table 10-73. Define Rules Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Show All Constraints/ Controls which constraints are displayed in the Constraints
<Type_of_Constraint> window. All Constraints displays all constraints included in the
rule selected in the Rules window. Otherwise, the dropdown list
includes the types of constraint used in that rule. Select a constraint
type to display only the constraints of that type.

Related Topics
Defining Rules

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 549

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Rule Selection Dialog Box

Rule Selection Dialog Box

To access: Click the Add Rule Reference ( ) button on the Define Rules Dialog Box or click
the Add Rule Reference ( ) button on the Rules Tab in Properties Dialog Box of an
object.
Use this dialog to select a rule whose constraints you want to add to another rule or to an object.
Objects

Table 10-74. Rule Selection Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Rule window Displays the rules that are available for selection. Select the rule
whose constraints you want to add and click OK.

Related Topics
Defining Rules
Assigning a Rule or Constraint to an Object or Design

Rules Tab in Properties Dialog Box

To access: Open the Properties dialog for an object.
Use this tab to edit the rules and constraints that apply to the object whose properties you are
editing.

Table 10-75. Rules Tab in Properties Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Add Rule Reference Used to add the constraints from one rule to the object whose
properties you are editing. Displays the Rule Selection Dialog Box
where you select the rule whose constraints you are adding. When
you click OK, the constraints are displayed in the Constraints
window (grouped under the name of the rule from which they
come).
Add Constraint Used to add one or more constraints to the object whose properties
you are editing. Displays the Constraint Selection Dialog Box
where you select the constraints. When you click OK, the
constraints are displayed in the Constraints window.

550 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Rules Tab in Properties Dialog Box

Table 10-75. Rules Tab in Properties Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Constraints window Displays all of the constraints that are applicable to the object
whose properties you are editing. These constraints may have been
applied directly to that object or to objects higher up the object
hierarchy. The constraints are grouped under the objects to which
they were applied.
In the case of a bundle, for example, constraints are displayed for
the bundle itself, for the harness to which it belongs and for the
diagram.
You can edit only those constraints that have been applied directly
to the object whose properties you are editing.
If you editing the properties for multiple objects, this window
displays only constraints that are common to all of those objects.If
there are no common constraints, the window is blank.
indicates a rule. Click the rule name to display its constraints
directly below it. Alternatively, you can hold your mouse cursor
over the rule name and its constraints are displayed in a tooltip. You
cannot edit those constraints here. You can only edit them by
editing the rule itself in the Define Rules Dialog Box.
indicates that the rule does not contain any rules or constraints
that are applicable to the object.
indicates a standard constraint. Click this icon to display a
dropdown list from which you can select a customized version of
the constraint (if any have been made available via Extensibility
Plugins).
Click to delete a constraint.
Show All Constraints/ Controls which constraints are displayed in the Constraints
<Type_of_Constraint> window. All Constraints displays all constraints applied to the
object. Otherwise, the dropdown list includes the types of constraint
applied. Select a constraint type to display only the constraints of
that type.

Related Topics
Assigning a Rule or Constraint to an Object or Design

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 551

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Warning Dialogs

Warning Dialogs
This section offers a description of warning dialogs. For each dialog, all fields are listed, along
with a full description of the field’s function.
Undoable Operation Confirmation Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553

552 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Undoable Operation Confirmation Dialog Box

Undoable Operation Confirmation Dialog Box

To access: Displayed when you perform an action that cannot be undone because it causes the
diagram to be saved automatically.
Used to confirm whether you want to perform an action or operation that cannot be undone.
Objects

Table 10-76. Undoable Operation Confirmation Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Don’t show Specifies whether you want this message to be displayed the
me this next time that you perform an undoable action (unselected)
message or whether you do not want this message to be displayed
again again (selected).
OK Click this to proceed with the undoable action.
Cancel Click this to cancel the undoable action.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 553

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Design Log Dialogs

Design Log Dialogs

This section describes the dialogs associated with viewing and configuring Design Logs:
Design Log Event Filter Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
Design Log Filter Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
Design Log Viewer Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
View Design Logs Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559

554 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Design Log Event Filter Options Dialog Box

Design Log Event Filter Options Dialog Box

To access: Press Space Bar and enter Event View.
Used to set default filtering behavior for all logs displayed in the Design Log Viewer Dialog
Box.
Objects

Table 10-77. Design Log Event Filter Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Filter Options The following line items can be turned off or on in all design logs
by default. Select an option to have it displayed; deselect an option
to hide that line item. The following line items are available:
Header, Info, Warnings, Errors, Blank.

Usage Notes
The Filter Options can be set interactively in the Design Log Viewer Dialog Box.

Related Topics
Viewing Design Logs

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 555

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Design Log Filter Options Dialog Box

Design Log Filter Options Dialog Box

To access: Press Space Bar and enter Log View.
Used to set default filtering behavior for the list of design logs offered in the View Design Logs
Dialog Box.
Objects

Table 10-78. Design Log Filter Options Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
View Log This option allows you to display all historical design logs
generated for the design, or only the latest log. Select View All or
View Latest as appropriate.
Filter By These options allow you to control the display of design logs in
which warnings and/or errors were generated.
Warnings
Select this option to display design logs in which warnings were
generated; deselect it to hide all logs containing warnings.
Errors
Select this option to display design logs in which errors were
generated; deselect it to hide all logs containing errors.

Related Topics
Viewing Design Logs
View Design Logs Dialog Box

556 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Design Log Viewer Dialog Box

Design Log Viewer Dialog Box

To access: Double-click a log in the Logs grid of the View Design Logs Dialog Box, or select a
log and click View.
Used to display the contents of a design log. The dialog box displays in two different layouts for
bridge related log files and non-bridge related log files.
Objects

Table 10-79. Design Log Viewer Dialog Box (Non-Bridge Logs) Contents
Field Description
Filter Options The following Event Type line items can be turned off or on in the
design log. Select an option to have it displayed; deselect an option
to hide that line item. The following line items are available:
Header, Info, Warnings, Errors, Blank.
Refresh Click this button to update the Events grid to reflect any changes
made to the Filter Options.
Events This window displays the contents of the log file.

Table 10-80. Design Log Viewer Dialog Box (Bridge Logs) Contents
Field Description
Severity Whether the result is an error ( ), a warning ( ), or an
information message ( ).
Operation The particular type of bridging activity that has been run (for
example, Place, Autolink, Synchronize, and so on).
Object type The specific object type on which a bridging activity has been run.
To make the list more manageable it can be filtered to show only
the required object types. These are:
• All
• Connector
• Bundle
• Splice
• Clip
• Grommet
• Tape
• Tube
• Wire
• Multicore

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 557

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Design Log Viewer Dialog Box

Table 10-80. Design Log Viewer Dialog Box (Bridge Logs) Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Object The specific object on which a bridging activity has been run.
Message Detailed message about the bridging activity that has occurred. You
can click an object in the message to jump to that object in the
diagram window.

Usage Notes
• You are able to open multiple viewers simultaneously in order to review the content of
the logs and interact with the diagram at the same time.
• The Filter Options can be set as defaults in the Design Log Event Filter Options Dialog
Box.
Related Topics
Viewing Design Logs

558 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
View Design Logs Dialog Box

View Design Logs Dialog Box

To access: Press Space Bar and enter View Design Log. The dialog can be accessed in a
different mode (with the dialog title Open Design Logs) by pressing Space Bar and entering
Open Design Log.
When the dialog box is accessed as View Design Logs, it is used to select log files to view in
the Design Log Viewer dialog box.When the dialog is accessed as Open Design Logs, it is
used to select a log to open in the Output Window.
Objects

Table 10-81. View Design Logs Dialog Contents

Field Description
View Log This option allows you to display all historical design logs
generated for the design, or only the latest log. Select View All or
View Latest as appropriate.
Filter By These options allow you to control the display of design logs in
which warnings and/or errors were generated.
Warnings
Select this option to display design logs in which warnings were
generated; deselect it to hide all logs containing warnings.
Errors
Select this option to display design logs in which errors were
generated; deselect it to hide all logs containing errors.
Preview Only displays when the dialog box is opened in Open Design Log
mode. Click this button to open the log in the Output Window.
View Only displays when the dialog box is opened in View Design Log
mode. Click this button to the view the selected log in the Design
Log Viewer Dialog Box.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 559

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
View Design Logs Dialog Box

Table 10-81. View Design Logs Dialog Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Logs This grid displays the design logs available for the currently open
harness. To view a log, first click to select it before clicking View/
Preview; alternatively, you can double-click the log in the grid. The
following information is displayed for each log:
Log
This column lists the logs available, named according to the
processes from which they were generated. When you are viewing
the available logs for a composite harness, the logs are displayed
beneath the composite or derivatives to which they relate.
User
The name of the user who ran the harness process from which the
log was generated.
Time
The time at which the process from which the log was generated
was started.
Date
The date upon which the process from which the log was generated
was started.
Warning
If the log contains one or more warnings, this column displays a
symbol.
Error
If the log contains one or more errors, this column displays a
symbol.

Related Topics
Viewing Design Logs

560 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Help Button Landing Pages for Dialog Boxes

Help Button Landing Pages for Dialog Boxes

The following topics are displayed when you click the Help button or press F1 for a dialog box
in the software.
Edit Properties Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
Edit Project Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
Project Folders Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
Import Designs to Project Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
Import Designs to Project Wizard Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
New Project Dialog Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
Open Project Dialog Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
Options Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
Choose Options Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
Project Preferences Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
Copy Design Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
Create New Design Revision Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
Build Lists Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
Design Effectivity Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
Edit Build List Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
Applicable Options Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
Compare Designs Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
Design Revision/Build List Selection Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
Design Rule Checks Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
Edit Breakout/Spot Tape Details Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
Edit Design Properties Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
Edit Effectivity Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
Edit Option Expression Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
Generate Advanced Names Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
Map Equivalent Devices Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
New Property Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
Part Selection Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
Project Usages Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
Select by Attribute/Property Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
Select By Name Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
Edit Border Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
Add Text Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 561

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Help Button Landing Pages for Dialog Boxes

Image Selection Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569

Symbol Selection Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
Update Symbol - Options Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
Edit Properties: Propertied Graphic Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
Fill Pattern Selection Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
Set Grid Defaults Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
Split Table Dialog Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
New Property Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
Plugins Dialog Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
Plugin Details Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
Batch Translate Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
Edit Capital Configuration Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
Release Designs Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
Engineering Change Orders Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
Options (Apply ECO) Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
Change Manager Apply ECO Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
Change Manager Preview ECO Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
Query Criteria Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
CGM Page Settings Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
DXF Page Settings Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
PDF Page Settings Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
SVG Page Settings Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
Print Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
Edit Print Region Groups Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
Print to File Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
Project Diagram Settings Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
Edit File Name Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
Constraint Selection Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
Define Rules Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
Rule Selection Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
Rules Tab in Properties Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
Undoable Operation Confirmation Dialog Box Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
Design Log Event Filter Options Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
Design Log Filter Options Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
Design Log Viewer Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577

562 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Edit Properties Help

View Design Logs Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577

Edit Properties Help

What do you need help with?
• The Edit Properties Dialog Box fields

Edit Project Help

What do you need help with?
• The Edit Project Dialog Box fields

Project Folders Help

What do you need help with?
• The Project Folders Dialog Box fields

Import Designs to Project Help

What do you need help with?
• The Import Designs to Project Dialog Box fields
• Importing Designs into a Project

Import Designs to Project Wizard Help

What do you need help with?
• The Import Designs to Project Wizard Dialog Box fields
• Importing Designs into a Project

New Project Dialog Help

What do you need help with?
• The New Project Dialog Box fields
• Importing Designs into a Project

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 563

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Open Project Dialog Help

Open Project Dialog Help

What do you need help with?
• The Open Project Dialog Box fields

Options Help
What do you need help with?
• The Options Dialog Box fields
• Creating an Option Folder at Project Level
• Defining Inclusive and Exclusive Relationships for an Option
• Creating an Option Combination at Project Level
• Adding a Valid Selection to an Option Combination
• Deleting a Valid Selection from an Option Combination

Choose Options Help

What do you need help with?
• The New Project Dialog Box fields
• Creating an Option Folder at Project Level
• Defining Inclusive and Exclusive Relationships for an Option
• Creating an Option Combination at Project Level
• Adding a Valid Selection to an Option Combination
• Deleting a Valid Selection from an Option Combination

Project Preferences Help

What do you need help with?
• The Project Preferences concept
• The Project Preferences Dialog Box fields
• Project Preferences for Capital Harness MPM and Capital Harness TVM Designs
• Project Preferences for Capital HarnessXC and Capital ModularXC Designs
• Project Preferences for Capital Integrator Designs

564 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Copy Design Help

• Project Preferences for Capital Logic Designs

• Project Preferences for Capital Topology Designs
• Project Preferences for Platform Designs in Capital Systems Architect
• Project Preferences for Design Rule Checks
• General Project Preferences Applicable to all Applications
• Design Rule Check Descriptions

Copy Design Help

What do you need help with?
• The concept behind Copying a Design within a Project
• The Copy Design Dialog Box fields

Create New Design Revision Help

What do you need help with?
• The concepts behind Creating a Design Revision.
• The Create New Design Revision Dialog Box fields

Build Lists Help

What do you need help with?
• Understanding Build List concepts
• The Build lists Dialog Box fields
• Viewing a Build Lists Report

Design Effectivity Help

What do you need help with?
• Understanding Effectivity concepts
• Understanding Build List concepts
• The Design Effectivity Dialog Box fields
• Creating a Build List Using Effectivity

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 565

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Edit Build List Help

Edit Build List Help

What do you need help with?
• The Build List concept
• The Edit Build List Dialog Box fields
• Creating a Build List
• Creating a Build List Using Effectivity
• Defining a Current Vehicle Configuration Using a Dynamic Build List
• Editing an Existing Build List
• Copying the Content of a Build List to a New Build List

Applicable Options Help

What do you need help with?
• The Applicable Options Dialog Box fields

Compare Designs Help

What do you need help with?
• The Compare Designs Dialog Box fields
• Comparing Objects and Their Properties in Design Revisions or Build Lists

Design Revision/Build List Selection Help

What do you need help with?
• The Design Revision - Build List Selection Dialog Box fields
• Comparing Objects and Their Properties in Design Revisions or Build Lists

Design Rule Checks Help

What do you need help with?
• The Design Rule Checks Dialog Box fields
• Running Design Rule Checks
• Release Designs Help

566 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Edit Breakout/Spot Tape Details Help

Edit Breakout/Spot Tape Details Help

What do you need help with?
• The Edit Breakout/Spot Tape Details Dialog Box fields

Edit Design Properties Help

What do you need help with?
• The Edit Design Properties Dialog Box fields

Edit Effectivity Help

What do you need help with?
• The Edit Effectivity Dialog Box fields

Edit Option Expression Help

What do you need help with?
• The Edit Option Expression Dialog Box fields
• The Set Variant Dialog Box fields

Generate Advanced Names Help

What do you need help with?
• Understanding Advanced Naming Functionality concepts
• The Generate Advanced Names Dialog Box fields
• Generating Names for Selected Objects in a Diagram
• Generating Names for all Objects in a Build List, Design or Diagram

Map Equivalent Devices Help

What do you need help with?
• The Map Equivalent Devices Dialog Box fields
• Comparing Objects and Their Properties in Design Revisions or Build Lists

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 567

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
New Property Help

New Property Help

What do you need help with?
• The New Property Dialog Box fields

Part Selection Help

What do you need help with?
• The Part Selection Dialog Box fields
• Capital HarnessXC Parts Browser
• Capital Integrator Parts Browser
• Capital Logic Parts Browser

Project Usages Help

What do you need help with?
• The Project Usages Dialog Box fields

Select by Attribute/Property Help

What do you need help with?
• The Select by Attribute/Property Dialog Box fields

Select By Name Help

What do you need help with?
• The Select By Name Dialog Box fields

Edit Border Help

What do you need help with?
• The Edit Border Dialog Box fields

Add Text Help

What do you need help with?

568 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Image Selection Help

• The Add Text Dialog Box fields

Image Selection Help

What do you need help with?
• The Image Selection Dialog Box fields

Symbol Selection Help

What do you need help with?
• The Symbol Selection Dialog Box fields

Update Symbol - Options Help

What do you need help with?
• The Update Symbol - Options Dialog Box fields

Edit Properties: Propertied Graphic Help

What do you need help with?
• The Edit Properties - Propertied Graphic Dialog Box fields

Fill Pattern Selection Help

What do you need help with?
• The Fill Pattern Selection Dialog Box fields

Set Grid Defaults Help

What do you need help with?
• The Set Grid Defaults Dialog Box fields

Split Table Dialog Help

What do you need help with?
• The Split Table Dialog Box fields

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 569

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
New Property Help

New Property Help

What do you need help with?
• The New Property Dialog Box fields

Plugins Dialog Help

What do you need help with?
• The Plugins Dialog Box fields
• The Plugin Details Dialog Box fields
• Harness Processing Extensibility

Plugin Details Help

What do you need help with?
• The Plugin Details Dialog Box fields
• The Plugins Dialog Box fields

Batch Translate Help

What do you need help with?
• Understanding Diagram Language Translation concepts
• The Batch Translate Dialog Box fields
• “Converting Free Text Strings into Translations” on page 50

Edit Capital Configuration Help

What do you need help with?
• The Edit Capital Configuration Dialog Box fields

Release Designs Help

What do you need help with?
• The Release Designs Dialog Box fields
• Releasing Designs with Enforced Design Rule Checks

570 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Engineering Change Orders Help

Engineering Change Orders Help

What do you need help with?
• Understanding Engineering Change Orders concepts
• The Engineering Change Orders Dialog Box fields
• Creating an Engineering Change Order
• Harness Object Behavior on Applying ECO Changes
• Viewing Engineering Change Orders

Options (Apply ECO) Help

What do you need help with?
• Understanding Engineering Change Orders concepts
• The Options (Apply ECO) Dialog Box fields
• Capture and Apply a Change Within an ECO
• Recording a Change with an ECO
• Harness Object Behavior on Applying ECO Changes
• Applying a Stored Change from an ECO
• Viewing Engineering Change Orders

Change Manager Apply ECO Help

What do you need help with?
• Understanding Engineering Change Orders concepts
• The Change Manager Apply ECO Dialog Box fields
• Capture and Apply a Change Within an ECO
• Harness Object Behavior on Applying ECO Changes
• Viewing Engineering Change Orders

Change Manager Preview ECO Help

What do you need help with?
• Understanding Engineering Change Orders concepts

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 571

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Query Criteria Help

• The Change Manager Preview ECO Dialog Box fields

• Capture and Apply a Change Within an ECO
• Harness Object Behavior on Applying ECO Changes
• Viewing Engineering Change Orders

Query Criteria Help

What do you need help with?
• Understanding Engineering Change Orders concepts
• The Query Criteria Dialog Box fields
• Capture and Apply a Change Within an ECO
• Harness Object Behavior on Applying ECO Changes
• Viewing Engineering Change Orders

CGM Page Settings Help

What do you need help with?
• The CGM Page Settings Dialog Box fields
• Print to a File
• Print to File Dialog Box
• The PDF Page Settings Dialog Box fields
• The DXF Page Settings Dialog Box fields
• The SVG Page Settings Dialog Box fields

DXF Page Settings Help

What do you need help with?
• The DXF Page Settings Dialog Box fields
• Print to a File
• Print to File Dialog Box
• The PDF Page Settings Dialog Box fields
• The CGM Page Settings Dialog Box fields

572 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
PDF Page Settings Help

• The SVG Page Settings Dialog Box fields

PDF Page Settings Help

What do you need help with?
• The PDF Page Settings Dialog Box fields
• Print to a File
• Print to File Dialog Box
• The DXF Page Settings Dialog Box fields
• The CGM Page Settings Dialog Box fields
• The SVG Page Settings Dialog Box fields

SVG Page Settings Help

What do you need help with?
• The SVG Page Settings Dialog Box fields
• Print to a File
• Print to File Dialog Box
• The DXF Page Settings Dialog Box fields
• The CGM Page Settings Dialog Box fields
• The PDF Page Settings Dialog Box fields

Print Help
What do you need help with?
• The Print Dialog Box fields
• Print to a Printer or Plotter
• Printing a Single Diagram
• Printing All Diagrams in a Project
• Printing All Diagrams in a Design
• Printing Selected Print Regions

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 573

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Edit Print Region Groups Help

Edit Print Region Groups Help

What do you need help with?
• Understanding Print Regions
• The Edit Print Region Groups Dialog Box fields
• Adding a Print Region to a Design
• Editing a Print Region

Print to File Help

What do you need help with?
• The Print to File Dialog Box fields
• Print to a File
• CGM Page Settings Dialog Box
• DXF Page Settings Dialog Box
• PDF Page Settings Dialog Box
• SVG Page Settings Dialog Box

Project Diagram Settings Help

What do you need help with?
• The Project Diagram Settings Dialog Box fields
• Printing All Diagrams in a Project
• Printing Selected Diagrams in a Project

Edit File Name Help

What do you need help with?
• The Edit File Name Dialog Box fields
• Print to a File

Constraint Selection Help

What do you need help with?

574 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Define Rules Help

• Understanding Rules and Constraints concepts

• Usage Examples for Rules and Constraints in Capital Integrator
• Defining Rules
• Assigning a Rule or Constraint to an Object or Design
• Capital HarnessXC constraint descriptions
• Capital Harness Formboard constraint descriptions
• Capital Modular Harness constraint descriptions
• Capital Integrator constraint descriptions
• Capital Logic constraint descriptions
• Capital Topology constraint descriptions
• Constraints for Platform Designs in Capital Systems Architect
• The Constraint Selection Dialog Box fields

Define Rules Help

What do you need help with?
• Understanding Rules and Constraints concepts
• Usage Examples for Rules and Constraints in Capital Integrator
• Defining Rules
• Capital HarnessXC constraint descriptions
• Capital Harness Formboard constraint descriptions
• Capital Modular Harness constraint descriptions
• Capital Integrator constraint descriptions
• Capital Logic constraint descriptions
• Capital Topology constraint descriptions
• Constraints for Platform Designs in Capital Systems Architect
• Editable Elements in Constraints
• The Constraint Selection Dialog Box fields

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 575

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
Rule Selection Help

Rule Selection Help

What do you need help with?
• Understanding Rules and Constraints concepts
• Usage Examples for Rules and Constraints in Capital Integrator
• Defining Rules
• Assigning a Rule or Constraint to an Object or Design

Rules Tab in Properties Help

What do you need help with?
• The Rules Tab in Properties Dialog Box fields
• Assigning a Rule or Constraint to an Object or Design

Undoable Operation Confirmation Dialog Box Help

What do you need help with?
• The Undoable Operation Confirmation Dialog Box fields

Design Log Event Filter Options Help

What do you need help with?
• Design Logs
• Viewing Design Logs
• The Design Log Event Filter Options Dialog Box fields

Design Log Filter Options Help

What do you need help with?
• Design Logs
• Viewing Design Logs
• The Design Log Filter Options Dialog Box fields

576 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Dialog and Field Reference
Design Log Viewer Help

Design Log Viewer Help

What do you need help with?
• Design Logs
• Viewing Design Logs
• The Design Log Viewer Dialog Box fields

View Design Logs Help

What do you need help with?
• The concepts of Design Logs
• Viewing Design Logs
• Opening Design Logs
• The View Design Logs Dialog Box fields
• The Design Log Viewer Dialog Box fields
• The Design Log Filter Options Dialog Box fields
• The Design Log Event Filter Options Dialog Box fields

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 577

February 2016
Dialog and Field Reference
View Design Logs Help

578 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Chapter 11
Bridges

For further information on how to use bridges, the bridge adaptors and functionality available,
see the link below.

Available Topics
The following topics area available:
• Bridging Data In and Out of Capital User Guide.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 579

February 2016
Bridges
Available Topics

580 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Chapter 12
Capital Insight

Capital Insight is a product that provides functionality for measuring and assessing your designs
as well as conducting physical architectural trade studies in Capital Integrator (including Capital
Level Manager), Capital Topology, Capital HarnessXC, Capital ModularXC, or Capital
Systems Architect.
If you have a Capital Insight license, you have access to all of its functionality and an Insight
tab is available at the bottom left of the application window. This enables you to create studies
on designs and to create/edit metrics that you use in those studies. If you use Capital Level
Manager or Capital Systems Architect, this functionality is included by default.

If you do not have a license, you have access to default metrics that can be run against designs
to measure and assess them. A Metrics tab is available at the bottom left of the application
window. There are fewer default metrics and you cannot modify them. See Viewing Metric
Results for the Open Design for instructions on how to view them.

Enabling Capital Insight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582

Architectural Study Concepts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
Overview of Studies and Scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
Studies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
Scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
Creating a Study . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586
Editing a Study . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586
Deleting a Study . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
Creating a Scenario (and Study) from the Insight Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
Opening a Scenario . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588
Metrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590
Default Metrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590
Creating a Metric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592
Creating a Metric Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593
Deleting a Metric Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594
Editing a Metric Element Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594
Deleting a Metric Element Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595
Specifying the Architectural Cost of a Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595
Viewing Metric Results for the Open Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596
Snapshots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598
Taking a Snapshot of Metric Results for Current Design Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598
Editing a Snapshot Name and Display Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599
Opening a Snapshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 581

February 2016
Capital Insight
Enabling Capital Insight

Opening a Snapshot in the Insight Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600

Comparing Snapshots from One Study . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600
Comparing Snapshots from Different Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601
Comparing Snapshots from One or More Studies in the Insight Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601
Capital Insight Dialog and Field Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
Calculation Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604
Compare Snapshots Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
Compare Snapshot With Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606
Condition Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609
Edit Metrics Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612
Edit Scenario Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615
Edit Snapshot Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616
Edit Study Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617
Edit Study/Scenario Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618
Metrics/Insight Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619
Metrics Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623
New Scenario Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624
New Study Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625
Snapshot Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628
Take Snapshot Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630
Usage Example - Study of Alternative Harness Routing Paths. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630
Help Button Landing Pages for Capital Insight Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
Calculation Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
Compare Snapshots Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
Compare Snapshot With Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
Condition Dialog Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
Edit Metrics Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
Edit Scenario Properties Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
Edit Snapshot Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
Edit Study Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
Edit Study Properties Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
New Scenario Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
New Study Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
Snapshot Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
Take Snapshot Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636

Enabling Capital Insight

Capital Insight is enabled by default in a new installation. If it has been disabled, you can enable
(expose) the functionality by following the procedure in this topic.

582 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Capital Insight
Architectural Study Concepts

Note
If you do not have a Capital Insight license, a Metrics tab is available at the bottom left of
the application window. It has a subset of default metrics that can be run against designs to
measure and assess them. There are fewer default metrics and you cannot modify them. This tab
is visible regardless of whether Capital Insight is enabled.

Prerequisites
• You must have a valid license for Capital Insight.
Procedure
1. In the Capital Launcher, click Configuration (located under Support at the top); the
Edit Capital Configuration dialog box is displayed.
2. Select the Enable Insight option (located at the bottom of the dialog) and click OK.
3. Close and re-start the Capital applications; when you next open the applications, the
Capital Insight functionality will be available.

Note
Alternatively, you can enable Capital Insight by editing the clientprops.xml file in
the config directory of your Capital installation. Find the <packages> section in that
file and ensure that the line for insight reads: <feature check="YES" name="insight"></
feature>

Results
An Insight tab with all of its functionality enabled is available at the bottom left of the
application window. This enables you to create studies on designs and to create/edit metrics that
you use in those studies.
Related Topics
Capital Insight
Architectural Study Concepts
Metrics/Insight Tab

Architectural Study Concepts

There are various concepts used in architectural studies in Capital Insight.
See the following related topics for definitions:

Related Topics
Overview of Studies and Scenarios
Metrics

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 583

February 2016
Capital Insight
Architectural Study Concepts

Snapshots

584 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Capital Insight
Overview of Studies and Scenarios

Overview of Studies and Scenarios

Capital Insight uses the following concepts of studies and scenarios.
The following related topics explain how to create and edit studies and their scenarios.

Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
Scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
Creating a Study . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586
Editing a Study. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586
Deleting a Study . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
Creating a Scenario (and Study) from the Insight Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
Opening a Scenario . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588

Studies
A study exists within a project and is a container in which an entire physical architectural design
evaluation can take place. The different architectural changes being considered and compared
are created and accessed within the context of a study.
For each study, you can decide which Metrics will be available and used to measure your
scenarios.

A study can contain multiple Scenarios. When evaluating or editing a scenario, you can take
Snapshots of the metric results when design changes are made. The metric results of these
snapshots can then be compared with each other or with the current (live) data in a design.

For an example of a study (including its scenarios), see “Usage Example - Study of Alternative
Harness Routing Paths” on page 630.

Scenarios
Within a study, you can create multiple scenarios. The purpose of a scenario is to provide a
context for one of the design options being considered and compared as part of an architectural
exercise (that is, a study). You associate each scenario with a specific design revision. You can
associate a design revision with multiple scenarios. When a design revision is associated with a
scenario, you can still edit it using the standard functionality of the application for which it was
created.
The key metrics used in a scenario can be generated and viewed as its design revision is being
developed. When two or more scenarios are available within a study, you can compare their key
metrics. You might then carry forward the preferred scenario as the basis of the production
design.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 585

February 2016
Capital Insight
Creating a Study

Creating a Study
This topic explains how to create a study and its scenarios.
Procedure
1. Right-click on the project in the Project Browser Window and select New Study; the
New Study Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Specify the Name.
3. Add the scenarios that you want to use:

a. Click Add new Scenario to Study ( ); a row is added to the Scenarios table.

b. Specify the Name of the scenario and the Design to be associated with the scenario.
c. Repeat steps a and b for each scenario you want to create.
4. In the Metrics window, select the metric elements that you want to use in the study. For
each metric, click the Change Default Chart Type to display for Metric dropdown list
(located on the right of the metric line) and select the default chart type that you want to
use for the metric when viewing metric results.
5. Select the Groups to make available to the Scenarios in the study, and click OK; the
study is added to the Project Browser Window and the scenarios are listed below it.
Related Topics
Overview of Studies and Scenarios
Editing a Study
Deleting a Study
Creating a Scenario (and Study) from the Insight Tab
Opening a Scenario

Editing a Study
This topic explains how to edit an existing study.
When editing a study, you can:

• add, edit and remove scenarios

• edit the metrics used in the study
• edit the groups applied to the study metric results

586 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Capital Insight
Deleting a Study

Procedure
1. Right-click on the study in the Project Browser Window and select Edit Study; the Edit
Study Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Edit the study as required and click OK.
Related Topics
Overview of Studies and Scenarios
Creating a Study
Deleting a Study
Creating a Scenario (and Study) from the Insight Tab
Opening a Scenario

Deleting a Study
This topic explains how to delete a study.
Procedure
1. Right-click on the study in the Project Browser Window
2. Select Delete; all scenarios within the study are deleted along with the associations to
designs. The designs are not deleted
Related Topics
Overview of Studies and Scenarios
Creating a Scenario (and Study) from the Insight Tab
Creating a Study
Editing a Study
Opening a Scenario

Creating a Scenario (and Study) from the Insight

Tab
You can create a new scenario (and new study if required) from the Insight tab displayed at the
bottom left of the application. The system automatically associates the scenario with the design
currently open in the diagram window.
Procedure
1. On the Insight tab (see Metrics/Insight Tab), click the Create a new scenario ( )
button; the New Scenario Dialog Box is displayed.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 587

February 2016
Capital Insight
Opening a Scenario

2. In the Study field, either select an existing study from the dropdown list or enter a name
for a new study.
3. Specify the Name of the scenario and click Create Scenario.
If you selected an existing study, you have completed creating the scenario.
If you entered the name for a new study, the New Study Dialog Box is displayed with
the new scenario in the Scenarios table (associated with the currently open design).
4. If required, add any additional scenarios that you want to use in the study:

a. Click Add new Scenario to Study ( ); a row is added to the Scenarios table.

b. Specify the Name of the scenario and the Design to be associated with the scenario.
c. Repeat steps a and b for each scenario you want to create.
5. In the Metrics window, select the metric elements that you want to use in the study. For
each metric, click the Change Default Chart Type to display for Metric dropdown list
(located on the right of the metric line) and select the default chart type that you want to
use for the metric when viewing metric results.
6. Select the Groups to make available to the scenarios in the study, and click OK.
Results
• The scenario is added to the Project Browser Window below the appropriate study.
• The currently open design/scenario switches to the newly created scenario.
Related Topics
Overview of Studies and Scenarios
Creating a Study
Editing a Study
Opening a Scenario

Opening a Scenario
This topic explains how to open a scenario and view its metric results.
Procedure
1. Double-click the scenario in the Project Browser Window
or
Right-click on the scenario in the Project Browser Window
2. Select Open Scenario.

588 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Capital Insight
Opening a Scenario

Results
• The design associated with the scenario is opened in the diagram window.
• The Insight tab (bottom left of application, see Metrics/Insight Tab) and Metrics Table
(in the Output Window at the bottom of the application) display the metric results for the
design.
For information about the interface elements (including information on changing chart type and
filtering the display of metric results, see “Metrics/Insight Tab” on page 619).
Related Topics
Overview of Studies and Scenarios
Creating a Study
Editing a Study
Deleting a Study

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 589

February 2016
Capital Insight
Metrics

Metrics
A metric is a single value calculated as a measure of ‘goodness’ (for example, cost or weight).
You define metrics at system level and you can apply them in all projects.
Each metric is calculated by adding together values for different types of object. These are
called metric elements and are listed separately when displayed in the interface. Metric
elements can be turned on or off when viewing a study to control whether they are used in
calculations or not.

You can export and import metrics from Capital Project, see “Exporting Metrics” or “Importing
Metrics” in the Capital Project User Guide.

Default Metrics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590

Creating a Metric. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592
Creating a Metric Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593
Deleting a Metric Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594
Editing a Metric Element Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594
Deleting a Metric Element Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595
Specifying the Architectural Cost of a Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595
Viewing Metric Results for the Open Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596

Default Metrics
A metric can be applied to multiple studies (and scenarios) and can be used to judge which
scenario within a study best addresses the needs of that study.
Depending on whether you have a Capital Insight license, the default metrics supplied for the
Metrics or Insight tab are:

• Measure: Cost
Calculates the total architectural cost of design objects. Available only if you have a
Capital Insight license.
• Measure: Count
Calculates the total number of objects of a particular object type.
• Measure: Length
Calculates the total length of wires.
• Measure: Weight
Calculates the total weight of design objects. Available only if you have a Capital
Insight license.

590 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Capital Insight
Default Metrics

• Optimize: Harness Complexity

Used by Capital Level Manager to automatically optimize complexity solutions.
Available only if you have a Capital Insight license and visible only when a scenario is
open in the diagram window.
• Report: Blank Cost Attribute
Counts the number of objects that do not have an assigned cost. These objects are
therefore reporting estimations in the cost metric. Available only if you have a Capital
Insight license and visible only when a scenario is open in the diagram window.
• Report: Blank Part Number
Counts the number of objects that do not have an assigned part number. Available only
if you have a Capital Insight license and visible only when a scenario is open in the
diagram window.
• Report: Blank Weight Attribute
Counts the number of objects that do not have an assigned weight. These objects are
therefore reporting estimations in the weight metric. Available only if you have a
Capital Insight license and visible only when a scenario is open in the diagram window.
• Report: Harness Complexity
Used to see complexity-related attributes quickly (for example, level counts and
giveaway costs). Available only if you have a Capital Insight license and visible only
when a scenario is open in the diagram window.
Examples of metric elements for a cost metric could be Cost of Splices, Cost of Wires, Cost of
Connectors, and so on. The total cost would then be calculated by adding together each of these
metric elements.

Each metric element is calculated from one of a set of element definitions. Each definition will
apply to a subset of the objects in the metric element and only one applies to any particular
object. Examples for a Cost of Splice metric element could be the cost of a center-strip splice or
the cost of a normal splice.

Metric results can be viewed:

• For the current (live) design data on the Metrics/Insight Tab at the bottom left of the
application.
• For a snapshot either on the Insight tab or in the Snapshot Dialog Box. Available only if
you have a Capital Insight license.
• For comparing snapshots either in the Compare Snapshots Dialog Box or Compare
Snapshot With Dialog Box. Available only if you have a Capital Insight license.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 591

February 2016
Capital Insight
Creating a Metric

See the Capital Insight Dialog and Field Reference topics, for information on filtering the
metric results and changing the chart type used in these dialogs.

If you have a Capital Insight license, within the Edit Metrics Dialog Box, you can modify the
default metrics or even define new ones based on attributes and properties of design objects. For
even more flexibility, you can develop custom metrics and groups as part of an extensibility
plugin. For more information about developing and using extensibility plugins, see the
PluginDevelopment.pdf file that is located in the doc\plugin directory of your Capital
installation.

Related Topics
Creating a Metric
Creating a Metric Element
Deleting a Metric Element
Editing a Metric Element Definition
Deleting a Metric Element Definition
Specifying the Architectural Cost of a Component
Viewing Metric Results for the Open Design

Creating a Metric
This topic explains how to create a new metric.
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Metrics; the Edit Metrics Dialog Box is displayed.

2. Click Add New Metric ( ); a new row is created in the Definition window.

3. Edit the name of the metric. Click elsewhere on the dialog to finish; the row is displayed
like the other metrics.
Related Topics
Metrics
Creating a Metric Element
Deleting a Metric Element
Editing a Metric Element Definition
Deleting a Metric Element Definition
Specifying the Architectural Cost of a Component

592 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Capital Insight
Creating a Metric Element

Creating a Metric Element

This topic explains how to create a new metric element. Metric elements can be turned on or off
in an architectural study to control whether they are included in calculations.
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Metrics; the Edit Metrics Dialog Box is displayed.
2. On the relevant metric type row, click the plus symbol (+); a new metric element name
is added below the metric.

Note
You can duplicate an existing metric element by right-clicking it and choosing
Duplicate; the duplicate is added below the same metric. Alternatively, you can
right-click an existing metric element and choose Copy or Cut. Right-click another
metric or one of its metric elements and choose Paste to add the copied or cut element
below it.

3. Edit the metric element name and click the color square in that row to select the color
that you want used to display the results for that metric element.
4. Define the element definitions:

a. Click Add New Definition ( ); the template for the new element definition is
added to the window.
b. Edit the element definition as required.
c. Repeat steps a and b for each element definition that you want to add.

Caution
The order in which the element definitions are listed dictates the order in which
they are calculated for design objects. If a design object matches more than one
element definition, only the value calculated for the first matching definition is
included in the metric result. This means that you should put the more specific
definitions at the top of the list and general definitions nearer the bottom.

5. Click OK.
Related Topics
Metrics
Creating a Metric
Deleting a Metric Element
Editing a Metric Element Definition
Deleting a Metric Element Definition

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 593

February 2016
Capital Insight
Deleting a Metric Element

Specifying the Architectural Cost of a Component

Deleting a Metric Element

This topic explains how to delete a metric element.
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Metrics; the Edit Metrics Dialog Box is displayed.
2. In the Metrics window, either:
• Right-click the metric element and choose Delete.
• Click the metric element and click the minus symbol (-) on the relevant metric.
The metric element is deleted.
Related Topics
Metrics
Creating a Metric
Creating a Metric Element
Editing a Metric Element Definition
Deleting a Metric Element Definition
Specifying the Architectural Cost of a Component

Editing a Metric Element Definition

This topic explains how to edit the metric element definitions of an existing metric.
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Metrics; the Edit Metrics Dialog Box is displayed.
2. In the Metrics window, click the metric element; the element definitions are displayed in
the Definition window.
3. Edit the element definitions as required.
4. Click OK.
Related Topics
Metrics
Creating a Metric
Creating a Metric Element

594 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Capital Insight
Deleting a Metric Element Definition

Deleting a Metric Element Definition

Specifying the Architectural Cost of a Component

Deleting a Metric Element Definition

This topic explains how to delete a metric element definition from an existing metric.
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Metrics; the Edit Metrics Dialog Box is displayed.
2. In the Metrics window, click the metric element; the element definitions for the metric
element are displayed in the Definition window.
3. In the Definition window, select the element definition to be deleted and click Remove
Selected Definition ( ). The element definition is removed from the window.

4. Click OK.
Related Topics
Metrics
Creating a Metric
Deleting a Metric Element
Editing a Metric Element Definition
Creating a Metric Element
Specifying the Architectural Cost of a Component

Specifying the Architectural Cost of a Component

This topic explains how to specify the Architectural Cost attribute for an instance of an object
in a design. The default Cost metric uses this attribute when calculating its result.
The attribute can be referenced when defining new metric element definitions. It does not use a
particular unit of measurement and is a generic value used for comparing the cost of a
component. For example, a cheaper component may have a value of 1 whereas a more
expensive component may have a value of 4 (four times the value of the cheaper component).

Note
If the object instance has a library part associated, the Architectural Cost attribute takes its
value from the library part definition in Capital Library and is read-only in the design tool.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 595

February 2016
Capital Insight
Viewing Metric Results for the Open Design

Procedure
1. Right-click on the object in the Design Browser Window or the Diagram Window and
select Properties; the Edit Properties dialog is displayed.
2. Click the General tab; the Architectural Cost attribute is listed. Edit the Value as
required and click OK.
Related Topics
Metrics
Creating a Metric
Creating a Metric Element
Editing a Metric Element Definition
Deleting a Metric Element Definition
Deleting a Metric Element

Viewing Metric Results for the Open Design

If you do not have a Capital Insight license, you can view the results of some default metrics for
the design currently open in the diagram window.
The results for the Metrics are displayed on the Metrics tab displayed on the bottom left of the
application window (see “Metrics/Insight Tab” on page 619 for full details of this tab) and in
the Metrics Table displayed in the Output Window at the bottom of the application.

For example, you could use the Length metric grouped by harness to view the length of wiring
in each harness.

Procedure
1. Click the Metrics tab.
2. Use the Group dropdown list to select the sub-set of design objects for which you want
to display metric results.

3. Click the Cycle Metric to display arrows to scroll through the available metrics.

The metric results chart on the tab updates as you scroll through the metrics.
The Metrics Table also updates in the Output Window.

Note
By default, you can display the results for Measure: Count and Measure: Length
metrics. Further metrics are available if you have a Capital Insight license.

596 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Capital Insight
Viewing Metric Results for the Open Design

Related Topics
Metrics
Capital Insight

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 597

February 2016
Capital Insight
Snapshots

Snapshots
A snapshot stores the metric results at a given design stage for a scenario.
These results can be compared with the current metric results for a scenario or with another
snapshot, from the same or a different study).

Taking a Snapshot of Metric Results for Current Design Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598

Editing a Snapshot Name and Display Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599
Opening a Snapshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599
Opening a Snapshot in the Insight Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600
Comparing Snapshots from One Study . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600
Comparing Snapshots from Different Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601
Comparing Snapshots from One or More Studies in the Insight Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601

Taking a Snapshot of Metric Results for Current

Design Data
This topic explains how to take a snapshot of the metric results for the current design data.
Procedure
1. Open the scenario for which you want to take a snapshot (see Opening a Scenario).
2. On the Metrics/Insight Tab, click the Take a Snapshot of the current data button
( ); the Take Snapshot Dialog Box is displayed.

3. Specify the Name for the snapshot and the color you want to use to display the metric
results for it when comparing snapshots.
4. Click OK; the snapshot is added below the scenario in the Project Browser Window.
Related Topics
Snapshots
Editing a Snapshot Name and Display Color
Opening a Snapshot
Opening a Snapshot in the Insight Tab
Comparing Snapshots from One Study
Comparing Snapshots from Different Studies
Comparing Snapshots from One or More Studies in the Insight Tab

598 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Capital Insight
Editing a Snapshot Name and Display Color

Editing a Snapshot Name and Display Color

This topic explains how to edit the name and display color of an existing snapshot of metric
results.
Procedure
1. Right-click on the snapshot in the Project Browser Window and select Edit; the Edit
Snapshot Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Edit the name and color as required.
3. Click OK.
Related Topics
Snapshots
Taking a Snapshot of Metric Results for Current Design Data
Opening a Snapshot
Opening a Snapshot in the Insight Tab
Comparing Snapshots from One Study
Comparing Snapshots from Different Studies
Comparing Snapshots from One or More Studies in the Insight Tab

Opening a Snapshot
This topic explains how to open the Snapshot Dialog Box that displays the metric results both in
a chart and a table.
Procedure
1. Right-click on the snapshot in the Project Browser Window and select Open; the
Snapshot Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Filter the metric results as required. See “Snapshot Dialog Box” on page 628 for
information about the user-interface elements available on the dialog.
Related Topics
Snapshots
Taking a Snapshot of Metric Results for Current Design Data
Editing a Snapshot Name and Display Color
Opening a Snapshot in the Insight Tab
Comparing Snapshots from One Study
Comparing Snapshots from Different Studies

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 599

February 2016
Capital Insight
Opening a Snapshot in the Insight Tab

Comparing Snapshots from One or More Studies in the Insight Tab

Opening a Snapshot in the Insight Tab

This topic explains how to open a snapshot in the Metrics/Insight Tab, which is located at the
bottom left of the application when a scenario is open.
Procedure
1. Open the scenario to which the snapshot belongs (see “Opening a Scenario” on
page 588).
2. On the Metrics/Insight Tab, select the snapshot from the <Live> dropdown list; the
metric results for the snapshot are displayed in the metric results chart.
Related Topics
Snapshots
Taking a Snapshot of Metric Results for Current Design Data
Editing a Snapshot Name and Display Color
Opening a Snapshot
Comparing Snapshots from One Study
Comparing Snapshots from Different Studies
Comparing Snapshots from One or More Studies in the Insight Tab

Comparing Snapshots from One Study

This topic explains how to compare the metric results from multiple snapshots from one study.
Procedure
1. Right-click on a snapshot in the Project Browser Window and select Compare
snapshot with followed by the second snapshot to be compared; the Compare Snapshot
With Dialog Box is displayed.
2. You can add other snapshots to the comparison by right-clicking the metric results chart
and selecting Add to Comparison followed by a snapshot or by dragging the additional
snapshot from the Project Browser Window into the Compare Snapshot With Dialog
Box.
3. Filter the metric results as required. See “Compare Snapshot With Dialog Box” on
page 606 for information about the user-interface elements available on the dialog.
Related Topics
Snapshots

600 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Capital Insight
Comparing Snapshots from Different Studies

Taking a Snapshot of Metric Results for Current Design Data

Editing a Snapshot Name and Display Color
Opening a Snapshot
Opening a Snapshot in the Insight Tab
Comparing Snapshots from Different Studies
Comparing Snapshots from One or More Studies in the Insight Tab

Comparing Snapshots from Different Studies

This topic explains how to compare the metric results from multiple snapshots from different
studies.
Procedure
1. Right-click on a study name in the Project Browser Window and select Compare
Snapshots; the Compare Snapshots Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Select the snapshots that you want to compare by adding them to the Chosen window
and click OK; the Compare Snapshot With Dialog Box is displayed.
3. You can add other snapshots to the comparison by right-clicking the metric results chart
and selecting Add to Comparison followed by a snapshot.
4. Filter the metric results as required. See “Compare Snapshot With Dialog Box” on
page 606 for information about the user-interface elements available on the dialog.
Related Topics
Snapshots
Taking a Snapshot of Metric Results for Current Design Data
Editing a Snapshot Name and Display Color
Opening a Snapshot
Opening a Snapshot in the Insight Tab
Comparing Snapshots from One Study
Comparing Snapshots from One or More Studies in the Insight Tab

Comparing Snapshots from One or More Studies in

the Insight Tab
This topic explains how to compare the metric results from multiple snapshots from one or more
studies in the Metrics/Insight Tab, which is located at the bottom left of the application when a
scenario is open.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 601

February 2016
Capital Insight
Comparing Snapshots from One or More Studies in the Insight Tab

Procedure
1. Open the scenario to which the first snapshot belongs (see “Opening a Scenario” on
page 588).

2. On the Metrics/Insight Tab, click Compare Snap-Shots ( ); the metric results for all
snapshots in the scenario are displayed in a spider chart in the metric results chart.
3. If you want to include a snapshot from another scenario or study in the comparison,
right-click on the metric results chart and select Add to comparison followed by the
snapshot.
4. Filter the metric results as required. See Metrics/Insight Tab for information about the
user-interface elements available on the dialog.
Related Topics
Snapshots
Taking a Snapshot of Metric Results for Current Design Data
Editing a Snapshot Name and Display Color
Opening a Snapshot
Opening a Snapshot in the Insight Tab
Comparing Snapshots from One Study
Comparing Snapshots from Different Studies

602 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Capital Insight
Capital Insight Dialog and Field Reference

Capital Insight Dialog and Field Reference

This section offers a description of all input dialogs used in the creation, maintenance and
viewing of studies. For each dialog, all fields are listed, along with a full description of the
field’s function.
Calculation Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604
Compare Snapshots Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
Compare Snapshot With Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606
Condition Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609
Edit Metrics Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612
Edit Scenario Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615
Edit Snapshot Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616
Edit Study Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617
Edit Study/Scenario Properties Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618
Metrics/Insight Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619
Metrics Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623
New Scenario Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624
New Study Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625
Snapshot Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628
Take Snapshot Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 603

February 2016
Capital Insight
Calculation Dialog Box

Calculation Dialog Box

To access: Click on an editable string in a metric element definition displayed in the Edit
Metrics Dialog Box and click Edit or New.
Used to create or edit a calculation using a simple query expression. This calculation is used
when a total is calculated for the metric element.
Objects

Table 12-1. Calculation Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Calculation Used to define the simple query expression.
window
Click the plus icon, ( ), to add a term to the expression.
Depending on the preceding element, the following terms
may be available:
• Attribute/Property/Value
If you select Attribute or Property, that term is added
to the window. Click the term to display either a
dropdown list of available attributes or a field where you
can enter a property name.
If you select Value, 0.0 is added to the window. Click
that value to display a field where you can enter a
different value.
• Operators
Select an operator from +, - , x or /.
To clear the window, click Clear Calculation ( ).
To delete the last term in the expression, click Remove
last element ( ). Click Go to Advanced Editor ( )
to access the Edit Query Expressions dialog where you
can use advanced query editing functionality (see the
Query Expressions topic in the Capital Project User
Guide for information on how to use this dialog).
• Brackets can be used to control the query evaluation
order.

Related Topics
Creating a Metric Element
Editing a Metric Element Definition
Deleting a Metric Element Definition

604 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Capital Insight
Compare Snapshots Dialog Box

Compare Snapshots Dialog Box

To access: Right-click on a study name in the Project Browser Window and select Compare
Snapshots
Used to compare the metric results from multiple snapshots from different studies.
Objects

Table 12-2. Compare Snapshots Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Studies Specifies the study for which snapshots are listed in the
Available window.
Scenarios Specifies the scenario for which snap-shops are listed in the
Available window.
Available Lists snapshots that are available for the specified study
(Studies field) and scenario (Scenarios field). Select the
snapshots that you want to include in the comparison and
click Add to move them to the Chosen window. You can
click Add All to move them all. Change the values in the
Studies field and Scenarios field to select further snapshots
from other studies and scenarios.
Chosen Lists the snapshots that have been selected for comparison.
To remove a snapshot, select it and click Remove. To
remove all selected snapshots, click Remove All.

Related Topics
Comparing Snapshots from Different Studies

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 605

February 2016
Capital Insight
Compare Snapshot With Dialog Box

Compare Snapshot With Dialog Box

To access: Right-click a snapshot in the Project Browser Window and select Compare
Snapshot With, followed by the second snapshot to be compared.
Used to compare the metric results from multiple snapshots from one study.
Objects

Table 12-3. Compare Snapshot With Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Group Select the sub-set of design objects for which you want to display
metric results.
Metrics are calculated to return a single numerical value for each
Group Type in a design.
Cycle Metric to Click the green arrows at the top of the reports to scroll between
Display the results for different metrics. When you click an arrow, the metric
results chart changes accordingly.
Alternatively, click the icon (located between the arrows) to select
a metric from a list.
The name of the metric for which results are currently displayed is
shown between the arrows.
Metric Results Displays the metric results for snapshots being compared in a spider
Chart chart.
You can add a snapshot to the comparison by right-clicking on the
metric results chart and selecting Add to Comparison followed by
the snapshot.
You can use the Group field to specify the sub-sets of design objects
for which you want to display metric results.
Below the Metrics table is a legend listing the snapshots currently
displayed in the chart together with the display colors for those
snapshots. To hide a snapshot in the chart, click it in the legend; it is
then grayed out. To display it again, click the grayed-out entry in the
legend.
To show or hide particular metric elements, you can right-click on the
chart and select Show Metrics or Hide Metrics followed by a metric
name.
You can select and copy the chart by right-clicking on it and selecting
Copy Chart. The report can be pasted into other applications, such as
Microsoft Word.

606 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Capital Insight
Compare Snapshot With Dialog Box

Table 12-3. Compare Snapshot With Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Metrics Table Displays the same data as displayed in the metric results chart.
You can select and copy any range of cells. Cells can be pasted into
other applications, such as Microsoft Excel or Microsoft Word. When
you copy cells, the column header is also copied.
Enter Filter String Applies a filter to the Group names on the metric results chart. In the
( ) / Clear Filter field next to the Enter Filter String icon ( ), enter a series of
String ( ) characters.
For example, if Harness is selected in the Group field and the chart
shows results for harnesses named BODY and DOORS, you could
enter the string BO so that the results for DOORS disappear from the
chart.
Click the Clear Filter String icon ( ) to clear the filter.

Usage Notes
The default groups for Capital Integrator, Capital Topology, and Capital Systems Architect are:

• Harness
• Multicore Type
• None
• Option
• Option Expression
• Vehicle Model
• Wire Material
• Wire Specification
Capital Systems Architect also has the following groups (which are listed for all applications):

• Carrier
• Carrier Type
• Component
• System Component Type
• ECU
The default groups for Capital HarnessXC and Capital ModularXC are:

• Assembly

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 607

February 2016
Capital Insight
Compare Snapshot With Dialog Box

• Component Type
• Library Group
• Multicore Type
• None
• Option
• Option Expression
• Terminal Material
• Wire Material
• Wire Specification

608 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Capital Insight
Condition Dialog Box

Condition Dialog Box

To access: click on an editable string in a metric element definition displayed in the Edit Metrics
Dialog Box and click Edit or New.
Used to create or edit a condition using a simple query expression. This condition is used to
determine which of a set of metric element definitions is used to calculate the metric element
value for a particular object.
Objects

Table 12-4. Condition Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Name Enter the name of the query expression used for the
condition. The query expression is saved to the database and
this name will be listed to all users wherever they can select
a query expression in the system. Mandatory.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 609

February 2016
Capital Insight
Condition Dialog Box

Table 12-4. Condition Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Condition Used to define the simple query expression. Mandatory.
Window
Click the plus icon, ( ), to add a term to the expression.
Depending on the preceding element, the following terms
may be available:
• Attribute/Property/Value
If you select Attribute or Property, that term is added
to the window. Click the term to display either a
dropdown list of available attributes or a field where you
can enter a property name.
If you select Value, 0.0 is added to the window. Click
that value to display a field where you can enter a
different value.
• Brackets can be used to control the query evaluation
order.
• Operators
Select an operator from the following:
= Equal to
≠ Not equal to
< Less than
> Greater than
≤ Less than or equal to
≥ Greater than or equal to
is Set - this means that the attribute or property is not
blank
• AND/OR
Specifies whether you want to add something to the
previous term (AND) or whether you want to specify an
alternative to the previous term (OR).
To clear the window, click Clear Calculation ( ). To
delete the last term in the expression, click Remove last
element ( ). Click Go to Advanced Editor ( ) to
access the Edit Query Expressions dialog where you
can use advanced query editing functionality (see the
Query Expressions topic in the Capital Project User
Guide for information on how to use this dialog).

Related Topics
Creating a Metric Element

610 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Capital Insight
Condition Dialog Box

Editing a Metric Element Definition

Deleting a Metric Element Definition

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 611

February 2016
Capital Insight
Edit Metrics Dialog Box

Edit Metrics Dialog Box

To access: Press Space Bar and enter Metrics or select Edit Metrics on the Insight tab.
Used to add, edit and delete the Metrics that are available for use in Studies in Capital Insight or
in Capital Level Manager.
Note
If you are using Capital Level Manager, click Edit Metrics Dialog Box (Capital Level
Manager).

If you are using Capital Insight, continue reading this topic.

Objects

Table 12-5. Edit Metrics Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Metrics Lists the existing metrics and their metric elements. The default types
are:
• Cost
Calculates the total architectural cost of design objects.
• Count
Calculates the total number of objects of a particular object type.
• Length
Calculates the total length of wires.
• Weight
Calculates the total weight of design objects.
Definition Lists the element definitions of the metric element currently selected
in the Definition window.
To add a new element definition, click Add New Definition ( ).
The template for the new element definition is added to the window.

Usage Notes
• You can edit metrics only if you have the Edit Metrics permission set for your user
account.
• The metric elements are displayed in rows below each metric. The color square on a
metric element row indicates the color used to display results for that metric. To change
the color, click the square.
• When you click on a metric element, the element definitions are listed in the Definition
window.

612 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Capital Insight
Edit Metrics Dialog Box

• You can add a new metric by clicking Add New Metric ( ). A new row is created and
you edit the name of the metric. Click elsewhere on the dialog to finish; the row is
displayed like the other metrics.
• You can create a metric element by clicking the plus symbol (+) on a metric row. A new
metric element name is added below the metric. Edit the metric element name and click
the color square in that row to select the color that you want used to display the results
for that metric element.
To delete a metric element, select it and click the minus symbol (-) on the metric row.
• You can duplicate an existing metric element by right-clicking it and choosing
Duplicate; the duplicate is added below the same metric. Alternatively, you can right-
click an existing metric element and choose Copy or Cut. Right-click another metric or
one of its metric elements and choose Paste to add the copied or cut element below it.
• The order in which the element definitions are listed dictates the order in which they are
calculated for design objects. If a design object matches more than one element
definition, only the value calculated for the first matching definition is included in the
metric result. This means that you should put the more specific definitions at the top of
the list and general definitions nearer the bottom.
• You can move an element up or down in the list by selecting it and clicking Move
Selected Definition Up in the list ( ) or Move Selected Definition Down in the list
( ).

• To delete a element definition, select it and click Remove Selected Definition ( ).

The element definition is removed from the window.
• The template for a element definition is:
Object Type matching {any} value is Expression
The red and green text indicates editable strings:
o Click Object Type to select an object type from a list.
o Click {any} to display a menu where you can select or create a condition using a
query expression. Either:
• Select an existing query expression directly from the menu. If you select {any},
all objects of the selected Object Type are considered by the element definition.
• Select New to display the Condition Dialog Box where you can define a query
expression. The query expression is saved to the database and will be available
to all users wherever they can select a query expression in the system.
• Select Edit to display either the Condition dialog box or the Edit Query
Expressions dialog.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 613

February 2016
Capital Insight
Edit Metrics Dialog Box

The displayed dialog depends on which dialog was used to create the condition
currently displayed in the metric template.
o Click Expression to display the Calculation dialog box where you can create a
calculation using a query expression.

614 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Capital Insight
Edit Scenario Properties Dialog Box

Edit Scenario Properties Dialog Box

To access: click the ellipsis (...) in the Props column for a scenario on the New Study Dialog
Box or the Edit Study Dialog Box.
Used to edit properties for a scenario.
Objects

Table 12-6. Edit Scenario Properties Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Properties To add a property to the scenario, click the New button,
Table enter a Property Name in the New Property Dialog, then
click OK. The new property is added to the list. A property
consists of the following fields:
• Name
A unique identifier for the property. Mandatory.
• Value
The value assigned to the property. Optional.
• Type
The data type of the value. Mandatory.
The following types are available:
• String - a mix of letters, numerical or special
characters
• Integer - a whole number
• Float - a number including a decimal (floating) point

Usage Notes
• If you enter a Value that is not supported by the selected Type, the Value is displayed in
red text and the OK button is disabled.
• To delete a property from the list, select it and click the Delete button, then click OK to
confirm the deletion.
Related Topics
Creating a Study
Editing a Study

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 615

February 2016
Capital Insight
Edit Snapshot Dialog Box

Edit Snapshot Dialog Box

To access: Right-click a snapshot in the Project Browser Window and select Edit.
Used to edit the name and display color of an existing snapshot of metric results.
Objects
See the descriptions for the fields of the “Take Snapshot Dialog Box” on page 630.
Related Topics
Editing a Snapshot Name and Display Color

616 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Capital Insight
Edit Study Dialog Box

Edit Study Dialog Box

To access: Right-click a study in the Project Browser Window and select Edit Study.
Used to edit an existing study in a project.
Objects
See the descriptions for the fields of the “New Study Dialog Box” on page 625.
Related Topics
Editing a Study

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 617

February 2016
Capital Insight
Edit Study/Scenario Properties Dialog Box

Edit Study/Scenario Properties Dialog Box

To access: Clicking the Properties button on the New Scenario Dialog Box, New Study Dialog
Box or the Edit Study Dialog Box.
Used to edit properties for a study or scenario.
Objects

Table 12-7. Edit Study/Scenario Property Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Properties To add a property to the study/scenario, click the New
Table button, enter a Property Name in the New Property
Dialog, then click OK. The new property is added to the list.
A property consists of the following fields:
• Name
A unique identifier for the property. Mandatory.
• Value
The value assigned to the property. Optional.
• Type
The data type of the value. Mandatory.
The following types are available:
• String - a mix of letters, numerical or special characters
• Integer - a whole number
• Float - a number including a decimal (floating) point

Usage Notes
• If you enter a Value that is not supported by the selected Type, the Value is displayed in
red text and the OK button is disabled.
• To delete a property from the list, select it and click the Delete button, then click OK to
confirm the deletion.
Related Topics
Creating a Study
Editing a Study

618 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Capital Insight
Metrics/Insight Tab

Metrics/Insight Tab
To access: This tab is displayed with the tabs at the bottom left of the application when a design
or scenario is opened (except when working in multi-user mode).
Used to view metric results for the currently open design or scenario. If you have a Capital
Insight license, you can also create a new scenario (and new study if required) from here.
Note
If you have a Capital Insight license, this tab is called Insight. If you do not have a license,
this tab is called Metrics. See “Capital Insight” on page 581 for an introduction to the
functionality available from this tab.

Description
Metrics are calculated to return a single numerical value for each group selected in a design.

This tab can be dragged from its location to display it as a separate floating dialog. Close the
dialog to return it to the original tab location.

Objects

Table 12-8. Metrics/Insight Tab Contents

Field Description
Create a new Disabled if you do not have a Capital Insight license.
scenario Opens the New Scenario Dialog Box from which you can create a new
scenario (and new study if required). See “Creating a Scenario (and
Study) from the Insight Tab” on page 587.
Group Select the sub-set of design objects for which you want to display metric
results.
Take a Snapshot of Disabled if you do not have a Capital Insight license.
the current data Displays the Take Snapshot Dialog Box that allows you to take a
snapshot of the metric results for the current (live) design data.
<Live> Dropdown Disabled if you do not have a Capital Insight license.
List Located to the right of the Take a Snapshot of the current data button.
Select a snapshot for which you want to view metric results in the
Insight tab. To return to the metrics for the current (live) design data,
select <Live>.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 619

February 2016
Capital Insight
Metrics/Insight Tab

Table 12-8. Metrics/Insight Tab Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Compare Snap- Disabled if you do not have a Capital Insight license.
Shots Displays a spider chart in the metric results chart that contains data from
all snapshots for the currently open scenario. It also contains data for the
current (live) design.
Below the metric results chart is a legend listing the snapshots for which
data is currently displayed in the report. It also lists the display colors
for those snapshots. To hide a snapshot in the report, click it in the
legend; it is then grayed out. To display it again, click the grayed-out
entry in the legend.
When comparing snapshot data, the button changes to Revert to Live
Snapshot ( ). Click this to display only data for the live design.
Show Metrics Opens the Metrics Table in the Output Window at the bottom of the
Table application if the tab has been hidden or closed.

Cycle Metric to Click the green arrows at the top of the reports to scroll between the
display results for different metrics. When you click an arrow, the metric results
chart changes accordingly.
Alternatively, click the icon (located between the arrows) to select a
metric from a list. If you have a Capital Insight license and want to
create a new metric, click Edit Metrics in the list to open the Edit
Metrics Dialog Box.
The name of the metric for which results are currently displayed is
shown between the arrows.
Metric Results Displays the metric results for the current (live) design data or a
Chart snapshot selected from the <Live> dropdown list.
You can use the Group field to specify the sub-sets of design objects for
which you want to display metric results.
Below the metrics report is a legend listing the metric elements
currently displayed in the chart. It also lists the display colors for those
metric elements. To hide a metric element in the chart, click it in the
legend; it is then grayed out. To display it again, click the grayed-out
entry in the legend. Alternatively, you can right-click on the chart and
select Show Metrics or Hide Metrics followed by a metric element
name.
To change the chart type (for example, Pie Chart or Horizontal Bar
Chart), right-click on the chart and select Chart Type followed by the
type that you want to display.
You can select and copy the chart by right-clicking on it and selecting
Copy Chart. The report can be pasted into other applications, such as
Microsoft Word.

620 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Capital Insight
Metrics/Insight Tab

Table 12-8. Metrics/Insight Tab Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Enter Filter String Applies a filter to the Group names on the metric results chart. In the
( ) / Clear Filter field next to the Enter Filter String icon ( ), enter a series of
String ( ) characters.
For example, if Harness is selected in the Group field and the chart
shows results for harnesses named BODY and DOORS, you could enter
the string BO so that the results for DOORS disappear from the chart.
Click the Clear Filter String icon ( ) to clear the filter.

Usage Notes
• The default groups for Capital Integrator, Capital Topology, and Capital Systems
Architect are:
o Harness
o Multicore Type
o None
o Option
o Option Expression
o Vehicle Model
o Wire Material
o Wire Specification
• Capital Systems Architect also has the following groups (which are listed for all
applications):
o Carrier
o Carrier Type
o Component
o System Component Type
o ECU
The default groups for Capital HarnessXC and Capital ModularXC are:
o Assembly
o Component Type
o Library Group
o Multicore Type

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 621

February 2016
Capital Insight
Metrics/Insight Tab

o None
o Option
o Option Expression
o Terminal Material
o Wire Material
o Wire Specification
Related Topics
Opening a Scenario
Taking a Snapshot of Metric Results for Current Design Data
Opening a Snapshot in the Insight Tab
Comparing Snapshots from One or More Studies in the Insight Tab
Creating a Scenario (and Study) from the Insight Tab
Viewing Metric Results for the Open Design

622 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Capital Insight
Metrics Table

Metrics Table
To access: This table is displayed in the Output Window at the bottom of the application when a
scenario or design is opened.
Used to display metric results for the currently open design or scenario in a table format.
Objects
This is the same data as displayed in the Metrics/Insight Tab.
Usage Notes
If this table has been hidden or closed, it can be re-opened by clicking the Show Metrics
Table button on the Metrics/Insight tab.

You can select and copy any range of cells. Those cells can be pasted into other applications,
such as Microsoft Excel or Microsoft Word. When you copy cells, the column header is also
copied.

The Total column displays the total values for the other columns. It is available only for
individual snapshots and is not displayed when comparing snapshots.

Related Topics
Metrics/Insight Tab
Opening a Scenario
Viewing Metric Results for the Open Design

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 623

February 2016
Capital Insight
New Scenario Dialog Box

New Scenario Dialog Box

To access: Click the Create a new scenario ( ) button on the Insight tab located at the bottom
left of the application window.
Used to create a new scenario (and new study if required) in the project.
Objects

Table 12-9. New Scenario Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Study Either select an existing study from the dropdown list or enter a new
study name. Mandatory.
Name Specify a name for the scenario. Mandatory.
Properties Displays the Edit Study/Scenario Properties Dialog Box where you
can add properties to the study. Optional.
Description Enter additional text to describe the intended usage of the scenario.
Optional.
Create Scenario Creates the scenario. If you entered a new study name, the New
Study Dialog Box is displayed where you enter details for the study.

Related Topics
Metrics/Insight Tab
Overview of Studies and Scenarios
Creating a Scenario (and Study) from the Insight Tab

624 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Capital Insight
New Study Dialog Box

New Study Dialog Box

To access: Right-click a project in the Project Browser Window and select New Study.
Used to create a new study in a project.
Metrics are calculated to return a single numerical value for each of the selected Groups types in
a design.
Objects

Table 12-10. New Study Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Name Enter the name of the study. This must be unique within the
project. You can click the ellipsis (...) next to this field to
select a name from a pre-defined list if such a list has been
created in Capital Project. Mandatory.
Properties Displays the Edit Study/Scenario Properties Dialog Box
where you can add properties to the study. Optional.
Description Enter additional text to describe the intended usage of the
study. Optional.
Scenarios Used to list the details of the scenarios that you want to use
in the study. Mandatory.
To add a scenario, click Add new Scenario to Study ( ).
To delete a scenario, select it and click Remove selected
Scenario from Study ( ).
• Name
The name of the scenario. This must be unique in the
study. Mandatory.
• Description
Enter additional text to describe the intended usage of
the scenario. Optional.
• Design
Select the design that you want to associate with the
scenario. Mandatory.
• Props
Click the ellipsis (...) to display the Edit Scenario
Properties Dialog Box where you can specify properties
for the scenario. Optional.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 625

February 2016
Capital Insight
New Study Dialog Box

Table 12-10. New Study Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Metrics Lists the metrics and metric elements that have been created
for use in studies. The listed metrics are created at system
level. See “Creating a Metric Element” on page 593.
Select the metric elements that you want to use in the study.
If not selected, a metric element will not be included in any
calculations for any scenarios in the study.
For each metric, click the Change Default Chart Type to
display for Metric dropdown list (located on the right of the
metric line) and select the default chart type that you want to
use for the metric when viewing study results. This default
can be overridden when viewing study results. Mandatory.
Groups Select the sub-sets of design objects for which you want
metric results to be calculated. If you select None, the metric
results are calculated for the design as a whole. If you select
a group, you will have the option of displaying the metric
results for those sub-sets on the Insight tab or in snapshot
dialog. Mandatory.
Select the sub-set of design objects for which you want to
display metric results.

Usage Notes
• The default groups for Capital Integrator and Capital Topology are:
o Harness
o Multicore Type
o None
o Option
o Option Expression
o Vehicle Model
o Wire Material
o Wire Specification
The default groups for Capital HarnessXC and Capital ModularXC are:
o Assembly
o Component Type
o Library Group

626 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Capital Insight
New Study Dialog Box

o Multicore Type
o None
o Option
o Option Expression
o Terminal Material
o Wire Material
o Wire Specification
• You can develop custom groups as part of an extensibility plugin. For more information
about developing and using extensibility plugins, see the PluginDevelopment.pdf file
that is located in the doc\plugin directory of your Capital installation.
Related Topics
Creating a Study

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 627

February 2016
Capital Insight
Snapshot Dialog Box

Snapshot Dialog Box

To access: From the Project Browser Window, double-click the snapshot or right-click it and
select Open.
Used to view metric results for a snapshot.
Metrics calculated return a single numerical value for each group selected in a design.
Objects

Table 12-11. Snapshot Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Group Select the sub-set of design objects for which you want to
display metric results.
Cycle Click the green arrows at the top of the reports to
Metric to scroll between the results for different metrics. When you
display click an arrow, the metric results chart changes accordingly.
Alternatively, click the icon (located between the arrows)
to select a metric from a list.
The name of the metric for which results are currently
displayed is shown between the arrows.
Metric Displays the metric results for the snapshot.
Results You can use the group field to specify the sub-sets of design
Chart objects for which you want to display metric results.
Below the Metrics table is a legend listing the metric
elements currently displayed in the report. It also lists the
display colors for those metric elements. To hide a metric
element in the report, click it in the legend; it is then grayed
out. To display it again, click the grayed-out entry in the
legend. Alternatively, you can right-click on the chart and
select Show Metrics or Hide Metrics followed by a metric
element name.
To change the chart type (for example, Pie Chart or
Horizontal Bar Chart), right-click on the chart and select
Chart Type followed by the type that you want to display.
You can select and copy the chart by right-clicking on it and
selecting Copy Chart. The report can be pasted into other
applications, such as Microsoft Word.

628 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Capital Insight
Snapshot Dialog Box

Table 12-11. Snapshot Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Metrics Displays the same data as displayed in the metric results
Table chart.
You can select and copy any range of cells. Those cells can
be pasted into other applications, such as Microsoft Excel or
Microsoft Word. When you copy cells, the column header is
also copied.
Enter Filter Applies a filter to the Group names on the metric results
String ( ) / chart. In the field next to the Enter Filter String icon ( ),
Clear Filter enter a series of characters.
String ( ) For example, if Harness is selected in the Group field and
the chart shows results for harnesses named BODY and
DOORS, you could enter the string BO so that the results for
DOORS disappear from the chart.
Click the Clear Filter String icon ( ) to clear the filter.

Usage Notes
• The default groups are:
o Harness
o Multicore Type
o None
o Option
o Option Expression
o Vehicle Model
o Wire Material
o Wire Specification
Related Topics
Opening a Snapshot

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 629

February 2016
Capital Insight
Take Snapshot Dialog Box

Take Snapshot Dialog Box

To access: Click the Take a Snapshot of the current data ( ) button on the Metrics/Insight
Tab with a scenario open.
Used to take a snapshot of the metric results for the current design data.
Objects

Table 12-12. Take Snapshot Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Name Specify a name for the snapshot. This must be unique for the
scenario. Click the color square beside the field to select the
color that you want used to display the metric results for the
snapshot when comparing it with another snapshot.
Mandatory.

Related Topics
Taking a Snapshot of Metric Results for Current Design Data

Usage Example - Study of Alternative Harness

Routing Paths
This topic is a usage example which creates and compares snapshot metrics for two scenarios.
Prerequisites
• If you want to work through this usage example, create a project containing two designs
with the names Driver Side Only and Driver and Passenger Side. Populate those
designs with dummy data of your own creation.
• In a light truck, there are two alternative paths for the harnesses to connect to the lights,
ABS wheel sensors, and fuel sender. In this case, the metrics of interest are total wiring
cost and weight.
o Scenario 1 - All wiring runs down the driver’s side of the vehicle, then crosses to the
passenger side in front of the rear bumper. This topology is detailed in a design
called Driver Side Only.
o Scenario 2 - Wiring for the driver’s side lights, fuel sender and wheel sensor run
down the driver’s side of the vehicle. Wires for the passenger side lights, license
plate light and wheel sensor cross just behind the cabin and run down the passenger
side of the vehicle. This topology is detailed in a design called Driver and
Passenger Side.

630 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Capital Insight
Usage Example - Study of Alternative Harness Routing Paths

• The two designs are created in the same project.

Procedure
1. The following steps will create a study with two scenarios:
2. In the Project Browser Window (located at the top left of the application), right-click on
the project containing the two designs and select New Study; the New Study Dialog
Box is displayed.
3. Specify Alternative Harness Routes in the Name field.

4. Click Add a new Scenario to Study ( ); a row is added to the Scenarios table.

5. Specify Driver Side Scenario as the Name of the scenario and select the Driver Side
Only design as the Design.
6. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for the second scenario, specifying Driver and Passenger
Scenario as the Name and selecting the Driver and Passenger Side design as the
Design.
7. In the Metrics window, select Wire cost and Wire weight (both default metrics
supplied with the system) as the metric elements that you want to use in the study. For
each metric, click the Change Default Chart Type to display for Metric dropdown list
(located on the right of the metric line) and select the default chart type that you want to
use for the metric when viewing metric results.
8. Select the groups to which you want to apply the study. In this example case, you might
want to select only Harness (to view the wire cost and weight for each harness in the
designs) and None (to view the total wire cost and weight for each design).
Click OK; the study is added to the Project Browser Window, expanding the study
reveals the scenarios listed below it.
9. The following steps will take a snapshot of the metric totals:
10. Double click on the Driver Side Scenario in the Project Browser Window and click on
the Metrics/Insight Tab (located on the lower left of the application) where you can view
the metric totals for that scenario.

11. On the Metrics/Insight Tab, click Take a Snapshot of the current data ( ); the Take
Snapshot Dialog Box is displayed.
12. Specify Driver Only Snapshot as the Name for the snapshot. Click the colored box and
select the color you want to use to display the metric results when comparing snapshots.
13. Click OK; the snapshot is added below the scenario in the Project Browser Window.
14. Repeat steps 1 to 4 for the Driver and Passenger Scenario scenario, specifying Driver
and Passenger Snapshot as the Name for the snapshot and a different color for
displaying its metric results.

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 631

February 2016
Capital Insight
Usage Example - Study of Alternative Harness Routing Paths

15. The following steps will compare the snapshots:

16. Right-click on the Driver Only Snapshot in the Project Browser Window and select
Compare snapshot with followed by the Driver and Passenger Snapshot; the
Compare Snapshot With Dialog Box is displayed.
17. Filter the metric results as required. See “Compare Snapshot With Dialog Box” on
page 606 for information about the user-interface elements available on the dialog. The
metric totals for the two scenarios are displayed together in the metric results chart and
Metrics table, thereby allowing you to compare the cost and weight. Clicking the right or
left arrows ( ) allows you to scroll views between the various metrics of interest.
You can also select the metric of interest from the drop down box ( ) next to the metric
title.

632 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Capital Insight
Help Button Landing Pages for Capital Insight Dialog Boxes

Help Button Landing Pages for Capital Insight

Dialog Boxes
The following topics are displayed when you click the Help button or press F1 for a dialog box
in the software.
Calculation Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
Compare Snapshots Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
Compare Snapshot With Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
Condition Dialog Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
Edit Metrics Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
Edit Scenario Properties Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
Edit Snapshot Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
Edit Study Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
Edit Study Properties Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
New Scenario Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
New Study Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
Snapshot Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
Take Snapshot Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636

Calculation Help
What do you need help with?
• Understanding Capital Insight concepts
• The Calculation Dialog Box fields
• Creating a Metric Element
• Editing a Metric Element Definition
• Deleting a Metric Element Definition

Compare Snapshots Help

What do you need help with?
• Understanding Capital Insight concepts
• The Compare Snapshots Dialog Box fields
• Comparing Snapshots from Different Studies

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 633

February 2016
Capital Insight
Compare Snapshot With Help

Compare Snapshot With Help

What do you need help with?
• Understanding Capital Insight concepts
• The Compare Snapshot With Dialog Box fields
• Comparing Snapshots from One Study
• Comparing Snapshots from Different Studies

Condition Dialog Help

What do you need help with?
• Understanding Capital Insight concepts
• The Condition Dialog Box fields
• Creating a Metric Element
• Editing a Metric Element Definition
• Deleting a Metric Element Definition

Edit Metrics Help

What do you need help with?
• Understanding Capital Insight concepts
• The Edit Metrics Dialog Box fields
• Creating a Metric Element
• Creating a Metric
• Creating a Metric Element
• Deleting a Metric Element
• Editing a Metric Element Definition
• Deleting a Metric Element Definition

Edit Scenario Properties Help

What do you need help with?
• Understanding Capital Insight concepts

634 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Capital Insight
Edit Snapshot Help

• The Edit Scenario Properties Dialog Box fields

• Creating a Study
• Editing a Study

Edit Snapshot Help

What do you need help with?
• Understanding Capital Insight concepts
• The Edit Snapshot Dialog Box fields
• Creating a Study
• Editing a Snapshot Name and Display Color

Edit Study Help

What do you need help with?
• Understanding Capital Insight concepts
• The Edit Study Dialog Box fields
• Editing a Study

Edit Study Properties Help

What do you need help with?
• Understanding Capital Insight concepts
• The Edit Study/Scenario Properties Dialog Box fields
• Creating a Study
• Editing a Study

New Scenario Help

What do you need help with?
• Understanding Capital Insight concepts
• The New Scenario Dialog Box fields
• Overview of Studies and Scenarios

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 635

February 2016
Capital Insight
New Study Help

• Creating a Scenario (and Study) from the Insight Tab

New Study Help

What do you need help with?
• Understanding Capital Insight concepts
• The New Study Dialog Box fields
• Creating a Study

Snapshot Help
What do you need help with?
• Understanding Capital Insight concepts
• The Snapshot Dialog Box fields
• Opening a Snapshot

Take Snapshot Help

What do you need help with?
• Understanding Capital Insight concepts
• The Take Snapshot Dialog Box fields
• Taking a Snapshot of Metric Results for Current Design Data

636 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 Third-Party Information
This section provides information on open source and third-party software that may be included in the Capital products. For
last minute additions to this information refer to the latest Capital Release Highlights document.

Copyright (c) 1999 The Apache Software Foundation. All rights reserved

This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation (http://www.apache.org/)

This product includes code licensed from RSA Security Inc

Some portions licensed from IBM are available at http://oss.software.ibm.com/icu4j/

This software application may include Hibernate third-party software, portions of which may be subject to the GNU Lesser
General Public License Version 2.1, February 1999. Copyright (C) 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple
Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA. You can view the complete license at: www.gnu.org/licenses/lgpl.htmll, or
find the file at <Capital_install_location>/docs/legal/gnu_lgpl_2.1.pdf. To obtain a copy of the Hibernate source code, or to
obtain a copy of any changes made to the Hibernate source code, send a request [email protected]. This
offer shall only be available for three years from the date Mentor Graphics Corporation first distributed the Hibernate source
code.

This software application may include Hibernate third-party software, portions of which may be subject to the Apache
License, version 2.0, January 2004. You can view the complete license at: www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.00, or find
the file at <Capital_install_location>/docs/legal/apache_2.0.pdf

This software application may include Hibernate third-party software, portions of which may be subject to the Apache
License, version 1.1, Copyright (c) 2002-2003, The Apache Software Foundation. All rights reserved. You can view the
complete license at:www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-1.11, or find the file at <Capital_install_location>/docs/legal/
apache_1.1.pdf

This software application may include Hibernate third-party software, portions of which may contain ANTLR, 1989-2003
Developed by jGuru.com, www.ANTLR.orgg and www.jGuru.comm

This software application may include Hibernate third-party software, portions of which may be subject to the Sun
Microsystems, Inc. Binary Code License Agreement. You can view the complete license at <Capital_install_location>/docs/
legal/sun_binary.pdf

Copyright 2001-2005 (C) MetaStuff, Ltd. All Rights Reserved.

Redistribution and use of this software and associated documentation ("Software"), with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain copyright statements and notices. Redistributions must also contain a copy of
this document.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. The name "DOM4J" must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this Software without prior written
permission of MetaStuff, Ltd. For written permission, please contact [email protected].

4. Products derived from this Software may not be called "DOM4J" nor may "DOM4J" appear in their names without prior
written permission of MetaStuff, Ltd. DOM4J is a registered trademark of MetaStuff, Ltd.

5. Due credit should be given to the DOM4J Project - http://www.dom4j.org

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY METASTUFF, LTD. AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED
OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
METASTUFF, LTD. OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

-----------------------------------

Copyright (c) 2000,2002,2003 INRIA, France Telecom. All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. Neither the name of the copyright holders nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products
derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF
THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

-------------------------------------

Copyright (c) 2004, Eugene Kuleshov

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. Neither the name of the copyright holders nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products
derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF
THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

-------------------------------------

This software application may include Java 1.6 JRE third-party software. Java 1.6 JRE is distributed under the terms of the
Sun Microsystems, Inc. Binary Code License Agreement for the JAVA SE RUNTIME ENVIRONMENT (JRE) VERSION 6
and is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the license
for the specific language governing rights and limitations under the license. You can view a copy of the license at:
<Capital_install_location>/docs/legal/sun_binary_JRE_6.pdf. Additional copyright notices and license terms applicable to
portions of Java 1.6 JRE can be found at: <install_location>/jre/THIRDPARTYLICENSEREADME.txt. Java 1.6 JRE may be
subject to the following copyrights:

© 1999 by CoolServlets.com.

Any errors or suggested improvements to this class can be reported as instructed on CoolServlets.com. We hope you enjoy this
program... your comments will encourage further development!

This software is distributed under the terms of the BSD License.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

Neither name of CoolServlets.com nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from
this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY COOLSERVLETS.COM AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING INANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE."

© 2002 Graz University of Technology. All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. The end-user documentation included with the redistribution, if any, must include the following acknowledgment:

"This product includes software developed by IAIK of Graz University of Technology."

Alternately, this acknowledgment may appear in the software itself, if and wherever such third-party acknowledgments
normally appear.

4. The names "Graz University of Technology" and "IAIK of Graz University of Technology" must not be used to endorse or
promote products derived from this software without prior written permission.

5. Products derived from this software may not be called "IAIK PKCS Wrapper", nor may "IAIK" appear in their name,
without prior written permission of Graz University of Technology.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR

© 2001 The Apache Software Foundation. All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. The end-user documentation included with the redistribution, if any, must include the following acknowledgment:

"This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation (http://www.apache.org/)."

Alternately, this acknowledgment may appear in the software itself, if and wherever such third-party acknowledgments
normally appear.

4. The names "Apache" and "Apache Software Foundation" and "Apache Turbine" must not be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without prior written permission. For written permission, please contact
[email protected].

5. Products derived from this software may not be called "Apache", "Apache Turbine", nor may "Apache" appear in their
name, without prior written permission of the Apache Software Foundation.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE APACHE SOFTWARE FOUNDATION OR ITS
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

© 1996-1999 by Scott Hudson, Frank Flannery, C. Scott Ananian

Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both the copyright notice and this permission
notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting documentation, and that the names of the authors or their employers not
be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific, written prior permission.

The authors and their employers disclaim all warranties with regard to this software, including all implied warranties of
merchantability and fitness. In no event shall the authors or their employers be liable for any special, indirect or consequential
damages or any damages whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether in an action of contract, negligence or
other tortious action, arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of this software.

© 1996-2003 by Elliot Joel Berk and C. Scott Ananian

Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both the copyright notice and this permission
notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting documentation, and that the name of the authors or their employers not be
used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific, written prior permission.

The authors and their employers disclaim all warranties with regard to this software, including all implied warranties of
merchantability and fitness. In no event shall the authors or their employers be liable for any special, indirect or consequential
damages or any damages whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether in an action of contract, negligence or
other tortious action, arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of this software.

Java is a trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc. References to the Java programming language in relation to JLex are not meant
to imply that Sun endorses this product.

© 1995-2003 The Cryptix Foundation Limited. All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:

1.Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2.Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE CRYPTIX FOUNDATION LIMITED AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
ANY EXPRESS ORIMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FORA PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE CRYPTIX FOUNDATION LIMITED OR CONTRIBUTORS BELIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOTLIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESSINTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OFTHE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

© 1994-2002 World Wide Web Consortium, (Massachusetts Institute of Technology, Institut National de Recherche en
Informatique et en Automatique, Keio University). All Rights Reserved.

http://www.w3.org/Consortium/Legal/

Public documents on the W3C site are provided by the copyright holders under the following license. The software or
Document Type Definitions (DTDs) associated with W3C specifications are governed by the Software Notice. By using and/
or copying this document, or the W3C document from which this statement is linked, you (the licensee) agree that you have
read, understood, and will comply with the following terms and conditions:

Permission to use, copy, and distribute the contents of this document, or theW3C document from which this statement is
linked, in any medium for any purpose and without fee or royalty is hereby granted, provided that you include the following on
ALL copies of the document, or portions thereof, that you use:

1. A link or URL to the original W3C document.

2. The pre-existing copyright notice of the original author, or if it doesn't exist, a notice of the form: "Copyright © [$date-of-
document] World Wide Web Consortium, (Massachusetts Institute of Technology, Institut National de Recherche en
Informatique et en Automatique, Keio University). All Rights Reserved. http://www.w3.org/Consortium/Legal/" (Hypertext is
preferred, but a textual representation is permitted.)

3. If it exists, the STATUS of the W3C document.

When space permits, inclusion of the full text of this NOTICE should be provided. We request that authorship attribution be
provided in any software, documents, or other items or products that you create pursuant to the implementation of the contents
of this document, or any portion thereof.

No right to create modifications or derivatives of W3C documents is granted pursuant to this license. However, if additional
requirements (documented in the Copyright FAQ) are satisfied, the right to create modifications or derivatives is sometimes
granted by the W3C to individuals complying with those requirements.

THIS DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED "AS IS," AND COPYRIGHT HOLDERS MAKE NO REPRESENTATIONSOR
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, WARRANTIES
OFMERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, OR TITLE;THAT THE
CONTENTS OF THE DOCUMENT ARE SUITABLE FOR ANY PURPOSE; NOR THAT THEIMPLEMENTATION OF
SUCH CONTENTS WILL NOT INFRINGE ANY THIRD PARTY PATENTS,COPYRIGHTS, TRADEMARKS OR
OTHER RIGHTS.

COPYRIGHT HOLDERS WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL ORCONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF ANY USE OF THE DOCUMENT OR THE PERFORMANCEOR IMPLEMENTATION
OF THE CONTENTS THEREOF.
The name and trademarks of copyright holders may NOT be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to this document or its
contents without specific, written prior permission. Title to copyright in this document will at all times remain with copyright
holders.

© 2001-2005 (C) MetaStuff, Ltd. All Rights Reserved.

The following software may be included in this product: Retroweaver; Use of any of this software is governed by the terms of
the license below:

© February 2004, Toby Reyelts

All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:

Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer
in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. Neither the name of Toby Reyelts nor the names of
his contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written
permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICTLIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE
USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

© 2003 Kohsuke Kawaguchi

All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. Neither the name of the copyright holders nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products
derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF
THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

© Copyright 2002,2003, Andy Clark. All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. The end-user documentation included with the redistribution, if any, must include the following acknowledgment:

"This product includes software developed by Andy Clark."

Alternately, this acknowledgment may appear in the software itself, if and wherever such third-party acknowledgments
normally appear.

4. The names "CyberNeko" and "NekoHTML" must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
without prior written permission. For written permission, please contact [email protected].

5. Products derived from this software may not be called "CyberNeko", nor may "CyberNeko" appear in their name, without
prior written permission of the author.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR OTHER CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

© 2001-2003 Thai Open Source Software Center Ltd

All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:

* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer
in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

* Neither the name of the Thai Open Source Software Center Ltd nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or
promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" ANDANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIEDWARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AREDISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANYDIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ONANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
THISSOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

© 2000-2003 Daisuke Okajima and Kohsuke Kawaguchi.

All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. The end-user documentation included with the redistribution, if any, must include the following acknowledgment:

"This product includes software developed by Daisuke Okajima and Kohsuke Kawaguchi (http://relaxngcc.sf.net/)."

Alternately, this acknowledgment may appear in the software itself, if and wherever such third-party acknowledgments
normally appear.

4. The names of the copyright holders must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without
prior written permission. For written permission, please contact the copyright holders.

5. Products derived from this software may not be called "RELAXNGCC", nor may "RELAXNGCC" appear in their name,
without prior written permission of the copyright holders.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.IN NO EVENT SHALL THE APACHE SOFTWARE FOUNDATION OR ITS
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

© 1994-2004 The XFree 86 Project, Inc. All rights reserved.

Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation
files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify,
merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is
furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions, and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution, and in the same place and form as other
copyright, license and disclaimer information.

3. The end-user documentation included with the redistribution, if any, must include the following acknowledgment: "This
product includes software developed by The XFree86 Project, Inc (http://www.xfree86.org/) and its contributors", in the same
place and form as other third-party acknowledgments.

Alternately, this acknowledgment may appear in the software itself, in the same form and location as other such third-party
acknowledgments.

4. Except as contained in this notice, the name of The XFree86 Project, Inc shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to
promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization from TheXFree86 Project, Inc.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY ANDFITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE XFREE86PROJECT, INC OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; ORBUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER INCONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISINGIN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITYOF
SUCH DAMAGE.

© 1990-2003 Info-ZIP. All rights reserved.

For the purposes of this copyright and license, "Info-ZIP" is defined as the following set of individuals:

Mark Adler, John Bush, Karl Davis, Harald Denker, Jean-Michel Dubois, Jean-loup Gailly, Hunter Goatley, Ian Gorman,
Chris Herborth, Dirk Haase, Greg Hartwig, Robert Heath, Jonathan Hudson, Paul Kienitz, David Kirschbaum, Johnny Lee,
Onno van der Linden, Igor Mandrichenko, Steve P. Miller, Sergio Monesi, Keith Owens, George Petrov, Greg Roelofs, Kai
Uwe Rommel, Steve Salisbury, Dave Smith, Christian Spieler, Antoine Verheijen, Paul von Behren, Rich Wales, Mike White

This software is provided "as is," without warranty of any kind, express or implied. In no event shall Info-ZIP or its
contributors be held liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special or consequential damages arising out of the use of or
inability to use this software.

Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose, including commercial applications, and to alter it and
redistribute it freely, subject to the following restrictions:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, definition, disclaimer, and this list of conditions.

2. Redistributions in binary form (compiled executables) must reproduce the above copyright notice, definition, disclaimer,
and this list of conditions in documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. The sole exception to this
condition is redistribution of a standard UnZipSFX binary (including SFXWiz) as part of a self-extracting archive; that is
permitted without inclusion of this license, as long as the normal SFX banner has not been removed from the binary or
disabled.

3. Altered versions--including, but not limited to, ports to new operating systems, existing ports with new graphical interfaces,
and dynamic, shared, or static library versions--must be plainly marked as such and must not be misrepresented as being
the original source. Such altered versions also must not be misrepresented as being Info-ZIP releases--including, but not
limited to, labeling of the altered versions with the names "Info-ZIP" (or any variation thereof, including, but not limited to,
different capitalizations), "Pocket UnZip," "WiZ" or "MacZip" without the explicit permission of Info-ZIP. Such altered
versions are further prohibited from misrepresentative use of the Zip-Bugs or Info-ZIP e-mail addresses or of the Info-ZIP
URL(s).

4. Info-ZIP retains the right to use the names "Info-ZIP," "Zip," "UnZip," "UnZipSFX," "WiZ," "Pocket UnZip," "Pocket Zip,"
and "MacZip" for its own source and binary releases.

-------------------------------------

This software application may include Xerces-J 2.8.1 third-party software. Xerces-J 2.8.1 is distributed under the terms of the
Apache v2.0 and is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See
the license for the specific language governing rights and limitations under the license. You can view a copy of the license at:
<Capital_install_location>/docs/legal/apache_2.0.pdf. Portions of this software may be subject to W3C License. You can
view a copy of the W3C License at: <Capital_install_location>/docs/legal/w3c_2002.pdf. Xerces-J 2.8.1 may be subject to
the following copyrights:

© 2001 World Wide Web Consortium, (Massachusetts Institute of Technology, Institut National de Recherche en
Informatique et en Automatique, Keio University). All Rights Reserved. This program is distributed under the W3C's
Software Intellectual Property License. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY
WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE.

See W3C License http://www.w3.org/Consortium/Legal/ for more details.

-------------------------------------

This software application may include JFreeChart version 1.0.10 third-party software. JFreeChart version 1.0.10 is distributed
under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public License v3.0 and is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the license for the specific language governing rights and
limitations under the license. You can view a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public License v3.0 at:
<Capital_install_location>/docs/legal/gnu_lgpl_3.0.pdf. To obtain a copy of the JFreeChart version 1.0.10 source code, send
a request to [email protected]. This offer shall only be available for three years from the date Mentor
Graphics Corporation first distributed JFreeChart version 1.0.10 and valid for as long as Mentor Graphics offers customer
support for Capital Insight Version 2008.2.

-----------------------------------

This software application may include JCommon version 1.0.13 third-party software. JCommon version 1.0.13 is distributed
under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public License v2.1 and is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. You can view a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public License
v2.1 at: <Capital_install_location>/docs/legal/gnu_lgpl_2.1.pdf. To obtain a copy of the JCommon version 1.0.13 source
code, send a request to [email protected]. This offer shall only be available for three years from the date
Mentor Graphics Corporation first distributed JCommon version 1.0.13.

----------------------------------

This software application may include Commons-net version 1.4.1 third-party software. Commons-net v1.4.1 is distributed
under the terms of the Apache License version 2.0 and is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, either express or implied. See the license for the specific language governing rights and limitations under the license.
You can view a copy of the license at: <Capital_install_location>/docs/legal/apache_2.0.pdf.

----------------------------------

This software application may include Apache Commons Virtual File System version 1.0 third-party software. Apache
Commons Virtual File System v1.0 is distributed under the terms of the Apache License version 2.0 and is distributed on an
"AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the license for the specific language
governing rights and limitations under the license. You can view a copy of the license at: <Capital_install_location>/docs/
legal/apache_2.0.pdf.

----------------------------------

This software application may include Java Secure Channel (JSch) version 0.1.41 third-party software, which is distributed on
an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. JSch v0.1.41 may be subject to the
following copyrights:

© 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008 Atsuhiko Yamanaka, JCraft, Inc.

All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. The names of the authors may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior
written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,

INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL JCRAFT, INC. OR ANY CONTRIBUTORS TO
THIS SOFTWARE BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

© 2002-2008 ymnk, JCraft, Inc. All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. The names of the authors may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior
written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,

INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL JCRAFT, INC. OR ANY CONTRIBUTORS TO
THIS SOFTWARE BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

----------------------------------

This software application may include TinyXML version 2.6.1 third-party software. TinyXML version 2.6.1 is distributed
under the terms of the zLib and is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express
or implied. See the license for the specific language governing rights and limitations under the license. You can view a copy
of the license at: <Capital_install_location>/docs/legal/zlib_libpng.pdf. TinyXML version 2.6.1 may be subject to the
following copyrights:

© 2000-2002 Lee Thomason (www.grinninglizard.com)

This software is provided 'as-is', without any express or implied warranty. In no event will the authors be held liable for any
damages arising from the use of this software.

Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose, including commercial applications, and to alter it and
redistribute it freely, subject to the following restrictions:

The origin of this software must not be misrepresented; you must not claim that you wrote the original software. If you use this
software in a product, an acknowledgment in the product documentation would be appreciated but is not required.

Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such, and must not be misrepresented as being the original software.

This notice may not be removed or altered from any source distribution.

----------------------------------

This software application may include iText version 2.1.5 third-party software. iText v2.1.5 is distributed under the terms of
the GNU Library General Public License v2 and is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, either express or implied. See the license for the specific language governingrights and limitations under the license.
You can view a copy of the GNU Library General Public License v2 at: <Capital_install_location>/docs/legal/
gnu_library_gpl_2.0.pdf. Portions of this software may be subject to the GNU Lesser General Public License v2.1. You can
view a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public License v2.1 at: <Capital_install_location>/docs/legal/gnu_lgpl_2.1.pdf.
Portions of this software may be subject to the Apache License v2.0. You can view a copy of the Apache License at:
<Capital_install_location>/docs/legal/apache_2.0.pdf. To obtain a copy of the iText v2.1.5 source code, send a request to
[email protected]. This offer shall only be available for three years from the date Mentor Graphics
Corporation first distributed iText v2.1.5. iText v2.1.5 may be subject to the following copyrights:

© 1991-2007 Unicode, Inc. All rights reserved.

Distributed under the Terms of Use in http://www.unicode.org/copyright.html.

Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of the Unicode data files and any associated
documentation (the "Data Files") or Unicode software and any associated documentation (the "Software") to deal in the Data
Files or Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute,
and/or sell copies of the Data Files or Software, and to permit persons to whom the Data Files or Software are furnished to do
so, provided that (a) the above copyright notice(s) and this permission notice appear with all copies of the Data Files or
Software, (b) both the above copyright notice(s) and this permission notice appear in associated documentation, and (c) there
is clear notice in each modified Data File or in the Software as well as in the documentation associated with the Data File(s) or
Software that the data or software has been modified.

THE DATA FILES AND SOFTWARE ARE PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR HOLDERS INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, OR ANY
SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM
LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER
TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THE DATA
FILES OR SOFTWARE.

Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the
sale, use or other dealings in these Data Files or Software without prior written authorization of the copyright holder.

© 2005 Sun Microsystems, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:

Redistribution of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

Redistribution in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

Neither the name of Sun Microsystems, Inc. or the names of contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived
from this software without specific prior written permission.

This software is provided "AS IS," without a warranty of any kind. ALL EXPRESS OR IMPLIED CONDITIONS,
REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES, INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT, ARE HEREBY EXCLUDED. SUN
MIDROSYSTEMS, INC. ("SUN") AND ITS LICENSORS SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES SUFFERED
BY LICENSEE AS A RESULT OF USING, MODIFYING OR DISTRIBUTING THIS SOFTWARE OR ITS
DERIVATIVES. IN NO EVENT WILL SUN OR ITS LICENSORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOST REVENUE, PROFIT OR
DATA, OR FOR DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, INCIDENTAL OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES,
HOWEVER CAUSED AND REGARDLESS OF THE THEORY OF LIABILITY, ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR
INABILITY TO USE THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF SUN HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGES.

You acknowledge that this software is not designed or intended for use in the design, construction, operation or maintenance
of any nuclear facility.

© 1988-1997 Sam Leffler

© 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc.

Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and
related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity
relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS-IS" AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR
OTHERWISE, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

© 2005-2006 www.fontbox.org
All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. Neither the name of fontbox; nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this
software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

Silk icon set 1.3

Mark James www.famfamfam.com/lab/icons/silk//

This work is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution 2.5 License.creativecommons.org/licenses/by/2.5//

This means you may use it for any purpose, and make any changes you like. All I ask is that you include a link back to this
page in your credits.

Are you using this icon set? Send me an email (including a link or picture if available) to [email protected]

----------------------------------

This software application may include trove4j version 2.1.0 third-party software. trove4j version 2.1.0 is distributed under the
terms of the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 and is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY
OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the license for the specific language governing rights and limitations under the
license. You can view a copy of the license at: <Capital_install_location>/docs/legal/gnu_lgpl_2.1. To obtain a copy of the
Trove version 1.1b3 source code, send a request to [email protected]. This offer shall only be available for
three years from the date Mentor Graphics Corporation first distributed trove4j version 2.1.0. trove4j version 2.1.0 may be
subject to the following copyrights:

© 1999 CERN - European Organization for Nuclear Research.

Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this
permission notice appear in supporting documentation. CERN makes no representations about the suitability of this software
for any purpose. It is provided "as is" without expressed or implied warranty.

----------------------------------

This software application may include SLF4J version 1.5.8 third-party software. SLF4J version 1.5.8 is distributed under the
terms of the Apache License version 2.0 and is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
either express or implied. See the license for the specific language governing rights and limitations under the license. You can
view a copy of the license at: <Capital_install_location>/docs/legal/apache_2.0.pdf. SLF4J version 1.5.8 may be subject to
the following copyrights:

© 2004-2005 SLF4J.ORG

© 2004-2005 QOS.CH
All rights reserved.

Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation
files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify,
merge, publish, distribute, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do
so, provided that the above copyright notice(s) and this permission notice appear in all copies of the Software and that both
the above copyright notice(s) and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR HOLDERS INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, OR ANY
SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM
LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER
TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS
SOFTWARE.

Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the
sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization of the copyright holder.

© 2004-2007 QOS.CH

All rights reserved.

Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation
files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify,
merge, publish, distribute, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do
so, provided that the above copyright notice(s) and this permission notice appear in all copies of the Software and that both
the above copyright notice(s) and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDER OR HOLDERS INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA
OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION,
ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.

Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the
sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization of the copyright holder.

----------------------------------

This software application may include CGLIB version 2.2 third-party software. CGLIB version 2.2 is distributed under the
terms of the Apache License version 2.0 and is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
either express or implied. See the license for the specific language governing rights and limitations under the license. You can
view a copy of the license at: <Capital_install_location>/docs/legal/apache_2.0.pdf. CGLIB version 2.2 may be subject to the
following copyrights:

© 2000-2005 INRIA, France Telecom

All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. Neither the name of the copyright holders nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products
derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF
THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

----------------------------------

This software application may include Hibernate version 3.3.2 third-party software. Hibernate version 3.3.2 is distributed
under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public License v2.1 and is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the license for the specific language governing rights and
limitations under the license. You can view a copy of the license at: <Capital_install_location>/docs/legal/gnu_lgpl_2.1.pdf.
To obtain a copy of the Hibernate version 3.3.2 source code, send a request to [email protected]. This offer
shall only be available for three years from the date Mentor Graphics Corporation first distributed Hibernate version 3.3.2.

----------------------------------

This software application may include Apache Commons Collections version 3.1 third-party software. Apache Commons
Collections version 3.1 is distributed under the terms of the Apache License version 2.0 and is distributed on an "AS IS" basis,
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the license for the specific language governing
rights and limitations under the license. You can view a copy of the license at: <Capital_install_location>/docs/legal/
apache_2.0.pdf.

----------------------------------

This software application may include Java Assist version 3.9.0 third-party software. Java Assist version 3.9.0 is dual licensed
under the terms of either the Mozilla Public License or the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1. We elect the
GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1. GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 is distributed on an "AS
IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the license for the specific language
governing rights and limitations under the license. You can view a copy of the license at: <Capital_install_location>/docs/
legal/gnu_lgpl_2.1.pdf. To obtain a copy of the Java Assist version 3.9.0 source code, send a request to
[email protected]. This offer shall only be available for three years from the date Mentor Graphics
Corporation first distributed Java Assist version 3.9.0.

----------------------------------

This software application may include Apache log4j version 1.2.12 third-party software. Apache log4j version 1.2.12 is
distributed under the terms of the Apache License version 2.0 and is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the license for the specific language governing rights and
limitations under the license. You can view a copy of the license at: <Capital_install_location>/docs/legal/apache_2.0.pdf.
Portions of this software may be subject to Apache License version 1.1. You can view a copy of the Apache License version
1.1License at: <Capital_install_location>/docs/legal/apache_1.1.pdf.

----------------------------------

This software application may include PostGreSQL jdbc version 8.4-701 third-party software, which is distributed on an "AS
IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. PostGreSQL jdbc version 8.4-701 may be
subject to the following copyrights:

© 1997-2008, PostgreSQL Global Development Group

All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. Neither the name of the PostgreSQL Global Development Group nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or
promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF
THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

----------------------------------

This software application may include PostGreSQL version 8.4.2 third-party software. PostGreSQL version 8.4.2 is
distributed under the terms of the GNU General Public License version 2.0 and is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the license for the specific language governing rights and
limitations under the license. You can view a copy of the license at: <Capital_install_location>/docs/legal/gnu_gpl_2.0.pdf.
To obtain a copy of the PostGreSQL version 8.4.2 source code, send a request to [email protected]. This
offer shall only be available for three years from the date Mentor Graphics Corporation first distributed PostGreSQL version
8.4.2. PostGreSQL version 8.4.2 may be subject to the following copyrights:

© 1983, 1987, 1988, 1989, 1990, 1992, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.

This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by Tom Truscott.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived
from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
I M P L I E D W A R R A N T I E S , I N C L U D IN G , B U T N O T L I M I T E D T O , T HE I M P L I E D W A R R A N T I E S O F
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

© 1983, 1995, 1996 Eric P. Allman

© 1988, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived
from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
I M P L I E D W A R R A N T I E S , I N C L U D IN G , B U T N O T L I M I T E D T O , T HE I M P L I E D W A R R A N T I E S O F
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

© 1987, 1990, 1993, 1994 The Regents of the University of California.

All rights reserved.

© 1996-2009 PostgreSQL Global Development Group

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived
from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
I M P L I E D W A R R A N T I E S , I N C L U D IN G , B U T N O T L I M I T E D T O , T HE I M P L I E D W A R R A N T I E S O F
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

© 1994 David Burren

All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. Neither the name of the author nor the names of other contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived
from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
I M P L I E D W A R R A N T I E S , I N C L U D IN G , B U T N O T L I M I T E D T O , T HE I M P L I E D W A R R A N T I E S O F
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

© 1995, 1996, 1997, and 1998 WIDE Project.

All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. Neither the name of the project nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from
this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE PROJECT AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
I M P L I E D W A R R A N T I E S , I N C L U D IN G , B U T N O T L I M I T E D T O , T HE I M P L I E D W A R R A N T I E S O F
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE PROJECT OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

© 2000-2001, Aaron D. Gifford

All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. Neither the name of the copyright holder nor the names of contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived
from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTOR(S) ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
I M P L I E D W A R R A N T I E S , I N C L U D IN G , B U T N O T L I M I T E D T O , T HE I M P L I E D W A R R A N T I E S O F
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTOR(S) BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

© 2001, 2005 Marko Kreen

All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
I M P L I E D W A R R A N T I E S , I N C L U D IN G , B U T N O T L I M I T E D T O , T HE I M P L I E D W A R R A N T I E S O F
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

----------------------------------

This software application may include Java 1.6 JRE version1.6 update 19 third-party software. Java 1.6 JRE version1.6 update
19 is distributed under the terms of the Sun Microsystems, Inc. Binary Code License Agreement for the JAVA SE RUNTIME
ENVIRONMENT (JRE) VERSION 6 and JAVAFX RUNTIME VERSION 1and is distributed on an "AS IS" basis,
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the license for the specific language governing
rights and limitations under the license. You can view a copy of the license at: <Capital_install_location>/docs/legal/
sun_binary_JRE_6.pdf. Additional copyright notices and license terms applicable to portions Java 1.6 JRE version1.6 update
19 can be found here: <Capital_install_location>/docs/legal/jre/THIRDPARTYLICENSEREADME.txt

----------------------------------

This software application may include jexcel version 2.5.3 third-party software. jexcel version 2.5.3 is distributed under the
terms of the GNU Lesser General Public License v2.1 and is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the license for the specific language governing rights and limitations under the
license. You can view a copy of the license at: <Capital_install_location>/docs/legal/gnu_lgpl_2.1.pdf. To obtain a copy of the
jexcel version 2.5.3 source code, send a request to [email protected]. This offer shall only be available for
three years from the date Mentor Graphics Corporation first distributed jexcel version 2.5.3.

----------------------------------

This software application may include HSQLDB version 2.0 third-party software. Portions of HSQLDB version 2.0 may be
distributed under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public License v2.1 and is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the license for the specific language governing rights and
limitations under the license. You can view a copy of the license at: <Capital_install_location>/docs/legal/legal/
gnu_lgpl_2.1.pdf. To obtain a copy of the HSQLDB version 2.0 source code, send a request to
[email protected]. This offer shall only be available for three years from the date Mentor Graphics
Corporation first distributed HSQLDB version 2.0. Portions of this software may be subject to W3C License. You can view a
copy of the W3C License at: <Capital_install_location>/docs/legal/legal/w3c_2002.pdf. HSQLDB version 2.0 may be subject
to the following copyrights:

© 2001-2010, The HSQL Development Group

All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:

Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer
in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
Neither the name of the HSQL Development Group nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
HSQL DEVELOPMENT GROUP, HSQLDB.ORG, OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF
THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

©1995-2000, The Hypersonic SQL Group.

All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:

Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer
in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

Neither the name of the Hypersonic SQL Group nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products
derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE HYPERSONIC SQL GROUP, OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF
THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

This software consists of voluntary contributions made by many individuals on behalf of the Hypersonic SQL Group.

----------------------------------

This software application may include ant version 1.8.2 third-party software. ant version 1.8.2 is distributed under the terms of
the Apache License version 2.0 and is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either
express or implied. See the license for the specific language governing rights and limitations under the license. You can view
a copy of the license at: <Capital_install_location>/docs/legal/apache_2.0.pdf. Portions of this software may be subject to
Apache License version 1.1. You can view a copy of the Apache License version 1.1 at: <Capital_install_location>/docs/
legal/apache_1.1.pdf.

---------------------------------

This software application may include Apache commons-lang version 2.6 third-party software. Apache commons-lang version
2.6 is distributed under the terms of the Apache version 2.0 and is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY
OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the license for the specific language governing rights and limitations under the
license. You can view a copy of the license at: <Capital_install_location>/docs/legal/apache_2.0.pdf. Portions of this
software may be subject to the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1. You can view a copy of the GNU Lesser
General Public License version 2.1 at: <Capital_install_location>/docs/legal/gnu_lgpl_2.1.pdf. To obtain a copy of the
Apache commons-lang version 2.6 source code, send a request to [email protected]. This offer shall only be
available for three years from the date Mentor Graphics Corporation first distributed Apache commons-lang version 2.6.

---------------------------------
This software application may include Apache Commons Configuration version 1.6 third-party software. Apache Commons
Configuration version 1.6 is distributed under the terms of the Apache License version 2.0 and is distributed on an "AS IS"
basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the license for the specific language
governing rights and limitations under the license. You can view a copy of the license at: <Capital_install_location>/docs/
legal/apache_2.0.pdf.

---------------------------------

This software application may include quartz version 2.0.1 third-party software. quartz version 2.0.1 is distributed under the
terms of the Apache License version 2.0 and is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
either express or implied. See the license for the specific language governing rights and limitations under the license. You can
view a copy of the license at: <Capital_install_location>/docs/legal/apache_2.0.pdf.

---------------------------------

This software application may include opencsv version 2.2 third-party software. opencsv version 2.2 is distributed under the
terms of the Apache License version 2.0 and is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
either express or implied. See the license for the specific language governing rights and limitations under the license. You can
view a copy of the license at: <Capital_install_location>/docs/legal/apache_2.0.pdf. Opencsv version 2.2 may be subject to
the following copyrights:

© 2000-2006, www.hamcrest.org

All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:

Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer
in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

Neither the name of Hamcrest nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this
software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF
THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

---------------------------------

This software application may include Apache Batik version 1.7 third-party software. Apache Batik version 1.7 is distributed
under the terms of the Apache v2.0 and is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either
express or implied. See the license for the specific language governing rights and limitations under the license. You can view
a copy of the license at: <Capital_install_location>/docs//legal/apache_2.0.pdf. Portions of this software may be subject to the
Apache version 1.1 License. You can view a copy of Apache version 1.1 at: <Capital_install_location>/docs/legal/
apache_1.1.pdf. Portions of this software may be subject to W3C License. You can view a copy of the W3C License at:
<your_Mentor_Graphics_documentation_directory>/legal/w3c_2002.pdf.

----------------------------------

This software application may include XMLUnit version 1.3 third-party software, which is distributed on an "AS IS" basis,
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. XMLUnit version 1.3 may be subject to the following
copyrights:

Copyright (c) 2001-2009, Jeff Martin, Tim Bacon

All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:

* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer
in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

* Neither the name of the xmlunit.sourceforge.net nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF
THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

----------------------------------

This software application may include jetty version 4.2.27 third-party software. jetty version 4.2.27 is distributed under the
terms of the GNU Lesser General Public License v2.1 and is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the license for the specific language governing rights and limitations under the
license. You can view a copy of the license at: <your_Mentor_Graphics_documentation_directory>/legal/gnu_lgpl_2.1.pdf.
Portions of this software may be subject to the Apache License version 1.1. You can view a copy of the license at:
<your_Mentor_Graphics_documentation_directory>/legal/apache_1.1.pdf. Portions of this software may be subject to W3C
License. You can view a copy of the W3C License at: <your_Mentor_Graphics_documentation_directory>/legal/
w3c_2002.pdf. To obtain a copy of the jetty version 4.2.27 source code, send a request to [email protected].
This offer shall only be available for three years from the date Mentor Graphics Corporation first distributed jetty version
4.2.27.

----------------------------------

This software application may include Apache POI version 3.8 third-party software. Apache POI version 3.8 is distributed
under the terms of the Apache License version 2.0 and is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, either express or implied. See the license for the specific language governing rights and limitations under the license.
You can view a copy of the license at: <your_Mentor_Graphics_documentation_directory>/legal/apache_2.0.pdf. Apache POI
version 3.8 may be subject to the following copyrights:

©2001-2005 MetaStuff, Ltd. All Rights Reserved.

Redistribution and use of this software and associated documentation ("Software"), with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain copyright statements and notices. Redistributions must also contain a copy of
this document.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. The name "DOM4J" must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this Software without prior written
permission of MetaStuff, Ltd. For written permission, please contact [email protected].

4. Products derived from this Software may not be called "DOM4J" nor may "DOM4J" appear in their names without prior
written permission of MetaStuff, Ltd. DOM4J is a registered trademark of MetaStuff, Ltd.

5. Due credit should be given to the DOM4J Project - http://www.dom4j.org

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY METASTUFF, LTD. AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED
OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
METASTUFF, LTD. OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

----------------------------------

This software application may include JGraphX version 1.10.1.0 third-party software. JGraphX version 1.10.1.0 is distributed
under the terms of the Apache License version 2.0 and is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, either express or implied. See the license for the specific language governing rights and limitations under the license.
You can view a copy of the license at: <your_Mentor_Graphics_documentation_directory>/legal/apache_2.0.pdf. JGraphX
version 1.10.1.0 may be subject to the following copyrights:

© 2001-2009, JGraph Ltd

All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:

Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer
in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

Neither the name of JGraph Ltd nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from
this software without specific prior written permission. Termination for Patent Action. This License shall terminate
automatically, as will all licenses assigned to you by the copyright

This software application may include PostGreSQL jdbc version 9.1.902 third-party software, which is distributed on an "AS
IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. PostGreSQL jdbc version 9.1.902 may be
subject to the following copyrights:

© 1997-2011, PostgreSQL Global Development Group

All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. Neither the name of the PostgreSQL Global Development Group nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or
promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF
THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF
THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

© 2001 Sun Microsystems, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:

-Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

-Redistribution in binary form must reproduct the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer
in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

Neither the name of Sun Microsystems, Inc. or the names of contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived
from this software without specific prior written permission.

This software is provided "AS IS," without a warranty of any kind. ALL EXPRESS OR IMPLIED CONDITIONS,
REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES, INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT, ARE HEREBY EXCLUDED. SUN AND ITS
LICENSORS SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES SUFFERED BY LICENSEE AS A RESULT OF USING,
MODIFYING OR DISTRIBUTING THE SOFTWARE OR ITS DERIVATIVES. IN NO EVENT WILL SUN OR ITS
LICENSORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOST REVENUE, PROFIT OR DATA, OR FOR DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL,
CONSEQUENTIAL, INCIDENTAL OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES, HOWEVER CAUSED AND REGARDLESS OF THE
THEORY OF LIABILITY, ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF SUN HAS
BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

© 2004, Mikael Grev, MiG InfoCom AB. (base64 @ miginfocom . com)

All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:

Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer
in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

Neither the name of the MiG InfoCom AB nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products
derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF
THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

----------------------------------

This software application may include Apache Commons HttpClient version 3.1 third-party software. Apache Commons
HttpClient version 3.1 is distributed under the terms of the Apache License version 2.0 and is distributed on an "AS IS" basis,
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the license for the specific language
governing rights and limitations under the license. You can view a copy of the license at:
<your_Mentor_Graphics_documentation_directory>/legal/apache_2.0.pdf.

----------------------------------

This software application may include Jetty version 8.1.5.v20120716 third-party software. Jetty version 8.1.5.v20120716 is
distributed under the terms of the Apache License version 2.0 and is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the license for the specific language governing rights and
limitations under the license. You can view a copy of the license at: <your_Mentor_Graphics_documentation_directory>/
legal/apache_2.0.pdf. Portions of this software may be subject to the Eclipse License version 1.0. You can view a copy of the
Eclipse License version 1.0 at: <your_Mentor_Graphics_documentation_directory>/legal/eclipse_1.0.pdf. Portions of this
software may be subject to the Common Development and Distribution License version 1.0. You can view a copy of the
Common Development and Distribution License version 1.0 at: <your_Mentor_Graphics_documentation_directory>/legal/
cddl_1.0.pdf.

----------------------------------

This software application may include SLF4J version 1.6.1 third-party software. SLF4J version 1.6.1 is distributed under the
terms of the Apache License version 2.0 and is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
either express or implied. See the license for the specific language governing rights and limitations under the license. You can
view a copy of the license at: <your_Mentor_Graphics_documentation_directory>/legal/apache_2.0.pdf. SLF4J version 1.6.1
may be subject to the following copyrights:

© 2004-2005 SLF4J.ORG

© 2004-2005 QOS.ch

All rights reserved.

Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation
files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify,
merge, publish, distribute, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do
so, provided that the above copyright notice(s) and this permission notice appear in all copies of the Software and that both
the above copyright notice(s) and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR HOLDERS INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, OR ANY
SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM
LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER
TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS
SOFTWARE.

Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the
sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization of the copyright holder.

© 2004-2007 QOS.CH

All rights reserved.

Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation
files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify,
merge, publish, distribute, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do
so, provided that the above copyright notice(s) and this permission notice appear in all copies of the Software and that both
the above copyright notice(s) and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation.

----------------------------------
This software application may include PostgreSQL version 9.2.0 third-party software, which is distributed on an "AS IS"
basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. PostgreSQL version 9.2.0 may be subject to the
following copyrights:

© 1983, 1987, 1989-1994

The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.

This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by Tom Truscott.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived
from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
I M P L I E D W A R R A N T I E S , I N C L U D IN G , B U T N O T L I M I T E D T O , T HE I M P L I E D W A R R A N T I E S O F
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

© 1989 The Regents of the University of California.

All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted provided that the above copyright notice and this paragraph
are duplicated in all such forms and that any documentation, advertising materials, and other materials related to such
distribution and use acknowledge that the software was developed by the University of California, Berkeley. The name of the
University may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written
permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

© 1998, 1999 Henry Spencer. All rights reserved.

Development of this software was funded, in part, by Cray Research Inc., UUNET Communications Services Inc., Sun
Microsystems Inc., and Scriptics Corporation, none of whom are responsible for the results. The author thanks all of them.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms -- with or without modification -- are permitted for any purpose, provided
that redistributions in source form retain this entire copyright notice and indicate the origin and nature of any modifications.

I'd appreciate being given credit for this package in the documentation of software which uses it, but that is not a requirement.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL HENRY SPENCER BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

© 1983, 1995, 1996 Eric P. Allman

© 1988, 1993

The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived
from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
I M P L I E D W A R R A N T I E S , I N C L U D IN G , B U T N O T L I M I T E D T O , T HE I M P L I E D W A R R A N T I E S O F
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

©1995, 1996, 1997, and 1998 WIDE Project.

All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. Neither the name of the project nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from
this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE PROJECT AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
I M P L I E D W A R R A N T I E S , I N C L U D IN G , B U T N O T L I M I T E D T O , T HE I M P L I E D W A R R A N T I E S O F
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE PROJECT OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

Portions © 1996-2012, PostgreSQL Global Development Group

Portions © 1990, 1994 The Regents of the University of California.

All rights reserved.

src/backend/port/dynloader/netbsd.c
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived
from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
I M P L I E D W A R R A N T I E S , I N C L U D IN G , B U T N O T L I M I T E D T O , T HE I M P L I E D W A R R A N T I E S O F
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

© 2000, 2001, 2005 Marko Kreen

All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
I M P L I E D W A R R A N T I E S , I N C L U D IN G , B U T N O T L I M I T E D T O , T HE I M P L I E D W A R R A N T I E S O F
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

----------------------------------

This software application may include HttpComponents version 4.0.1 third-party software. HttpComponents version 4.0.1 is
distributed under the terms of the Apache License version 2.0 and is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the license for the specific language governing rights and
limitations under the license. You can view a copy of the license at: <your_Mentor_Graphics_documentation_directory>/
legal/apache_2.0.pdf. Portions of this software may be subject to Apache License version 1.1. You can view a copy of the
Apache License version 1.1 at: <your_Mentor_Graphics_documentation_directory>/legal/apache_1.1.pdf.

----------------------------------

This software application may include Apache Jena version 2.7.1 third-party software. Apache Jena version 2.7.1 is
distributed under the terms of the Apache v2.0 and is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, either express or implied. See the license for the specific language governing rights and limitations under the license.
You can view a copy of the license at: <your_Mentor_Graphics_documentation_directory>/legal/apache_2.0.pdf. Portions of
this software may be subject to W3C License. You can view a copy of the W3C License at:
<your_Mentor_Graphics_documentation_directory>/legal/w3c_2002.pdf. Apache Jena version 2.7.1 may be subject to the
following copyrights:

© 2003, Plugged In Software

All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior
written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGE.

© 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, LP

All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior
written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGE.

----------------------------------

This software application may include OAuth version Revision 1273 third-party software. OAuth version Revision 1273 is
distributed under the terms of the Apache License version 2.0 and is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the license for the specific language governing rights and
limitations under the license. You can view a copy of the license at: <your_Mentor_Graphics_documentation_directory>/
legal/apache_2.0.pdf.

----------------------------------
This software application may include Touchposé version 1.0 third-party software. Touchposé version 1.0 is distributed under
the terms of the Apache License version 2.0 and is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, either express or implied. See the license for the specific language governing rights and limitations under the license.
You can view a copy of the license at: <your_Mentor_Graphics_documentation_directory>/legal/apache_2.0.pdf.

-------------------------------------

This software application may include Jackson version 2.2.3 third-party software. Jackson version 2.2.3 is distributed under
the terms of the Apache License version 2.0 and is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, either express or implied. See the license for the specific language governing rights and limitations under the license.
You can view a copy of the license at: <your_Mentor_Graphics_documentation_directory>/legal/apache_2.0.pdf.

-------------------------------------

-------------------------------------

This software application may include Java Runtime Environment (JRE) version 1.7 update 51 third-party software. Java
Runtime Environment (JRE) version 1.7 update 51 distributed under the terms of the Oracle Corporation Binary Code License
Agreement for the JAVA SE RUNTIME ENVIRONMENT (JRE) VERSION 6 and JAVAFX RUNTIME VERSION 1and is
distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the license for the
specific language governing rights and limitations under the license. You can view a copy of the license at:
<your_Mentor_Graphics_documentation_directory>/legal/oracle_binary_jre_javafx_6.pdf. Additional copyright notices and
license terms applicable to portions Java Runtime Environment (JRE) version 1.7 update 51 can be found here: <MGC
installed location>/jre/THIRDPARTYLICENSEREADME.txt

-------------------------------------

This software application may include Java Runtime Environment (JRE) version 1.8 update 5 third-party software. Java
Runtime Environment (JRE) version 1.8 update 5 distributed under the terms of the Oracle Corporation Binary Code License
Agreement for the JAVA SE RUNTIME ENVIRONMENT (JRE) VERSION 6 and JAVAFX RUNTIME VERSION 1and is
distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the license for the
specific language governing rights and limitations under the license. You can view a copy of the license at:
<your_Mentor_Graphics_documentation_directory>/legal/oracle_binary_jre_javafx_6.pdf. Additional copyright notices and
license terms applicable to portions Java Runtime Environment (JRE) version 1.8 update 5 can be found here: <MGC installed
location>/publisher/javafx/runtime/jre/ THIRDPARTYLICENSEREADME.txt

-------------------------------------

This software application may include guava-libraries version 17.0 third-party software. guava-libraries version 17.0 is
distributed under the terms of the Apache License version 2.0 and is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the license for the specific language governing rights and
limitations under the license. You can view a copy of the license at: <your_Mentor_Graphics_documentation_directory>/
legal/apache_2.0.pdf.

-------------------------------------

This software application may include Apache Commons Compress version 1.8.1 third-party software. Apache Commons
Compress version 1.8.1 is distributed under the terms of the Apache License version 2.0 and is distributed on an "AS IS" basis,
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the license for the specific language governing
rights and limitations under the license. You can view a copy of the license at:
<your_Mentor_Graphics_documentation_directory>/legal/apache_2.0.pdf.

-------------------------------------

This software application may include jersey-media-multipart version 2.10 third-party software. jersey-media-multipart
version 2.10 is distributed under the terms of the Common Development and Distribution License version 1.0 and is
distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the license for the
specific language governing rights and limitations under the license. You can view a copy of the license at:
<your_Mentor_Graphics_documentation_directory>/legal/ cddl_1.0.pdf.

-------------------------------------
This software application may include mimepull version 1.9.4 third-party software. mimepull version 1.9.4 is distributed
under the terms of the Common Development and Distribution License version 1.0 and is distributed on an "AS IS" basis,
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the license for the specific language governing
rights and limitations under the license. You can view a copy of the license at:
<your_Mentor_Graphics_documentation_directory>/legal/ cddl_1.0.pdf.

-------------------------------------

This software application may include socketio version 1.0 third-party software, which is distributed on an "AS IS" basis,
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.

-------------------------------------

This software application may include ActiveMQ version 5.8.0 third-party software. ActiveMQ version 5.8.0 is distributed
under the terms of the Apache v2.0 and is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either
express or implied. See the license for the specific language governing rights and limitations under the license. You can view
a copy of the license at: <your_Mentor_Graphics_documentation_directory>/legal/apache_2.0.pdf. Portions of this software
may be subject to Common Development and Distribution License version 1.0. You can view a copy of the Common
Development and Distribution License version 1.0 at: <your_Mentor_Graphics_documentation_directory>/legal/cddl_1.0.pdf.
Portions of this software may be subject to Creative Commons License version 2.5. You can view a copy of the Creative
Commons License version 2.5 at: <your_Mentor_Graphics_documentation_directory>/legal/ creative_common_2.5.pdf.
Portions of this software may be subject to W3C License. You can view a copy of the W3C License at:
<your_Mentor_Graphics_documentation_directory>/legal/w3c_2002.pdf. ActiveMQ version 5.8.0 may be subject to the
following copyrights:

© 2005, Ben Nolan

All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:

* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer
in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

* Neither the name of the Ben Nolan nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived
from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,

© 2001-2004 by the MX4J contributors. All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. The end-user documentation included with the redistribution, if any, must include the following acknowledgment: "This
product includes software developed by the MX4J project (http://mx4j.sourceforge.net)." Alternately, this acknowledgment
may appear in the software itself, if and wherever such third-party acknowledgments normally appear.

4. The name "MX4J" must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written
permission. For written permission, please contact biorn_steedom [at] users [dot] sourceforge [dot] net
5. Products derived from this software may not be called "MX4J", nor may "MX4J" appear in their name, without prior written
permission of Simone Bordet.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE MX4J CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

© 2003-2004, Joe Walnes

All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:

Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer
in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

Neither the name of XStream nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this
software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF
THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

© 2006, Alastair Tse

All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:

* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer
in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

* Neither the name of the Alastair Tse nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived
from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF
THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

© 2000-2004 Jason Hunter & Brett McLaughlin.

All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions, and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions, and the disclaimer that
follows these conditions in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. The name "JDOM" must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written
permission. For written permission, please contact <request_AT_jdom_DOT_org>.

4. Products derived from this software may not be called "JDOM", nor may "JDOM" appear in their name, without prior
written permission from the JDOM Project Management <request_AT_jdom_DOT_org>.

In addition, we request (but do not require) that you include in the end-user documentation provided with the redistribution
and/or in the software itself an acknowledgement equivalent to the following: "This product includes software developed by
the JDOM Project (http://www.jdom.org/)." Alternatively, the acknowledgment may be graphical using the logos available at
http://www.jdom.org/images/logos.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE JDOM AUTHORS OR THE PROJECT CONTRIBUTORS
BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY
OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

This software consists of voluntary contributions made by many individuals on behalf of the JDOM Project and was originally
created by Jason Hunter <jhunter_AT_jdom_DOT_org> and Brett McLaughlin <brett_AT_jdom_DOT_org>. For more
information on the JDOM Project, please see <http://www.jdom.org/>.

-------------------------------------

This software application may include select2 version 3.4.6 third-party software. select2 version 3.4.6 is distributed under the
terms of the Apache License version 2.0 and is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
either express or implied. See the license for the specific language governing rights and limitations under the license. You can
view a copy of the license at: <your_Mentor_Graphics_documentation_directory>/legal/apache_2.0.pdf.

-------------------------------------

This software application may include ui-select2 version 0.0.5 third-party software, which is distributed on an "AS IS" basis,
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.

-------------------------------------

This software application may include Bootstrap version 3.1.1 third-party software, which is distributed on an "AS IS" basis,
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.

-------------------------------------

This software application may include ui-bootstrap version 0.11.0 third-party software, which is distributed on an "AS IS"
basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.

-------------------------------------

This software application may include Angularjs version 1.2.14 third-party software. Angularjs version 1.2.14 is distributed
under the terms of the Apache License version 2.0 and is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, either express or implied. See the license for the specific language governing rights and limitations under the license.
You can view a copy of the license at: <your_Mentor_Graphics_documentation_directory>/legal/apache_2.0.pdf.

-------------------------------------

This software application may include ui-router version 0.2.10 third-party software, which is distributed on an "AS IS" basis,
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.

-------------------------------------

This software application may include jQuery version 1.11.1 third-party software, which is distributed on an "AS IS" basis,
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.

-------------------------------------

This software application may include ng-grid version 2.0.12 third-party software, which is distributed on an "AS IS" basis,
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.

-------------------------------------

This software application may include TableLayout version Rivision 103 third-party software. TableLayout version Rivision
103 is distributed under the terms of the Clearthought Software License and is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the license for the specific language governing rights and
limitations under the license. You can view a copy of the license at: <your_Mentor_Graphics_documentation_directory>/
legal/ clearthought_2.0.pdf.

-------------------------------------

This software application may include Apache Commons Codec version 1.6 third-party software. Apache Commons Codec
version 1.6 is distributed under the terms of the Apache License version 2.0 and is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the license for the specific language governing rights and
limitations under the license. You can view a copy of the license at: <your_Mentor_Graphics_documentation_directory>/
legal/apache_2.0.pdf.

------------------------------------

This software application may include Apache Commons Logging version 1.1.1 third-party software. Apache Commons
Logging version 1.1.1 is distributed under the terms of the Apache License version 2.0 and is distributed on an "AS IS" basis,
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the license for the specific language governing
rights and limitations under the license. You can view a copy of the license at:
<your_Mentor_Graphics_documentation_directory>/legal/apache_2.0.pdf.

------------------------------------

This software application may include Apache HttpComponents Client version 4.2.1 third-party software. Apache
HttpComponents Client version 4.2.1 is distributed under the terms of the Apache License version 2.0 and is distributed on an
"AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the license for the specific language
governing rights and limitations under the license. You can view a copy of the license at:
<your_Mentor_Graphics_documentation_directory>/legal/apache_2.0.pdf

-------------------------------------

This software application may include TinyXML version 2.6.2 third-party software, which is distributed on an "AS IS" basis,
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. TinyXML version 2.6.2 may be subject to the following
copyrights:

© 2000-2006 Lee Thomason (www.grinninglizard.com)

This software is provided 'as-is', without any express or implied warranty. In no event will the authors be held liable for any
damages arising from the use of this software.
Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose, including commercial applications, and to alter it and
redistribute it freely, subject to the following restrictions:

1. The origin of this software must not be misrepresented; you must not claim that you wrote the original software. If you use
this software in a product, an acknowledgment in the product documentation would be appreciated but is not required.

2. Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such, and must not be misrepresented as being the original software.

3. This notice may not be removed or altered from any source distribution.

------------------------------------

This software application may include Java Runtime Environment (JRE) version 1.8 Update 40 third-party software. Java
Runtime Environment (JRE) version 1.8 Update 40 distributed under the terms of the Oracle Corporation Binary Code License
Agreement for the JAVA SE RUNTIME ENVIRONMENT (JRE) VERSION 6 and JAVAFX RUNTIME VERSION 1and is
distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the license for the
specific language governing rights and limitations under the license. You can view a copy of the license at:
<your_Mentor_Graphics_documentation_directory>/legal/oracle_binary_jre_javafx_6.pdf. Additional copyright notices and
license terms applicable to portions Java Runtime Environment (JRE) version 1.8 Update 40 can be found here:
<install_root>/edge_<version>/eclipse/jre/ THIRDPARTYLICENSEREADME.txt

------------------------------------

This software application may include Angular UI Grid version v3.0.0-rc.20 third-party software, which is distributed on an
"AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.

-------------------------------------

This software application may include Jersey version 2.17 third-party software. Jersey version 2.17 is distributed under the
terms of the Apache version 2.0 and is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either
express or implied. See the license for the specific language governing rights and limitations under the license. You can view
a copy of the license at: <your_Mentor_Graphics_documentation_directory>/legal/apache_2.0.pdf. Portions of this software
may be subject to Common Development and Distribution License version 1.0 License. You can view a copy of the Common
Development and Distribution License version 1.0 at: <your_Mentor_Graphics_documentation_directory>/legal/cddl_1.0.pdf.
Jersey version 2.17 may be subject to the following copyrights:

© 2000-2013 INRIA, France Telecom

© 2004-2011, Eugene Kuleshov

All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. Neither the name of the copyright holders nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products
derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF
THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
-------------------------------------

This software application may include org.osgi.core version 4.2.0 third-party software.org.osgi.core version 4.2.0 is
distributed under the terms of the Apache License version 2.0 and is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the license for the specific language governing rights and
limitations under the license. You can view a copy of the license at: <your_Mentor_Graphics_documentation_directory>/
legal/apache_2.0.pdf.

-------------------------------------

This software application may include jersey media multipart version 2.17.0 third-party software.jersey media multipart
version 2.17.0 is distributed under the terms of the Common Development and Distribution License version 1.0 and is
distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the license for the
specific language governing rights and limitations under the license. You can view a copy of the license at:
<your_Mentor_Graphics_documentation_directory>/legal/cddl_1.0.pdf.

-------------------------------------

This software application may include angular-spinner version 0.6.1 third-party software, which is distributed on an "AS IS"
basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.

-------------------------------------

This software application may include spin.js version 2.1.0 third-party software, which is distributed on an "AS IS" basis,
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.

-------------------------------------

This software application may include pdf.js version 1.1.13 third-party software. pdf.js version 1.1.13 is distributed under the
terms of the Apache License version 2.0 and is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
either express or implied. See the license for the specific language governing rights and limitations under the license. You can
view a copy of the license at: <your_Mentor_Graphics_documentation_directory>/legal/apache_2.0.pdf. pdf.js version 1.1.13
may be subject to the following copyrights:© 1990-2009 Adobe Systems Incorporated.All rights reserved.Redistribution and
use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are
met:Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. Neither the name of Adobe Systems
Incorporated nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without
specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGE.

-------------------------------------

This software application may include PDFBox version 1.8.9 third-party software. PDFBox version 1.8.9 is distributed under
the terms of the Apache License version 2.0 and is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, either express or implied. See the license for the specific language governing rights and limitations under the license.
You can view a copy of the license at: <your_Mentor_Graphics_documentation_directory>/legal/apache_2.0.pdf. PDFBox
version 1.8.9 may be subject to the following copyrights:©1990-2009 Adobe Systems Incorporated.All rights
reserved.Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and
the following disclaimer.Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and
the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. Neither the name of
Adobe Systems Incorporated nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this
software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS
AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

-------------------------------------

This software application may include lodash version 3.10.0 third-party software, which is distributed on an "AS IS" basis,
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. lodash version 3.10.0 may be subject to the following
copyrights:© 2006, Yahoo! Inc.All rights reserved.Redistribution and use of this software in source and binary forms, with or
without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:* Redistributions of source code must
retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.* Redistributions in binary form must
reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other
materials provided with the distribution.* Neither the name of Yahoo! Inc. nor the names of its contributors may be used to
endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission of Yahoo! Inc.THIS
SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF
THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.© 2007, Parakey
Inc.All rights reserved.Redistribution and use of this software in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above
copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with
the distribution.* Neither the name of Parakey Inc. nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific prior written permission of Parakey Inc.THIS SOFTWARE IS
PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY,
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED
AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

-------------------------------------

This software application may include Font Awesome version 4.3.0 third-party software. Font Awesome version 4.3.0 is
distributed under the terms of the SIL Open Font License Version 1.1and is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the license for the specific language governing rights and
limitations under the license. You can view a copy of the license at: <your_Mentor_Graphics_documentation_directory>/
legal/sil_open_font_1.1.pdf. To obtain a copy of the Font Awesome version 4.3.0 source code, send a request to
[email protected].

-------------------------------------

This software application may include Chart.js version 1.0.2 third-party software, which is distributed on an "AS IS" basis,
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.

-------------------------------------
This software application may include Chart.StackedBar.js version 1.0.3 third-party software, which is distributed on an "AS
IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.

-------------------------------------

This software application may include textAngular version 1.3.7 third-party software, which is distributed on an "AS IS" basis,
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.

-------------------------------------

This software application may include angular-chart.js version 0.7.2 third-party software, which is distributed on an "AS IS"
basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. angular-chart.js version 0.7.2 may be subject to
the following copyrights:© Jerome Touffe-Blin ("Author")All rights reserved.The BSD LicenseRedistribution and use in
source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:1.
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.2.
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer
in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE
AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OFSUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGE.

-------------------------------------

This software application may include fontbox.jar version 1.8.9 third-party software. fontbox.jar version 1.8.9 is distributed
under the terms of the Apache License version 2.0 and is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, either express or implied. See the license for the specific language governing rights and limitations under the license.
You can view a copy of the license at: <your_Mentor_Graphics_documentation_directory>/legal/apache_2.0.pdf. fontbox.jar
version 1.8.9 may be subject to the following copyrights:© 2002-2007, www.pdfbox.org© 2006-2007, www.jempbox.orgAll
rights reserved.Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that
the following conditions are met:1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.3.
Neither the name of pdfbox; nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this
software without specific prior written permission.THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS
AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGE.© 1997,1998,2002,2007 Adobe Systems IncorporatedPermission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any
person obtaining a copy of this documentation file to use, copy, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the
documentation, and to permit others to do the same, provided that: - No modification, editing or other alteration of this
document is allowed; and - The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies of the
documentation.Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this documentation file, to
create their own derivative works from the content of this document to use, copy, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell the
derivative works, and to permit others to do the same, provided that the derived work is not represented as being a copy or
version of this document.Adobe shall not be liable to any party for any loss of revenue or profit or for indirect, incidental,
special, consequential, or other similar damages, whether based on tort (including without limitation negligence or strict
liability), contract or other legal or equitable grounds even if Adobe has been advised or had reason to know of the possibility
of such damages. The Adobe materials are provided on an "AS IS" basis. Adobe specifically disclaims all express, statutory, or
implied warranties relating to the Adobe materials, including but not limited to those concerning merchantability or fitness for
a particular purpose or non-infringement of any third party rights regarding the Adobe materials.© 1990-2010 Adobe Systems
Incorporated.All rights reserved.Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
distribution. Neither the name of Adobe Systems Incorporated nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or
promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED
BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
AD V I S E D OF T HE P OS S I B IL IT Y O F S U C H D A M A GE .© 20 0 2- 2 00 7 , w ww . f o nt b ox . o rg © 2 0 06 - 20 0 7,
www.jempbox.orgAll rights reserved.Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above
copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with
the distribution.3. Neither the name of fontbox; nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products
derived from this software without specific prior written permission.THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.© 1995-2009 International Business Machines Corporation and others All rights
reserved.Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated
documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use,
copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is
furnished to do so, provided that the above copyright notice(s) and this permission notice appear in all copies of the Software
and that both the above copyright notice(s) and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation.THE SOFTWARE
IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR
HOLDERS INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR
PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING
OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.Except as contained in this
notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in
this Software without prior written authorization of the copyright holder.

-------------------------------------

This software application may include pdf.js version 1.1.13 third-party software. pdf.js version 1.1.13 is distributed under the
terms of the Mozilla Public License version 2.0 and is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, either express or implied. See the license for the specific language governing rights and limitations under the license.
You can view a copy of the license at: <your_Mentor_Graphics_documentation_directory>/legal/mozilla_2.0.pdf. Portions of
this software may be subject to Apache License version 2.0. You can view a copy of the Apache License version 2.0 at:
<your_Mentor_Graphics_documentation_directory>/legal/apache_2.0.pdf. To obtain a copy of the pdf.js version 1.1.13
source code, send a request to [email protected]. pdf.js version 1.1.13 may be subject to the following
copyrights:© 1990-2009 Adobe Systems Incorporated.All rights reserved.Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:Redistributions of source code must
retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.Redistributions in binary form must
reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other
materials provided with the distribution. Neither the name of Adobe Systems Incorporated nor the names of its contributors
may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS
SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF
THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
 Index

design rule checks, 84

Index

—A— Child module design references module code

Add not on composite, 85
properties, 234 Clip To Border, 537
Alternative cavity plug available, 85 Component
Alternative cavity seal available, 85 selecting, 268
Alternative terminal avai lable, 85 Component does not exist in housing
Assembly component not in library, 85 definition, 85
Assembly splits in derivative design, 85 Component not located on any bundle, 85
Assign Connectivity, 85
library description, 239 Connector route does not exist in library
options, 244 definition, 85
Attributes Consistency, 85
editing, 251 Cross references
finding values, 261 refreshing, 22, 23
replacing values, 261 Custom action plugins, 26
—B— CustomActionDevelopment.pdf, 26
Blank terminal material driver, 85 —D—
Bundle length Design assembly does not match the library
editing, 239 assembly, 85
Bundle regions Design has applicable module code that is not
editing offset of nodes, 248 assigned to any object, 85
Bundles Design Log Event Filter Options dialog, 555
reconnecting sliced ends, 280 Design Log Filter Options dialog, 556
slicing, 279 Design Log Viewer dialog, 557
—C— Design that breaks module code relationships,
Capital Harness MPM Design Rule Checks, 85 85
Capital Harness MPM User Guide, 21 Design that breaks module code relationships
Cavity component does not fit wire, 85 (Capital Logic), 95
Cavity with plug or seal marked as“none”, 85 Designs
Cavity with seal but no wire, 85 checking for errors, 84
Cavity with terminal but no wire, 85 checks, 84
Centerstrip splice not on wire route, 85 editing information, 77
CGM Page Settings Dialog, 529, 534 editing properties, 84
Change Policies refreshing, 22
refreshing, 22 —E—
Check Edit
designs errors, 84 attributes, 251
Checks

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 683

February 2016
 bundle lengths, 239 Invalid wire attributes versus library definition,
general properties, 228 85
graphical properties, 253 Invalid wire path, 85
options, 244 Invalid wire route, 85
properties, 225
Edit Properties facility, 225 —K—
Effectivity, 455, 567 Keyboard Shortcuts
Empty bundle, 85 All Tools Editing, 163
Empty modular design, 85 All Tools Graphics, 164
Empty multicore, 85 All Tools Navigation, 164
Errors All Tools Styling, 164
checking designs, 84 Capital Harness TVM Actions, 169
Capital HarnessXC Actions, 168
—F— Capital HarnessXC Editing, 167
Fill patterns, 256 Capital HarnessXC Harness Processing,
Find 169
attribute/property values, 261 Capital HarnessXC Process Part Selection,
Fused table layout, 491 169
Capital HarnessXC Processing, 168
—G— Capital HarnessXC Rules, 168
General DRCs, 85 Capital HarnessXC Styling, 167
General properties, 228 Capital Integrator Add, 167
Graphical properties Capital Integrator Editing, 166
editing, 253 Capital Logic Add, 165
Group objects, 196 Capital Logic Editing, 165
—H— Capital Topology Add, 166
Harness Group, 79 Capital Topology Editing, 166
Harness levels —L—
editing on which wire exists, 247 Layout, 491
specifying part numbers, 246 Library Consistency, 85
Hatching Pattern Scale Factor, 529 Library description
—I— assigning, 239
Inappropriate terminal material or type for unassigning, 242
wire, 85 updating, 242
Include-on-BOM status differs from library, 85 viewing, 243
Inclusion, 85 Library part requ ired for multi-location
Incomplete insulation, 85 component, 85
Incomplete overbraid, 85 Library part required for bundle insulation, 85
Incomplete splice, 85 Library part required for clip, 85
Inconsistent assembly module code, 85 Library part required for connector, 85
Inconsistent multicore inner core module code, Library part required for grommet, 85
85 Library part required for mult icore, 85
Invalid mandatory item selection, 85 Library part required for node insulation, 85
Invalid name for component, 85 Library part required for splice, 85
Library part required for wire, 85

684 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
Library part without supplier number, 85 assigning, 244
Library parts editing, 244
refreshing, 22 refreshing, 22
selecting, 268 Orphaned strip, 110
Line Pattern Scale Factor, 529, 534
Line styles, 254, 256 —P—
Line Thickness Scale Factor, 529, 534 Part numbers
Logical changes specifying for harness levels, 246
refreshing, 22 Plug and wire at the same cavity, 85
Logs Plugin, 25
viewing, 287 PluginDevelopment.pdf, 593, 628
Printing a build list, 291
—M— Printing a build list (print to file), 303
Max Grid Distance for Toggle Indicator, 418 Properties
Mismat c hed wire and cavity terminal, 85 adding, 234
Mismatch between assembly content and editing, 225
project preference, 85 editing for design, 84
Mismatched mated connectors and terminal editing general, 228
material, 85 finding values, 261
Modular code used on composite but not replacing values, 261
consumed by child module, 85
Modular expression too long to be costed in —R—
CapH Costing, 85 Related objects assigned different module
Moving codes, 85
objects, 157 Report Builder, 37
Multiple components at position, 85 Resolution, 529
Ring terminal with connector part number, 85
—N— Route codes, 246
Name Uniqueness, 405
Names —S—
specifying, 229 Scaling, 537
Naming, 85 Sealed and unsealed components exist, 85
Nested assembly contains in-house Select
assembly/multicore, 85 component, 268
library parts, 268
—O— Shared Objects
Object assigned a technical module code that refreshing, 22
has no associated combinations, 85 Short description, 232
Object that breaks module code relationships, Slice
85, 95 bundles, 279
Objects Slots
moving, 157 specifying type, 243
Obsolete or invalid part number, 85 Snap To Object, 208
Offsets of bundle region nodes, 248 Specify
Option on object not applicable to design, 85 name property, 229
Options part number for harness level, 246

Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1 685

February 2016
 slot types, 243
Split Table Dialog, 490, 569
Sub-assembly not costed, 85
Sub-assembly with no part assigned, 85
Symbol libraries
refreshing, 22
—U—
Unassign
library descriptions, 242
Unconnected wire, 85
Ungroup objects, 196
Uniqueness, 405
Unterminated bundle, 85
Unterminated wire end, 85
Unterminated Wire Ends, 85
Update
library descriptions, 242
—V—
Variants
refreshing, 22
View
library descriptions, 243
logs, 287
View Design Logs dialog, 559
Violated attribute/property rule, 85
—W—
Wire breaks routing rule, 85
Wire does not fit cavity, 85
Wire with zero strip length, 85
Wires
editing harness levels, 247

686 Capital Design Tools - Common Functions, 2015.1

February 2016
 End-User License Agreement
The latest version of the End-User License Agreement is available on-line at:
www.mentor.com/eula

IMPORTANT INFORMATION

USE OF ALL SOFTWARE IS SUBJECT TO LICENSE RESTRICTIONS. CAREFULLY READ THIS LICENSE
AGREEMENT BEFORE USING THE PRODUCTS. USE OF SOFTWARE INDICATES CUSTOMER’S COMPLETE
AND UNCONDITIONAL ACCEPTANCE OF THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS SET FORTH IN THIS AGREEMENT.
ANY ADDITIONAL OR DIFFERENT PURCHASE ORDER TERMS AND CONDITIONS SHALL NOT APPLY.

END-USER LICENSE AGREEMENT (“Agreement”)

This is a legal agreement concerning the use of Software (as defined in Section 2) and hardware (collectively “Products”)
between the company acquiring the Products (“Customer”), and the Mentor Graphics entity that issued the corresponding
quotation or, if no quotation was issued, the applicable local Mentor Graphics entity (“Mentor Graphics”). Except for license
agreements related to the subject matter of this license agreement which are physically signed by Customer and an authorized
representative of Mentor Graphics, this Agreement and the applicable quotation contain the parties’ entire understanding
relating to the subject matter and supersede all prior or contemporaneous agreements. If Customer does not agree to these
terms and conditions, promptly return or, in the case of Software received electronically, certify destruction of Software and all
accompanying items within five days after receipt of Software and receive a full refund of any license fee paid.

1. ORDERS, FEES AND PAYMENT.

1.1. To the extent Customer (or if agreed by Mentor Graphics, Customer’s appointed third party buying agent) places and Mentor
Graphics accepts purchase orders pursuant to this Agreement (each an “Order”), each Order will constitute a contract between
Customer and Mentor Graphics, which shall be governed solely and exclusively by the terms and conditions of this Agreement,
any applicable addenda and the applicable quotation, whether or not those documents are referenced on the Order. Any
additional or conflicting terms and conditions appearing on an Order or presented in any electronic portal or automated order
management system, whether or not required to be electronically accepted, will not be effective unless agreed in writing and
physically signed by an authorized representative of Customer and Mentor Graphics.

1.2. Amounts invoiced will be paid, in the currency specified on the applicable invoice, within 30 days from the date of such invoice.
Any past due invoices will be subject to the imposition of interest charges in the amount of one and one-half percent per month
or the applicable legal rate currently in effect, whichever is lower. Prices do not include freight, insurance, customs duties, taxes
or other similar charges, which Mentor Graphics will state separately in the applicable invoice. Unless timely provided with a
valid certificate of exemption or other evidence that items are not taxable, Mentor Graphics will invoice Customer for all
applicable taxes including, but not limited to, VAT, GST, sales tax, consumption tax and service tax. Customer will make all
payments free and clear of, and without reduction for, any withholding or other taxes; any such taxes imposed on payments by
Customer hereunder will be Customer’s sole responsibility. If Customer appoints a third party to place purchase orders and/or
make payments on Customer’s behalf, Customer shall be liable for payment under Orders placed by such third party in the event
of default.

1.3. All Products are delivered FCA factory (Incoterms 2010), freight prepaid and invoiced to Customer, except Software delivered
electronically, which shall be deemed delivered when made available to Customer for download. Mentor Graphics retains a
security interest in all Products delivered under this Agreement, to secure payment of the purchase price of such Products, and
Customer agrees to sign any documents that Mentor Graphics determines to be necessary or convenient for use in filing or
perfecting such security interest. Mentor Graphics’ delivery of Software by electronic means is subject to Customer’s provision
of both a primary and an alternate e-mail address.

2. GRANT OF LICENSE. The software installed, downloaded, or otherwise acquired by Customer under this Agreement, including any
updates, modifications, revisions, copies, documentation, setup files and design data (“Software”) are copyrighted, trade secret and
confidential information of Mentor Graphics or its licensors, who maintain exclusive title to all Software and retain all rights not
expressly granted by this Agreement. Except for Software that is embeddable (“Embedded Software”), which is licensed pursuant to
separate embedded software terms or an embedded software supplement, Mentor Graphics grants to Customer, subject to payment of
applicable license fees, a nontransferable, nonexclusive license to use Software solely: (a) in machine-readable, object-code form
(except as provided in Subsection 4.2); (b) for Customer’s internal business purposes; (c) for the term of the license; and (d) on the
computer hardware and at the site authorized by Mentor Graphics. A site is restricted to a one-half mile (800 meter) radius. Customer
may have Software temporarily used by an employee for telecommuting purposes from locations other than a Customer office, such as
the employee’s residence, an airport or hotel, provided that such employee’s primary place of employment is the site where the
Software is authorized for use. Mentor Graphics’ standard policies and programs, which vary depending on Software, license fees paid
or services purchased, apply to the following: (a) relocation of Software; (b) use of Software, which may be limited, for example, to
execution of a single session by a single user on the authorized hardware or for a restricted period of time (such limitations may be
technically implemented through the use of authorization codes or similar devices); and (c) support services provided, including
eligibility to receive telephone support, updates, modifications, and revisions. For the avoidance of doubt, if Customer provides any
feedback or requests any change or enhancement to Products, whether in the course of receiving support or consulting services,
evaluating Products, performing beta testing or otherwise, any inventions, product improvements, modifications or developments made
by Mentor Graphics (at Mentor Graphics’ sole discretion) will be the exclusive property of Mentor Graphics.
3. BETA CODE.

3.1. Portions or all of certain Software may contain code for experimental testing and evaluation (which may be either alpha or beta,
collectively “Beta Code”), which may not be used without Mentor Graphics’ explicit authorization. Upon Mentor Graphics’
authorization, Mentor Graphics grants to Customer a temporary, nontransferable, nonexclusive license for experimental use to
test and evaluate the Beta Code without charge for a limited period of time specified by Mentor Graphics. Mentor Graphics may
choose, at its sole discretion, not to release Beta Code commercially in any form.

3.2. If Mentor Graphics authorizes Customer to use the Beta Code, Customer agrees to evaluate and test the Beta Code under normal
conditions as directed by Mentor Graphics. Customer will contact Mentor Graphics periodically during Customer’s use of the
Beta Code to discuss any malfunctions or suggested improvements. Upon completion of Customer’s evaluation and testing,
Customer will send to Mentor Graphics a written evaluation of the Beta Code, including its strengths, weaknesses and
recommended improvements.

3.3. Customer agrees to maintain Beta Code in confidence and shall restrict access to the Beta Code, including the methods and
concepts utilized therein, solely to those employees and Customer location(s) authorized by Mentor Graphics to perform beta
testing. Customer agrees that any written evaluations and all inventions, product improvements, modifications or developments
that Mentor Graphics conceived or made during or subsequent to this Agreement, including those based partly or wholly on
Customer’s feedback, will be the exclusive property of Mentor Graphics. Mentor Graphics will have exclusive rights, title and
interest in all such property. The provisions of this Subsection 3.3 shall survive termination of this Agreement.

4. RESTRICTIONS ON USE.

4.1. Customer may copy Software only as reasonably necessary to support the authorized use. Each copy must include all notices
and legends embedded in Software and affixed to its medium and container as received from Mentor Graphics. All copies shall
remain the property of Mentor Graphics or its licensors. Except for Embedded Software that has been embedded in executable
code form in Customer’s product(s), Customer shall maintain a record of the number and primary location of all copies of
Software, including copies merged with other software, and shall make those records available to Mentor Graphics upon
request. Customer shall not make Products available in any form to any person other than Customer’s employees and on-site
contractors, excluding Mentor Graphics competitors, whose job performance requires access and who are under obligations of
confidentiality. Customer shall take appropriate action to protect the confidentiality of Products and ensure that any person
permitted access does not disclose or use Products except as permitted by this Agreement. Customer shall give Mentor Graphics
written notice of any unauthorized disclosure or use of the Products as soon as Customer becomes aware of such unauthorized
disclosure or use. Customer acknowledges that Software provided hereunder may contain source code which is proprietary and
its confidentiality is of the highest importance and value to Mentor Graphics. Customer acknowledges that Mentor Graphics
may be seriously harmed if such source code is disclosed in violation of this Agreement. Except as otherwise permitted for
purposes of interoperability as specified by applicable and mandatory local law, Customer shall not reverse-assemble,
disassemble, reverse-compile, or reverse-engineer any Product, or in any way derive any source code from Software that is not
provided to Customer in source code form. Log files, data files, rule files and script files generated by or for the Software
(collectively “Files”), including without limitation files containing Standard Verification Rule Format (“SVRF”) and Tcl
Verification Format (“TVF”) which are Mentor Graphics’ trade secret and proprietary syntaxes for expressing process rules,
constitute or include confidential information of Mentor Graphics. Customer may share Files with third parties, excluding
Mentor Graphics competitors, provided that the confidentiality of such Files is protected by written agreement at least as well as
Customer protects other information of a similar nature or importance, but in any case with at least reasonable care. Customer
may use Files containing SVRF or TVF only with Mentor Graphics products. Under no circumstances shall Customer use
Products or Files or allow their use for the purpose of developing, enhancing or marketing any product that is in any way
competitive with Products, or disclose to any third party the results of, or information pertaining to, any benchmark.

4.2. If any Software or portions thereof are provided in source code form, Customer will use the source code only to correct software
errors and enhance or modify the Software for the authorized use, or as permitted for Embedded Software under separate
embedded software terms or an embedded software supplement. Customer shall not disclose or permit disclosure of source
code, in whole or in part, including any of its methods or concepts, to anyone except Customer’s employees or on-site
contractors, excluding Mentor Graphics competitors, with a need to know. Customer shall not copy or compile source code in
any manner except to support this authorized use.

4.3. Customer agrees that it will not subject any Product to any open source software (“OSS”) license that conflicts with this
Agreement or that does not otherwise apply to such Product.

4.4. Customer may not assign this Agreement or the rights and duties under it, or relocate, sublicense, or otherwise transfer the
Products, whether by operation of law or otherwise (“Attempted Transfer”), without Mentor Graphics’ prior written consent and
payment of Mentor Graphics’ then-current applicable relocation and/or transfer fees. Any Attempted Transfer without Mentor
Graphics’ prior written consent shall be a material breach of this Agreement and may, at Mentor Graphics’ option, result in the
immediate termination of the Agreement and/or the licenses granted under this Agreement. The terms of this Agreement,
including without limitation the licensing and assignment provisions, shall be binding upon Customer’s permitted successors in
interest and assigns.

4.5. The provisions of this Section 4 shall survive the termination of this Agreement.

5. SUPPORT SERVICES. To the extent Customer purchases support services, Mentor Graphics will provide Customer with updates and
technical support for the Products, at the Customer site(s) for which support is purchased, in accordance with Mentor Graphics’ then
current End-User Support Terms located at http://supportnet.mentor.com/supportterms.

6. OPEN SOURCE SOFTWARE. Products may contain OSS or code distributed under a proprietary third party license agreement, to
which additional rights or obligations (“Third Party Terms”) may apply. Please see the applicable Product documentation (including
license files, header files, read-me files or source code) for details. In the event of conflict between the terms of this Agreement
 (including any addenda) and the Third Party Terms, the Third Party Terms will control solely with respect to the OSS or third party
code. The provisions of this Section 6 shall survive the termination of this Agreement.

7. LIMITED WARRANTY.

7.1. Mentor Graphics warrants that during the warranty period its standard, generally supported Products, when properly installed,
will substantially conform to the functional specifications set forth in the applicable user manual. Mentor Graphics does not
warrant that Products will meet Customer’s requirements or that operation of Products will be uninterrupted or error free. The
warranty period is 90 days starting on the 15th day after delivery or upon installation, whichever first occurs. Customer must
notify Mentor Graphics in writing of any nonconformity within the warranty period. For the avoidance of doubt, this warranty
applies only to the initial shipment of Software under an Order and does not renew or reset, for example, with the delivery of (a)
Software updates or (b) authorization codes or alternate Software under a transaction involving Software re-mix. This warranty
shall not be valid if Products have been subject to misuse, unauthorized modification, improper installation or Customer is not in
compliance with this Agreement. MENTOR GRAPHICS’ ENTIRE LIABILITY AND CUSTOMER’S EXCLUSIVE
REMEDY SHALL BE, AT MENTOR GRAPHICS’ OPTION, EITHER (A) REFUND OF THE PRICE PAID UPON
RETURN OF THE PRODUCTS TO MENTOR GRAPHICS OR (B) MODIFICATION OR REPLACEMENT OF THE
PRODUCTS THAT DO NOT MEET THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. MENTOR GRAPHICS MAKES NO WARRANTIES
WITH RESPECT TO: (A) SERVICES; (B) PRODUCTS PROVIDED AT NO CHARGE; OR (C) BETA CODE; ALL OF
WHICH ARE PROVIDED “AS IS.”

7.2. THE WARRANTIES SET FORTH IN THIS SECTION 7 ARE EXCLUSIVE. NEITHER MENTOR GRAPHICS NOR ITS
LICENSORS MAKE ANY OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, WITH RESPECT TO
PRODUCTS PROVIDED UNDER THIS AGREEMENT. MENTOR GRAPHICS AND ITS LICENSORS SPECIFICALLY
DISCLAIM ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT OF INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY.

8. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL
MENTOR GRAPHICS OR ITS LICENSORS BE LIABLE FOR INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING LOST PROFITS OR SAVINGS) WHETHER BASED ON CONTRACT, TORT OR ANY OTHER
LEGAL THEORY, EVEN IF MENTOR GRAPHICS OR ITS LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGES. IN NO EVENT SHALL MENTOR GRAPHICS’ OR ITS LICENSORS’ LIABILITY UNDER THIS
AGREEMENT EXCEED THE AMOUNT RECEIVED FROM CUSTOMER FOR THE HARDWARE, SOFTWARE LICENSE OR
SERVICE GIVING RISE TO THE CLAIM. IN THE CASE WHERE NO AMOUNT WAS PAID, MENTOR GRAPHICS AND ITS
LICENSORS SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER. THE PROVISIONS OF THIS SECTION 8
SHALL SURVIVE THE TERMINATION OF THIS AGREEMENT.

9. THIRD PARTY CLAIMS.

9.1. Customer acknowledges that Mentor Graphics has no control over the testing of Customer’s products, or the specific
applications and use of Products. Mentor Graphics and its licensors shall not be liable for any claim or demand made against
Customer by any third party, except to the extent such claim is covered under Section 10.

9.2. In the event that a third party makes a claim against Mentor Graphics arising out of the use of Customer’s products, Mentor
Graphics will give Customer prompt notice of such claim. At Customer’s option and expense, Customer may take sole control
of the defense and any settlement of such claim. Customer WILL reimburse and hold harmless Mentor Graphics for any
LIABILITY, damages, settlement amounts, costs and expenses, including reasonable attorney’s fees, incurred by or awarded
against Mentor Graphics or its licensors in connection with such claims.

9.3. The provisions of this Section 9 shall survive any expiration or termination of this Agreement.

10. INFRINGEMENT.

10.1. Mentor Graphics will defend or settle, at its option and expense, any action brought against Customer in the United States,
Canada, Japan, or member state of the European Union which alleges that any standard, generally supported Product acquired
by Customer hereunder infringes a patent or copyright or misappropriates a trade secret in such jurisdiction. Mentor Graphics
will pay costs and damages finally awarded against Customer that are attributable to such action. Customer understands and
agrees that as conditions to Mentor Graphics’ obligations under this section Customer must: (a) notify Mentor Graphics
promptly in writing of the action; (b) provide Mentor Graphics all reasonable information and assistance to settle or defend the
action; and (c) grant Mentor Graphics sole authority and control of the defense or settlement of the action.

10.2. If a claim is made under Subsection 10.1 Mentor Graphics may, at its option and expense: (a) replace or modify the Product so
that it becomes noninfringing; (b) procure for Customer the right to continue using the Product; or (c) require the return of the
Product and refund to Customer any purchase price or license fee paid, less a reasonable allowance for use.

10.3. Mentor Graphics has no liability to Customer if the action is based upon: (a) the combination of Software or hardware with any
product not furnished by Mentor Graphics; (b) the modification of the Product other than by Mentor Graphics; (c) the use of
other than a current unaltered release of Software; (d) the use of the Product as part of an infringing process; (e) a product that
Customer makes, uses, or sells; (f) any Beta Code or Product provided at no charge; (g) any software provided by Mentor
Graphics’ licensors who do not provide such indemnification to Mentor Graphics’ customers; (h) OSS, except to the extent that
the infringement is directly caused by Mentor Graphics’ modifications to such OSS; or (i) infringement by Customer that is
deemed willful. In the case of (i), Customer shall reimburse Mentor Graphics for its reasonable attorney fees and other costs
related to the action.

10.4. THIS SECTION 10 IS SUBJECT TO SECTION 8 ABOVE AND STATES THE ENTIRE LIABILITY OF MENTOR
GRAPHICS AND ITS LICENSORS, AND CUSTOMER’S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY, FOR DEFENSE,
 SETTLEMENT AND DAMAGES, WITH RESPECT TO ANY ALLEGED PATENT OR COPYRIGHT INFRINGEMENT
OR TRADE SECRET MISAPPROPRIATION BY ANY PRODUCT PROVIDED UNDER THIS AGREEMENT.

11. TERMINATION AND EFFECT OF TERMINATION.

11.1. If a Software license was provided for limited term use, such license will automatically terminate at the end of the authorized
term. Mentor Graphics may terminate this Agreement and/or any license granted under this Agreement immediately upon
written notice if Customer: (a) exceeds the scope of the license or otherwise fails to comply with the licensing or confidentiality
provisions of this Agreement, or (b) becomes insolvent, files a bankruptcy petition, institutes proceedings for liquidation or
winding up or enters into an agreement to assign its assets for the benefit of creditors. For any other material breach of any
provision of this Agreement, Mentor Graphics may terminate this Agreement and/or any license granted under this Agreement
upon 30 days written notice if Customer fails to cure the breach within the 30 day notice period. Termination of this Agreement
or any license granted hereunder will not affect Customer’s obligation to pay for Products shipped or licenses granted prior to
the termination, which amounts shall be payable immediately upon the date of termination.

11.2. Upon termination of this Agreement, the rights and obligations of the parties shall cease except as expressly set forth in this
Agreement. Upon termination of this Agreement and/or any license granted under this Agreement, Customer shall ensure that
all use of the affected Products ceases, and shall return hardware and either return to Mentor Graphics or destroy Software in
Customer’s possession, including all copies and documentation, and certify in writing to Mentor Graphics within ten business
days of the termination date that Customer no longer possesses any of the affected Products or copies of Software in any form.

12. EXPORT. The Products provided hereunder are subject to regulation by local laws and European Union (“E.U.”) and United States
(“U.S.”) government agencies, which prohibit export, re-export or diversion of certain products, information about the products, and
direct or indirect products thereof, to certain countries and certain persons. Customer agrees that it will not export or re-export Products
in any manner without first obtaining all necessary approval from appropriate local, E.U. and U.S. government agencies. If Customer
wishes to disclose any information to Mentor Graphics that is subject to any E.U., U.S. or other applicable export restrictions, including
without limitation the U.S. International Traffic in Arms Regulations (ITAR) or special controls under the Export Administration
Regulations (EAR), Customer will notify Mentor Graphics personnel, in advance of each instance of disclosure, that such information
is subject to such export restrictions.

13. U.S. GOVERNMENT LICENSE RIGHTS. Software was developed entirely at private expense. The parties agree that all Software is
commercial computer software within the meaning of the applicable acquisition regulations. Accordingly, pursuant to U.S. FAR 48
CFR 12.212 and DFAR 48 CFR 227.7202, use, duplication and disclosure of the Software by or for the U.S. government or a U.S.
government subcontractor is subject solely to the terms and conditions set forth in this Agreement, which shall supersede any
conflicting terms or conditions in any government order document, except for provisions which are contrary to applicable mandatory
federal laws.

14. THIRD PARTY BENEFICIARY. Mentor Graphics Corporation, Mentor Graphics (Ireland) Limited, Microsoft Corporation and
other licensors may be third party beneficiaries of this Agreement with the right to enforce the obligations set forth herein.

15. REVIEW OF LICENSE USAGE. Customer will monitor the access to and use of Software. With prior written notice and during
Customer’s normal business hours, Mentor Graphics may engage an internationally recognized accounting firm to review Customer’s
software monitoring system and records deemed relevant by the internationally recognized accounting firm to confirm Customer’s
compliance with the terms of this Agreement or U.S. or other local export laws. Such review may include FlexNet (or successor
product) report log files that Customer shall capture and provide at Mentor Graphics’ request. Customer shall make records available in
electronic format and shall fully cooperate with data gathering to support the license review. Mentor Graphics shall bear the expense of
any such review unless a material non-compliance is revealed. Mentor Graphics shall treat as confidential information all information
gained as a result of any request or review and shall only use or disclose such information as required by law or to enforce its rights
under this Agreement. The provisions of this Section 15 shall survive the termination of this Agreement.

16. CONTROLLING LAW, JURISDICTION AND DISPUTE RESOLUTION. The owners of certain Mentor Graphics intellectual
property licensed under this Agreement are located in Ireland and the U.S. To promote consistency around the world, disputes shall be
resolved as follows: excluding conflict of laws rules, this Agreement shall be governed by and construed under the laws of the State of
Oregon, U.S., if Customer is located in North or South America, and the laws of Ireland if Customer is located outside of North or
South America or Japan, and the laws of Japan if Customer is located in Japan. All disputes arising out of or in relation to this
Agreement shall be submitted to the exclusive jurisdiction of the courts of Portland, Oregon when the laws of Oregon apply, or Dublin,
Ireland when the laws of Ireland apply, or the Tokyo District Court when the laws of Japan apply. Notwithstanding the foregoing, all
disputes in Asia (excluding Japan) arising out of or in relation to this Agreement shall be resolved by arbitration in Singapore before a
single arbitrator to be appointed by the chairman of the Singapore International Arbitration Centre (“SIAC”) to be conducted in the
English language, in accordance with the Arbitration Rules of the SIAC in effect at the time of the dispute, which rules are deemed to be
incorporated by reference in this section. Nothing in this section shall restrict Mentor Graphics’ right to bring an action (including for
example a motion for injunctive relief) against Customer in the jurisdiction where Customer’s place of business is located. The United
Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods does not apply to this Agreement.

17. SEVERABILITY. If any provision of this Agreement is held by a court of competent jurisdiction to be void, invalid, unenforceable or
illegal, such provision shall be severed from this Agreement and the remaining provisions will remain in full force and effect.

18. MISCELLANEOUS. This Agreement contains the parties’ entire understanding relating to its subject matter and supersedes all prior
or contemporaneous agreements. Any translation of this Agreement is provided to comply with local legal requirements only. In the
event of a dispute between the English and any non-English versions, the English version of this Agreement shall govern to the extent
not prohibited by local law in the applicable jurisdiction. This Agreement may only be modified in writing, signed by an authorized
representative of each party. Waiver of terms or excuse of breach must be in writing and shall not constitute subsequent consent, waiver
or excuse.

Rev. 151102, Part No. 265968